Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout11-08-21 Office of the Mayor WHEREAS,the La Porte Chapter No. 683 Order of the Eastern Star was chartered October 26, 1921,by the Grand Chapter of Texas; and WHEREAS,the Order of the Eastern Star is a worldwide fraternal, non-profit, charitable service organization that is an associated body of the family of Masonry;and WHEREAS,the members of La Porte Chapter have spread its message of charity, faith and loving kindness throughout ourcommunity by giving to the needy, supporting community projects,and offering hope for theirlegacy into the future; and WHEREAS,the City of La Porte does hereby commend the members of Chapter 683 for their long and storied history and service toallour citizens. I, Louis R. Rigby, Mayor, do hereby proclaim October NOW, THEREFORE, 26, 2021, as th Eastern Star 100Anniversary Day In Witness Whereof: I have hereto set my hand and caused the Seal of the th City to be affixed hereto, this,the 8day ofNovember, 2021. wĻĭƚŭƓźƷźƚƓ ƚŅ ЋЉЋЊ /źƷǤ ƓźǝĻƩƭźƷǤ tğƩƷźĭźƦğƓƷƭ th In September 2021, the City began its 6 City University class. A total of 13 citizens signed up for the class and met every Thursday for 10-weeks so that they could daily basis. This unique opportunity gave participants hands-on interaction with key City Staff, tours of City facilities, a closer look at the services the City provides, and a chance to ask questions about operations. The Class of 2021 provided the City with citizen input and has shown our employees that we have great leaders who can help influence the direction the City takes in the future by serving on Boards and Commissions. We congratulate all of you for completing the course and look forward to working with you in the future. At this time I would like to recognize the following City University graduates: Raquel Arriaga Nancy Pagani Alicia Charles Robert Pagani Norma Elliott Gladys Rivera Iris Gaddis Sharon Styron Amanda Gerrish Christa Loera Debra Hoot Marie Kilbourn Phillip Hoot Service Awards November 8, 2021 The four employees being recognized tonight have a combined 90 years of service to the La Porte community. Anthony Bish, Police Sergeant (10 years) Sgt. Bish joined the La Porte team on October 24, 2011, and worked as a patrol and crime prevention officer before promoting to the rank of Sergeant in 2018. Sgt. Bish is certified as a Master Peace Officer and been previously nominated for Employee of the Quarter. Sgt. Bish, thank you for your decade of service to La Porte. Bobby Hopper, Street Maintenance Supervisor (10 Years) After starting his career as an Equipment Operator I, ten years ago, Bobby has moved up through the ranks of Operator II, Senior Operator, and is now a Supervisor in our Street Maintenance Division. He has received multiple Employee of the Quarter and other recognitions for his great customer service and positive attitude. Bobby, thanks for all you do for the La Porte community. Jesse Gonzalez, Sr. Utility Maintenance Operator (10 years) Jesse Gonzalez has also provided a decade of service in installing and maintaining our utility systems. He holds a class s license from the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). He is known as one of the best operators in the field and being a great guy to work with. Jesse, thanks for the work you do for all of us. Shawn Kominek, Assistant EMS Chief (20 years) Assistant Chief Shawn Kominek has been providing emergency medical services to the La Porte community for a little over 20 years. She worked as a relief paramedic for just more than a year before joining the team full time as a paramedic in 2001. Promotions to Lieutenant and Captain followed, and Shawn Kominek has been our Assistant Chief of EMS since July 2019. She has played a lead role in handling COVID personal protective equipment and reporting activities for the Department. She has been a great source of information to all employees as we have worked through the pandemic. Shawn Kominek is a great teammate, leader, and public servant. Assistant Chief Shawn Kominek, we are fortunate to have you on our team. Thanks for your continued service to La Porte. 9ƒƦƌƚǤĻĻ ƚŅ ƷŷĻ ŷźƩķ vǒğƩƷĻƩ ЋЉЋЊ YĻƌƌǤ \[ğƷŷƩĻƒͲ 9a{ /ğƦƷğźƓ Kelly Lathrem has been a member of the La Porte EMS team since 2014. In her current role as a Captain, she serves as a genuine and positive role model for every other member of the team. In addition to her supervisory work, Kelly works daily with field paramedics on calls and spends many hours staffing special events in the community, like Sylvan Beach Fest, football games, and running events with other bike medics. She is our lead trainer for ultrasound imaging, after taking initiative to learn this valuable skillset. Captain Lathrem never seems to have a bad day. She is always encouraging and positive to others and is a great example of a public servant. Captain Lathrem was nominated for this award by Chief Lisa Camp, for her th outstanding service and leadership on July 27, during an event at a local industrial facility. La Porte EMS was initially dispatched to the location for a patient with difficulty breathing. While the first unit was en route, more information began to come in indicating this was a chemical related event. Captain Lathrem and the first EMS crew arrived to find a very chaotic scene. Captain Lathrem immediately recognized the critical nature of the event, and the need for additional units. Maintaining a calm and reassuring manner, she coordinated ten additional units from La Porte Fire, area EMS services, and industry partners and set up two separate triage sites on the scene. Each patient was identified, taken through decontamination, and assessed by medical personnel before being transported or receiving care on scene. A total of 60 patients were processed on scene, with 30 patients transported to local hospitals within two hours. led to quick assessment, delivery of care, and seamless transport for patients. Her rapid thinking and leadership in such a chaotic and life threatening environment is a testament to her skill and professionalism. We are fortunate to have Kelly on our team serving the La Porte community. For her performance that day and her consistently great work every day, please join me in congratulating Captain Kelly Lathrem as our Employee of the Third Quarter 2021. LOUIS R. RIGBY BILL BENTLEY Mayor CouncilpersonDistrict 3 BRANDON LUNSFORD THOMAS GARZA CouncilpersonAt Large A CouncilpersonDistrict 4 BRENT McCAULLEY JAY MARTIN CouncilpersonAt Large B Mayor Pro Tem MANDI WILLIAMS CouncilpersonDistrict 5 CouncilpersonDistrict 1 ROBBIE McLARRIN CHUCK ENGELKEN CouncilpersonDistrict 6 Councilperson District 2 MINUTES OF THE REGULAR MEETING OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LA PORTE OCTOBER 25, 2021 The City Council of the City of La Portemet in a regularmeetingonMonday, October 25, 2021,at the City Hall Council Chambers, 604 West Fairmont Parkway, La Porte, Texas, at 6:00p.m.,withthe following in attendance: Councilpersons present: Louis Rigby,Brandon Lunsford,Brent McCaulley, Mandi Williams, Chuck Engelken,Bill Bentley, Thomas Garza, Jay Martin, Robbie McLarrin Councilpersons attending remotely: None Councilpersons absent: None Council-appointed officers present:Corby Alexander, City Manager;Lee Woodward, City Secretary; Clark Askins, AssistantCity Attorney CALL TO ORDER Mayor Rigbycalled the meeting to order at6:00p.m. 2.INVOCATION The invocation was given by Rev. Dee Spears, Fairmont Park Church,and pledges wereled byCouncilperson Bill Bentley. 3.PRESENTATIONS, PROCLAMATIONS, AND RECOGNITIONS a.Proclamation in recognition of Rotary World Polio Day. \[Louis R. Rigby, Mayor\] b.Proclamation in recognition of Wellby Day. \[Louis R. Rigby, Mayor\] c.Recognition of City employees for years of service. \[Louis R. Rigby, Mayor\] 4.CITIZENCOMMENT(Generally limited to five minutes per person; in accordance with state law, the time may be reduced if there is a high number of speakers or other considerations.) Phillip Hootexpressed his appreciation of the flag disposal box by City Hall and on the importance of rooftops and increased household income to develop downtown and increase local retail. Terry Matthewsspoke on her issue with her neighbor, saying she felt it had not been addressed and confirming it had not been resolved, and asked the Council for action, 5.CONSENTAGENDA(Approval of Consent Agenda items authorizes each to be implemented in accordance with staff recommendations provided. An item may be removed from the consent agenda and added to the Statutory Agenda for full discussion upon request by a member of the Council present at this meeting.) a.Approve the minutes of the regular City Council meeting held on October 11, 2021. \[Louis R. Rigby, Mayor\] b.Approve Resolution 2021-62 to join as a party with the State of Texas and participating political subdivisions in the Texas Opioid Settlement Agreement secured by the Texas Attorney General and authorizing the City Manager to execute all related documents. \[Corby Alexander, City Manager\] c.Authorize staff to accept quote from Athletic Field Specialists for the reconstruction of all ten (10) fields at Pecan Park, in the amount of $64,000.00, utilizing BuyBoard Contract #641- 21. \[Lindsay French, Recreation Superintendent\] Page 1of 3 October 25,2021,Council Meeting Minutes d. Authorize the City Manager to execute a contract with Kraftsman, LLC, in the amount of $535,488.94, utilizing BuyBoard Contract #592-19, for the installation of a new Splash Park, shade structures, and picnic tables in Fairmont Park West, with a contingency amount of $53,548.89, for a total authorization of $589,037.83. \[Lindsay French, Recreation Superintendent\] e. hardware, in the amount of $364,736.90, utilizing Texas DIR contract DIR-TSO-4167. \[Grady Parker, IT Manager\] f. Approve the purchase of twenty-seven (27) new Dell computer tablets from Dell for use by the La Porte Police Department in patrol units, utilizing Texas DIR contract DIR-TSO-3763, in the amount of $67,187.88. \[Grady Parker, IT Manager\] g. Award the purchases of vehicles and equipment approved for replacement in the City of La Porte FY 2021-2022 Budget through the Texas BuyBoard Cooperative Purchasing Program, with an authorization of $575,289.03. \[Ray Mayo, Director of Public Works\] Councilperson Garza pulled item b for individual consideration. Councilperson Bentley moved to adopt the consent agenda, less item b; the motion was seconded by Councilperson Engelken; the motion was adopted, 9-0. Councilperson Garza moved to postpone item b to the November 8, 2021, Council meeting; the motion was not seconded and was not considered. Mayor Pro Tem Martin moved to approve Resolution 2021-62 to join as a party with the State of Texas and participating political subdivisions in the Texas Opioid Settlement Agreement secured by the Texas Attorney General and authorizing the City Manager to execute all related documents and that any funds received would be allocated to opioid prevention for citizens of La Porte; the motion was seconded by Councilperson Bentley; the motion was adopted, 8-1, Councilperson Garza voting against. 6. PUBLIC HEARINGS AND ASSOCIATED ORDINANCES a. The City Council will hold a public hearing to receive comments regarding a recommendation by the Planning and Zoning Commission to adopt Ordinance 2021-3847, amending the City's Future Land Use Map Component of the Comprehensive Plan for an approximately 5.4-acre tract of land located at the 800 Block of McCabe Road, legally described as Part of Tract 5E, Abstract 30, WP Harris Survey, Harris County, Texas, by -High Density followed by discussion and possible action to consider adopting Ordinance 2021-3847, amending the City's Future Land Use Map Component of the Comprehensive Plan for an approximately 5.4-acre tract of land located at the 800 Block of McCabe Road, legally described as Part of Tract 5E, Abstract 30, WP Harris Survey, Harris County, Texas, by -High Density \] Mayor Rigby opened the public hearing at 6:38 p.m. Planning and Development Director Teresa Evans provided a presentation for the SCUP and the FLUP. There were no public comments and Donna Boudreaux of PALT, Inc., the applicant, answered Council questions. Mayor Rigby closed the public hearing at 7:01 p.m. Mayor Pro Tem Martin moved to adopt 2021-3847, amending the City's Future Land Use Map Component of the Comprehensive Plan for an approximately 5.4-acre tract of land located at the 800 Block of McCabe Road, legally described as Part of Tract 5E, Abstract 30, WP Harris Survey, Harris County, Texas, by changing the land use designation from -; the motion was seconded by Councilperson Bentley; the motion was adopted, 9-0. b. The City Council will hold a public hearing to receive comments regarding a recommendation by the Planning and Zoning Commission to adopt Ordinance 2021-3848, Special Conditional Use Permit #21-91000004, to allow for a senior living multi-family development on a 5.4-acre tract of land located at the 800 Block of McCabe Road, legally described as Part of Tract 5E, Abstract 30, WP Harris Survey, Harris County, Texas in the Planned Unit Development (PUD) zoning district; followed by discussion and possible Page 2 of 3 October 25, 2021, Council Meeting Minutes action to consider adopting Ordinance 2021-3848, amending the Code of Ordinances of the it #21- 91000004 to allow for a senior living multi-family development on a 5.4-acre tract of land in the Planned Unit Development (PUD) zoning district. \[Teresa Evans, Planning and Development Director\] Mayor Rigby opened the public hearing at 7:06 p.m. Phillip Hoot spoke on the involvement of the neighboring residents throughout the process as this development was handled by the City. Mayor Rigby closed the public hearing at 7:10 p.m. Mayor Pro Tem Martin moved to adopt Ordinance 2021-3848, amending the C granting Special Conditional Use Permit #21-91000004 to allow for a senior living multi-family development on a 5.4-acre tract of land in the Planned Unit Development (PUD) zoning district; the motion was seconded by Councilperson McCaulley; the motion was adopted, 9-0. 7. REPORTS a. Receive report on the La Porte Development Corporation Board meeting, \[Councilperson Engelken\] Councilperson Engelken shared that the Committee had met, approved a reimbursement payment for $14,140.88 for Snider Transmission, approved a $45,000,00 incentive payment for the refurbishment and renovation at 100 West Main Street, provided direction to staff on the ten-year planning for anticipated fund balance in relation to proposed projects, and set the next meeting for December 13. 8. ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS Drainage and Flooding Committee meeting, November 8 La Porte Development Corporation Board meeting, November 8 City Council meeting, November 8 Planning and Zoning Commission meeting, November 18 Corby Alexander reminded the Council of the FEMA webinar tomorrow concerning flood insurance and also that he would have staff provide an update on the issues on Crescent Drive. 9. COUNCIL COMMENTS Hear announcements concerning matters appearing on the agenda; items of community interest; and/or inquiries of staff regarding specific factual information or existing policy from the Mayor, Councilmembers, and City staff, for which no formal action will be discussed or taken. Councilpersons thanked the staff who were recognized, and all employees, for their many years of service, noting how valuable it was; expressed appreciation to the Rotary Club for their many years of effort to eradicate polio; commended those who received proclamations; thanked the Parks and Recreation Department for their significant parks work so soon after the beginning of the new fiscal year; asked that action be taken on the issues between the Matthews and the Shorts; Councilperson Garza offered to join Mayor Pro Tem Martin in his proposal to put an item for the Matthews and the recounted attending the LPHS Distinguished Alumni presentation last week; noted the Bay Area Habitat for Humanity had met with the City to address issues and focus on their renewal; noted Lubrizol had come to visit to discuss the th recent odor incident and efforts to increase communication efforts; Anniversary over the weekend; and thanked Lindsay French for her work as the interim Parks and Recreation Director. ADJOURN Without objection, the Council adjourned at 7:24 p.m. _______________________________ Lee Woodward, City Secretary Page 3 of 3 October 25, 2021, Council Meeting Minutes REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:Nov. 8, 2021 Requested By:Louis R. Rigby, Mayor Source of Funds: Department:City Council Account Number: Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance Amount Requested: Exhibits:Proposed Reso. 2021-61and certification Budgeted Item:YesNo HCAD electionballotpacket Adopted Reso. 2021-59 Letter from Mike Sullivan SUMMARY The cities of the Harris County Appraisal District(HCAD)other than the City of Houston, as a group, are entitledto nominate and select asingleboard member.composed of six members serving two-year terms.The functions of the boardand additional information follow this cover sheet.Any nominating resolutions must be sent to the HCAD Chief Appraiser no later than October 15, 2021, to be considered for election. Mike Sullivan, the former Harris County Tax Assessor-Collector, is the current representative for the position, and has asked that he be nominated again. At its October 11, 2021, meeting, the City Council adopted Resolution 2021-59 in support ofThe ballot package from HCAD indicates Mike Sullivan was the only person nominated for the board position representing cities other thanthe City of Houston. The City has now received the election ballot for this position. HCADrequires that each City Council must cast its vote for one of the nominees and provide it to HCAD by December 15, 2021. RECOMMENDED MOTION Adopt Resolution 2021-61, casting the ballotforthe City of La Porte forMike Sullivan as the Harris County Appraisal District (HCAD) board member representing cities other than the City of Houston, for a two-year term beginning January 1, 2022. RESOLUTION 2021-61 A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LA PORTE, TEXAS, CASTING ITS BALLOT FOR THE ELECTION OF A PERSON TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE HARRIS COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT WHEREAS, the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District has delivered to the mayor of La Porte the names of those persons duly nominated as candidates to serve in that position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the cities other than the City of Houston, participating in said appraisal district; and WHEREAS, the City of La Porte deems it appropriate and in the public interest to cast its vote for the candidate of its choice to fill such position; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LA PORTE, TEXAS, THAT Section 1. The facts and recitations set forth in the preamble of this resolution be and are hereby adopted, ratified, and confirmed. Section 2. The City of La Porte, Texas, does hereby cast its vote for Mike Sullivan, to fill the position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the cities, other than the City of Houston, participating in the appraisal district. Section 3. The mayor be, and is hereby, authorized and directed to deliver or cause to be delivered an executed or certified copy of this resolution to the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District no later than December 15, 2021. th PASSED AND APPROVED by the City Council on this, the 8 day of November 2021. CITY OF LA PORTE, TEXAS ________________________________ Louis R. Rigby, Mayor ATTEST: APPROVED: ________________________________ ________________________________ Lee Woodward, City Secretary Clark T. Askins, Asst. City Attorney CERTIFICATION OF BALLOT FOR BOARD OF DIRECTORS HARRIS COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT th I, Louis R. Rigby, certify that on the 8 day of November, 2021, the City Council of the City of La Porte did by resolution cast its ballot for the following nominee to serve as a member of the Board of Directors of the Harris County Appraisal District. (Place an "X" in the square next to the candidate of your choice.) Mike Sullivan \[ X \] I further certify that a true and correct copy of the resolution casting such ballot is attached hereto. th WITNESS MY HAND this 8 day of November, 2021. CITY OF LA PORTE, TEXAS ________________________________ Louis R. Rigby, Mayor ATTEST: APPROVED AS TO FORM: ________________________________ ________________________________ Lee Woodward, City Secretary Clark T. Askins, Asst. City Attorney Harris County Appraisal District Interoffice Memorandum OFFICE OF THE CHIEF APPRAISER TO: Presiding Officers of Taxing Units Served by the Harris County Appraisal District FROM: Roland Altinger, Chief Appraiser SUBJECT: Election of Board of Directors of the Harris County Appraisal District DATE: October 26, 2021 The nomination period for board candidates representing the small cities, school districts, junior college districts and conservation and reclamation districts closed October 15, 2021. The names of all candidates officially nominated to me on or before that date are reflected on the enclosed "Certification of Ballot" forms. Candidates for contested positions are listed alphabetically on the ballots in the manner required by the Texas Tax Code. Mike Sullivan was the only person nominated for the board position representing cities other than the City of Houston. Martina Lemond Dixon was the only nominee for the position representing school districts other than Houston Independent School District and the junior college districts. Charles Brandman, Erin Corken, Jonathan Cowen, Sandra Jaramillo, Shantai Magee, Wayne Mentz, and Patricia Morlen are nominees for the position representing the conservation and reclamation districts. To assist you in the election procedure, I have enclosed a Certification of Ballot and a suggested form of resolution for casting your vote for the candidate representing your type of taxing unit. Ballot forms for all four types of units are enclosed to make you aware of all nominees, even though only taxing units of a particular type may vote in the election applicable to that type of unit. The governing body of each taxing unit is entitled to one vote for the candidate of its choice from the names appearing on the appropriate Certification of Ballot. Please note, the junior college districts vote collectively. Each board of trustees for the respective junior college districts may file a vote by resolution with the chief appraiser, however, the collective vote of the junior college districts will thereafter be cast for the candidate who receives the most votes from among the junior college districts. Each governing body must cast its vote for one of the nominees, formally adopt a resolution naming the person for whom it votes, and submit a certified copy to the chief appraiser. The vote must be by resolution. The resolution, or a certified copy thereof, together with the completed Certification of Ballot, must be delivered to Roland Altinger, Chief Appraiser, 13013 Northwest Freeway, Houston, Texas 77040, or mailed to P. O. Box 920975, Houston, Texas 77292-0975 to arrive before 5:00 p.m. on December 15, 2021. The outside of the envelope should be marked "Ballot for Board of Directors." Ballots that arrive after that day and time will not be counted. Resolutions and Certification of Ballot may be submitted via e-mail to cguerra@hcad.org. However, if they are submitted via e-mail, the original must also be mailed to the address shown above via regular first-class mail. Prior to December 20, 2021, the chief appraiser will count the votes, declare the results, and notify the winners, the nominees, and the presiding officers of each taxing unit. A tie vote will be resolved by a method of chance chosen by the chief appraiser. These procedures do not apply to Harris County, the City of Houston, or the Houston Independent School District. Those units will select their board member by adopting a resolution appointing such member by December 15, 2021, and delivering an original or certified copy to the Office of the Chief Appraiser. If you have questions about the board selection process, please call me at 713/957-5299. Sincerely, Roland Altinger, RPA Chief Appraiser Attachments c: HCAD Board Members Tax Assessors Attorneys (For Use by School Districts Other Than Houston ISD) C ERTIFICATION OF B ALLOT F OR B OARD OF D IRECTORS H ARRIS C OUNTY A PPRAISAL D ISTRICT I, _______________________________________, certify that on the _______ day of _____________, 2021, the Board of Trustees of _____________________________ Independent School District did by resolution cast its ballot for the following nominee to serve as a member of the Board of Directors of the Harris County Appraisal District. (Place an "X" in the square next to the candidate of your choice.) Martina Lemond Dixon \[ \] I further certify that a true and correct copy of the resolution casting such ballot is attached hereto. WITNESS MY HAND this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _____________________________ President, Board of Trustees ATTEST: _______________________________ Secretary, Board of Trustees RESOLUTION NO. _______________ A RESOLUTION OF THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE ___________________________ INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT CASTING ITS BALLOT FOR THE ELECTION OF A PERSON TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE HARRIS COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT WHEREAS, the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District, has delivered to the superintendent of this school district the names of those persons duly nominated as candidates to serve in that position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the school districts other than the Houston Independent School District participating in said appraisal district; and WHEREAS, this school district deems it appropriate and in the public interest to cast its vote for the candidate of its choice to fill such position; now, therefore BE IT RESOLVED BY THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF _____________________________ INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT: Section 1. That the facts and recitations set forth in the preamble of this resolution be, and they are hereby, adopted, ratified, and confirmed. Section 2. That ______________________________ Independent School District does hereby cast its vote for _______________________________, to fill the position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the school districts, other than the Houston Independent School District, participating in the appraisal district. Section 3. That the superintendent be, and he or she is hereby, authorized and directed to deliver or cause to be delivered an executed or certified copy of this resolution to the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District no later than December 15, 2021. PASSED AND APPROVED this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _______________________________________ President, Board of Trustees ATTEST: ______________________________ Secretary, Board of Trustees (For Use by Cities Other Than the City of Houston) C ERTIFICATION OF B ALLOT F OR B OARD OF D IRECTORS H ARRIS C OUNTY A PPRAISAL D ISTRICT I, _______________________________________, certify that on the _______ day of _____________, 2021, the City Council of the City of ___________________________ did by resolution cast its ballot for the following nominee to serve as a member of the Board of Directors of the Harris County Appraisal District. (Place an "X" in the square next to the candidate of your choice.) Mike Sullivan \[ \] I further certify that a true and correct copy of the resolution casting such ballot is attached hereto. WITNESS MY HAND this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _____________________________ Mayor ATTEST: _______________________________ City Secretary RESOLUTION NO. _______________ A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ___________________________ CASTING ITS BALLOT FOR THE ELECTION OF A PERSON TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE HARRIS COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT WHEREAS, the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District has delivered to the mayor of this city, the names of those persons duly nominated as candidates to serve in that position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the cities other than the City of Houston, participating in said appraisal district; and WHEREAS, this city deems it appropriate and in the public interest to cast its vote for the candidate of its choice to fill such position; now, therefore BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF _______________________: Section 1. That the facts and recitations set forth in the preamble of this resolution be, and they are hereby, adopted, ratified, and confirmed. Section 2. That the City of ______________________________ does hereby cast its vote for _______________________________, to fill the position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the cities, other than the City of Houston, participating in the appraisal district. Section 3. That the mayor be, and he or she is hereby, authorized and directed to deliver or cause to be delivered an executed or certified copy of this resolution to the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District no later than December 15, 2021. PASSED AND APPROVED this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _______________________________________ Mayor ATTEST: ______________________________ City Secretary (For Use by Conservation & Reclamation Districts) C ERTIFICATION OF B ALLOT F OR B OARD OF D IRECTORS H ARRIS C OUNTY A PPRAISAL D ISTRICT I, _______________________________________, certify that on the _______ day of _____________, 2021, the Board of Directors of _____________________________ did by resolution cast its ballot for the following nominee to serve as a member of the Board of Directors of the Harris County Appraisal District. (Place an "X" in the square next to the candidate of your choice.) Charles Brandman \[ \] Erin Corken \[ \] Jonathan Cowen \[ \] Sandra Jaramillo \[ \] Shantai Magee \[ \] Wayne Mentz \[ \] Patricia Morlen \[ \] I further certify that a true and correct copy of the resolution casting such ballot is attached hereto. WITNESS MY HAND this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _____________________________ President, Board of Directors ATTEST: _______________________________ Secretary, Board of Directors RESOLUTION NO. _______________ A RESOLUTION OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE _____________________________________________________ (CONSERVATION & RECLAMATION DISTRICT) CASTING ITS BALLOT FOR THE ELECTION OF A PERSON TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE HARRIS COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT WHEREAS, the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District has delivered to the president of this governing body the names of those persons duly nominated as candidates to serve in that position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the conservation & reclamation districts participating in said appraisal district; and WHEREAS, this conservation & reclamation district deems it appropriate and in the public interest to cast its vote for the candidate of its choice to fill such position; now, therefore BE IT RESOLVED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF _______________________________________________________________________: Section 1. That the facts and recitations set forth in the preamble of this resolution be, and they are hereby, adopted, ratified, and confirmed. Section 2. That _________________________________________ (name) does hereby cast its vote, for _______________________________, to fill the position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the conservation & reclamation districts, participating in the appraisal district. Section 3. That the presiding officer be, and he or she is hereby, authorized and directed to deliver or cause to be delivered an executed or certified copy of this resolution to the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District no later than December 15,2021. PASSED AND APPROVED this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _______________________________________ President, Board of Directors ATTEST: ______________________________ Secretary, Board of Directors (For Use by Junior College Districts) C ERTIFICATION OF B ALLOT F OR B OARD OF D IRECTORS H ARRIS C OUNTY A PPRAISAL D ISTRICT I, _______________________________________, certify that on the _______ day of _____________, 2021, the Board of Trustees of _____________________________ Junior College District did by resolution cast its ballot for the following nominee to serve as a member of the Board of Directors of the Harris County Appraisal District. (Place an "X" in the square next to the candidate of your choice.) Martina Lemond Dixon \[ \] I further certify that a true and correct copy of the resolution casting such ballot is attached hereto. WITNESS MY HAND this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _____________________________ President, Board of Trustees ATTEST: _______________________________ Secretary, Board of Trustees RESOLUTION NO. _______________ A RESOLUTION OF THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE ___________________________ JUNIOR COLLEGE DISTRICT CASTING ITS BALLOT FOR THE ELECTION OF A PERSON TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF THE HARRIS COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT WHEREAS, the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District, has delivered to the presiding officer of the board of trustees of this junior college district the names of those persons duly nominated as candidates to serve in that position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the junior college districts participating in said appraisal district; and WHEREAS, this junior college district deems it appropriate and in the public interest to cast its vote for the candidate of its choice to fill such position; now, therefore BE IT RESOLVED BY THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF _____________________________ JUNIOR COLLEGE DISTRICT: Section 1. That the facts and recitations set forth in the preamble of this resolution be, and they are hereby, adopted, ratified, and confirmed. Section 2. That ______________________________ Junior College District does hereby cast its vote for _______________________________, to fill the position on the board of directors of the Harris County Appraisal District, representing and to be filled by the junior college districts participating in the appraisal district. Section 3. That the presiding officer be, and he or she is hereby, authorized and directed to deliver or cause to be delivered an executed or certified copy of this resolution to the chief appraiser of the Harris County Appraisal District no later than December 15, 2021. PASSED AND APPROVED this _____ day of ____________________, 2021. _______________________________________ President, Board of Trustees ATTEST: ______________________________ Secretary, Board of Trustees REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 014 Insurance Fund Requested By:Matt Hartleib, HR Manager Source of Funds: Department:Admin Human Resources 014-6144-515-6012 Account Number: $738,000 Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance $765,245 Amount Requested: Exhibits:2022 Stop Loss Presentation Budgeted Item:YesNo SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION On September 23, 2021, a Request for Proposal (RFP)22501was released for Stop Loss/Reinsurance coverage for the 2022plan year of the City of La Porte Health Fund. Due to the sensitive nature of the supporting information, this RFP utilized a targeted release of likely bidders in the Stop Loss insurance field. The RFP was advertisedin rdth the Bay Area Observer on September 23and September 30. The current plan year has seen continued return to normal levels of high claims after an atypical 2019 experience. From January through August 2020, the total Stop Loss premium paid is $440,413while reimbursements over the same period total $19,342. For comparison in 2020 the period of January-August resulted in premiums of $364,200 and reimbursements of $776,746.In 2019, premiums were $353,900 and reimbursements were $956,939. RFP generated aresponse of one proposal which wasopened on October 26, 2021.The proposalreceived is from the same provider utilized in the 2021 plan year, SA Benefit Vista UW.The bid from SA Benefit maintains the specific deductible claim which carries an additional $185,000 in potential plan liability. This is the same number of lasers included in the 2021 coverage and a reduction from the HUB, the Chapter 172 Employee, Retiree Insurance and Benefits Board voted to recommendselection of SA Benefit Vista UW as the provider ofstop loss coverage for the 2022plan year at the $165,000specific deductible rate. This recommendation carries a projected cost of $765,245which is $27,245 abovethe budgeted amount and represents an increase of 15.38% inStop Loss premiums. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Authorize the City Manager to execute an agreement with SA Benefits Vista UW for Stop Loss insurance for the 2022 plan year. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date Advocacy. Tailored Insurance Solutions. Peace of Mind October 28, 2021 City of La Porte CH 172 Committee Stop Loss Reinsurance RFP Brent Weegar, MBA Senior Vice President Julian Fontana Account Executive Mike Weaver Account Manager CarolineSmithMarketingSpecialist © 2018 HUB International Limited.© 2021 HUB International Limited. 11 Agenda Stop Loss RFP Response Summary 1 RFP Financial Summary 2 © 2018 HUB International Limited.© 2021 HUB International Limited. 22 1 Stop Loss RFP Response Summary Advocacy. Tailored Insurance Solutions. Peace of Mind © 2018 HUB International Limited. 33 © 2021 HUB International Limited.. RFP Responses CARRIERPROPOSED/DECLINE SA Benefit Services Vista UW (Incumbent)Proposed AetnaDeclined Stealth Partner GroupDeclined Stealth Partner Group Markets SA Benefit Service Markets Stop Loss CarriersResponseReason for decline ATSNo response by bid due date ISUDeclineUncompetitive PartnerREDeclineUncompetitive LibertyNo response by bid due date Vista (Renewal)Quoted PaceDeclineInforce Companion American FidelityDeclineUncompetitive RockportDeclineUncompetitive ECUDeclineLoss History MRMDeclineUncompetitive © 2018 HUB International Limited. 4 2 RFP Financial Summary Medical Plan Cost Summary and 2022 Plan Premiums Advocacy. Tailored Insurance Solutions. Peace of Mind © 2018 HUB International Limited. 55 © 2021 HUB International Limited. RFP Financial Summary The renewal proposal from the incumbent MGU SA Benefit Services with Vista UW Companion Life is a +15.38% increase to premium. The proposal includes 1 individual laser of $185,000 in added plan liability. The Aggregate Claim Attachment Factors in the renewal proposal increased+8.83%. The overall projected plan cost increase at maximum plan cost is +8.83% under this scenario. Declinationswerereceived fromAetnainadditiontoMGU Stealth Partners Group which represents multiple carriers. © 2018 HUB International Limited. 6 Medical Plan Cost Financial Summary © 2018 HUB International Limited. 7 Medical Plan Premiums 2022 Total Costs - Monthly EnrollmentUnit Costs - Monthly Full Time Employee Total Employee EPOMedical RateCity Contribution ($)City Contribution (%) EmployeesContribution ($)Contribution ($) Employee Only 154$906.05$855.8394.5%$50.22$50.22 + Spouse 28$1,087.25$861.2079.2%$226.05$276.27 + Child(ren)23$732.80$527.9272.0%$204.88$255.10 + Family 61$1,721.49$1,456.2984.6%$265.20$315.42 Premium Contributions154$3,502,085$3,082,64688.0%$419,438 Full Time Employee Total Employee AHF 1000Medical RateCity Contribution ($)City Contribution (%) EmployeesContribution ($)Contribution ($) Employee Only 95$650.91$628.2096.5%$22.71$22.71 + Spouse 15$781.10$619.6479.3%$161.46$184.17 + Child(ren)11$520.74$374.6972.0%$146.06$168.76 + Family 20$1,236.73$1,037.3883.9%$199.36$222.06 Premium Contributions95$1,248,185$1,126,10890.2%$122,077 HRA Contributions95$70,500$70,500100.0%n/a Total Contributions95$1,318,685$1,196,60890.7%$122,077 Full Time Employee Total Employee AHF 1500Medical RateCity Contribution ($)City Contribution (%) EmployeesContribution ($)Contribution ($) Employee Only 159$631.27$616.6297.7%$14.65$14.65 + Spouse 24$757.53$645.8685.3%$111.67$126.32 + Child(ren)21$505.02$414.2882.0%$90.74$105.39 + Family 334$1,199.42$1,052.2287.7%$147.20$161.85 Premium Contributions159$6,357,170$5,684,20689.4%$672,964 HRA Contributions159$269,000$269,000100.0%n/a Total Contributions159$6,626,170$5,953,20689.8%$672,964 Full Time Employee All PlansTotal Medical CostCity Contribution ($)City Contribution (%) EmployeesContribution ($) Total Contributions408$11,107,440$9,892,96189.1%$1,214,479 Contributions with HRA254$11,446,940$10,232,46189.4%$1,214,479 © 2018 HUB International Limited. 8 Thank you! © 2018 HUB International Limited. 9 REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 Requested By:Michael Dolby, Finance Director Source of Funds:Utility/CIP Department:Finance Account Number:Multiple Amount Budgeted:$485,000.00 ReportResolutionOrdinance Amount Requested:$485,000.00 Exhibits:Sole Source Letter from Neptune Budgeted Item:YesNo SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION The Cityof La Porte Neptune water meters and parts. Components of other manufacturers are not compatible with the Neptune system. Core and Main of Houston is the only distributor in the Houston and Southeast Texas area for the Neptune meters and parts making them the sole source supplier for this area. to insure the accuracy of the AMR system through the replacement ofresidential and commercial meters, meter interface units, registers and antennas. Due to the electronic components of the meter; the interface units, registers and antennas are not repaired but replaced with new parts as needed. Neptune meters are reliable and each cycle we are able to read 97% electronically.The life cycle of a meter is about ten years. These parts will be purchased as needed throughout FY 2021-2022. The budgeted amount includes residential and commercial meter replacement programs, newservices and meter repairs. Due to the City purchasing more than $50,000 of material and parts from one sole- source vendor, staff is recommending that City Council authorize approval to purchase Neptune meters and parts from Core and Main of Houston. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Authorize approval to purchase Neptune meters and parts from Core and Main of Houston. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date October 07, 2021 Neptune Sole Source Letter Ms. Ashley Lovercheck City of La Porte 604 W. Fairmont Pkwy. La Porte, TX 77571 RE: Sole Source Neptune Letter Ms. Lovercheck, Neptune Technology Group, Inc. has always valued the City of La Porte, Texas as a loyal customer. I want to clarify, Core & Main, formerly HD Supply Waterworks, is the sole, exclusive authorized Neptune Technology Group distributor for the State of Texas. As the sole source provider of all Neptune products, the City of La Porte can continue to depend on Core and Main for all of your metering needs. Please direct all Neptune product communication to Core & Main for local sales and support. Regards, Hunter Brown Ï S Texas Territory Manager Email: hbrown@neptunetg.com Cell: 334-415-2032 REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 001 -General Fund Requested By:Steve Deardorff, Chief Source of Funds: Department:Police 001-5258-521-5007 Account Number: $55,000 Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance $55,000 Amount Requested: Exhibits:Bid #22002 and Bid Tabulation Budgeted Item:YesNo SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION The City of La Porte has tested and treated all cats and dogs that are taken in atthe shelter before they are eligible for adoption since 2019. Our contract with Deer Park Animal Hospital ended on September 30, 2021, but we have continued operating under the pricing on the expired agreement. The City of La Porte Bid #22002 for Veterinary Services was advertised in the Bay Area Observer on September 16, 2021 and September 23, 2021, posted on Public Purchase All local Veterinary Clinics were notified that the Bid was posted by email from the Purchasing Department.Below is the scope and detailed specifications for the bid: Medications to be provided only for shelter owned animals. Minimum Service Requirements: All services are to be provided in accordance with the requirements of the State of Texas Veterinary Licensing Board. Current licenses and any other required documentation to operate in Texas must be provided with the offer. Test dogs for heartworms Test cats for feline HIV and/or leukemia (Feline Combo) Administerheartworm preventative for non-positive dogs Treatment on dogs that are positive for heartworms Examine and treatdog/cats for minor issues including, but not limited to manage, skin allergies, kennel cough, etc. Provide four to eight hours once each week onsite at the City of La Porte Adoption Center and Animal Shelter, located at 10901 Spencer Highway, La Porte, Texas 77571. Alternate Pricing, Exhibit E: Heartworm test kits for dogs Feline Combo test for cats Heartworm prevention such as lverhart Plus or approved equal Medication for treatment of heartworms The only bid received was from Deer Park Animal Hospital, who is our current vendor. In FY 2021, we spent $45,627.44 on treatment and medication with the vendor. In comparing the original bid from 2019 to the attached bid, most of the medication pricing has gone down, but there is a slight increase in labor for the Veterinarian and Veterinary Technician. In 2019, Staff looked into taking animals to a local veterinarian without a contract for treatment, but there was no single provider that could handle the volume of animals and staff hours for transportation and assistance made this option cost prohibitive. The term of the contract for Veterinary Services is a one-year term, with three (3) additional one-year period extensions. The La Porte Police Department, requests acceptance of Bid #22002 from Deer Park Animal Hospital, with yearly expenditures for the contract terms not-to-exceed the annual budget for veterinary services and authorize expenditures up to $55,000. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Approval of Bid #22002 and purchases made under the contract with Deer Park Animal Hospital and authorizing expenditure up to $55,000.00. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date BID TABULATION-BID #22002 VETERINARY SERVICES Opening Date: October 7, 2021DEER PARK ANIMAL HOSPITAL Item No.DescriptionPrice 1 Veterinarian services rate per hour $60.00 Veterinary Technician services rate per hour 2$25.00 3 As needed, Per Cent discount off list pricing on medications30% REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 032 -Grant Fund Requested By:Steve Deardorff, Chief Source of Funds: Department:Police (Various) Account Number: $ Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance N/A Amount Requested: Exhibits:FY 2021Chapter 59 Asset Forfeiture Budgeted Item:YesNo Report by Law enforcement Agency and Related Financial Records Back Up SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION According toChapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure, Article 59.06 (G) proceeds or property under this chapter shall account for the seizure, forfeiture, receipt, and specific expenditure of all such proceeds in an audit, which is to be performed annually by the commissioners court or governing body of a municipality, as appropriate.In accordance with this requirement, a completed FY 2021Chapter 59 Asset Forfeiture Audit Report by the La Porte Police Department (Law Enforcement Agency)is attached, along with a summary of the fund balance, revenues and expenditures provided by the Finance Department, a financial print out for all revenues and expenditures reported under the State seizure project number (SZST) and copies of all expenditure receipts are attached for council review. During the FY 2021, expenditures included: SWAT Headsets CPA Shirts for Working City events Thermal Imagers Drone and accessories, software and storage unit Fixed post LPR Lexipol Employee Policy Software Leadership Training A summary of the fund is as follows: Beginning Balance$ 94,349.62 Interest Earned58.21 Receipts 8,901.42 Expenditures42,480.29 Ending Balance$ 60,828.96 Staff recommends approval of the FY 2021City of La Porte Police Department State audit/asset forfeiture report. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Approve the FY 2021 audit/asset forfeiture report and associated financial records as required by Chapter 59 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 015 -CIP Budget Requested By:Steve Deardorff, Chief Source of Funds: Department:Police 015-5253-521-1100 Account Number: $314,711 (Year 1 of 2) Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance $314,711(Year 1 of 2) Amount Requested: Exhibits: Motorola Shared Agency Agreement, Budgeted Item:YesNo Motorola GRID Premiereone CAD, &Records Management Draft Agreement SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION As presented in theFY 2022 Pre-budget Retreat, the La Porte Police Department will be changing CAD/RMS software, as part of a change being made for all members of the Gulf Region Information and Dispatch (GRID) System. As previously discussed the conducted a request for proposal (RFP) and after thorough cost, support and product analysisby all members, a decision was made to move forward with Motorola PremierOne CAD and RMS system. estimated cost for this project will be $615,944.00, with a contingency of 5% at $30,797.20 for a total budgeted amount of $646,741.20 split between FY 2022 and FY 2023 in the Capitol Improvement Fund. There is $314,711.00 budgeted in FY 2022 and there will be $332,030.20 requested in FY 2023. To begin the implementation process, each participating agency within the GRID must sign a Shared Agency Agreement with Motorola. League City (primary agency that is responsible for GRID software implementation and maintenance) must also sign the Master Agency Agreementbefore the implementation process begins. Upon signing of the Shared Agency Agreementby November 12, 2021,the City of La Porteill allow IT to install PremierOne products on as many computers as we need for growth without adding to our initial fees or annual maintenance fees. The Shared Agency Agreement goes into effect only when the City of League City signs the Master Agency Agreement. At that time, the City of La Portemust begin payments to Motorola: Initial 20% payment on execution of the Master Agency Agreement at $86,704.20. Subsequent payments will be made once certain benchmarks of product installation are madefor up to an additional $228,006.80 in FY 2022. Final installation and go live will occur in FY 2023 with final payments up to $332,030.20. The City will begin receiving invoices for annual recurring maintenance fees, which the prices are locked in for a period of nine years, beginning FY 2024 The Police Department requests approval by City Council for the City Manager to execute the Shared Agency Agreement and authorize the expenditure of up to $314,711.00 for the current fiscal year, and $332,030.20 for fiscal year 2023 and subsequent annual fees for this product for a period of nine (9) years beginning fiscal year 2024. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Authorize the City Manager to sign the Motorola Shared Agency Agreement and Motorola Preimierone CAD and Records Management Software. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date GULF COAST REGIONAL INFORMATION AND DISPATCH (GRID) PREMIERONE CAD AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SEPTEMBER 29, 2021 21-121967 / TXP20P249A The design, technical, pricing, and other information (ÐInformationÑ) furnished with this submission is proprietary and/or trade secret information of Motorola Solutions, Inc. (ÐMotorola SolutionsÑ) and is submitted with the restriction that it is to be used for evaluation purposes only. To the fullest extent allowed by applicable law, the Information is not to be disclosed publicly or in any manner to anyone other than those required to evaluate the Information without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. © 2021 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. 21-121967 / TXP20P249A TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1 System Description ............................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1System Overview ............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1Participating Agencies .................................................................................................... 1-2 The following agencies are proposed as options: .............................................................................. 1-3 1.1.2Basis for System Sizing .................................................................................................. 1-3 1.1.3Application Software and System Components ............................................................. 1-3 1.1.4PremierOne Application Client Software Licensing ........................................................ 1-4 1.1.5Microsoft, VMware, other Software Licensing Ancillary components ............................. 1-4 1.1.6System Interfaces and Integrations ................................................................................ 1-6 1.2Purchase Options ............................................................................................................... 1-8 1.3Agency deployments .......................................................................................................... 1-8 1.3.1Deployment Group 1 ...................................................................................................... 1-8 1.3.1.1League City ............................................................................................................1-8 1.3.1.2Dickinson ................................................................................................................1-9 1.3.1.3Kemah ..................................................................................................................1-10 1.3.1.4Webster ................................................................................................................1-10 1.3.2Deployment Group 2 .................................................................................................... 1-12 1.3.2.1City of Galveston ..................................................................................................1-12 1.3.2.2Texas City.............................................................................................................1-12 1.3.2.3La Marque ............................................................................................................1-13 1.3.2.4UTMB ...................................................................................................................1-14 1.3.3Deployment Group 3 .................................................................................................... 1-14 1.3.3.1Sugarland .............................................................................................................1-14 1.3.3.2Friendswood .........................................................................................................1-15 1.3.3.3Alvin ......................................................................................................................1-16 1.3.3.4Santa Fe ...............................................................................................................1-16 1.3.4Deployment Group 4 .................................................................................................... 1-17 1.3.4.1La Porte ................................................................................................................1-17 1.3.4.2Port of Houston.....................................................................................................1-18 1.3.4.3Deer Park .............................................................................................................1-18 1.3.4.4Seabrook ..............................................................................................................1-19 1.4System Architecture ......................................................................................................... 1-20 1.4.1PremierOne High Availability Architecture ................................................................... 1-20 1.4.2Microsoft Active Directory Service ................................................................................ 1-21 1.4.2.1Name Resolution ..................................................................................................1-22 1.4.3Common Services ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.4.3.1Geographic Information System (GIS) .................................................................1-22 1.4.3.2System Security ....................................................................................................1-23 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Table of Contents i 1.4.3.3Query Services .....................................................................................................1-23 1.4.3.4Microsoft Reporting Services ................................................................................1-23 1.5CJIS and Compliance ...................................................................................................... 1-23 1.6System Platform and Components................................................................................... 1-24 1.6.1System Storage and Backup ........................................................................................ 1-24 1.6.2Ancillary Components .................................................................................................. 1-25 1.7TCP/IP Network and Data Center Requirements ............................................................. 1-27 1.7.1Network Requirements ................................................................................................. 1-27 1.7.2Data Center Requirements ........................................................................................... 1-28 1.7.3System Workstation Specifications .............................................................................. 1-29 1.7.3.1PremierOne CAD Recommended Specifications .................................................1-29 1.7.3.2PremierOne CAD VDI Client Specifications .........................................................1-30 1.7.3.3PremierOne Mobile CAD Workstation Recommended Specifications .................1-30 1.7.3.4PremierOne Records Workstation Recommended Specifications .......................1-30 1.7.3.5PremierOne Records Mobile Workstation Recommended Specifications ............1-31 1.7.3.6CommandCentral Jail Workstation Recommended Specifications (Optionally Proposed).............................................................................................................................1-31 1.7.4CAD Virtual Desktop Infrastructure .............................................................................. 1-31 1.8Technical Considerations and Design Requirements ...................................................... 1-32 1.8.1Consortium Responsibilities: ........................................................................................ 1-32 1.9Application Descriptions ................................................................................................... 1-34 1.9.1PremierOne CAD ......................................................................................................... 1-34 1.9.1.1PremierOne CAD Concepts .................................................................................1-35 1.9.2PremierOne Mobile with Mobile Mapping ..................................................................... 1-36 1.9.3PremierOne Records .................................................................................................... 1-38 1.9.3.1PremierOne Records Concepts: ...........................................................................1-38 1.10Third Party Integrations .................................................................................................... 1-40 1.10.1RapidSOS Integration .............................................................................................. 1-40 1.11Service Solutions ............................................................................................................. 1-40 1.11.1Legacy Data Conversion .......................................................................................... 1-40 1.11.1.1Legacy RMS Data Convert on Demand to PremierOne Records .......................1-40 1.11.2Intelligent Data Discovery Services (IDD) for CAD ................................................... 1-41 1.11.3Intelligent Data Discovery Services (IDD) for Records ............................................. 1-41 1.12purchase options .............................................................................................................. 1-42 1.12.1PremierOne NG911 Integrated Call Control (ICC) ................................................... 1-42 1.12.1.1Text-to-9-1-1 Capability .......................................................................................1-42 1.12.2Responder Location ................................................................................................. 1-42 1.12.2.1ASTRO Subscriber Requirements .......................................................................1-43 1.12.2.2ASTRO Infrastructure Requirements ...................................................................1-43 1.12.2.3ASTRO System Capacity ....................................................................................1-43 1.12.2.4ASTRO Location Accuracy ..................................................................................1-44 1.12.3Motorola Radio Integrations ..................................................................................... 1-45 September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A ii Table of Contents Motorola Solutions 1.12.3.1MCC7500 Console Integration ............................................................................1-45 1.12.3.2Push-to-Talk (PTT) and Emergency Button Activation Monitor ...........................1-46 1.12.4PremierOne Handheld .............................................................................................. 1-46 1.12.5Command Central Responder (eCitations) .............................................................. 1-47 1.12.6Command Central Evidence .................................................................................... 1-48 1.12.7Galveston County ..................................................................................................... 1-48 1.12.8Port of Galveston ...................................................................................................... 1-48 1.12.9Command Central Jail (option proposed for Galveston County) .............................. 1-49 1.12.9.1Jail Management Solution (JMS) .........................................................................1-49 1.12.9.2Commissary Management ...................................................................................1-51 1.12.9.3Inmate Work Assignments ...................................................................................1-52 1.12.9.4Disciplinary Actions .............................................................................................1-52 1.12.10Brazoria County ........................................................................................................ 1-52 Section 2 Sample Project Management Plan .................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1Project Approach ................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.1Project Management ...................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1.1Motorola Solutions PM ...........................................................................................2-1 2.1.1.2City PM ...................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.2Team Organization ......................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3Organization Chart ......................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2Project Repository and Project Control Register ................................................................ 2-4 2.3Schedule Management ...................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3.1Milestones ...................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.3.2Schedule Control ............................................................................................................ 2-5 2.3.3Cutover and Transition Plan ........................................................................................... 2-6 2.4Communication Management ............................................................................................ 2-6 2.4.1Communications Management Plan .............................................................................. 2-6 2.4.2Meetings ......................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.4.3Project Communication Tools and Documentation ........................................................ 2-6 2.4.3.1Project Escalation Process .....................................................................................2-7 2.5Quality Assurance .............................................................................................................. 2-7 2.6Risk Management .............................................................................................................. 2-8 2.6.1Risk Management Plan .................................................................................................. 2-8 2.7Action Items ....................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.7.1Action Items Management Plan ..................................................................................... 2-8 2.8Change Control .................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.8.1Change Request Procedure ......................................................................................... 2-10 2.8.2Change Control Process .............................................................................................. 2-10 2.9Project Contact List .......................................................................................................... 2-11 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Table of Contents iii Section 3 Statement of Work ............................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 3-1 3.2Award, administration and project initiation ........................................................................ 3-1 3.3Project Management Terms ............................................................................................... 3-1 3.4Completion and Acceptance Criteria .................................................................................. 3-2 3.5Project Roles and Responsibilities Overview ..................................................................... 3-2 3.5.1Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities .................................................................. 3-2 3.5.2Consortium Project Roles and Responsibilities Overview .............................................. 3-4 3.5.2.1General Consortium Responsibilities .....................................................................3-7 3.6Project Planning ................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.6.1Project Planning Session - Teleconference/Web Meeting ............................................. 3-8 3.6.2Project Kickoff Meeting ................................................................................................... 3-9 3.6.3GIS Planning Session Î Teleconference/Web Meeting ............................................... 3-10 3.6.4Interface Planning Session ........................................................................................... 3-10 3.6.5Interface Design Review .............................................................................................. 3-11 3.6.6Contract Design Review ............................................................................................... 3-12 3.7Environment Review and Site Preparations ..................................................................... 3-13 3.7.1Site Survey and IP Network Analysis ........................................................................... 3-13 3.8GIS Services .................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8.1GIS Scope Review ....................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8.2GIS Boundaries Meeting .............................................................................................. 3-15 3.8.3GIS CheckPoint Meetings ............................................................................................ 3-16 3.8.4GIS Draft Geodatabase ................................................................................................ 3-16 3.9Business Process Review (BPR) and System Provisioning ............................................. 3-17 3.9.1Business Process Review ............................................................................................ 3-17 3.9.2Records Detailed Design Document ............................................................................ 3-19 3.9.3PremierOne Provisioning ............................................................................................. 3-20 3.9.3.1PremierOne CAD Provisioning Scenario ..............................................................3-21 3.9.3.2PremierOne Records Provisioning Scenario ........................................................3-22 3.9.3.3PremierOne Provisioning Activities ......................................................................3-22 3.9.3.4Provisioning Finalization .......................................................................................3-23 3.10Hardware and Software ................................................................................................... 3-23 3.10.1Hardware Procurement ............................................................................................ 3-23 3.10.2System Staging ........................................................................................................ 3-23 3.10.3On-Site Installation ................................................................................................... 3-24 3.10.4Cumulative Updates ................................................................................................. 3-24 3.10.5Client Software Installation ....................................................................................... 3-25 3.11Interfaces and Integration ................................................................................................ 3-26 3.11.1Interface Development ............................................................................................. 3-26 3.11.2Interface Deployment ............................................................................................... 3-26 3.11.3Integration Activities ................................................................................................. 3-27 September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A iv Table of Contents Motorola Solutions 3.11.4State Uniform Crime Reporting (UCR)/Incident Based Reporting System (NIBRS)/Interface ..................................................................................................................... 3-27 3.11.5State Crash Report (Traffic Accident Reporting) ...................................................... 3-28 3.12Reports and Dashboards ................................................................................................. 3-29 3.12.1Reports ..................................................................................................................... 3-29 3.12.2Intelligent Data Discovery ......................................................................................... 3-29 3.13System Training ............................................................................................................... 3-30 3.13.1Learning eXperience Portal (On-line Training) ......................................................... 3-30 3.13.2Instructor-Led Training (On-site and/or Remote/virtual) ........................................... 3-30 3.13.3Advanced Configuration Tool ................................................................................... 3-31 3.14Product Validation ............................................................................................................ 3-32 3.14.1Product Validation Plan ............................................................................................ 3-32 3.14.2Functional Validation ................................................................................................ 3-32 3.14.3Interface Validation ................................................................................................... 3-33 3.15Go Live ............................................................................................................................. 3-34 3.15.1Go Live Planning ...................................................................................................... 3-34 3.15.2Motorola Support Engagement ................................................................................ 3-35 3.15.3Go Live Event ........................................................................................................... 3-35 3.15.4Documentation ......................................................................................................... 3-36 3.16Project Closure Î Transition to Support ........................................................................... 3-36 Section 4 Training Plan ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1Course Listing .................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1Technical and Provisioning Training .............................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2Functional Application Training ...................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2.1Application Training - Deployment Group 1 ............................................................4-2 4.1.2.2Application Training - Deployment Group 2 ............................................................4-3 4.1.2.3Application Training - Deployment Group 3 ............................................................4-4 4.1.2.4Application Training Î Deployment Group 4 ...........................................................4-4 4.2Training Overview .............................................................................................................. 4-5 4.2.1System Administrator ..................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2.2Training Facilities and Schedules ................................................................................... 4-5 4.2.2.1Training Methods and Procedures .........................................................................4-6 4.2.3Training Environment ..................................................................................................... 4-7 4.2.4Session Attendance ....................................................................................................... 4-7 4.2.5Learning Experience Portal (LXP) Requirements .......................................................... 4-7 4.2.5.1LXP Learner Subscription Package ........................................................................4-8 4.3Course Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 4-8 Section 5 PremierOne GIS Requirements ......................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1Overview ............................................................................................................................ 5-1 5.2GIS Data Requirements for Basic Functionality ................................................................. 5-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Table of Contents v 5.2.1Street Centerline ............................................................................................................ 5-1 5.2.2 Common Place Location Points ..................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.2.1 Address Point Feature Class ..................................................................................5-2 5.2.3 Response Boundary(s) ................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.4 Optional Support Tables ................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4.1 Street Name Alias Table .........................................................................................5-3 5.2.4.2 Common Place Alias Table ....................................................................................5-3 5.2.5 Additional Boundary Data Types .................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.6 Contractor Boundary ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.7Reporting District ............................................................................................................ 5-3 5.2.8Map Book ....................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.9Premise Hazard Areas ................................................................................................... 5-4 Section 6 Proposal Pricing ................................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.1Development Group 1 Pricing ............................................................................................ 6-1 6.2Optional CommandCentral Evidence Pricing ................................................................... 6-45 6.2.1(Digital Evidence) ......................................................................................................... 6-45 Section 7 H-GAC Master Customer Agreement ................................................................................................... 1 Section 8 Appendix A: Interface Specification Documents ................................................................................ 8-1 September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A vi Table of Contents Motorola Solutions October 4, 2021 Darrell Kelemen Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) 555 W. Walker Street League City, TX 77573 Re: Proposal 21-121967 / TXP20P249A for PremierOne CAD and Records Management System (ÐProposalÑ) Dear Mr. Kelemen: Motorola Solutions, Inc. (ÐMotorolaÑ) is pleased to provide the attached Proposal to Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID). This Proposal is valid until December 10, 2021. This solution is proposed as a single system and purchasing only some components may change the overall pricing. The proposal is priced as a single system. All prices and discounts are given as a bundle purchase. MotorolaÓs Proposal is subject to the terms and conditions of the attached System and Services Agreement. You may accept this Proposal by signing the attached agreement. Alternatively, Motorola would be pleased to address any concerns you might have regarding this Proposal. Please send your order to your Motorola Public Safety Solutions Consultant listed below. Motorola appreciates your consideration of this Proposal and hopes you will find it acceptable. Motorola would be pleased to address any concerns you might have and we look forward to receiving your response. Please feel free to contact your Motorola Public Safety Solutions Consultant, Diane Culverhouse, (303) 506-7249, Diane.Culverhouse@motorolasolutions.com with any questions. Sincerely, Motorola Solutions, Inc. Travis Boettcher AVP, Software Enterprise Sales Motorola Solutions, Inc., Enterprise & Mobility Solutions 7237 Church Ranch Blvd. Suite 406, Westminster CO 80021 U.S.A. Tel: +1 303 527 4000 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 SECTION 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW Motorola Solutions (ÐMotorolaÑ) is pleased to present the following system for Gulf Coast Regional GRID (hereinafter referred to as the ÐConsortiumÑ). Information and Dispatch or MotorolaÓs offering is comprised of server hardware, server networking hardware, system software, PremierOne application and client software, interfaces and services (as stated in the Statement of Work). The following presents a logical illustration of the system components. GRIDÎSYSTEMDIAGRAM Figure 1-1 - Representative System Diagram PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.1.1 Participating Agencies The designated agencies participating in the system are: Alvin Animal Control Alvin Code Enforcement Alvin EMS Alvin Fire Department Alvin Police Department Deer Park Animal Control Deer Park Ems Department Deer Park Fire Department Deer Park Police Department Bayou Animal Services Dickinson Ems Department Dickinson Fire Department Dickinson Fire Marshals Office Dickinson Police Department Forest Bend Fire Department Friendswood Animal Control Friendswood EMS Friendswood Fire Dept Friendswood Police Dept Windsor EMS Galveston Animal Control Galveston EMS Galveston Fire Department Galveston Police Department Jamaica Beach Fire Department Jamaica Beach Police Department Kemah Ems Department Kemah Fire Department Kemah Police Department Lamarque EMS Lamarque Fire Department Lamarque Police Department La Porte Animal Control La Porte EMS La Porte Fire Dept La Porte Police Department Morgans Point Police Department Shoreacres Police Department League City Animal Control League City EMS League City Fire Department League City Police Department Port Of Houston Police Department Port Of Houston EMS Port Of Houston Fire Department Santa Fe Ems Department Santa Fe Fire Department PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-2 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Santa Fe Police Department Seabrook Animal Control Seabrook EMS Seabrook Fire Department Seabrook Police Department Sugar Land Fire Department Sugar Land Police Department Texas City Fire Department Texas City Police Department UTMB Police Lakeview Police Department Nassau Bay EMS Nassau Bay Fire Department Nassau Bay Police Southeast EMS Southeast Fire Department Webster EMS Webster Fire Department Webster Police Department The following agencies are proposed as options: Galveston County Port of Galveston 1.1.2 Basis for System Sizing The system is sized by tiers. Motorola uses Call for Service (CFS) and employee counts as some the parameters to establish the tiers of infrastructure sizing. Based on the counts provided by you, this system has been sized as follows: Up to 2,000,000 CAD Calls for Service per year Up to 250 PremierOne CAD clients Up to 1000 PremierOne Mobile clients 5% annual growth for 5 years Five (5) years of PremierOne CAD data retention (2 years online, 3 years reporting) The following applications, system components and services are included in this system: 1.1.3 Application Software and System Components This System is comprised of the following component and Subsystem elements: CAD Subsystem PremierOne CAD with Automatic Resource Location (ARL) via: PremierOne Mobile via cellular PremierOne Mobile with Mobile Mapping PremierOne Records Version 4.5 with IBR (TIBRS) submission only PremierOne Records supports the submission of Texas IBR, Texas Department of Public Safety TIBRS Training and Reference Manual (Revised 02/03/15), and Texas Peace OfficerÓs Crash Report (Form CR-3 1/1/2010). Property & Evidence PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-3 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 PremierOne Records Convert-on-Demand PremierOne Records Mobile PremierOne CAD Intelligent Data Discovery PremierOne Records Intelligent Data Discovery RapidSOS Integration PremierOne Virtual Desktop Integration System Component PremierOne Sever Hardware Interfaces Third Party Components CommSys Queries 1.1.4 PremierOne Application Client Software Licensing The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for all agencies listed in Participating Agencies. Table 1-1 Î System Client Licensing System Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 68 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 63 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 1155 PremierOne Records 592 PremierOne Records Mobile 689 1.1.5 Microsoft, VMware, other Software Licensing Ancillary components The following table lists the type and number of Microsoft, VMware, Hewlett Packard Enterprise (HPe) and other licenses and the party responsible for providing them. Table 1-2 - Microsoft and VMware Licensing Microsoft & VMware Licenses Primary Motorola Site Provided Microsoft DataCenter 2016 16 Core OS license 2 X Microsoft DataCenter 2016 2 Core OS Add on license 20 X Microsoft Windows 2016 16 Core OS license 5 X Microsoft SQL 2017 Enterprise 4 core license 3 X Microsoft SQL 2017 Enterprise 2 core add on license 5 X Microsoft SQL 2017 Standard 4 core license 5 X Microsoft SQL 2017 Standard 2 core add on license 5 X Microsoft System Center Operation Manager 2016 60 X (SCOM) VMware vCenter Standard 1 X VMware vSphere Ent+ CPU 11 X PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-4 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The following table lists the type, number and who is providing these ancillary items: Table 1-3 - Ancillary Components Description Details Customer Motorola Quantity Provided Provided F5 Load Virtual/Physical Network Load X 2 Balancers Balancing software integrated with system SolarWinds Network performance monitoring X 1 SolarWinds NetFlow Traffic Analyzer X 1 GIS Editing 10.6 of Esri ArcGIS Desktop and X Software Network Analyst extension software Client Access X 1 Per Client Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Licenses Refer to Microsoft Website for Guidance VDI Client Microsoft VDI Client access X 1 Per VDI access Client Refer to Microsoft Website for Guidance CommSys Enables State Queries X 1 ConnectCIC FortiGate Provides server component isolation X Network Devices from other systems within the CustomerÓs data center by means of a firewall router. Extreme 16 port 10Gb Layer 2 switching, Layer X Networks X620 3 IPv4/IPv6 routing Extreme 48 port GbE Management vLAN X Networks X420 Switch Host Server X HPe DL360c Gen10 w/dual Xeon Gold 6146, 384 GB RAM, 2 NIC, 2 x 8GB microSD HPe DL360 Monitor Server X Gen10 w/ single XeonS 4114, 128 GB RAM, 5x1.2TB HDD HPe DL560c VDI Server X Gen10 w/single Xeon 6254, 512 GB RAM, 4 10GB NIC, 2 x 8GB microSD PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-5 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Description Details Customer Motorola Quantity Provided Provided Nimble Storage VDI SAN X HF20 48x 240GB SSD 11TB AF20 246TB All PremierOne SAN X Flash SAN HPe StoreOnce Location to store backups X 3520 Equipment Rack Rack mount keyboard and monitor X HPe Rack Model Cabinet Dimensions P9K42A 42 U 78.9 in. x 39.7 in. x 24 in. Shipping Dimensions (with packaging materials) 86.2 in. x 48 in. x 35.6 in. Shipping Weight 1868 lb. Î Total Installed Weight 385 lb. Î Rack Maximum Load of Rack 3000 lb. Rack Clearance Front: 48 inch Back: 30 inch Power Distribution Units HPE 4.9kVA 208V 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations The table below list the specific integrations or interfaces included in our system. An Interface Specification Document (ISD) is available for each interface. The ISD details the specific features and functionality of the interface and describes the implementation process and responsibilities of the involved parties. Any requests for change to the ISD following contract is subject to review and consideration through the change control mechanism of the contract. Table 1-4 - System Interfaces Interface Name Functionality ISD Name AFIS LiveScan Records Server Records Two-Way AFIS LiveScan ASAP to PSAP CAD Server ASAP Alarm Avigilon CAD Server Avigilon ACC Video Axon Body Camera CAD RDW Axon CAD Outbound Brazos eCitation Records Server Brazos eCitation Data Import Coban Dash Camera Records Server Axon CAD Outbound PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-6 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Interface Name Functionality ISD Name CryWolf CAD Server CryWolf E911/TDD CAD Server E911-TDD Emergency Reporting FRMS CAD RDW ERS (Emergency Reporting) ESO FRMS CAD RDW ESO Fire (ESO Solutions) ESO ePCR CAD RDW Electronic Health Record- ePCR Data View Evidence.com Records Server Records Outbound Data Firehouse Enterprise CAD CAD RDW CAD Outbound Data Firehouse FRMS CAD RDW Firehouse FRMS NFIRS (ESO Solutions) Foray P&E Records Server Records Two-Way Property and Evidence FTO Module (CAD) CAD RDW CAD Data View FTO Module (Records) Records RDW Records Data View Geovision Cameras IP N/A TBD Higher Ground CAD RDW CAD Data View IA Pro Records Server Records - Outbound Data L3 Digital Evidence Records Client TBD Mach Alert FSA CAD Server MACH Fire Station Alerting - FSA PageGate CAD Server PageGate (NotePage) PMAM CAD Server TBD PowerPhone CAD Client PowerPhone CACH Interface ISD ProQA CAD Client ProQA Paramount Regional RMS External Query PremierOne Suite External Query Suite Services Responder 360 CAD RDW CAD Outbound Data SETCIC PremierOne Suite External Query Suite Services State/NCIC PremierOne State Suite Query Suite Services Tyler Encode Records Server Records Outbound Data ISD Tyler Odyssey Court System PremierOne Suite External Query Query Suite Services WatchGuard Body Camera CAD RDW Axon CAD Outbound WatchGuard In Car Camera CAD RDW Axon CAD Outbound WestNet CAD Server First-In Fire Station Alerting FSA Zetron FSA CAD Server Zetron 6/26 Fire Station Alerting FSA Table 1-5 - System Integrations Integration Name RapidSOS Vigilant PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-7 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.2 PURCHASE OPTIONS The following system components are presented for the ConsortiumÓs consideration. While not required to support the system, each of the following separately priced options enhance the system by adding additional capabilities. PremierOne NG911 Integrated Call Control Responder Location Motorola Radio Integrations PremierOne Subscriber Radio PTT/Emergency ID PremierOne Handheld CommandCentral Responder (eCitations) CommandCentral Evidence Galveston County/Port of Galveston Add-On Agencies CommandCentral Jail (proposed for Galveston County) 1.3 AGENCY DEPLOYMENTS PremierOne agency deployment will be broken down into groups as identified in the subsequent paragraphs. If Galveston County and the Port of Galveston join the consortium and are included in the contract, some realignment of deployment groups may be required. 1.3.1 Deployment Group 1 1.3.1.1 League City The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for League City Table 1-6 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 8 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 5 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 170 PremierOne Records 100 PremierOne Records Mobile 100 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Avigilon CryWolf E911/TDD Emergency Reporting FRMS ESO ePCR PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-8 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Firehouse FRMS ProQA State/NCIC Tyler Encode WestNet Integrations RapidSOS Vigilant 1.3.1.2 Dickinson The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Dickinson. Table 1-7 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 3 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 8 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 25 PremierOne Records 38 PremierOne Records Mobile 21 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD ESO ePCR Firehouse FRMS PageGate State/NCIC Tyler Encode WatchGuard Body Camera WatchGuard In-Car Camera Integrations RapidSOS PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-9 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.3.1.3 Kemah The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Kemah. Table 1-8 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 2 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 3 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 7 PremierOne Records 10 PremierOne Records Mobile 7 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD Geovision Camera State/NCIC Tyler Encode WatchGuard Body Camera WatchGuard In-Car Camera Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.1.4 Webster The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Webster. Table 1-9 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 4 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 2 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 40 PremierOne Records 45 PremierOne Records Mobile 30 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces CryWolf E911/TDD ESO FRMS State/NCIC Tyler Encode PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-10 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 WatchGuard Body Camera WatchGuard In-Car Camera WestNet FSA Integrations RapidSOS Nassau Bay Nassau Bay is an additional agency dispatched by Webster. The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Nassau Bay. Table 1-10 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 1 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 11 PremierOne Records 2 PremierOne Records Mobile 10 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Evidence.com Lakeview Lakeview is an additional agency dispatched by Webster. The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Lakeview. Table 1-11 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 1 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 8 PremierOne Records 7 PremierOne Records Mobile 8 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces L3 Digital Evidence Southeast Southeast is an additional agency dispatched by Webster. No additional interfaces have been identified for this agency. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-11 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.3.2 Deployment Group 2 1.3.2.1 City of Galveston The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for the City of Galveston. Table 1-12 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 7 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 4 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 105 PremierOne Records 75 PremierOne Records Mobile 85 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD Firehouse FRMS State/NCIC Tyler Encode WatchGuard Body Camera WatchGuard In-Car Camera Integrations RapidSOS Jamaica Beach Jamaica Beach is an additional agency dispatched by Galveston. The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Jamaica Beach. Table 1-13 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 5 1.3.2.2 Texas City The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Texas City. Table 1-14 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 4 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 1 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-12 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 93 PremierOne Records 31 PremierOne Records Mobile 70 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Axon Body Camera Brazos eCitation E911/TDD ESO ePCR FESO FRMS Evidence.com Firehouse FRMS PageGate State/NCIC Tyler Encode Westnet FSA Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.2.3 La Marque The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for La Marque. Table 1-15 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 5 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 8 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 168 PremierOne Records 50 PremierOne Records Mobile 168 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD ESO FRMS State/NCIC Tyler Encode Westnet FSA Integrations RapidSOS PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-13 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.3.2.4 UTMB The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for UTMB. Table 1-16 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 2 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 1 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 16 PremierOne Records 20 PremierOne Records Mobile 16 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Axon Body Camera State/NCIC Tyler Encode WatchGuard Body Camera WatchGuard In-Car Camera Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.3 Deployment Group 3 1.3.3.1 Sugarland The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Sugarland. Table 1-17 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 8 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 7 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 180 PremierOne Records 26 PremierOne Records Mobile 91 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Axon Body Camera Coban Dash Camera E911/TDD PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-14 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 ESO FRMS PowerPhone State/NCIC Tyler Encode Zetron FSA Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.3.2 Friendswood The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Friendswood. Table 1-31 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 3 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 6 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 80 PremierOne Records 30 PremierOne Records Mobile 55 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Avigilon E911/TDD Firehouse FRMS ProQA State/NCIC Tyler Encode WatchGuard Body Camera Integrations RapidSOS PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-15 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.3.3.3 Alvin The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Alvin. Table 1-33Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 3 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 6 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 35 PremierOne Records 39 PremierOne Records Mobile 35 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD Evidence.com FTO Module (CAD) FTO Module (Records) PMAM State/NCIC Tyler Encode Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.3.4 Santa Fe The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Santa Fe. Table 1-35 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 2 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 1 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 12 PremierOne Records 20 PremierOne Records Mobile 12 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD State/NCIC Tyler Encode PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-16 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.4 Deployment Group 4 1.3.4.1 La Porte The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for La Porte. Table 1-37 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 6 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 7 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 100 PremierOne Records 40 PremierOne Records Mobile 55 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces AFIS LiveScan Brazos eCitation CryWolf E911/TDD ESO ePCR Firehouse FRMS ProQA State/NCIC Tyler Encode Integrations RapidSOS MorganÓs Point MorganÓs Point is an additional agency dispatched by La Porte. The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Lakeview. Table 1-18 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 4 PremierOne Records 4 PremierOne Records Mobile 4 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-17 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces WatchGuard Body Camera Integrations RapidSOS Shore Acres Shore Acers is an additional agency dispatched by La Porte. No additional interfaces have been identified for this agency. 1.3.4.2Port of Houston The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Port of Houston. Table 1-40 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 5 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 6 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 43 PremierOne Records 16 PremierOne Records Mobile 25 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces E911/TDD Firehouse Enterprise CAD Firehouse FRMS ProQA State/NCIC Zetron FSA Integrations RapidSOS 1.3.4.3 Deer Park The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Deer Park. Table 1-42 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 4 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-18 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 3 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 46 PremierOne Records 48 PremierOne Records Mobile 34 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces AFIS Livescan CryWolf E911/TDD ESO ePCR ESO FRMS IA Pro ProQA State/NCIC Tyler Encode Integrations RapidSOS CommandCentral Analytics CommandCentral Community 1.3.4.4 Seabrook The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Seabrook. Table 1-45 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 2 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 3 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 25 PremierOne Records 17 PremierOne Records Mobile 1 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Brazos eCitation E911/TDD ESO ePCR ESO FRMS State/NCIC Tyler Encode PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-19 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Integrations RapidSOS ccAnalytics ccCommunity 1.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE The system is designed on the principles of Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) allowing separation of servers and services to modular components. The system can be expanded through the allocation of additional physical or logical resources as needs grow. In addition, site-to-site replication creating a multi-site architecture. The system is deployed with a single production environment incorporating the high availability components and interfaces presented in this system. The production environment incorporates the high availability components and reconfigured interfaces presented in this system. The system is architected around a virtualized server configuration and supports VMware vSphere 6.5 (or later) for the hypervisor. Server virtualization provides application isolation providing the ability to isolate specific services for ease of diagnostics and hardware resource management. 1.4.1 PremierOne High Availability Architecture PremierOne is also architected to have no single point of failure. Its software design is redundant, as database replication occurs across multiple servers. The system is built on industry standard components from Microsoft .NET architecture using Microsoft Windows and Microsoft SQL Server and other vendors. The combined software, hardware and IT network architecture is designed to provide an integrated high-availability system at each site. Redundant software and hardware components are the basis of the high-availability system design. Redundant network paths are used throughout the system configuration. Multiple application servers support the application service layer and utilize load balancing to manage the load across the servers. RAID storage configurations provide redundancy and recovery within the storage components, and dual power supplies and circuits are used to ensure power redundancy. Application, database and Application Delivery Controllers (ADC) failovers operate independent of one another within PremierOne. This means the failure of one component does not require the other components to fail over. PremierOneÓs active monitoring identifies problems and failures before they occur. For example, low disk space or high processor utilization will trigger an alert to be sent, to notify the recipient of a possible problems or future failure before it affects the system. In the event of a service or component failure, PremierOne will stop using the failed service or component instance and automatically shift over to the secondary service or component instance without impacting operations. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-20 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The following depicts the fault tolerant components of the system. Table 1-48 - Fault Tolerant Software Components Component Multiple F5 ADCs to provide load balanced network traffic to the application services PremierOne monitors active services and restarts them as necessary. In the case of a server failure, the node is disabled transferring the load to the remaining nodes in the cluster. Replicated databases on different servers. Servers are replicated in a cluster set. SQL Server AlwaysOn provides redundancy and automatic failover. In case of a database server failure, there is no user intervention required. Secondary database becomes the active database without administrator intervention and continues processing transactions within the data center. Fault tolerant networking components throughout the entire stack, the use of Link Aggregation Groups between network nodes and multipath configuration such that no single cable, port or device can interrupt system operation. PremierOne System Manager monitoring: CAD application Records application Application Delivery Controller cluster Database status Disk space Windows Performance Counters The backup service (backup library and backup software), the Report Data Warehouse (ad hoc reporting services), and the Test/Training environments are not designed to meet the same high availability requirements as the production application and database servers. Reporting services and test/training environment(s) are not considered critical and therefore are not redundant in the configuration. The system design provides a single limited use environment for use in a non-production mode that can be used as a test or training environment. Due to architectural restrictions of the system, 3rd party vendors, and the ConsortiumÓs environment, the limited use environment does not include the interfaces configured for use in the production environment. Environment Summary: 1 Production Environment 1 Limited Use Environment for Test or Training 1.4.2 Microsoft Active Directory Service The system provides directory services to support the secure management and operations of the system through an isolated Microsoft Active Directory (AD) environment. The servers provided with the system contain computer accounts in this AD tree. Service and Administrator user accounts and groups will be set up in the isolated Active Directory with the appropriate group memberships set. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-21 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 In order to facilitate ease of user account management, the system can use the ConsortiumÓs AD environment for authentication. Once the user account is built in the system provisioning, it can then use LDAP to query the ConsortiumÓs environment for the account authentication. By using this configuration, the Consortium can enforce password policy, retention, and complexity requirements across the enterprise with a user having a singular identity. Motorola will provide a one-way forest trust from the system local domain to the ConsortiumÓs Active Directory environment. The trust provides users with Domain Administrator privileges on the ConsortiumÓs AD instance to access and administer the system environment while preserving authentication and logon information. Motorola recommends that this trust be non-transitive in nature. Motorola does not recommend a two-way trust, as none of the system service accounts need authentication or resources on the ConsortiumÓs network. The systemÓs Active Directory schema is for servers and services. Active Directory user authentication (if desired) will be against the Consortium's Active Directory schema. 1.4.2.1 Name Resolution The system provides host name resolution through an Active Directory Integrated Domain Name Service (DNS). In order for computers residing outside of the systemÓs network to communicate with the system, the Consortium must configure their DNS servers to forward their computerÓs name resolution requests to systemÓs DNS servers. This will allow devices on the Consortium network to find systems within the systemÓs environment. For tighter integration, the Consortium, working with Motorola, must configure their DNS servers to allow name resolution requests from within their networks to be processed. 1.4.3 Common Services Common Services provides system administrators the flexibility to manage internal services throughout the platform from a single point. The systemÓs Common Services include GIS, System Security, Reporting, and the system tools for provisioning. 1.4.3.1 Geographic Information System (GIS) Geo-spatial data is uploaded to the system through tools implemented within Esri ArcGIS. Address validation data is maintained in redundant Microsoft SQL Server geodatabases that store locations and boundaries both spatially and in optimized search tables. Esri ArcGIS Servers provide routing and ETA calculations using the Network Analyst extension. Client maps are displayed using Esri ArcGIS Engine. The system uses GIS for display, location validation, and unit recommendation. The systemÓs tools made available for ArcTool box, provides the ability to load local data manually or through an automated model. The systemÓs Response Boundary Data Import Tool imports and aggregates boundaries in multiple layers into a single spatial table within the geodatabase for support of multi-agency / multi-jurisdictional scenarios. GIS data is a required key component of a system deployment. GIS provides the mechanism for location validation and recommendation for response. A system conformant and geographically accurate GIS data is required for the proper operation of the system. It is the ConsortiumÓs responsibility to provide a complete and accurate GIS data that conforms to the PremierOne GIS Data Requirements as noted in Section 5 for use in PremierOne. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-22 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Each agency being added to the system must have their geographic coverage included in the geodatabase imported into the system. The use of remote and/or Esri Online services is not supported. Motorola is not responsible for map availability or any degradation of client performance caused by the use of third party hosted internet map services; as these services are outside the domain of the system infrastructure and are not managed by Motorola. The system is a mission critical application that must control the import/access of the GIS data. 1.4.3.2 System Security The system is deployed within its own Microsoft Active Directory (AD) domain in its own local area network. Active Directory Domain Controllers authenticate and authorize users to perform actions within the domain making sure authorized users have appropriate access to data and services. The system user provisioning environment can be setup to query your AD environment (using LDAP) allowing for a single point of user and password management across all applications. The system network contains multiple virtual local area networks that are used to secure and segment traffic for purposes of user access as well as data storage and replication. system architecture resides behind dual redundant firewalls to protect the system network from unauthorized intrusion and security threats. These firewalls are provisioned in a high availability configuration so if either of the two fails, traffic and security will remain intact across the other. 1.4.3.3 Query Services PremierOne allows users to submit requests for information to external databases. These external queries can involve local agencies and also state and federal agencies. External databases all have their own data formats and respond to submitted queries with one or more responses. PremierOne also allows the users to build queries against a local database. Customers now have the option to enter a SQL statement during query provisioning that can be run against the local database. If a query is configured for submission to both a state interface and a local database, state queries will continue to be passed to the existing CommSys interface, while the local database query will run through the custom SQL statement provided by the Consortium. 1.4.3.4 Microsoft Reporting Services PremierOne uses Microsoft SQL Server 2017 Reporting Services (SSRS) for reporting purposes. SQL Server 2017 Reporting Services is a server-based reporting platform that is used to create and manage tabular, matrix, graphical, dashboards, and free form reports that contain data from relational and multidimensional data sources. The reports can be viewed and managed via a browser. 1.5 CJIS AND COMPLIANCE Motorola offers security functions and capabilities through its PremierOne offerings that when activated support the efforts of a Public Safety Agency or Hosted Multi-Agency environment to observe the Criminal Justice Information Services (CJIS) Security Policy best practices and recommendations. System services are designed to use FIPS certified technologies to protect data at rest and in transit. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-23 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.6 SYSTEM PLATFORM AND COMPONENTS This section discusses the hardware, operating system, and system software of the system which is on premise. Note: It is the responsibility of the Customer to provide any specialized hardware and installation to ensure compliance with any local, State or Federal natural disaster safety regulations. System Servers The system hardware is comprised of HPe servers as physical hosts. Host servers are HPe DL360c Gen10 servers configured with: ®® Dual 12-Core Intel Xeon Gold 6146 processor, running at 3.2 GHz, with a 25 MB L3 Cache Each server also contains direct attached storage in the form of two 8 GB micro SD hard drives with Smart Array controllers in a RAID configuration Four (4) - 10 Gigabit network ports Each server is configured with 384 GB RAM The Monitor server is HPe DL360c Gen10 server configured with: ®® Single 10-Core Intel XeonS4114 processor, running at 2.2 GHz, with a 13.75 MB L3 Cache Each server also contains direct attached storage in the form of five 1.2 TB 10,000 RPM SAS hard drives with Smart Array controllers in a RAID configuration Four (4) Î 1 Gigabit network ports Each server is configured with 128 GB RAM. SolarWinds Network Performance Monitor and Traffic Analyzer Module. 1.6.1 System Storage and Backup The systemÓs Backup and Recovery subsystem includes online storage and a means to back up the system offline through Nimble Storage and HPe StoreOnce disk arrays. Our system design provides storage area arrays that are utilized by the host servers for storage and for online backups with near real-time data recovery. Nimble Storage The Nimble Storage AF20 All Flash storage delivers sub-millisecond response times make the AF20 ideal for mixed or mainstream workloads requiring high performance. The AF20 can scale from 13 TB to over 1.9 PB of effective capacity. The AF20 can be non-disruptively scaled-up all the way to over 2.3 PB of effective capacity. Performance can be scaled independently of capacity to flexibly match workload and capacity requirements. Adaptive Flash arrays automatically optimize for capacity and performance, while allowing you to change the service level of any volume. The Nimble Storage AF Series SAN provides 61 TB of all flash RAW storage. HPe StoreOnce Backup The system includes an HPe StoreOnce Enterprise-class Backup and Recovery system. This system uses backup to disk and data deduplication techniques to enable high-speed backup of Big Data sets. The HPe StoreOnce is controlled by an application server running HPe Data Protector software for the purposes of application and database server backup and recovery. In addition, this backup system PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-24 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 provides mechanisms for data encryption for offsite storage as needed. Best Practices and Motorola recommendation are to locate this device in an alternative geo-diverse location from the system. 1.6.2 Ancillary Components FortiGate Network Devices Component isolation provides reliability, availability and performance. The system is based on FortiGate devices to provide the perimeter network router, firewall and Virtual LAN (VLAN) configurations for the PremierOne system. The Consortium needs to supply four (4) 1GB Lan connections per FortiGate; with a total of eight (8) 1GB connections. Extreme Networks Extreme Switching The ExtremeXOS modular operating system supports intelligent Layer 2 switching, Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 routing, as well as role-based policy capabilities. The ExtremeSwitching X620 is a compact 10 GB Ethernet switch designed for 10GB edge applications. The family includes 10-port and 16-port 10 Gbe versions Î all in a small 1RU form factor Î ideal for high-performance workgroups requiring 10GB connectivity to servers, storage and clients. The ExtremeSwitching X460 is a compact 10/100/1000 MB Ethernet switch. This switch is included to provide network connectivity to non 10GB activities. F5 BigIP Application Delivery Controllers The system consists of a virtual Application Delivery Controllers (ADC) for the system. These are purpose built appliances that reside outside of the application servers that present a Ðvirtual serverÑ address to the outside world. Upon user connection, these appliances will forward the connection to the most appropriate real server using bi-directional network address translation (NAT). SolarWinds System/Network Management Tools The system consists of a dedicated virtual server to host an instance of the SolarWinds management tools. SolarWinds is setup to monitor and log traffic flow data through the FortiGate firewalls and load balancers through the server side network interface cards. Additionally, it monitors and logs CPU and memory utilization on the switches and firewalls as well as the hardware layer for the server hosts in the system. As part of the firewall, monitoring it also indirectly monitors the WAN link for replication. This data provides the Motorola support teams with the information necessary to support the system and provide historical measurements of system performance. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-25 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Figure 1-2 - Hardware Rack Layout for Primary Site Note: This is a representative diagram only final configuration will be determined during system staging and is subject to change. The Consortium must provide access to the loading dock at the installation location for the delivery of equipment and that a Consortium resource is able to receive and secure the storage of equipment. Additionally, a temporary staging area for the unpacking and assembly of equipment must be provided. The Consortium is responsible for any accommodation necessary to provide clearance and access through hallways, doorways, and elevators meeting or exceeding the specifications of the shipping container/rack at all sites housing system components. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-26 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.7 TCP/IP NETWORK AND DATA CENTER REQUIREMENTS 1.7.1Network Requirements MotorolaÓs system requires TCP/IP protocol for connectivity. All servers and workstations will connect to the ConsortiumÓs existing network. The Consortium will provide access to facilities and a dedicated resource knowledgeable on the ConsortiumÓs WAN/LAN. The Consortium will supply IP addresses and a mechanism for maintaining IP persistence. Desktop, Mobile, and Handheld clients require a persistent IP address from the time the application is opened to the time the application is closed. System CAD Client Network Requirements The system is dependent on the ConsortiumÓs LAN for client workstation performance. The recommended built-to bandwidth is 2.0 Mbps per workstation. Peak load events (e.g. login) require higher bandwidth and higher bandwidth will generally be required for sites with higher quantities of users and greater data intensive operations such as complex map annotation sets and map manipulation if the data resides on the server. The bandwidth recommendations account for the operation of the LAN client to Ðnot exceed the valuesÑ with the map data being stored locally on the client workstation. Additional bandwidth will be required for the transfer of large multi-media files, premise hazard data files and other large attachments. Network latency plays a key role in the responsiveness of CAD client operations. The system is designed for optimal use on a local network environment where latency is very low. It is important that efforts be made to provide the lowest latency possible between the system CAD servers and each CAD client. PremierOne requires latency of no greater than 6ms round-trip from the client to the servers and back. VDI CAD Client Network Requirements PremierOne is dependent on the ConsortiumÓs LAN and/or Wireless Network for client workstation performance. The estimated network requirement per VDI CAD client with typical usage is 400 Î 600 Kbs per workstation. The recommended built-to bandwidth for new deployments is 1Mbs per workstation. Peak load events (e.g. login) require higher bandwidth and higher bandwidth will generally be required for sites with higher quantities of users and greater data intensive operations such as complex map annotation sets and map manipulation of the data that resides on the server. Network latency plays a key role in the responsiveness of CAD client operations. The utilization of VDI clients with PremierOne permits effective use in an environment with higher latency than a traditional CAD client. Although the lower the network latency the better the performance will be. For this reason, it is important that efforts be made to provide the lowest latency possible between the PremierOne CAD servers and each PremierOne CAD client. PremierOne requires latency of no greater than 80ms round-trip from the client to the servers. CAD Mobile and Records Mobile Client Network Requirements Both CAD Mobile and Records Mobile's functionality is designed for 3G and 4G networks. 3G network connectivity is required but, 4G connectivity is highly recommended. The Consortium will need to provide 3G/4G wireless network infrastructure and connectivity with routing between the Mobile clients. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-27 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Records Client Network Requirements Records is dependent on the ConsortiumÓs LAN for client workstation performance. The estimated bandwidth requirements between server and a records client can vary based on the activity of the user. It is when documents are being requested or submitted and searches are being performed, is when network bandwidth is required. During data entry, network requirements are minimal. Peak load events (e.g. login) require higher bandwidth and higher bandwidth will generally be required for sites with higher quantities of users and higher frequency data intensive operations including image display. Records Mobile Client Network Requirements Records Mobile's is designed for 3G and 4G networks. 3G network connectivity is required and 4G connectivity is highly recommended. The Consortium will need to provide 3G/4G wireless network infrastructure and connectivity with routing between the Mobile. Mobile workstations require a persistent IP address from the time the application is opened to the time the application is closed. A persistent IP address can be accommodated in many ways including static IP, DHCP reservation, permanent DHCP lease, or with middleware such as RadioIP and NetMotion. The Consortium will need to supply IP addresses for Mobile clients. Motorola encourages the Consortium to test and evaluate the level of service being provided by their carriers on a regular basis. This is to validate mobile applications will be not affected by provider changes. 1.7.2 Data Center Requirements The environmental data center requirements stated in the following sections must be satisfied in order to support the system installation. The requirements specify what the Consortium must perform, provide, or ensure in order to prepare for and aid with the system deployment. Included in the requirements are various considerations for the servers and supplemental equipment, power and network connectivity, access to various information and resources, and compliance with laws and specifications. Power Requirements and Heat Output The following tables provide representative examples of the power utilization, heat output, and the temperature ranges for the various components of the system and the electrical circuits needed by the overall system. It is important to note that these numbers represent an estimate only. This table will be updated once the hardware list has been finalized. Table 1-49 - Power Requirements and Heat Output Component Max Total Power Total Heat (Watts) Generation (BTU/hr.) System Rack 4910 13539 Cooling airflow through each server rack enclosure is front-to-back. Because of high heat densities and hot spots, the Consortium must ensure that an accurate assessment of airflow into and out of the server equipment has been performed. This is essential for reliable server operation. Airflow assessment is not within the scope of Motorola responsibility. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-28 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 1-50 - Temperature and Humidity Ranges Specification Operating Temperature Range 50°F to 95°F Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Circuit Requirements The system racks require a specific type of connector due to the type of equipment housed in each rack. The power circuit requirements for each systeme server rack are contained in the table below. Table 1-51 - PremierOne Server Rack Circuit Requirements (Per Rack) Voltage (VAC) Dedicated Branch Quantity Line Cord Circuit rating (A) 208 30 3 NEMA L6-30P 1.7.3 System Workstation Specifications The following specifications are provided for ConsortiumÓs reference. Workstation specifications are representative of workstations used in the testing of the latest release of system software and do not take into account any other applications. Future releases of the system may dictate changes to the workstation specifications. Each agency should consider their own technology replacement lifecycles and policies for specific purchase decisions. 1.7.3.1 PremierOne CAD Recommended Specifications Table 1-52 - PremierOne CAD Workstation Recommended Specifications Component Description Processor 3.5 GHz quad-core processor (E5-1620 v4 CPU 3.5 GHz) RAM Memory 16 GB memory Available Disk Space 20 GB available on a SSD disk. Operating System Windows 10 Professional 64 Network Interface Card 1 Gigabit or faster Ethernet network adapter Display Three (3) Î 1024 x 768+ pixel, 16+ bit color displays Keyboard QWERTY Keyboard with 12 function keys Graphics Adaptor Graphics adapter with at least 512 MB RAM per monitor, 24-bit capable graphics accelerator, OpenGL v2.0 runtime or higher. Latest available drivers. Shader Model 3.0 or higher is recommended Network Bandwidth 2 Mbps network bandwidth (to server) with 6 ms or less round-trip latency Additional Applications Adobe PDF reader (for help files) SQL Server Express 2017 The following are required .net Framework versions that need to be installed in the workstations: Microsoft .Net Framework v4.8 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-29 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.7.3.2 PremierOne CAD VDI Client Specifications With the deployment of VDI, the workstation requirements are minimal. Any endpoint such as a thin client or windows desktop that is capable of running the VMware Horizon client is acceptable. Minimum Windows workstation requirements are: x86-based processor with SSE2 extensions, with a 800MHz or higher processor speed. At least 1GB of RAM for multi monitor support At least dual monitor capability up to a four-monitor output. 1.7.3.3 PremierOne Mobile CAD Workstation Recommended Specifications Table 1-53 - PremierOne Mobile CAD Workstation Recommended Specifications Component Description Processor Intel i3, i5, or i7 2.6 GHz dual core processor RAM Memory 16 GB memory Available Disk Space 20 GB available disk space Operating System Windows 10 Professional 64-bit (Windows 7 SP1 and Windows 8.1 Pro supported) Network Interface Card Radio / Wireless communications device, 3G or 4G network Display One (1) Î 1024 x 768+ pixel, 16+ bit color display, 11.6Ñ or larger display. Usage on devices with alternative resolutions and smaller screens should be tested and screen settings optimized. Example: On a 10.1Ñ WUXGA screen, use a resolution of 1280 x 800 and a font size of 125%. Keyboard Standard QWERTY keyboard and Touchpad / Point Stick (or equivalent mouse device) Touchscreen Optional Graphics Adaptor Video processor with at least 256 MB RAM, 24-bit capable graphics accelerator, OpenGL v2.0 runtime or higher. Latest available drivers. Shader Model 3.0 or higher is recommended. Adobe PDF reader (for help files) Additional Applications Adobe PDF reader (for help files) SQL Server Express 2017 1.7.3.4 PremierOne Records Workstation Recommended Specifications Table 1-54 -PremierOne Records Workstation Recommended Specifications Component Description Processor Intel® Dual Core (2.8 GHz) RAM Memory 16 GB memory Display 1024 X 768 or higher pixel, 16+ bit color display Keyboard-Mouse QWERTY Keyboard The following are required .NET Framework versions that need to be installed in the workstations: Microsoft .NET Framework v4.8. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-30 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.7.3.5 PremierOne Records Mobile Workstation Recommended Specifications Table 1-55 - PremierOne Records Mobile Recommended Specifications Component Description Processor Intel i3, i5, or i7 1.6 GHz dual core processor RAM Memory 16 GB memory Minimum Available Disk Space 20 GB available disk space Operating System Windows 10 Professional 64-bit Network Interface Card Radio / Wireless communications device, 3G or 4G network Display One (1) Î 1024 x 768+ pixel, 16+ bit color display, 11.6Ñ or larger display. Usage on devices with alternative resolutions and smaller screens should be tested and screen settings optimized. Example: On a 10.1Ñ WUXGA screen, use a resolution of 1280 x 800 and a font size of 125%. Keyboard-Mouse Standard QWERTY keyboard and Touchpad / Point Stick (or equivalent mouse device) Touchscreen Optional Graphics Adaptor Video processor with at least 64 MB RAM, 24-bit capable graphics accelerator, OpenGL v2.0 runtime or higher. Latest available drivers. Shader Model 3.0 or higher is recommended Additional Applications Adobe PDF reader (for help files) SQL Server Express 2017 The following are required .NET Framework versions that need to be installed in the workstations: Microsoft .NET Framework v4.8. 1.7.3.6 CommandCentral Jail Workstation Recommended Specifications (Optionally Proposed) Table 1-16 Î CommandCentral Jail Recommended Specifications Component Description ProcessorIntel i3, i5, or i7 2.0 GHz dual core processor RAM Memory 8 GB or more memory Available Disk Space 20 GB or more available disk space for PremierOne Operating System Windows 10 Professional 64-bit Network Interface Card 100 Mbps with 10 ms or less round-trip latency Display 1920x1080 resolution Monitor 21Ñ monitor 1.7.4 CAD Virtual Desktop Infrastructure Motorola Solutions has included the hardware and software to implement a VMware Horizon Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) system. A VDI infrastructure is needed to meet the following environmental and operational issues: Network requirements (bandwidth and latency) for client workstations PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-31 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The need to use existing workstations that may not meet specifications. Improved performance in remote locations Virtual desktop infrastructure is hosting the desktop operating system and application within a virtual workstation running on a centralized server commonly referred as server-based computing. CAD System VDI System The system hardware is comprised of HPe servers as physical hosts along with HPe Nimble San. VDI servers are HPe DL560c Gen10 servers configured with the following components: ®® Single 18-Core Intel Xeon Gold 6254 processor, running at 3.1 GHz. Each server also contains direct attached storage in the form of two 8GB micro SD hard drives with Smart Array controllers in a RAID configuration Four (4) - 10 Gigabit network ports Each server is configured with 512 GB RAM. The Nimble Storage AF20 Series SAN provides 11TB of RAW storage. This storage is comprised of 48x240 GB SSD (11 TB flash) iSCSI connected drives. 1.8 TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Network and Environment Requirements referred to in this section are those requirements found in TCP/IP Network and Data Center Requirements sections of this document. Motorola is not responsible for the level of service, bandwidth and coverage a wireless network carrier provides. The server hardware will be setup and staged at a Motorola staging facility where the system will be configured using Motorola's IP schema using the firewalls for address translation to the ConsortiumÓs network. The hardware and licensing identified in this system may be subject to change. As technology continues to advance, Motorola may take advantage of new and different offerings for the betterment of the Consortium. Any changes will be reviewed with the Consortium. 1.8.1Consortium Responsibilities: 1. Supply hardware, operating system software, third party components and other elements of the system not specifically identified as being provided by Motorola. 2. Supply Windows Server Client Access Licenses (CALs) for all system client devices accessing CAD and Mobile. 3. Supply Mobile Device Management (MDM) software for Mobile devices, as desired by the Consortium. 4. Provide a single geodatabase data including any preparation and/or editing, if necessary, to meet PremierOne GIS Build Requirements for the purpose of address validation. 5. Provide CAD visual map files in MPK or MXD and GDB format. 6. Supply the Esri ArcGIS Desktop and Network Analyst extension software required for editing of GIS data as described in Table 1-3 - Ancillary Components. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-32 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 7. Provide Mobile symbology maps with locator and routing features in MMPK format for Universal Map support. Additionally, provide a separate MMPK with night mode symbology, if required. 8. Supply the Esri ArcGIS Desktop and Network Analyst extension software required for editing of GIS data. 9. Provide wireless connectivity and middleware to deliver mobile Virtual Private Network (mVPN) with routing and IP persistence to the system network. Optimal system application performance on mobile workstations requires 4G connectivity. 10. Provide advanced authentication for Mobile/Handheld device connectivity if required by the Consortium. 11. Provide a site adhering to the Data Center Requirements for the installation, housing, operation, and maintenance of all equipment. The space provided must be able to contain the entire rack dimensions as specified in Data Center Requirements. 12. Provide power connectivity (power receptacles, and any other receptacles required within manufacturer recommended cable run lengths of the equipment and all supplemental components), power distribution units, and power to the system in the designated installation location. The anticipated quantity and type of connectivity as well as the power draw of the system have been identified in Data Center Requirements. The final system specifications will be provided during deployment as part of the hardware ordering process. 13. Provide active cooling and humidity control for the designated installation location. The cooling requirements and the operating temperature range of the system have been identified in Data Center Requirements. The final system specifications will be provided during deployment as part of the hardware ordering process. 14. Provide network connectivity to clients as specified in the Network Requirements. Motorola has included network hardware for the system server architecture. Networking hardware for the connectivity outside the system LAN must be provided by the Consortium. 15. Provide a network diagram depicting all the devices, device types, and interfaces that the system will connect to and through, including, but not limited to all blocked ports, hubs, switches, routers, firewalls, and any other network equipment. 16. Provide IP addresses on the ConsortiumÓs network for the system servers and third-party application servers. All server names and IP addresses behind Motorola Firewalls cannot be changed 17. Provide external interface connection demarcation points at locations agreed to by Motorola. These locations shall normally be adjacent to the PremierOne equipment rack. 18. Provide access, administrative or otherwise, to appropriate systems, locations, information, tools, and equipment to ensure proper connectivity, installation, operations, and maintenance of the system. 19. Provide 24-hour access to a secured two-way Internet connection to the system firewalls for the purposes of deployment, maintenance, and monitoring. 20. Provide for outbound Internet connectivity initialized by system Servers. 21. Provide proxy friendly outbound Internet connectivity initialized by PremierOne Servers for the purposes of sending encrypted SMTP SCOM messages to Motorola support. 22. The Motorola delivery model is reliant upon our ability to perform some tasks remotely, which requires secure, remote broadband access for remote deployment, monitoring, and support of the PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-33 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 system. Consortium-provided high-speed internet access with a minimum of 10 Mbps is required at the time of project kickoff and must remain available to Motorola throughout warranty and support periods to accommodate remote support of the system. In the event that dedicated links are required, a minimum of 7.5 Mbps upload and download access is required. It is the Consortium's responsibility to ensure that the aforementioned capacity is available. In the event remote broadband access is not available to Motorola preventing us from delivering the contracted service remotely, Motorola will provide service on-site at additional cost. The additional cost will be presented to the Consortium via the change provision of the contract prior to the delivery of the on-site service. 23. Provide three (3) NTP timing sources available to the system servers. 24. Provide, install, maintain, and service any software required for anti-viral, anti-malware protection on the system. If the software requires connectivity to a central server for maintenance and updates, the connectivity including ports and access needs to be provided. 25. Provide clean printed copies of blank forms. The creation of printed forms and reports has been quoted assuming clean, printed copies of blank forms and reports are available. If forms and reports are not provided in a format that can be scanned to produce an acceptable printed copy, additional services may be required resulting in additional charges that are the responsibility of the Consortium 26. PremierOne will be deployed in its standard configuration environment, including isolated Active Directory, PremierOne standard host naming and PremierOne standard IP schema. 1.9 APPLICATION DESCRIPTIONS The following sections provide brief descriptions of PremierOne CAD, Mobile and other system applications. The system is a Commercially Off the Shelf (COTS) product. As such, no software development to the application framework is provided. 1.9.1 PremierOne CAD Motorola has designed PremierOne CAD to be the central convergence point for communications from multiple sources and systems, mission-critical information and resource management. The user interface offers quick access to information via a location-based, Esri standard GIS map. Users perform commands and functions using a mouse, command lines, function keys, shortcuts, or user definable right click menus. The GPS-aided resource management tool displays the location and identity of GPS equipped vehicles or devices enabling a coordinated response while further supporting officer safety. In PremierOne CAD, ARL, if purchased, could be used in recommendations to track the location of emergency vehicles to determine their present location when requiring units to respond to an incident. By adding ARL recommendations to PremierOne CAD, PremierOne CAD can make recommendations based on the actual location of units rather than recommending units solely based on jurisdictional assignment. Users can create incidents from public telephone calls, from information received from an officer or from another public safety agency, or through an alarm interface. Once the user enters basic details of the incident into the system, users may dispatch field personnel to handle the incident. Users may PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-34 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 update incidents with additional details such as information about the handling of the incident. Once the user has completed the incident in an appropriate fashion, the user then can close the incident. Field personnel may use PremierOne CAD to retrieve details about incidents or to make incident updates. Additionally, supervisory personnel may use the PremierOne CAD to monitor the operations of the communications center, the handling of incidents and field unit statistics. PremierOne CAD functions as a standalone product but also seamlessly integrates with MotorolaÓs PremierOne Mobile application. PremierOne CAD may also be integrated with other Motorola and third-party systems. 1.9.1.1 PremierOne CAD Concepts User Input Users may operate PremierOne CAD either with or without a mouse. While all commands and actions within the application can be accessed with the mouse, users also may drive PremierOne CAD almost exclusively from the keyboard. A few PremierOne CAD functions, such as selecting units from a map, must be performed with a mouse. Work and Status Monitors Users perform the majority of actions within PremierOne CADÓs work monitor. Status monitors present summary information about incidents or units. A user may have one or more status monitor windows available at the workstation. Security and Roles PremierOne CAD recognizes authorized users and provides access to individually authorized functions at the time of sign-on. To facilitate these responsibilities, access rights and permissions are associated with the various functions available within PremierOne CAD. A role is a set of specified privileges which provide access to data, commands, forms, devices, and functions. Each user and device is assigned to one or more of the default of Customer created roles. Units, Incidents and Dispatching A unit within PremierOne CAD represents the resources which are dispatched or monitored by the communications center personnel. All units in the system are identified with a unit id which is typically the radio call sign for the unit. Users can initiate incidents from the command line or from the incident initiation form. The system provides a user with four methods to begin the incident dispatching process. These four methods include: Dispatch incident function key Incident dispatch command Dispatch form Drag and drop feature within status monitors and map. Incident Management In addition to initiating and dispatching incidents, users can manage existing incidents through the various incident management features of PremierOne CAD: Updating existing incident information Associating incidents Disassociating incidents PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-35 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Cloning incidents Closing incidents Reopening incidents Displaying a summary list of incidents Searching for incidents Unit Management Users have the ability to monitor and maintain the current activities for each unit through the various unit management features: View and update unit assignment data Make unit status changes Manipulate a unitÓs call stack Transfer units View a unitÓs history Move units from one station or area to another station or area View the current activities for a unit Assign crews Clear units from an incident Manipulate units that are assigned to incidents Move resources to cover depleted stations or areas PremierOne CAD can alter a unitÓs capabilities based on the personnel assigned to that unit. Federal, State and Local Queries PremierOne allows users to submit requests for information to external databases. These external queries can involve local agencies and also state and federal agencies. External databases all have their own data formats and respond to submitted queries with one or more responses. Maps PremierOne mapping utilizes products from Environmental Systems Research Institute (Esri) for geo- processing. The display of maps is an integrated component within PremierOne. The map may be configured to automatically display when the user signs on to the workstation. A number of commands and functions allow the user to manipulate the map and make updates in response to user actions. The map may be configured to display an icon at this location to assist the call taker in determining the location at which an emergency response is required. The system also attempts to find the nearest address/common place to the caller coordinates Mail & Messaging Services The mail and messaging functionalities of PremierOne CAD allow users to exchange and distribute electronic mail and messages within the dispatch center and to units equipped with MDTs 1.9.2 PremierOne Mobile with Mobile Mapping PremierOne Mobile provides public safety personnel the ability to assess and prepare for a situation while en route to the scene. Users access information via screen configurations that provides navigation throughout the PremierOne Mobile application. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-36 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 PremierOne Mobile - Available Clients: Windows Android iOS Windows 8.1+ Android 8.0+ iOS 10 - 13 Operating System Cloud Enabled Silent Dispatch Incident & Unit Management Real-Time Status Monitors 7 5 5 Field Initiation for Traffic Stops & Other Incidents Database Querying BOLOs Query Only Responder and Unit Location Tracking Premise & Hazard Details with Images Geofencing with Entry & Exit Alerts 4G & LTE Network Capability CJIS Security Support with FIPS 140-2 Encryption & Auditing Barcode Scan Voice Entry for Comments Actionable URL in Comments Messaging Advanced Mapping, BOLOs, Premise & Hazards Advanced Configurations The integrated map provides the user the ability to display call location, drive directions, premise hazards and the location of other units. PremierOne Mobile leverages the same common map platform used in PremierOne CAD, which is managed and provisioned from a centralized location and deployed to all systems remotely. PremierOne Mobile obtains location information from a collocated GPS receiver. The PremierOne Mobile Windows Client It supports either the Trimble ASCII Interface Protocol (TAIP) or National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) standard. The PremierOne Mobile client application can send its location to PremierOne CAD via a cellular data modem. The vehicle location information is used by PremierOne CAD to support location dependent features including: Mapping, Track-It, Follow-It, and Recommendations. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-37 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.9.3 PremierOne Records PremierOne Records is MotorolaÓs next generation law enforcement records management system. Based on over 30 years of industry RMS experience, PremierOne Records is a fourth generation product that was designed from the ground up with the current and future needs of public safety agencies in mind. Not only does the system leverage the experience gained from decades of public safety experience, it utilizes the latest graphical user interface design and development techniques. PremierOne Records is built on true service oriented architecture, not simply a legacy product with services added as an afterthought. Another fundamental goal of PremierOne Records is to provide the greatest level of flexibility. Working with the Advanced Configuration Tool of PremierOne Records allows agencies to add and hide fields, change field labels, make fields required, alter output format, and determine the information that is made available to users and roles. 1.9.3.1 PremierOne Records Concepts: Records Clients PremierOne Records provides the same functionality, fields, data, and security to both the officer in the field using a Records Mobile Client and the records bureau user accessing the system through a LAN-connected desktop computer. Standard Client Î Used for workstations which are connected to the network, such as those on a LAN or WLAN. This self-updating client can be launched from a web browser and can be run without a local installation, thus reducing installation and maintenance costs. Records Mobile Client Î Used in situations where network connectivity is not assured or nonexistent, such as with mobile units on a wireless network for field based reporting (FBR). Over the wire update and caching services assure that all clients are kept up to date with application updates, changes to forms, code tables, etc., reducing maintenance costs. Navigation PremierOne Records was designed with a physical law records department in mind. Users can find information in PremierOne Records in the same areas where you would expect to find them physically in your department. PremierOne Records provides easy and quick access throughout the application. Users can navigate using familiar point-and-click access to modules, similar to a browser. As with a browser, forward and back keys are provided as well as the ability to open additional tabs, allowing multiple modules to be open at a time. Records Command Line A command line window can be opened using a hotkey that allows authorized users to perform typical actions such as add, edit and navigation functions without using the mouse. The command line auto-fills both commands and parameters requiring just a few keystrokes to create a new record or access any record in the system. The Records command line window can be displayed even with the other PremierOne Records windows minimized giving the user a cleaner more efficient client. This is especially important for Records Bureau or other data entry users as the can create or edit records much faster, with fewer keystrokes and mouse clicks. This feature is also available in the Records Mobile client allowing patrol officers and other Mobile users to quickly create records without using a mouse. For paper-based agencies that print and use paper copies of records, the command line can be combined with a low cost bar code scanner to greatly improve efficiencies. A bar code can be PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-38 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 printed at the bottom of each document that when scanned immediately retrieves the record with no other user intervention. This feature is especially beneficial for document approval or other manual or automated workflow processing Motorola Documents Users perform the majority of data entry within Motorola Documents, a forms tool based on patented technology. This technology leverages decades of experience with law enforcement records management systems and is designed to improve data entry efficiency, accuracy and reduce the learning curve for new user. Specially designed functionality such as tabs, search while you type, and ÒTo doÓ items are all designed to reduce the effort required to fully document each event. Tabs-To facilitate data entry, tabs combine like data types such as victim, offense, or property. Within each data type, a user may enter as many of that data type as necessary. Required Fields-Within any document in PremierOne Records, some fields will be required to be filled in before the document can be saved to the database. Required information helps to preserve the integrity of the document as a whole to make it a valid document. Fields may be required based on business rules established by an agency or because the agency requires data to be collected for reporting purposes. The system may also require certain data fields be completed to assure accurate and complete IBR or UCR submissions. Single select code Fields-Single select code tables allow users to enter only those codes that have been created for a given field. Search while you type-This functionality displays only the entries in a list that match the text that you type. Search-as-you-type considers all the words in a phrase, not just the first word at the beginning of the phrase. Multi-select Code Tables-As with single select code tables, multi-select code tables only allow for the acceptable range of data values to be entered. Pull Forward--You can use Pull Forward to search for and find existing data, and then pull that data into Motorola Document. To Do List. Motorola Documents also check to ensure all required fields have been filled out and are valid. If you omit a required field or have incorrect information, an error message will appear in the Help window of the document. These error messages, or the to-do list, are hyperlinks. They bring the cursor directly to the field that requires attention when the form you are currently working in. Documents that are not complete may be saved as a draft, but the data is not present in the database directly. Only display necessary fields. This feature of Motorola Documents only displays those fields necessary to complete the document. When a user enters data that then requires further information, fields for entering the additional data become available. Until those fields are needed, they remain hidden. Photos Î Drag and drop Motorola Document windows also support drag-and-drop functionality for images. Autosave. PremierOne Records can be configured to automatically backup or save a document prior to document submission. The document is saved in draft form until it has been submitted. Document Locking-A locking message displays if another user tries to access a document that is open and locked. Document locks expire when the opened document is closed or after a configured time (default is 12 hours), whichever comes first. Other users attempting to open a PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-39 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 locked document will get a read-only version of the document that displays the document lock message in the lower right corner. Users cannot make edits to the read-only document. Searching Î Free text Searching PremierOne Records provides default basic search and field display functionality as well as advanced search functionality for custom search. Agencies can specify and configure which module data fields are available for searching. Additionally, PremierOne Records has a free text and advanced free text search capability which functions similarly to web text searches; Users can enter a word or phrase in the free text search field and search across the entire data store for records that match the text or phrase. 1.10 THIRD PARTY INTEGRATIONS 1.10.1 RapidSOS Integration PremierOne Integrates RapidSOS features into PremierOne CAD. This integration allows for immediate call location, responses to moving callers and access to additional more detailed information about the caller. Locate Callers Immediately Improve response time and call location accuracy by accessing a reliable caller device based hybrid (DBH) location in as little as three seconds of taking a call from within PremierOne CAD. Respond to Moving Callers See a faster and more reliable location even if the caller is moving with integration between PremierOne CAD and RapidSOS. This robust technology provides accurate location to three seconds every time the call taker re-bids the caller location. More Detailed Information Arm you call takers and responders with faster more detailed caller information before questioning has even started. With this streamlined technology, caller data is provided by multiple resources, aggregated by RapidSOS, which PremierOne CAD then queries and delivers to the call taker. 1.11 SERVICE SOLUTIONS The following sections provide brief descriptions of service solutions delivered as part of the PremierOne offering. 1.11.1 Legacy Data Conversion 1.11.1.1 Legacy RMS Data Convert on Demand to PremierOne Records When the need arises to import legacy RMS data into PremierOne Records; Motorola can offer the alternative approach of Convert on Demand (CoD). CoD is a PremierOne Records tool that can connect to a Microsoft SQL Server database and would be configured to read the legacy database records. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-40 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The Consortium could inspect the records to determine if they need to imported into PremierOne Records. If needed, that record or multiple records could be imported into PremierOne Records on an as-needed basis. The legacy databases must be stored in Consortium-supplied Microsoft SQL Server databases (hardware and software) external to the PremierOne system and Motorola must be able to link directly to the legacy databases from Microsoft SQL Server. 1.11.2 Intelligent Data Discovery Services (IDD) for CAD IDD Services include instruction in the use of advanced SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) features which will allow for the connection, extraction, and display of data from CAD in the tailored standard IDD and customized dashboards. IDDÓs use of MicrosoftÓs SSRS employs the data to generate and securely share online dashboards and reports, initiate searches and mine data. The IDD services include the following dashboards: Three (3) Tailored Standard Dashboards Roll Call Briefing Dashboard Intelligent Resource Deployment Dashboard COMPSTAT Dashboard View Only CAD IDD bundle Unit Status Unit History Map Incident Search Drill-through to Incident Details and Officer Activity Reports Two (2) Customer-defined Dashboards (built during IDD Training) Two (2) days of consultative services pertaining to reports and dashboards for the CAD Two (2) days of PremierOne Intelligent Data Discovery (IDD) Training, after completion of training requirements. A single copy of each of the Standard IDD dashboards will be tailored per the provisioning of the CAD system, and delivered to the site. IDD is limited to data existing in the system CAD dataset. MicrosoftÓs SSRS is a reporting and report distribution application. A map view of the data, such as location of Incidents, may be produced as part of the report output, but, with no interactive mapping ability. Total system capacity for IDD is dependent upon the total number of concurrent reports being requested from the RDW server. Final system capacity is dependent upon final design and report types being generated on a concurrent basis. 1.11.3 Intelligent Data Discovery Services (IDD) for Records Records IDD Services include instruction in the use of advanced SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS) features which will allow for the connection, extraction, and display of data from Records in tailored and customized dashboards. IDDÓs use of MicrosoftÓs SSRS employs the data to generate and securely share online dashboards and reports, initiate searches and mine data. The IDD services for Records include the following dashboards: Three (3) Tailored Standard Dashboards Master Index Search Dashboard PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-41 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Records CompStat Dashboard Records major Crimes Dashboard Two (2) City Defined Dashboards (built during IDD Training and limited to data existing in the system Records dataset) Two (2) days of consultative services pertaining to reports and dashboards for Records Three (3) days of Records Intelligent Data Discovery (IDD) Training (*Additional dashboards are built during the training class) A single copy of each of the Standard IDD dashboards will be tailored per the provisioning of the P Records system, and delivered to the site. Records IDD is limited to data existing in the system records dataset. MicrosoftÓs SSRS is a reporting and report distribution application. A map view of the data, such as location of Incidents, may be produced as part of the report output, but, with no interactive mapping ability. Total system capacity for IDD is dependent upon the total number of concurrent reports being requested from the Records reporting data warehouse server. Final system capacity is dependent upon final design and report types being generated on a concurrent basis. 1.12 PURCHASE OPTIONS The following system components are presented for the ConsortiumÓs consideration. While not required to support the system, each of the following separately priced options enhance the system by adding additional capabilities. 1.12.1 PremierOne NG911 Integrated Call Control (ICC) PremierOne NG9-1-1 Integrated Call Control in CAD provide workflows by enabling call taking functionality with PremierOne CAD in a single Graphic User Interface (GUI). The application handles voice calls. The most common call control functions can be accessed from the NG9-1-1 Call Control GUI or PremierOne CAD command line. The integrated system minimizes keystrokes. Answering a call, creating an incident, dispatching and releasing a call can be accomplished in fewer keystrokes. With full integration of previously disparate data sources, call takers and dispatchers maintain critical focus by accessing 9-1-1 and CAD controls from one application using a single keyboard and mouse. 1.12.1.1 Text-to-9-1-1 Capability PremierOne NG911 Integrated Call Control text-to-9-1-1 capability combined with Call Controls provides a system for PSAPs to simultaneously answer calls and citizen 911 texts and comply with emerging standards. This will meet the needs of the agency by seamlessly integrating text-to-9-1-1 capabilities into their PremierOne NG9-1-1 Integrated Call Control and Dispatch systems. 1.12.2 Responder Location The core features of ASTRO 25 Responder Location are integrated with PremierOne CAD: ASTRO 25 Subscriber Responder Location The Responder Location Feature allows the CAD system to obtain the location of subscriber radios via the ASTRO 25 infrastructure. This capability allows dispatchers and supervisors to monitor the location of personnel who are using ASTRO subscribers. The location update rate is configured on a per Unit Status basis allowing specific location cadences for statuses such as Emergency, In-Route. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-42 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Location services are enabled on a per subscriber basis allowing agencies to limit its use to portable radios or other specific groups. Vehicle location can be obtained via Direct GPS or a GPS equipped MDT. These methods use cellular data and can provide a higher location reporting rate than narrow band radio systems. 1.12.2.1 ASTRO Subscriber Requirements The Responder Location feature requires APX portable or mobile subscribers equipped with a GPS receiver, the current subscriber firmware version, and the Enhanced Data option. XTL/XTS subscribers do not support Enhanced Data and are not recommended for use with Responder Location. 1.12.2.2 ASTRO Infrastructure Requirements When deploying an ASTRO 25 infrastructure with IMW, the location functionality described with the CAD can be enabled as part of that effort. Services, hardware, and subscriber licensing associated with the implementation and maintenance of ASTRO 25 Responder Location licenses are not included in this proposal and may be provided as part of an ASTRO 25 voice/data communications proposal. ASTRO systems must be properly equipped and licensed to support data operation. The minimum requirements are ASTRO 7.14 infrastructure with Enhanced Data, IMW 5.x, a GGSN and a Packet Data Gateway for each zone. The proposed system will utilize the existing ASTRO infrastructure. The current system is currently configured with IMW and Enhanced Data. A capacity study must be performed to determine the systemÓs ability to accommodate Responder Location features. 1.12.2.3 ASTRO System Capacity ASTRO communication systems utilize narrowband channels to support voice and data communications. The capacity of ASTRO systems, that is, the volume of voice and data traffic they can support, varies with the number of channels in the system and the system architecture (multi-site, simulcast). The ASTRO infrastructure provides two types of packet data bearer service between data enabled subscribers and host applications: Integrated Voice & Data (IV&D) is a P25 compliant data service that is integrated with trunked voice services. Trunked data allows data transmission inbound from a data enabled trunked subscriber through the ASTRO Infrastructure to a host application in a connected Customer Enterprise Network. Enhanced Data is a data system based on Phase 2 voice signaling. It allows data transmission inbound only, and is primarily used for periodic location update messages. Enhanced Data offers a 12-fold improvement in inbound location reporting capacity over Trunked IV&D. Its use is limited to Motorola APX subscribers. The Automatic Responder location (ARL) features can utilize an ASTRO system for data transport. The messaging and location reporting parameters configured in PremierOne have a dramatic impact on feature performance and on ASTRO data utilization. ItÓs critical to take the ASTRO systemÓs configuration and capacity into account when configuring these application features. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-43 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The table below provides general guidelines for the channel utilization of Enhanced Data channels supporting ASTRO location data only. PremierOne CAD control signaling and other data applications such as, Messaging, OTAP, OTAR, and Radio Management also require data capacity and will increase data channel utilization. Table 1-56 ÎChannel Utilization Guidelines ASTRO Data Systems Capacity Guidelines (Location updates only) IV&D Enhanced Data 150 Users per channel at 30 second location cadence (w/ Header Compression) 300 Users per channel at 60 second location cadence 1 channel for IMW Registration per 500 Users During system deployment Motorola will perform a detailed capacity analysis prior to finalizing the CAD Messaging and Responder Location feature configurations. MotorolaÓs Hydra coverage analysis tool allows the system engineer to assess both the systemÓs RF coverage and its voice and data utilization. All potential data sources will be analyzed including Radio Management, OTAP, OTAR, text messaging, and PremierOne. The analysis process will accurately determine the volume of Messaging and Responder Location data that the ASTRO system can support. 1.12.2.4 ASTRO Location Accuracy There are a number of factors that impact the accuracy of ASTRO location updates. Some are a fundamental aspect of the Global Positioning System design such as the need to ÐseeÑ satellites. Others are a result of the ASTRO system implementation and configuration settings. These settings can be adjusted for a specific implementation, but always involve a trade-off between competing system characteristics. GPS Signal Availability The ASTRO subscriberÓs GPS antenna must be able to receive GPS signals from five or more satellites to accurately derive a location. Operation in buildings, tunnels, urban canyons, or densely forested areas can reduce GPS location accuracy or prevent the subscriber from determining its location altogether. Temporary Signal Loss ASTRO subscribers cache their last known location. In the event that an ASTRO subscriber loses GPS fix, it will send its last known location in response to a location query or scheduled location update. The subscriber will send its last known location for up to 100 seconds after losing GPS fix. The accuracy of the location updates sent during temporary signal loss is a function of the subscriber speed. GPS Acquisition Time When ASTRO subscribers are powered on they require a finite amount of time to accurately establish their location. This is referred to as Time to First Fix (TTFF). In the Cold Start scenario, a subscriber is turned on after a prolonged period of time and does not have an accurate estimate of its position or time. TTFF in this case is <60 seconds 95% of the time. In a Warm Start scenario, the subscriber is turned on and has an accurate location and time estimate. TTFF in this case is <10 seconds 95% of the time. This can result in a delay between subscriber power up and the first accurate location update. For example, if an officer turns on a portable radio when exiting the vehicle, the Responder Location CAD feature may not receive an accurate location update for over a minute. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-44 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 GPS Sleep Cycle APX subscribers use a sleep cycle to conserve battery life when GPS signal lock cannot be achieved. When the GPS receiver enters sleep cycle it powers down for 90 seconds then wakes and searches for GPS signal lock for 180 seconds. If it is able to achieve GPS signal lock it will remain awake, otherwise it will return to sleep for another 90 seconds. This behavior can result in a delay between the time when a subscriber moves into a location with GPS signal (e.g. goes outside) and its first location update. Voice Priority ASTRO IV&D subscribers give priority to voice transmissions. If a user is talking on their radio or receiving a transmission from another user, their radio cannot originate or receive data traffic. This voice preference results in data packets being queued within the radio for transmission when the radio is not participating in a voice service. Packets are discarded if they are older than the 12 second queue dwell timer. This can cause a variable arrival rate of location update reports at PremierOne. Open Mic on Emergency ASTRO subscribers can be configured to transmit audio after the Emergency Button is pressed. This will prevent the subscriber from transmitting location updates until the radio de-keys. 1.12.3 Motorola Radio Integrations Figure 1-1. Radio Integration Diagram 1.12.3.1 MCC7500 Console Integration The MCC7500 console integration enables the Channel Grouping feature from CAD. The Channel Grouping feature is available when system CAD is interfaced to the Motorola MCC7500 Radio Console. From a window within the CAD client, the user can use predefined groups PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-45 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 or create and maintain their own groups. Groups can be activated as multi-selects on the radio console at the discretion of the user. When the group is utilized, the CAD client will show the status and will allow the user to transmit on all the selected talkgroups. The user can make a priority transmission or may request the use of the talkgroups by alerting the other users with an audible notification. CAD can also be provisioned to automatically load a particular channel group based on the geographical location of an incident. 1.12.3.2 Push-to-Talk (PTT) and Emergency Button Activation Monitor An emergency situation can be triggered either by the Radio Emergency button or the Emergency icon on the PremierOne Mobile client. A radio PTT status monitor window displays an identification of the source of a configurable number of the most recent radio transmission. The information shown to identify the radio varies depending on how the radio has been identified within the system. If the radio has been associated with a unit, a vehicle, or a person, the system identifies that unit, vehicle, or person as the source of the transmission. If an association has not been made, the system displays the id of the radio. Any radio that is in emergency status will be displayed in a distinctly different manner in the CADÓs work monitor window. Every time a unit keys up a radio that is in emergency status, the display in the PTT window will show the unit is in emergency status. Radio Channels that are to be monitored by CAD and have their status displayed on the PTT Status monitor must be selected by the CAD User using the CT command. This allows for a dispatcher to select only those channels that need to be monitored and may be associated with a dispatcherÓs coverage area. Once the channels are selected, enabling the PTT Status Monitor will ensure that all radio traffic on that channel is monitored and displayed. CADICAD: Radio Proxy server The systemÓs element providing the main radio infrastructure interface is the CADICAD server. This stand-alone Server provides proxy functions from the Radio Infrastructure to the CAD system. CADICAD can support ASTRO 25 Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) Conventional as well as Trunking systems. There are three supported interface protocols from the ASTRO systems: CADI, ATIA, and AIS. ATIA and CADI interfaces are also supported on ASTRO 25 Trunking systems. The CADICAD Server provides four types of data from the Radio system to the CAD system. These include specific radio initiated events as follows: Non-PTT Events PTT Events Emergency status Unit Status Change 1.12.4 PremierOne Handheld PremierOne Handheld expands the PremierOne Suite to the Android and iOS platforms including embedded functionality with PremierOne CAD, Mobile, Mapping and Provisioning. The integrated client is a mobility solution, offering the first responder: database look-up/query, messaging, mapping, status updates, status monitoring, and dispatch capabilities on smart devices. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-46 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 PremierOne HandheldÓs five (5) status monitors allow the Command Staff to have a constant view to active incidents, pending incidents and unit activities in their jurisdiction and beyond. This enables Sergeants, Lieutenants, and Chiefs to keep a pulse on their staff to monitor the operations of the department even when they are away from the office or their vehicles. PremierOne Handheld offers seven (7) standard queries including the ability to scan a driverÓs license barcode to submit a person query, plus the ability to cascade queries allowing the officer to enter a plate to get both the vehicle returns and information on the registered owner of the vehicle. PremierOne Handheld provides a connected officer solution providing officers situational awareness such as previous incidents, premise and hazard information, location of other officers, geofencing, and critical incident updates in the palm of their hand. The solution requires: Android 5.0 Î 9.0 or higher or iOS 9 - 12 smart devices Data Network with 4G coverage Static IP address Users can log on to both PremierOne Mobile and Handheld simultaneously as a single user and single unit. Tasks performed on either client apply to both logged on sessions. Messaging, Query Responses, Incidents, and Status are synchronized across the client platforms for that logged in user. PremierOne Handheld also includes responder location tracking both inside and outside of the vehicle. The PremierOne client application is natively built for Android and iOS operating systems, and there are some client differences to note. PremierOne handheld for iOS does not have at this time, the following features found in the Android versions: Messaging, Bolos, Address Book, Unit Status Filter and the Client Administrative password. 1.12.5 Command Central Responder (eCitations) CommandCentral Responder (CC Responder) is a cloud based, next-generation handheld system. The system is iOS or Android platform that extends the PremierOne CAD and PremierOne Records Management System experience out to mobile (smartphones) and or handheld (tablet) devices. Each agency may have multiple citation forms. Citation forms vary between states and may vary between agencies. Agency level configuration data is downloaded by client applications from the Command Central App configuration service. The CC Responder client application that supports following: Searching CommandCentral Records system for person - either by scanned driver license barcode or by entering person details. Data in CC Responder comes from PremierOne Records system. Searching CommandCentral Records system for vehicle by entering vehicle details. Data in CommandCentral Records comes from PremierOne Records system. Creating & issuing a Citation Create a citation - either with data from search result or by creating citation from home screen Populate citation data (e.g. text fields, select values from code tables, enter dates/times) Perform a person search from an existing citation and use results in citation Perform a vehicle search from an existing citation and use results in citation Issue citation Submit citation PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-47 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 CC ResponderÓs Handheld is an Android and iOS Field Based Reporting system that is integrated with PremierOne. 1.12.6 Command Central Evidence Maximize the value of your digital evidence with CommandCentral Evidence, which is included with your PremierOne Records system. CommandCentral Evidence is the foundation for an evidence- based operation. With it, your team can simplify content management, quickly review case evidence and share it, securely and seamlessly, with partners to ensure justice is achieved. Managing the influx of video, images, audio and other content from a variety of different systems can cause a lot of strain for your team. But now, more than ever, this content is vital to accomplishing the right criminal justice outcomes. CommandCentral Evidence is a cloud-based solution for aggregating and intelligently organizing all of your agencyÓs digital content in one place. Because of its seamless integration with PremierOne Records, all digital content can be easily managed, reviewed and shared with corresponding agencies. 1.12.7 Galveston County The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Galveston County Table 1-19 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 5 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 5 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 140 PremierOne Records 400 PremierOne Records Mobile 115 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces ASAP to PSAP E911/TDD Firehouse FRMS ProQA Magistrate Court State/NCIC Integrations RapidSOS 1.12.8 Port of Galveston The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for the Port of Galveston. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-48 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 1-20 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 2 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 1 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 23 PremierOne Records 5 PremierOne Records Mobile 23 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces Axon In-Car Camera Integrations RapidSOS 1.12.9 Command Central Jail (option proposed for Galveston County) 1.12.9.1 Jail Management Solution (JMS) CommandCentralÓs Jail Management systems provide powerful tools to gather a broad range of vital inmate data. The ability to flag records enhance safety for all users. The intuitive system includes simplified booking processes and jail log information, enabling users to include multiple offences and inmates on a single entry. Additionally, the system captures and integrates corrections data system- wide, creating seamless data flow, and allowing users to process inmates from start to finish more efficiently. The following system description provides an introduction to the many advanced features available to CommandCentral users. Hybrid Solution CommandCentral Jail combines on-premises solutions with cloud capabilities. Cloud capabilities are developed with a user-centered design, optimizing the workflow for the end user to complete tasks quickly and accurately. The cloud features utilize Microsoft Azure Government Cloud to ensure your data is secure both in transit and at rest in accordance with CJIS standards. Booking Process JMS streamlines inmate booking with simple, step-by-step processes and seamless integration with the Records Management system. As users enter inmate information into the system, menu-driven options facilitate the collection of important details regarding property taken, property issued, inmate medical conditions, and risk assessments. The checklist screen also allows users to see what has been completed in the booking process. Intake Workflow Î Cloud Feature The Intake Workflow enables a booking officer to capture the inmateÓs information from the arresting officer during the intake process. The system captures relevant name and demographic information, arrest information, charges, victim information, and probable cause statement along with notes for any immediate needs the inmate might have. Booking officers can record the bond amount for each PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-49 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 charge. The system also captures one or more physical searches performed during intake. Users can refuse custody as needed, recording the reason for refusal. When custody is accepted a booking record is created to complete the booking process. Biometric Positive ID Î Cloud Feature During the booking process biometric positive ID captures one or more fingerprints from an inmate. Upon release, users can compare the fingerprint captured during the booking process to verify the correct inmate is being released Assessments CommandCentralÓs Assessment feature enables users to place inmates in accordance with their risk factors, enhancing safety for inmates and jail staff alike. Users can create custom inmate assessment questionnaires that determine security restrictions and appropriate medical care. This Assessment feature is decision-tree based, meaning that each question is dynamically determined by the inmateÓs previous answer. After an assessment is complete, an inmate record is automatically tagged with name alerts, flags, medical conditions, security classifications, and risk factors, as appropriate. Inmate Flags Users can relay vital inmate information to jail personnel using the Inmate Flags feature. If, for example, an inmate record is marked with a flag denoting that he or she is prone to violent behavior, users can click the flag to display the code, description, and detailed instructions regarding that inmate. Users can also assign optional expiration dates to these flags. Inmate Movement Using a scanner and barcoded wristband system, users can efficiently track inmates as the inmates move from place to place. Agencies can create custom wristbands for each inmate and quickly log the movement of groups or individuals as they enter or leave different locations. The system also restricts users from moving inmates into an area where maximum capacity has been met, and provides a warning when gender, juvenile, or security restrictions are violated. Inmate Activity Î Cloud Feature Inmate Activity combines scheduled inmate activities and past activity logs into a single location. Users can create a single activity record and add as many inmates and officers to the activity as needed. Capture notes for the activity or for an individual inmate. Apply filters to limit the activities to only those you are interested in. Keep Separate Users can keep specific inmates isolated from each other using the Keep Separate feature. The software provides notification when a Keep Separate violation has occurred. This feature also allows agencies to include an expiration date and narrative for each Keep Separate record. Scheduled Events The system enables officials to maintain situational awareness of all scheduled events. Users can set events like court appearances, work releases, and any other activity to recur daily, weekly, monthly, or annually. They can also partition events by agency as appropriate. Agencies have the ability to combine levels and locations in a jail and assign personnel to specific areas. The moduleÓs event viewer provides the time, event, inmate name, and other details that may be important for security purposes. Additionally, users can create reminders that show approaching or past due events. The software allows users to snooze, dismiss, or open event details at any time. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-50 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Jail Log Administrators can add multiple officers and inmates to the same log entry with the Jail Log feature; this eliminates the need to create a separate incident for every person involved in an event. Users can also automatically create a jail incident from an inmate log entry. Narratives are stored in a separate detail table for security purposes. Jail Incident Report A Jail Incident Report provides a summary of jail incident records, capturing information about events leading to disciplinary action, criminal charges, or exposure to liability. Information reported includes inmates, officers involved, and a description of the event. An incident report can be refined by: Jail Incident Number Time reported Incident narrative Incident supplemental narrative CommandCentral Jail controls who has access to incident report information by agency-defined partitions and detailed permissions 1.12.9.2 Commissary Management The Commissary Management module assists correctional facilities in accurately managing inmate purchases and maintaining total inventory control. The softwareÓs all-inclusive design provides users with features such as: Tracking individual commissary transactions Summarizes purchase and sales activities through detailed reports Manages supplier accounts. Commissary Supplier Data Users can quickly view records for each company that supplies commissary items to your facility. In the Commissary Supplier screen, users can post or cancel orders, and track inventory. The Commissary Item screen can also be set to automatically reorder items based on current inventory levels. Commissary Items Users can filter approved or restricted items, keep track of supplier and product information, and control purchasing restrictions. The software can filter approved items for indigent inmates as well as items that certain inmates cannot have. Each commissary item record contains information on the supplier of each item, unit size and cost, re-orders, current balances, and purchasing restrictions. Available commissary items and prices can be filtered for inmates housed in specific areas, and the Single Commissary List shows the items available to an individual inmate. Item Purchases Users can view all inmate purchases from the Enter Commissary Purchases screen. The software creates a file detailing all transactions made with each purchaser, including the individualÓs account balance at the close of each transaction. Additionally, users can access supplier summaries and purchases, item cost, inventory orders and value, current inventory levels, orders pending, purchases payable, unit reports, and inmate purchase summaries. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-51 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1.12.9.3 Inmate Work Assignments The CommandCentral Inmate Work Assignments module enables users to create profiles within the system that ties inmates to their respective jobs, facilitating accurate record keeping. Among the systemsÓ many advanced features, administrators can associate a work credit for each job profile according to hours worked, and/or deduct work time from an inmateÓs sentence based on the ratio set up in the job profile. This facilitates a culture of accountability and accomplishment by helping jail staff keep track of an inmateÓs work, and helping incentivize inmates to be productive and reach work goals. Additionally, the system will store past and current work assignments, giving staff a full picture of an inmateÓs work history. This can facilitate placement in new job openings, which users can view the second they become available. 1.12.9.4 Disciplinary Actions The Disciplinary Actions module facilitates accountability in numerous ways from a single screen. Users can accomplish many tasks in the module, including: Track rule violations and subsequent discipline Add narrative or supplementary data Present all disciplinary hearing information in one place Attach disciplinary sanctions Note the timeframe for a sanction Additionally, the system will present all disciplinary hearing information including the date and time of the hearing, the incident number, names of disciplinary board members, and history of disciplinary action. Lastly, the systemÓs single-source, unified database will flag inmates with active sanctions throughout the system until a sanction either expires or is manually removed from an inmate record. 1.12.10 Brazoria County The following table summarizes the number of PremierOne client application software licenses for Brazoria County Table 1-21 Î Client Licensing Client Licenses Per Seat PremierOne CAD Dispatch with Mapping 9 PremierOne CAD Low Use Client 22 PremierOne Mobile with Mapping 97 PremierOne Records 71 PremierOne Records Mobile 200 The following interfaces and/or integrations will be deployed for the agency. Please refer to Section 1.1.6 System Interfaces and Integrations for additional information on these interfaces. Interfaces PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 1-52 Table of Contents Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 E911/TDD Livescan Tyler Odyssey Court System Query State/NCIC Integrations RapidSOS PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions System Description 1-53 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 SECTION 2 SAMPLE PROJECT MANAGEMENT PLAN 2.1 PROJECT APPROACH The project management methodology to be used in this project is based on the principles of the Project Management InstituteÓs Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK) and Motorola SolutionsÓ extensive experience in project implementation. It includes processes to guide initiating, planning, executing, controlling, and closing projects to support on time and on budget completion while meeting the quality expectations of the stakeholders. The project will be implemented in accordance with this Project Management Plan that will be reviewed and updated during the planning phase of the project. The Project Management Plan defines the project scope, schedule, and quality expectations of the project, and to provide a comprehensive strategy for managing the project. This document, combined with the Statement of Work, Project Schedule, Training Plan, Acceptance Test Plan and Cut-over Plan comprise the documents that are collectively referred to as the Project Plan. 2.1.1 Project Management Motorola SolutionsÓ project management approach has been developed and refined based on lessons learned in the execution of hundreds of system implementations. Using experienced and dedicated people, industry-leading processes, and integrated software tools for effective project execution and control, we have developed and refined practices that support design, production, and testing is optimized to deliver a high quality, feature-rich system. Motorola Solutions employs intelligent project management processes and tools such as Planview Enterprise for schedule development, control and management schedule and budget. Planview Projectplace provides the ability for the Consortium to collaborate online with Motorola and City project team members. There is no license fee required for the Consortium to access Planview Projectplace. The assigned PM for each organization shall be the business representative and point of contact for the organization, responsible for coordination of the organizationÓs resources and activities. The PM shall schedule all activities and resources as required to execute tasks, initiate review meetings, provide status information to their counterpart, and generally oversee the execution of the project plan. Project management is an ongoing activity for the duration of the project and should be assumed to be part of every project task. 2.1.1.1 Motorola Solutions PM 1. We will designate a PM who will direct the efforts of our project team and serve as the primary point of contact for the Consortium. The responsibilities of the Motorola Solutions PM include: 2. Maintaining the Project Management Plan. 3. Maintaining project communications with the ConsortiumÓs PM. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Sample Project Management Plan 2-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 4. Managing the efforts of Motorola Solutions staff and coordinate activities with the ConsortiumÓs project team members. 5. Managing Motorola SolutionsÓ subcontractors and third party vendors and integrating the delivery of third party content into the project. 6. Measuring, evaluating and reporting the progress against the project schedule. 7. Resolving deviations from the project schedule. 8. Monitoring the project so resources are available as scheduled and as identified in the contract. 9. Coordinating and overseeing the installation of all licensed Motorola Solutions application software. 10. Reviewing and administering change control procedures with the ConsortiumÓs PM and in accordance with the change management provisions of the Agreement. 11. Conducting status meetings in person on a monthly basis and/or via teleconference or as may be reasonably required to discuss project status. 12. Preparing and submitting a monthly status report that identifies the activities of the previous month, as well as activities planned for the current month, including an updated project schedule and action item log. 13. Providing timely responses to issues related to project progress raised by the ConsortiumÓs PM. 2.1.1.2 City PM The Consortium will designate a PM who will direct the ConsortiumÓs efforts and serve as the primary point of contact for Motorola. Responsibilities of the Consortium PM include: 1. Maintaining project communications with the Motorola Solutions PM. 2. Identifying the efforts required of City staff to meet the task requirements and milestones in the Statement of Work and project schedule. 3. Consolidate all project-related questions and queries from City staff to present to the Motorola Solutions PM. 4. Reviewing the project schedule with the Motorola Solutions PM and assisting in finalizing the detailed tasks, task dates and responsibilities. 5. Measuring and evaluating progress against the project schedule. 6. Monitoring the project to ensure that resources are available as scheduled. 7. Attending status meetings. 8. Providing timely responses to issues related to project progress raised by the Motorola Solutions PM. 9. Liaising and coordinating with other agencies, City vendors, contractors and common carriers. 10. Reviewing and administering change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to maintain the implementation schedule. 11. Ensuring City vendorsÓ adherence to overall project schedule and plan. Identifying signatory personnel authorized to approve and release payment and approving and releasing payments in a timely manner. September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 2-2 Sample Project Management Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 12. Assigning one or more personnel who will work with Motorola Solutions staff as needed for the duration of the project, including at least one application administrator for CAD and for Records and one or more representative(s) from the IT department. 13. Identify the resource that has the authority to formally acknowledge and approve change orders, approval letter(s) and milestone recognition certificates and to approve and release payments in a timely manner. 14. Providing building access to Motorola Solutions personnel to all facilities where the system is to be installed during the project. Temporary identification cards should be issued to Motorola Solutions personnel if required for access to City facilities. Access must be available twenty-four (24) hours a day during the course of this project. 15. As applicable to the PremierOne installation, assuming responsibility for all fees for licenses and inspections and for any delays associated with inspections due to required permits. 16. Providing reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure to contaminants that cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. 17. Ensure a safe work environment for Motorola Solutions personnel. If problems are encountered with hazardous materials, Motorola Solutions will immediately halt work and the Consortium will be responsible for the abatement of the problem or Motorola Solutions and the Consortium will jointly come to a mutual agreement on an alternative solution. Motorola Solutions will be excused from timely performance of its obligations pending such resolution. 2.1.2 Team Organization The Motorola Solutions Software Enterprise organization is comprised of business groups that support the development and implementation of complex public safety communications systems. Members of several of these groups are involved from the proposed solution conception through system completion. The Motorola Solutions project team includes the project manager (PM) and subject matter specialists for each discipline (CAD, Mobile, Records, Records Mobile) and the various implementation activities. Project resources and roles are described in detail in the Statement of Work. The ConsortiumÓs core project team should consist of a PM, a transformation lead, an application administrator, system administrator, subject matter experts (SMEs) from each primary discipline (CAD, Mobile, Records, etc.) who will become system Ðsuper usersÑ and who are empowered to make provisioning decisions on behalf of the agency, a GIS administrator, IT personnel, and training representatives. Note that in some cases, one person may fill more than one role. The project team must be committed to participate in activities for a successful deployment. Team member roles are described in the Statement of Work. 2.1.3 Organization Chart An organizational chart is a graphic display of the project organization which shows relationships. It also communicates the project structure. Figure 2-1: High Level Org Chart PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Sample Project Management Plan 2-3 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Project Manager PMO SolutionApplicationSolution ArchitectsSpecialistsTechnologist 2.2 PROJECT REPOSITORY AND PROJECT CONTROL REGISTER The official project repository is the location where all project documentation will be stored. This repository will be the primary repository of record in accordance with the records retention requirements of the performing organizationÓs policies. The project repository will be located at a Motorola-provided Planview Projectplace workspace. The repository is the primary tool the project manager will use to manage and control the project, and contains areas for the following: Customer meeting minutes Project schedule Action Item Register Risk Management Plan Approved Change Orders Approved Business Process Review Report Records Detailed Design Document Approved ACT work Provisioning Checkpoint progress report Signed Milestone certificates Final Bill of Materials Technical Project Documentation Interface Specification Documents Approved Site Survey Network diagram, showing interfaces Acceptance Test Plan results (ATP) Shipping Documents Standard User Documentation Kickoff Presentation with Customer Design Review Presentations 2.3 SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT Schedule management includes the processes required to manage timely completion of the project. The objective of the schedule management plan is to establish a structured, repeatable schedule management process to support the following: September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 2-4 Sample Project Management Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Creation of a master, detailed schedule. Creation of a baseline for the originally planned work start and finish dates. Regular updates to the schedule. Routine monitoring of the progress of all activities against the baseline. Regular reporting of variance against the baseline. Corrective action taken if the project deviates significantly from the plan. Any new commitments or changes to planned work follow the change control procedure. Utilization of a scheduling tool to maintain a consistent schedule structure. The schedule for this project will be maintained using Planview. The project schedule will be baselined before work on activities begins. The schedule will be stored in Planview Projectplace and shared with the Consortium. Over the course of the project, the Motorola Project Manager will request the Consortium to sign off on progress and billing different types of milestones. 2.3.1 Milestones Progress Milestones memorialize completion of work during the project and could include events such as training completion, Interface Requirements Documents and other major deliverables. In addition, all contractual billing events will be memorialized with completion of a Milestone Certificate. At such time a milestone event takes place, Motorola Solutions will submit a completed Deliverable Milestone Notification either via an informal email for minor milestones or in the form of a milestone certificate for major milestones. The Consortium will identify the resource that has the authority to formally acknowledge and approve the Deliverable Milestone Notifications to whom Motorola Solutions will deliver the Notifications. Upon receiving a Deliverable Milestone Notification, the Consortium will have fifteen (15) business days to approve or reject the Notification, including reasons for the rejection, in written form or electronically via email. If the Deliverable Milestone Notification is rejected within the fifteen days, Motorola Solutions will address the reasons for rejection and resubmit the Deliverable Milestone Notification. The fifteen business day cycle will then be repeated until approval is achieved. Failure to acknowledge Milestone Notifications within the fifteen day period may adversely impact the project schedule. During project initiation, the respective PMs will develop the delivery/milestone schedule. 2.3.2Schedule Control The schedule will be monitored and controlled by the project manager(s) in the following manner: Monitor the project schedule on a mutually agreed upon timeframe to determine if the project will be completed within the original effort, cost and duration. Identify activities that have been completed during the previous time period and update the schedule to show they are finished and determine whether there are any other activities that should be completed but have not been. If not, determine the critical path and look for ways to accelerate these activities to get the project back on its original schedule. Integrate any fully executed change requests into the project schedule baseline and provide project teams with an assessment of the impact on the timeline. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Sample Project Management Plan 2-5 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Utilize performance reports to identify which dates in the schedule have or have not been met, as well as for alerting the project team to any issues that may cause schedule performance problems in the future. Obtain progress reports from the various project teams to monitor the status of tasks by collecting information such as start and finish dates, remaining durations for unfinished activities, and any known risks or issues. Changes to the schedule will be managed through the change control procedure. The action item register will be used as a tool to manage and report schedule variance by all project teams. 2.3.3 Cutover and Transition Plan The Cutover Plan is a deliverable of the Motorola Solutions contract. It will be developed in conjunction with the ConsortiumÓs project team and will consist of the tasks, resources, schedules and contingency plans put in place to support a successful cutover and transition to the customer support organization. This plan will be jointly created prior to the cutover of the PremierOne solution. Motorola Solutions will also work create a transition to support plan. This will be reviewing the contracted maintenance plan and introducing the Consortium to the Motorola Solutions Support organization. 2.4 COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT Communications management includes the processes required to support timely and appropriate generation, collection, dissemination, storage, and ultimately disposition of project information. 2.4.1 Communications Management Plan The communication tools and documents addressed in the project plan are used for communication between project team members and between the project team members and stakeholders. All of these documents will be stored in the project repository. All project team members will have access to this database. 2.4.2 Meetings Meetings are one of the major communication tools used in this project and will be documented in the format of minutes stored in the project repository. Meeting minutes will be taken during the meeting. The project team has the opportunity to comment or change information during the meeting. The minutes should be released within 3 days of the meeting and if applicable, approved within 3 days of receipt. Some meetings (e.g., the Executive Steering Committee meeting) may have different timelines for approval of minutes. Please see the Meetings table below for differing timelines. Minutes for a meeting will be approved by the sponsor or designee. 2.4.3 Project Communication Tools and Documentation Following are the types of tools that may be used for communication during this project: Table 2-1: Example of Communication Tools and Documents September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 2-6 Sample Project Management Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Communication Description Frequency Author(s) Recipient(s) Location Tool Status Reports Summarize Monthly Project Project Planview progress of the manager Sponsor Projectplace project and upcoming activities, including reporting budget and schedule variance Meeting Minutes Written record of a As Needed Facilitator or Meeting Planview attendees meeting designee Projectplace and other interested parties Project Schedule Tracks cost and Monthly Project Team Planview schedule variance manager Projectplace and budget 2.4.3.1 Project Escalation Process The escalation process addresses those situations when an agreement cannot be reached between the project managers and one or more of its stakeholders in a timely manner. The project managers may enlist the assistance of its stakeholders in the resolution of an issue to verify the resolution represents the best interests of the project and its stakeholders. The first level in the escalation path would be to the sponsor. If the issue cannot be resolved at that level within the defined time period, the issue is escalated to the executive level. The project team should always strive to make decisions and address items at the lowest level possible; however, when a resolution cannot be reached, the item should be escalated so a decision is made before it impacts the project. Motorola Solutions Escalation Process If there are issues that cannot be resolved with the project team: 1. The first level in the Motorola Solutions escalation path would be to the Project Manager. 2. If the issue cannot be resolved at that level within the defined time period, then the issue can be escalated to the Regional Resource/Program Manager. 3. If the issue cannot be resolved at that level within the defined time period, the issue can be escalated to the Director of Solutions Delivery. 4. If the issue cannot be resolved at that level within the defined time period, the issue may be escalated to the Vice-president of Software Enterprise. 2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Service Quality: At major project intervals prior to key project milestones, a Quality Review will occur that will verify the adherence to plan. Included in such reviews could be readiness for major delivery activities, including provisioning, training, installation and pre-cutover, as well as review of major project deliverables for completeness and adherence to the Statement of Work. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Sample Project Management Plan 2-7 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 2.6 RISK MANAGEMENT Risk management is the systematic process of identifying, analyzing, and responding to project risks. It includes maximizing the probability and consequences of positive events, and minimizing the probability and consequences of adverse events to project objectives. 2.6.1 Risk Management Plan A risk is considered to be an uncertain event that has the potential to affect project implementation. The practice of risk management is intended to plan and prepare for those possibilities and identify new potential risks throughout the duration of the project. The process for flagging and managing risks is as follows: Risk Identification - This will be done by reviewing project documentation and by conducting brainstorming sessions with the project team. During the planning phase, an initial evaluation of risks will occur by the project team, led by the project manager. A project team member can identify new risks at any point during the project. Risk Response Planning - The risk index will be used to prioritize risks. The risks will be rated using the probability and impact as estimated and the risk trigger and owner will be identified for further monitoring of the risk. Risk Monitoring & Control - The risk owner will be responsible for monitoring the risk through the project execution and will report the status during every project management meeting. Any updates to the probability or impact of the risks will be communicated to the project manager of the project. When a risk occurs during the project it will be considered an ÐissueÑ and be handled according to the agreed response plan. Risk Reporting - The risk response plan will be reviewed and updated for change in probability/impact of the existing risks, new risks identified, and any risk that occurred with the status of the response in action. The risks will be reviewed regularly at project management meetings. Change Requests & Lessons Learned - Any change to the project activities to mitigate a risk or workaround for an unidentified risk may generate change requests. These change requests will follow the procedures detailed in the Change Control section of this document. Any lessons learned will be documented in the lessons learned repository for the project. 2.7 ACTION ITEMS An action item is defined as a question, problem, or condition that requires a follow up activity for resolution. If unsettled, an action item can become an issue, or depending upon the severity of the impact, a risk. 2.7.1 Action Items Management Plan All action items will be documented in the project Action Item Register with the updated document being stored in the project repository. The procedures for handling an action item are as follows: Raising the Action Item: All project members are responsible for identifying action items. September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 2-8 Sample Project Management Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The project manager designates the team member who will act as the Ðaction item owner.Ñ The owner is primarily responsible for entering the action item. The owner will be responsible for determining the person(s) who is/are assigned to resolve the action item and for notifying the responsible person of the action item. The owner is the primary point of contact responsible for action item tracking, resolution and closure. Evaluate/Prioritize Action Items: The project manager, with key stakeholders, objectively assesses the priority each action item will receive with respect to its impact on the project. Consideration in determining priority (high, medium, or low) includes: Assessing the consequences of a delayed response to an action item on quality, project cost, scope, technical success, and schedule. Assessing the impact of an outstanding action item on the overall project Î not just the discrete action item. Identifying potential risks associated with the action item. Determining possible response to resolve an outstanding action item. Monitor and Control: The project team is responsible for monitoring and controlling action items weekly as follows: Review action item log and assess existing action items that are not in a ÐClosedÑ status to determine if: The priority has changed. The due date needs to be changed; If the due date is past due it either needs to be extended out further, or an explanation needs to be added to the notes section providing a current update on the action item and when it is expected to be completed). Ownership needs to be changed. The action item status is ÐCompletedÑ and can be ÐClosedÑ. Identify and assess new action items. Communication: Communicate status of action items to team members and stakeholders. Escalation: Once the project manager identifies that an action item due date has passed without resolution, the action item may become an issue, based on the priority and potential impact to the project. Closing the Action Item: After it has been completed and communicated, it is the responsibility of the owner to close the action item. The project manager will audit to verify action items are resolved and closed. 2.8 CHANGE CONTROL Change Control is concerned with influencing the factors that create changes to verify that changes are agreed upon, determining that a change has occurred, and managing the actual changes when and as they occur. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Sample Project Management Plan 2-9 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Changes to the project can impact a variety of areas including cost, scope, schedule, and quality. Changes to the project that impact one or more of these areas must be approved via the change control process outlined in the Contract. A change request is used to identify a change in cost, schedule, scope, and/or quality relating to the project. The change request will specify what the change is and how it will affect cost, scope, schedule, and/or quality. There are times when the change may affect one without the others. All change requests must be approved or rejected by the sponsor or designee and will be documented in the project repository. 2.8.1 Change Request Procedure Motorola Solutions and the Consortium will utilize the following change control process to manage changes during the life of the project. 1. A change request must be submitted via email to document the potential change - the email for the proposed change must be submitted to Motorola Solutions and the ConsortiumÓs project managers who will in turn provide it to relevant parties for assessment. 2. All change orders will be logged and tracked - the Consortium project manager will record the request in the change management log section of the project control register and will update the log throughout the process. 3. The change will be reviewed and, if acceptable to the Consortium, Motorola Solutions will submit to City an estimate of the impact to cost, schedule, scope, and quality. 4. Motorola Solutions will continue performing the services in accordance with the original agreement unless otherwise agreed upon by the ConsortiumÓs project manager (work cannot commence on any new activities related to the change request until all parties agree in writing). 5. Motorola Solutions project manager and City project manager will adapt project plans to incorporate approved changes. 2.8.2 Change Control Process Steps for the change control process are as follows: 1. Complete a write-up for the proposed change and submit copies to Motorola Solutions and City project manager(s) who will in turn provide to relevant parties for assessment. 2. Record the request in the change management log section of the project control register. 3. Investigate the impact of the proposed change (cost, schedule, scope) and evaluate the impact of not performing the change. 4. Prepare a response to the proposed change. 5. Retain the original in the project repository. 6. Motorola Solutions and City agree whether the change should be performed and obtain authorization sign-off of the change request. 7. The change document is created. September 16, 2021 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 2-10 Sample Project Management Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 If Change is not Accepted: Motorola Solutions project manager will discuss and document the issue with the Consortium project manager. The proposed change can be modified and re-submitted, or withdrawn, if it is agreed to be non- essential (in this case, the reasons will be documented). If Change is Accepted: Once the change request has been approved and signed by the authorized parties, work may begin. Motorola Solutions project manager and the Consortium project manager will adapt project plans to incorporate the approved change. Both Motorola Solutions and the Consortium must sign-off that a change has been complete. The change control log will be updated. The change control log will be supplied at the progress meetings and/or in status reports. 2.9 PROJECT CONTACT LIST The respective project managers will complete the table below during kick-off. Table 2-2. Project Team Directory Name Department Role Phone Number E-mail Address PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Sample Project Management Plan 2-11 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 SECTION 3 STATEMENT OF WORK 3.1 INTRODUCTION In accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, this Statement of Work (ÐSOWÑ) defines the principal activities and responsibilities of all parties for the delivery of the Motorola Solutions (ÐMotorolaÑ) system as presented in this offer to the Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (hereinafter referred to as ÐConsortiumÑ). When assigning responsibilities, the phrase ÐMotorolaÑ includes our subcontractors and third-party partners. Deviations and changes to this SOW are subject to mutual agreement between Motorola and the Consortium and will be addressed in accordance with the change provisions of the Agreement. Unless specifically stated, Motorola work will be performed remotely. The Consortium will provide Motorola resources with unrestricted direct network access to enable Motorola to fulfill its delivery obligations. Motorola and the Consortium will work to complete their respective responsibilities in accordance with the mutually agreed upon Project Schedule. Any changes to the Project Schedule will be mutually agreed upon via the change provision of the Agreement. The number and type of software or subscription licenses, products, or services provided by Motorola or its subcontractors are specifically listed in the Agreement and any reference within this document as well as subcontractorsÓ SOWs (if applicable) does not imply or convey a software or subscription license or service that are not explicitly listed in the Agreement. 3.2 AWARD, ADMINISTRATION AND PROJECT INITIATION Project Initiation and Planning will begin following execution of the Agreement between Motorola and the Consortium. Following the conclusion of the Project Planning Session, the Motorola Project Manager will conduct twice monthly one-hour remote status meetings with the Consortium Project Manager for the purpose of baselining progress of current activities and the planning of future activities. Following the conclusion of the Contract Design Review, the Motorola Project Manager will prepare and submit monthly status reports to the Consortium Project Manager. Monthly Status Reports provide a summary of the activities completed in the month, those activities planned for the following month, project progress against the project schedule, items of concern requiring attention as well as potential project risks and agreed upon mitigation actions. Motorola utilizes Meet as its teleconference tool. If the Consortium desires a different teleconference tool, the Consortium may provide an mutually agreeable alternate tool at the ConsortiumÓs expense. 3.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT TERMS The following project management terms are used in this document. Since these terms may be used differently in other settings, these definitions are provided for clarity. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Project Schedule means the schedule providing dates and timeframes for completion of tasks and deliverables during the course of the project. The Project Schedule is subject to change at the mutual agreement of Motorola and the Consortium. Project Management Plan is composed of the Communications Management Plan, Risk Management Plan, and Change Management Plan that provide the criteria for managing those tasks within the project. 3.4 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Motorola Integration Services are considered complete upon Motorola performing the last task listed in a series of responsibilities or as specifically stated in Completion Criteria. Consortium task completion will occur per the project schedule enabling Motorola to complete its tasks without delay. The Consortium will provide Motorola written notification that it does not accept the completion of Motorola responsibilities or rejects a Motorola service deliverable within five (5) business days of completion of an activity, or receipt of a deliverable. The Service Completion will be acknowledged in accordance with the terms of Master Customer Agreement and the Service Completion Date will be memorialized by Motorola and the Consortium. Software System Completion will be in accordance with the terms of the Software Products Addendum unless otherwise stated in this Statement of Work. 3.5 PROJECT ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OVERVIEW 3.5.1 Motorola Project Roles and Responsibilities A Motorola team, made up of specialized personnel, will be assigned to the project under the direction of the Motorola Project Manager. Team members will be multi-disciplinary and may fill more than one role. Team members will be engaged in different phases of the project as necessary. In order to maximize efficiencies MotorolaÓs project team will provide services remotely via teleconference, web-conference or other remote method in fulfilling its commitments as outlined in this Statement of Work. Motorola project team resources will be on site at the Consortium location when fulfilling commitments that are crucial to project success as noted in this Statement of Work. The personnel role descriptions noted below provide an overview of typical project team members. One or many resources of the same type may be engaged as needed throughout the project. There may be other personnel engaged in the project under the direction of the Project Manager. MotorolaÓs project management approach has been developed and refined based on lessons learned in the execution of hundreds of system implementations. Using experienced and dedicated people, industry-leading processes, and integrated software tools for effective project execution and control, we have developed and refined practices that support the design, production, and testing required to deliver a high-quality, feature-rich system. Project Manager A Motorola Project Manager will be assigned as the principal business representative and point of contact for the organization. The Project ManagerÓs responsibilities include: 1. Manage the Motorola responsibilities related to the delivery of the project. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-2 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 2. Maintain the project schedule and manage the assigned Motorola personnel and applicable subcontractors/supplier resources. 3. Manage the Change Order process per the Agreement. 4. Maintain project communications with the Consortium. 5.Identify and manage project risks. 6. Collaborative coordination of Consortium resources to minimize and avoid project delays. 7. Measure, evaluate, and report the project status against the Project Schedule. 8. Conduct remote status meetings on mutually agreed dates to discuss project status. 9.Prepare and submit a monthly status report that identifies the activities of the previous month, as well as activities planned for the current month, including an updated Project Schedule and action item log. 10.Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. Application Specialist The Motorola Application Specialist will work with the Consortium project team with system provisioning. The Application SpecialistÓs responsibilities will include: 1. Provide consultation services to the Consortium regarding the provisioning and operation of the Motorola system. 2. Provide provisioning training to the Consortium to provide the knowledge to setup and maintain the system. 3. Complete the provisioning ownership handoff to the Consortium. 4. Complete the project-defined milestones and tasks as defined in this SOW. Provide product training as defined by this SOW and described in the Training Plan. GIS Analyst The Motorola GIS Analyst specializes in geographical information technology. Responsibilities of the Motorola GIS Analyst include: 1. Perform the GIS analysis on the Consortium-supplied GIS source data. 2. Provide the results of the GIS analysis based on the requirements of the Motorola GIS Build Requirements document to include: A. Geocoding Data B. Centerlines to support Routing C. Response Area Polygons 3. Offer consultation services for the conversion of Consortium GIS source data for Motorola use. 4. Provide GIS Training as defined in this SOW and the Agreement 5. Import Consortium-provided GIS data into PremierOne. Solutions Architect The Solutions Architect is responsible for the delivery of the technical and equipment elements of the solution. Specific responsibilities include: PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-3 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 1. Confirmation that the delivered technical elements meet contracted requirements. 2. The delivery of interfaces and integrations between Motorola products. 3. Remain engaged throughout the duration of the delivery. Customer Success Advocate A Customer Success Advocate will be assigned to the Consortium post Go Live event. By being the ConsortiumÓs trusted advisor, the Customer Success AdvocateÓ responsibilities include: 1. Assist the Consortium with maximizing the use of their Motorola software and service investment. 2.Actively manage, escalate, and log issues with Support, Product Management, and Sales. 3. Provide ongoing customer communication about progress, timelines, and next steps. 4. Liaise with the Consortium on industry trends and Motorola evolutions. Customer Support Services Team The Customer Support Services team will provide ongoing support following commencement of beneficial use of the ConsortiumÓs System(s) as defined in Customer Support Plan. 3.5.2 Consortium Project Roles and Responsibilities Overview The success of the project is dependent on early assignment of key Consortium resources. In many cases the Consortium will provide project roles that correspond with MotorolaÓs project roles. It is critical these resources are empowered to make provisioning decisions based on the ConsortiumÓs operational and administration needs. The Consortium project team should be engaged from project initiation through beneficial use of the system. The continued involvement in the project and use of the system will convey the required knowledge to maintain the system post completion of the project. In some cases, one person may fill multiple project roles. The project team must be committed to participate in activities for a successful implementation. In the event the Consortium is unable to provide the roles identified in this section Motorola may be able to supplement Consortium resources at an additional price. Project Manager The Project Manager will act as the primary Consortium point of contact for the duration of the project. The Project Manager is responsible for management of any third party vendors that are the ConsortiumÓs subcontractors. In the event the project involves multiple agencies, Motorola will work exclusively with a single Consortium-assigned Project Manager (the primary Project Manager). The Project ManagerÓs responsibilities include: 1. Communicate and coordinate with other project participants. 2. Manage the Consortium project team including timely facilitation of efforts, tasks, and activities. 3. Maintain project communications with the Motorola Project Manager. 4. Identify the efforts required of Consortium staff to meet the task requirements and milestones in this SOW and Project Schedule. 5. Consolidate all project-related questions and queries from Consortium staff to present to the Motorola Project Manager. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-4 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 6. Review the Project Schedule with the Motorola Project Manager and finalize the detailed tasks, task dates, and responsibilities. 7. Ensure any customer or third party resources needed or requested for specific project meetings are available and able to attend. 8.Measure and evaluate progress against the Project Schedule. 9. Monitor the project to ensure resources are available as scheduled. 10. Attend status meetings. 11. Provide timely responses to issues related to project progress. 12.Liaise and coordinate with other agencies, Consortium vendors, contractors, and common carriers. 13. Review and administer change control procedures, hardware and software certification, and all related project tasks required to maintain the Project Schedule. 14. Ensure Consortium vendorsÓ adherence to overall Project Schedule and Project Plan. 15. Assign the personnel who will work with Motorola staff as needed for the duration of the project, including at least one Application Administrator for PremierOne and one or more representative(s) from the IT department. 16. Identify the resource with authority to formally acknowledge and approve Change Orders, approval letter(s), and milestone recognition certificates as well as approve and release payments in a timely manner. 17. Provide building access to Motorola personnel to all Consortium facilities where system equipment is to be installed during the project. Temporary identification cards are to be issued to Motorola personnel if required for access to facilities. 18. Ensure remote network connectivity and access to Motorola resources. 19. As applicable to this project, assume responsibility for all fees for licenses and inspections and for any delays associated with inspections due to required permits. 20. Provide reasonable care to prevent equipment exposure to contaminants that cause damage to the equipment or interruption of service. 21. Ensure a safe work environment for Motorola personnel. 22. Provide signatures of Motorola-provided milestone certifications and Change Orders within five (5) business days of receipt. Transformation Lead The Transformation Lead, who may or may not be your Project Manager, must be able to holistically represent your organization and be able to work cross functionally between Motorola, your organization, and all stakeholders involved in the delivery of your new system. The Transformation Lead must be empowered to acknowledge the resource and time commitments required of your organization and authorize Motorola to proceed with scheduling the Project Kickoff event. System Administrator The System Administrator manages the technical efforts and ongoing tasks and activities of their system as defined in the Customer Support Plan (CSP). PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-5 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Application Administrator(s) The Application Administrator(s) manage the Consortium-owned provisioning maintenance and Consortium code tables required to enable and maintain system operation. The Application AdministratorÓs involvement will start at the Business Process Review (BPR) stage of the project. They will attend Provisioning and Train the Trainer Training and remain engaged throughout the project to ensure they are able to maintain the provisioning post Consortium Provisioning handoff. For solutions that consist of multiple Motorola products (e.g. CAD and Records) the Consortium may elect to have multiple Application Administrators. The Application AdministratorÓs responsibilities include: 1. Participate in overall delivery and training activities to understand the software, interfaces, and functionality of the system. 2. Participate with the SMEs during the BPR, provisioning process, and training. 3. Authorize global provisioning choices and decisions, and be the point(s) of contact for reporting and verifying problems and maintaining provisioning. 4. Obtain inputs from other user agency stakeholders related to business processes and provisioning. GIS Analyst The GIS Analyst is responsible for the development and maintenance of all of the GIS data used in the PremierOne system. The GIS Analyst must have working experience with Esri software including ArcCatalog, ArcMap, and ArcPro, knowledge of model builder, toolbox tools, and general database structure. Also, it is very important to have a working relationship with the named CAD Application Administrator. The GIS Administrator will be heavily involved in the data preparation for the system as well as data maintenance throughout the term of the Agreement. This will include but is not limited to the following standard responsibilities: 1. Provide GIS data in the Motorola required schema (ESRI based) 2. Develop, maintain, and update GIS data 3. Support of the GIS elements used in the system (Server, CAD consoles, etc.) Subject Matter Experts The Subject Matter Experts (SME or Super Users) are the core group of users involved with the Business Process Review (BPR) and analysis, the provisioning process, including making global provisioning choices and decisions, and training. These members should be experienced users in the working area(s) they represent, i.e. dispatch, patrol, etc., and should be empowered to make decisions related to provisioning elements, workflows, screen layouts, etc. IT Personnel IT personnel provide required information related to LAN, WAN, wireless networks, server, and client infrastructure. They must also be familiar with connectivity to internal, external, and third-party systems to which the Motorola system will interface. Training Representative Training representatives will be the point of contact for the Motorola Application Specialist when policy and procedural questions arise. They will act as course facilitators and are the ConsortiumÓs educational monitors. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-6 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 User Agency Stakeholders User Agency Stakeholders, if the system is deployed in a multi-agency environment, are those resources representing agencies outside of the ConsortiumÓs agency. These resources will provide provisioning inputs to the SMEs if operations for these agencies differ from that of the primary agency. The Consortium will manage User Agency Stakeholder involvement as needed to fulfil Consortium responsibilities. 3.5.2.1 General Consortium Responsibilities In addition to the Consortium Responsibilities stated elsewhere in this SOW, the Consortium is responsible for: 1. All Consortium-provided equipment including hardware and third-party software necessary for delivery of the System not specifically listed as a Motorola deliverable. This will include end user workstations, network equipment, telephone, or TDD equipment and the like. 2. Configuration, maintenance, testing, and supporting the third-party systems the Consortium operates which will be interfaced to as part of this project. The Consortium is responsible for providing Application Programming Interface (API) documentation to those systems that document the integration process for the level of interface integration defined by Motorola. 3. Initiate, coordinate, and facilitate communication between Motorola and ConsortiumÒs third-party vendors as required to enable Motorola to perform its duties. 4. Active participation of Consortium Subject Matter Experts (SMEÓs) in project delivery meetings and working sessions during the course of the project. Consortium SMEÓs will possess requisite knowledge of Consortium operations and legacy system(s) and possess skills and abilities to operate and manage the system. 5. The provisioning of Consortium code tables and GIS data as requested by Motorola. This information must be provided in a timely manner in accordance with the Project Schedule. 6. Electronic versions of any documentation associated with the business processes identified. 7. Providing a facility with the required computer and audio-visual equipment for training and work sessions as defined in the Training Plan. 8. Ability to participate in remote project meeting sessions using Meet or a mutually agreeable Consortium-provided alternate remote conferencing solution. 3.6 PROJECT PLANNING A clear understanding of the needs and expectations of both Motorola and the Consortium are critical to fostering a collaborative environment of trust and mutual respect. Project Planning requires the gathering of project specific information that is required to set clear project expectations and guidelines, create the Project Management Plan, project schedule and set the foundation for a successful implementation. Examples of specific information that is gathered include the Business Process Review Agency Pre-Kickoff Survey (a survey that is sent to the Consortium to collect agency-specific information such as dispatch logistics, communication center information, operational process, and workflow.) and the GIS Discovery Survey (used to assist Motorola Solutions in gathering information to better understand the ConsortiumÓs current capabilities and needs relating to the GIS.) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-7 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.6.1 Project Planning Session - Teleconference/Web Meeting A Project Planning Session teleconference will be scheduled after the Agreement has been executed. The agenda will include: 1. Review the Agreement documents. 2. A summary review of the contracted applications, query(ies) and interface(s), and bill of materials. 3. Review project delivery requirements as described in this SOW. 4. Discuss which tasks will be conducted by on-site Motorola resources as well as the activities when the Motorola Project Manager will be on-site 5. Discuss Consortium involvement in provisioning and data gathering to confirm understanding of the scope and required time commitments. 6. Review the initial Project Schedule and incorporate Consortium feedback resulting in the delivery Project Schedule. The Project Schedule will be maintained by Motorola and updated through mutual collaboration. Schedule updates that impact milestones will be addressed via the Change Order provision of the Agreement. 7. Review the Project Management Plan. 8. Confirm CJIS background investigations and fingerprint requirements for Motorola employees and/or contractors. Required fingerprints will be submitted on Motorola provided FBI FD-258 Fingerprint cards 9. Review Virtual Desktop (VD) and Learning eXperience Portal (LXP) role in the Project Plan delivery and obtain Customer User Name and Access Information. 10. Discuss Motorola remote access requirements (24-hour access to a secured two-way Internet connection to the Motorola system firewalls for the purposes of deployment, maintenance, and monitoring). 11. Discuss ConsortiumÓs obligation to manage change among the stakeholder and user communities. 12. Review the Business Process Review Agency Pre-Kick Off Survey. The information in the survey is used to prepare for the Business Process Review. 13. Review Software System completion criteria and the process for transitioning to support. NOTE - Completing the Business Process Review Agency Pre-Kick Off Survey is a critical Project Task. Delayed, incomplete, or inaccurate information may have a significant impact on the Project Schedule. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Schedule the remote Project Planning Session. 2. Request the attendance of any additional Consortium resources that are instrumental in the project as needed. 3. Provide the initial Project Schedule and Project Management Plan. 4. Provide the Business Process Review Agency Pre-Kickoff Survey and the GIS Discovery Survey. 5. Provide the PremierOne Agency Build Guide. 6. Conduct a review of the Project Management Plan. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-8 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 7. Baseline the Project Schedule. 8. Review MotorolaÓs delivery approach and its reliance on Consortium provided remote access. 9. Document the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda. 10. Request user information required to establish the Consortium in the Motorola LXP. 11.Request sample GIS data in preparation for the GIS Planning Session. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Schedule the availability of the Transformation Lead to meet with Motorola. 2. Ensure Consortium GIS Administrator reviews the PremierOne GIS build requirements. 3. Provide GIS sample to Motorola within ten (10) business days of the GIS Planning Meeting to avoid impact on the Project Schedule. 4. Provide required information to complete the PremierOne Agency Build Guide. Required information is to be provided prior to GIS Check Point #1 Addressing Validation, Routing, and Boundaries. 5. Provide acknowledgement of the mutually agreed upon Project Kickoff Meeting agenda. 6. Provide approval to proceed with the Project Kickoff meeting. 7. Provide LXP user information as requested by Motorola. 8. Verify Consortium Administrator(s) have access to the LXP. 9. Review and complete the Business Process Review Agency Pre-Kick Off Survey within ten (10) business days of the Project Planning Session to avoid impact on the Project Schedule. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Project Kickoff Meeting Agenda Project Management Plan Business Process Review Agency Pre-Kick Off Survey Link GIS Discovery Worksheet PremierOne Agency Build Guide 3.6.2 Project Kickoff Meeting The purpose of the Project Kickoff Meeting is to introduce project participants and review the scope of the project. The Project Kickoff event consists of various branching activities such as the Site Survey and Interface Planning session commence following the general kickoff meeting (while Motorola resources are still onsite) and the GIS Planning Session teleconference. The PM, lead Application Specialist, and lead Solutions Architect travel to Consortium site. Other Motorola project team resources may attend remotely. Availability of Consortium resources to participate in each branching activity is critical to the project success. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Schedule and facilitate the Project Kickoff Meeting to clarify roles, responsibilities, establish team working relationships, and initiate project tasks. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-9 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 2. Present a high level overview of project scope. 3. Confirm Consortium access to the LXP. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide a meeting space equipped with remote conferencing capability enabling remote Motorola project team members to participate. 2. Identify and ensure participation of key team members in kickoff and project initiation activities. 3. Confirm access to the LXP. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Project Kickoff Meeting Minutes 3.6.3 GIS Planning Session Ï Teleconference/Web Meeting A GIS planning session will be scheduled to review the GIS Build Requirements Document and complete an overview of the GIS components of the project. The agenda will include: 1. Review the Motorola GIS Build Requirements Document. 2. Discuss Consortium GIS skill-set and responsibilities. 3. Review the requirements of the Consortium GIS sample data provided by the Consortium that is required in the Motorola system. 4. Discuss any GIS related project questions. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Schedule and conduct the remote GIS Planning Session. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Review the GIS Build Requirements document prior the meeting. 2. Discuss any areas of concern relative to GIS and schedule requirements. Providing the GIS Consortium Data is a critical Project Task. Delayed, incomplete, or inaccurate information may have a significant impact on the Project Schedule. 3.6.4 Interface Planning Session The objective of the interface planning session is to discuss the user experience presented by each contracted interface. Topics of discussion will include: 1. Reviewing the functionality delivered with each interface. 2. Reviewing the deployment requirements and dependencies of each interface (NDA, network information, API, and access credentials required to connect to third party systems). 3. Reviewing the interface delivery and validation process. The interface deployment requirements (NDA, network information, API, and access credentials required to connect to third party systems) are needed to begin deployment of the interfaces. Delayed, incomplete, or inaccurate information may have a significant impact on the Project Schedule. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-10 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Motorola is not responsible for third-party vendor management, scheduling, or additional cost for software, customization, development, or testing unless the work is defined in this SOW or amended to the Agreement via a change order. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Discuss the need for additional information such as third-party API, SDKs, data schema, and any internal and third-party documents necessary to establish interfaces. 2.Conduct reviews of the interface to explain how each functions as well as any dependency on third-party API, SDKs, data schema, and any internal and third-party documents necessary to establish interfaces with local and remote systems. 3. Review the functional interface demonstration process. 4. Add interface related details to the CDR Summary report. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide all required third-party API and SDK licensing and documentation for ConsortiumÓs existing systems. 2. Discuss and collect information on third-party API, SDKs, data schema, and any internal and third-party documents necessary to establish interfaces with all local and remote systems and facilities within ten (10) days of the Project Kickoff Meeting to avoid impact on the Project Schedule. 3. Establish network connectivity between the Motorola server(s) and all third-party interface demarcations. 3.6.5 Interface Design Review Motorola and the Consortium will review MotorolaÓs understanding of the interface design, at the time of contract, as documented in an Interface Specification Document (ISD) in order to ensure consensus of functionality of the interface prior to Motorola commencing with development efforts. The review will include the structure of the interface, involved data elements and data mapping, event trigger, update cadence, communication path, connectivity requirements and the expected user experience. Changes in design and or functionality identified during the review that material impact MotorolaÓs level of effort to develop the interface will be evaluated for cost and price impact. In such cases Motorola reserves the right to provide the Consortium with a change order for the increased price or to descope the interface from the contract. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct a review of the interface to explain the design of the interface and how the interface functions in the Motorola system. 2. Work with the ConsortiumÓs third-party vendors, as required, to clarify any connectivity issues/data transfer issues. 3. Consensus of the design will be memorialized by Consortium signature on the design document before Motorola commences with any development activities. ConsortiumÓs Responsibilities 1. Make knowledgeable individuals available for the reviews. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-11 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 2. Provide clarity on the use case of the interface and verify the functional specification in the ISD meets the use case or identify desired changes to the specifications. 3. Facilitate communications and assist with resolution of issues that arise between Motorola and the ConsortiumÓs third-party vendor(s). 4.Assume costs associated with efforts required of the third-party vendors, which may include professional services, API/SDK fees, Non-Disclosure Agreements, licenses, and configuration or development, if necessary, to support desired interface functionality. 5. Memorialize the interface specification by signature expeditiously enabling Motorola to initiate development activities. 6. Initiate a Change Order for any modifications. NOTE - Unknown circumstances, requirements, and anomalies at the time of initial design can present difficulties in interfacing to some third-party applications. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or even a nonÎfunctional interface. When information and access to systems is provided, Motorola will be able to mitigate these difficulties. If Motorola mitigation requires additional thirdÎparty integration, application upgrades, API upgrades, and/or additional software licenses, those costs will need to be addressed through the change order provision of the Agreement. 3.6.6 Contract Design Review The objective of the Contract Design Review (CDR) is to review the contracted Products, Project Schedule, bill of materials, Training Plan, System Validation Plan, and contractual obligations of each party. The CDR will commence immediately following the conclusion of the Project Kickoff meeting while Motorola resources are still on site. In the event the CDR cannot commence immediately following the Project Kickoff meeting while Motorola resources are onsite, Motorola will schedule a web conference session at a mutually agreeable date and time. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Review third-party partner solutions and involvement in the project, as applicable. 2. Summarize and review the contracted Products, query(s), and interface(s) described in the System Description. 3. Review the initial Project Schedule and incorporate Consortium feedback resulting in the implementation Project Schedule. The Project Schedule will be maintained by Motorola and updated through mutual collaboration. Schedule updates that impact milestones will be addressed via the change provision of the Agreement. 4. Review the system bill of materials and note any necessary modifications. 5. Review the Training Plan, training delivery schedule and training requirements. 6. Plan installation activities with the Consortium project team. 7. Review the Consortium results of the Pre-Kickoff Business Process Survey. Depending upon availability of Consortium resources this may be conducted as a follow-up teleconference but must be completed prior to the commencement of Business Process Review activities. 8. Discuss the Product Validation demonstration process for the contracted products. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide input to the Project Schedule dates. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-12 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 2. Review the bill of materials and operating system software configuration with the Motorola project team. 3. Provide shipping address and receiver name. 4. Participate in reviewing the Training Plan. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Initial Project Schedule 3.7 ENVIRONMENT REVIEW AND SITE PREPARATIONS 3.7.1 Site Survey and IP Network Analysis Following the Project Kickoff meeting, while Motorola resources are on site, Motorola will review the existing infrastructure(s) and installation location(s) to validate that the installation environment(s) and local and wide area networks will provide optimal support of the Motorola solution. A single site Survey/IP Network Analysis will be conducted at the primary installation location and a single site survey will be conducted at the disaster recovery location if an on-premise disaster recovery system has been included in the contract. The purpose of the site survey is to confirm the ConsortiumÓs installation environment conforms to the site requirements presented in the System Description and hardware manufacturer specification verifying that the physical installation environment is accessible, without special accommodation, to support the movement of equipment in ConsortiumÓs facility from receiving dock to the equipment room. Examples of areas of concern include door/hallway widths and heights, stairs, elevator weight limitations, ventilation including cooling, power receptacle locations and power types. Motorola makes no provision for cabling, special accommodations, power consumption or capital improvements to the installation environment that may be required to support the Motorola system. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Review the site requirements section of the System Description with the Consortium. 2. Facilitate a meeting to review the physical installation environment and equipment travel path from receiving dock through equipment room. 3. Analyze IP network data. 4. Prepare a report with recommendations for any site and or network preparation required to provide an optimal environment for installation of the system equipment and identify any deficiencies related to power, power supplies, cabling, IP network connectivity, and communications equipment. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide escorted access to the installation location where Motorola system equipment will be installed. 2. Provide documentation on the current infrastructure, i.e. existing hardware and operating system software components and terminal networks, as well as projected utilization statistics and other information as is reasonably required to validate final hardware requirements. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-13 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3. Provide information on current network architecture and configuration as well as physical site information such as building plans and schemaÓs, as required. 4. Make knowledgeable staff available to explain the current architecture, infrastructure, and environment and physical environment conditions (e.g. building engineers/electrician) as needed. 5.Provide a site for the installation, operation, and maintenance of all computer server(s), workstation(s), and related peripheral in accordance with Motorola requirements and all network infrastructures described in the System Description. 6. Ensure the computer processor(s), operating system software, third-party software, all associated workstations, printers, communications, and related components conform with the specifications in the System Description. 7. Provide a programmer work area for Motorola on-site staff in the primary facility, located near, but outside of the computer machine room. The room will be equipped with a workstation, AC power to support workspace for a minimum of two (2) people, and Internet access. Wireless access is recommended. This work area will be available during the course of the project. 8. Provide 24-hour access to a secured two-way Internet connection to the Motorola system firewalls for the purposes of deployment, maintenance, and monitoring throughout the course of the project and maintenance and warranty phases. 9. Review and approve the final hardware and operating system software configuration with the Motorola project team. 10. Provide any cabling or capital improvements required for the installation environment and/or power consumption considerations. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Site Survey and Network Analysis Results 3.8 GIS SERVICES 3.8.1 GIS Scope Review The Motorola GIS Analyst meets remotely with the ConsortiumÓs GIS Administrator to discuss the approach to developing the GIS data for use with the PremierOne system. GIS Scope Review topics that will be discussed include: For CAD - Agency Response boundaries needs, routing requirements, premise hazard areas and specifics for address validation using street centerlines, common places, address points, and alias tables. premise hazard areas. For Records - data types necessary for address validation support in the system. These data types include: street centerlines, commonplace points, address points, street alias tables and commonplace alias tables. The GIS Data Verification Report describes the Consortiums source feature classes and data values that have been made available to Motorola. The data is reviewed and any items identified that may impact the applicable functionality of the data within the Motorola System are noted within the GIS Data Verification Report. The GIS Data Verification Report is delivered post contract after review of PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-14 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 the Consortium GIS data. As GIS data is critical to the provisioning and operation of the system, it is imperative that the Consortium GIS Data be made available to Motorola prior to the GIS Scope Review. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Review GIS Draft Data Verification Report. 2. Discuss current GIS business practices. 3. Discuss GIS data types that are going to be utilized within the PremierOne system. 4. Discuss frequency of GIS updates to current service and desired frequency. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Ensure availability of GIS administrator for this meeting. 2. Finalize the agency code and beat names for the geodatabase. All of the data will be required but the streets, address points and common places can be works in progress that can be updated as the project moves. along. The agency and beat names should be final by provisioning. NOTE - Providing the Agency Code and Beat Names for the geodatabase is a critical Project Task. Delayed, incomplete or inaccurate information may have a significant impact on the Project Schedule. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description GIS Draft Verification Report 3.8.2 GIS Boundaries Meeting If PremierOne CAD is contracted as a System component, the Motorola GIS Analyst will meet remotely with the ConsortiumÓs GIS Administrator and CAD SMEs to discuss and confirm Response Boundaries data that is loaded into PremierOne CAD. Motorola will provide an overview of the available boundaries types and their function that can be used in PremierOne CAD. Topics that will be discussed include confirmation of the ConsortiumÓs Agency Code and Beat Names, and provide an overview of the Agency Code and Beat names role in the PremierOne CAD to determine if any modifications need to be made prior to import into the PremierOne. The Agency Code and Beat Names must be provided to Motorola prior to the GIS Boundaries Meeting. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Provide an overview of the Agency Code and Beat Names role in PremierOne CAD. 2. Discuss additional boundary capabilities and data development needs. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Ensure availability of GIS administrator for this meeting. 2. Confirm Agency Code and Beat Names readiness for load into PremierOne. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-15 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 NOTE - Import of the Agency Code and Beat Names for the geodatabase is a critical Project Task. Delayed, incomplete or inaccurate information may have a significant impact on the Project Schedule. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Response Boundary overview 3.8.3 GIS CheckPoint Meetings The Motorola GIS Analyst and ConsortiumÓs GIS Administrator will participate in up to five (5) - two (2) hour remote CheckPoint Meetings in accordance with the Project Schedule. CheckPoint meeting topics are outlined as: 1. GIS Check Point #1 Initial Data Review/Discussion Delivery of revised Consortium GIS Data based on GIS Draft Data Verification Report is required prior to this Check Point 2. GIS Check Point #2 Readiness for GIS Load Delivery of revised Consortium GIS Data based on GIS Draft Data Verification Report updates is required prior to this Check Point 3. GIS Check Point #3 Consortium GIS Load Review Completion of PremierOne GIS Import Training is required prior to this Check Point 4. GIS Check Point #4 General GIS Check-In 5. GIS Check Point #5 GIS Go Live Readiness Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct the GIS CheckPoint Meetings 2. Evaluate Consortium GIS data as submitted Consortium Responsibilities 1. Based on the GIS Data Draft Verification Report, make required changes to meet the Motorola defined GIS requirements Motorola Deliverables Title/Description GIS Draft Data Verification Report Updates 3.8.4 GIS Draft Geodatabase The draft geodatabase will be created and uploaded to the PremierOne server to support provisioning efforts and draft maps will be created for use by the CAD workstations. If PremierOne CAD is not a System component, the GIS Draft Geodatabase is still required as it serves as the supporting data for address validation in PremierOne Records. Error reports that are produced as a result of developing the draft geodatabase will be delivered to the Consortium in updates to the GIS Data Draft Verification Report. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-16 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The final geodatabase will be delivered during the GIS Import Tool Training, which is described in the Training Plan. Following completion of GIS Import Tool Training, the Consortium will be responsible for maintenance of the geodatabase. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Create the draft geodatabase, maps and Routing Network. 2. Create the draft geodatabase. 3.Provide updates to the GIS Data Draft Verification Report reflecting any issues found during the geodatabase build. 4. Provide up to three (3) draft geodatabases. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Correct any GIS errors identified in the GIS Data Draft Verification Report from geodatabase build. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description GIS draft geodatabases 3.9 BUSINESS PROCESS REVIEW (BPR) AND SYSTEM PROVISIONING 3.9.1 Business Process Review A Motorola led Business Process Review (BPR) provides Motorola and the Consortium the opportunity to review current operational processes and workflows and determine the provisioning parameters that will provide the most optimal use of the PremierOne system. A BPR session will be conducted for each of the contracted Product categories: CAD/Mobile and/or Records (and Jail if included in the Contract). The information collected in the BPR will provide Motorola the framework for how the product(s) will be provisioned and configured to best meet the ConsortiumÓs needs. The three day on-site BPR review will be conducted during the traditional business hours Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. A single instance of the activities described as Ðthe BPRÑ will be conducted for a combined law enforcement and fire dispatch audience unless specifically stated otherwise in this SOW. The results of the BPR will be used in the creation of a single CAD provisioning profile for law enforcement and or fire/EMS dispatch. If PremierOne Records is a contracted product component, Motorola will schedule a separate session to review the Consortium results of the Business Process Review Survey and provide the Consortium with an overview of the Records modules. BPR activities will be conducted with Consortium designated Records personnel and the BPR data will be used in the creation of a single Records provisioning profile. The Consortium is responsible for engaging all user agencies that will be provisioned in PremierOne to obtain required inputs. If an additional BPR or provisioning for additional agencies is required, it will be addressed via the change order provision of the Agreement. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-17 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 The BPR should be attended by senior operational decision makers, such as dispatch supervisors, senior call takers/dispatchers, senior records clerks, and records supervisors as applicable. Manager- level personnel can help guide the discussion of policies that have the potential to be improved or modified. The practical input based on experience in the ConsortiumÓs operational environment is often indispensable in the later configuration of the system. The BPR agenda will include items such as the following: Business Process Review Survey Responses. Provisioning processes for the contracted Products (CAD/Mobile and or Records). Overview of the contracted Products. Agency and Discipline Information (Agency Type, # of Personnel, shift types). User Permissions/Security Groups. Interface Field Mapping Provisioning. Provisioning Overview - PremierOne Agency Build Guide (provided post contract). For CAD deployments, discuss: Agency data gathering (includes incident types, unit status codes, dispositions, unit IDs, and personnel). Dispatcher/Responder workflow (incident creation to closure). Notifications and Status Monitors. Reporting Review. For Records deployments discuss: Overview of the records product with designated Records users Records business process flows Standard module tailoring (Up to 8 field modifications per module) Module Field Definitions: (Pane Name, Group Name, Grid Name, Captions, DB Name, Field Type, View (Read Only, Required, visible), Display Length, Max Length, Code Table, Dependencies, Actions (Mask/Conversion), Field Validations, Indexing, Data Grid and RDW Configurations, Expungement Types, CI Master Mappings, Smart Copy Settings) Code tables Document Views & Workflows Printouts and RDLC Reports Data View and SSRS Reports Priority and Responsible Party Role-based training recommendations. For CAD BPR - Conduct one (1) Site Visit and one (1) Ride Along with a communications or dispatch agency and conduct a single interview session with CAD agency personnel (as designated by the Consortium). For Records BPR - Conduct one (1) Site Visit and one (1) Ride Along with a Records division unit and conduct a single interview session with Records personnel (as designated by the Consortium). Motorola Responsibilities 1. Provide the BPR Agenda/Workbook prior to the meeting. 2. Complete the BPR Workbook. 3. Review the documented business processes and provide configuration options. 4. Review the completed BPR Workbook. 5. Provide provisioning worksheets for the Consortium to complete. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-18 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 6. Conduct a single BPR session for each Product in the system (one for CAD/Mobile, one for Records) inclusive of sit-alongs and ride-alongs. CAD/Mobile BPRs will be conducted within the same on-site trip as the Records BPR, provided Consortium resources are available. 7. Create and deliver the Records Operational Review document. The Records Operational Review document memorializes MotorolaÓs understanding of Records business processes and enables Motorola to assess the best approach to provisioning the Records system to best enable existing processes. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Review the BPR Agenda/Workbook prior to the meeting. 2. Schedule applicable resources (dispatch, police and fire/EMS, and Records personnel for sit- alongs, ride-alongs and interview sessions). 3. Provide resources knowledgeable in the ConsortiumÓs business processes to provide relevant documentation on the workflow and operating procedures. 4.Provide Motorola with forms, reports, and templates to be created in PremierOne Records to aid Motorola in developing the Records Operational Review Document. 5. Complete provisioning worksheets. 6. Provide required information to complete the BPR, such as: Field modification decisions. Personnel information provided. Workflow configuration. Document colors. Agency logo provided (if desired by the Consortium). 7. Review the completed BPR Workbook and Records Operational Review Document. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description BPR Agenda BPR Workbook Records Operational Review Document 3.9.2 Records Detailed Design Document Motorola will review the Records Operational Review document with the Consortium and solicit feedback. Motorola will incorporate any modifications into the document based on the Consortium feedback and present the Consortium with a Records Detailed Design Document.. The Records Detailed Design Document will contain the standard tailoring parameters (up to eight field level modifications per records module) and any module and or form development included in the contract. It is anticipated that iterative updates will be required over a ten (10) business day period in order to reach mutual agreement. The result is the final Records Detailed Design Document that serves as the basis for Records tailoring and for Records validation demonstration. The Records Detailed Design Document will also provide a level of effort estimate for module level modifications and or form development that exceed the scope of standard module tailoring and or not expressly stated as being developed and provided by Motorola. The Consortium may make module PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-19 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 level modifications/develop new forms themselves using the Advanced Configuration Tool (ACT) or contract with Motorola to do this work via the change provision of the Agreement. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Review the Records Detailed Design Document with the Consortium for the purpose of obtaining mutual understanding of the scope of work, levels of effort, work duration, and resources needed to complete the work. 2. Memorialize mutual understanding and agreement of the finalized Records Detailed Design Document via signature. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Review the Records Operational Review Document with Motorola. 2. Memorialize mutual understanding and agreement of the Records Operational Review Document via signature. 3. Request additional Motorola assistance via the change order provision of the Agreement for additional module/form development. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Finalized Detailed Design Document to include: Business Process Flows Field Level Modifications Document Views Security Groups Interface Mappings Data Conversion Mappings Document Workflows Printouts RDLC Reports Data Views Estimated level of effort to develop List of Identified SSRS Reports Short Description Priority Due By \[Training, Go-Live, Post Go-Live <time frame>\] Responsible Party Motorola-developed modules and reports Field demonstration scenario recommendations Provide recommendations to the role based training approach 3.9.3 PremierOne Provisioning PremierOne provisioning includes the configuration of user configurable parameters (unit names, personnel, status codes). The PremierOne system will be provisioned using Motorola standard PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-20 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 provisioning parameters and will incorporate Consortium-specific provisioning. PremierOne provisioning for CAD is defined in the PremierOne CAD File Build Document. Provisioning for Records will be per the Records Operational Review Document. Provisioning activities include instruction of the mechanics and methodologies required to complete system provisioning and provides the Consortium with the required knowledge to complete and maintain system provisioning as required to support the ConsortiumÓs operational needs. On-site Provisioning Training is presented as outlined in the Training Plan for the contracted Products. Consortium-specific provisioning parameters will be collected from the Consortium using Provisioning Export Worksheets. Motorola will review the Provisioning Export Worksheets with the Consortium to identify the information that is required for the Consortium-specific provisioning data tables. The Consortium is responsible for determining the number and type of provisioning profiles (e.g. Law profile, Fire profileÈ) required to support their operation. The Consortium will be responsible for completing the Provisioning Export Worksheets in the proper format and with agency specific information. The information collected in the worksheets will be imported into the system exactly as it is provided by the Consortium. The Consortium will provide the completed Provisioning Export Worksheets within ten business days of receipt so as not to impact the Project Schedule. PremierOne provisioning activities will be completed for each contracted Product included in the system: CAD/Mobile and Records. PremierOne provisioning data collection and import is a critical project Milestone. Delayed, incomplete, or inaccurate information may have a significant impact on the Project Schedule. The responsibility for maintaining the Consortium provisioning will transfer to the Consortium post completion of the Provisioning Training workshop. If the Consortium requires additional Motorola provisioning support, it can be provided via the Change Order provision of the Agreement. 3.9.3.1 PremierOne CAD Provisioning Scenario If PremierOne CAD is a part of the system, the Motorola Application Specialist will complete the following provisioning tasks for CAD. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct a remote review of the standard provisioning database with the Consortium prior to the start of provisioning. 2. Provide and review the Provisioning Export Worksheets with the Consortium. 3. Conduct a conference call with the Consortium to review the completeness of the Provisioning Export Worksheets prior to the start of provisioning. 4. Pre-provision PremierOne CAD per the PremierOne CAD File Build. 5. Modify the CAD user interface with the field level changes (move, hide, label change) identified in the Provisioning Worksheets. 6. Conduct CAD Provisioning Training. 7. Conduct the following three-day remote Check Point sessions: Check Point #1 Follow-up Provisioning Review/Discussion. Check Point #2 Provisioning Review/Handoff/Client Installation Procedures. Check Point #3 Trainer the Trainer Readiness. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-21 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.9.3.2 PremierOne Records Provisioning Scenario If PremierOne Records is a part of the contracted system, provisioning will include the configuration of user configurable parameters (personnel, security groups, and workflows) to support Records operations. PremierOne Records Product provisioning will result in a single provisioning profile for the contracting/primary agency. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Use the information from the Records Detailed Design Document to complete Records tailoring. 2. Complete the import of the data from Provisioning Worksheets. 3. Conduct standard provisioning with base code tables inclusive of NCIC values, and the imported data as identified in the Records Detailed Design, ready for the Consortium to apply Consortium- specific provisioning parameters 4. Conduct a remote demonstration to the Consortium validating the standard provisioning 5. Conduct Records Provisioning Training. 6. Conduct the following four-hour remote Check Point sessions: Check Point #1 Follow-up Provisioning Review/Discussion. Check Point #2 Provisioning Review/Handoff/Client Installation Procedures. Check Point #3 Trainer the Trainer Readiness. 3.9.3.3 PremierOne Provisioning Activities For all provisioning scenarios the Consortium will complete the following tasks for each contracted Product in the system: Consortium Responsibilities 1. Participate in BPR/Operation Design review and provisioning verification sessions. 2. Complete Provisioning Worksheets in accordance with the Project Schedule. 3. Provide Motorola with forms, reports, and templates to be created in PremierOne Records to aid Motorola in developing the Operational Review Document. 4. Provide examples of forms currently being used in the Citation workflow. 5. Attend Provisioning Training prior to commencing with Consortium Provisioning activities 6. Complete GConsortium provisioning activities per the Project Schedule. 7. Review the records Operational Design Document with Motorola (if applicable). 8. Actively participate in provisioning checkpoints. 9. Memorialize mutual understanding and agreement of the Operational Design Document via signature (applicable to PremierOne Records). 10. Complete Consortium specific provisioning activities and maintain the provisioning profiles. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-22 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Updated CAD UI Provisioning Training Provisioning Checkpoints 3.9.3.4 Provisioning Finalization Upon completion of provisioning by the Consortium, Motorola will conduct a working session with the ConsortiumÓs Administrators and desired SMEÓs demonstrating system operation in accordance with Consortium determined provisioning parameters (BPR Workbook and Provisioning Worksheets). The purpose of the session is to enable the Consortium to fine tune provisioning parameters as needed to better align with operational use needs. In this working session, Motorola provides the Consortium with guidance on provisioning options that may better support the Consortium's operational objectives. In order to reinforce provisioning training principles, the Consortium completes any provisioning parameter updates with Motorola guidance as desired. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct an operational walk through of the provisioned system enabling the Consortium to verify the operational behavior of the provisioned system. 2. Consult with the Consortium on provisioning options that better support the Consortiums business operations. 3. Provide guidance on making desired provisioning updates. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Participate in the Provisioning Optimization Session 2. Note desired provisioning updates. 3. Update provisioning tables, as desired. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Completed Provisioning Finalization working session 3.10 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 3.10.1 Hardware Procurement Motorola will procure the system equipment in accordance with the bill of materials. 3.10.2 System Staging System staging provides for the installation of the software components on the hardware procured by Motorola at our staging facility. The system will be tested and verified to be operational in a staged environment. Once validated, the system will be packaged and shipped to the ConsortiumÓs location for installation. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-23 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Motorola Responsibilities 1. Receive the contracted hardware, software, and related components at the Motorola staging facility. 2. Rack and install hardware components. 3.Install and configure system software. 4. Ship staged system to the ConsortiumÓs installation site. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Receive the staged system and securely store it until Motorola installation. 2. Provide acknowledgement of receipt of delivered equipment. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Equipment Inventory Staged System Delivery 3.10.3 On-Site Installation The objective of this activity is to install the system at the ConsortiumÓs site. This activity addresses physical installation activities and system connectivity verification. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Install the staged system in the ConsortiumÓs environment. 2. Conduct a Power On test to validate the installed hardware and software are ready for configuration. 3. Load preliminary provisioning data. 4. Verify contracted software is available and accessible on the installed system. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Validate server room availability and meets the requirements stated in the System Description. 2. Provide power and network connectivity at designated workstation installation locations. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Power On/Installation Verification 3.10.4 Cumulative Updates Motorola may install a Cumulative Update (CU) of the PremierOne software to address contractual requirement(s) following the initial system software installation. A remote demonstration of the newly introduced or modified features/functions will be provided to the Consortium. CU delivery is determined at MotorolaÓs discretion. If a CU that introduces new functionality is delivered following the conclusion of Motorola training, the Consortium may purchase additional training as desired in accordance with the Change Order provisions in the Agreement. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-24 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Motorola Responsibilities 1. Provide release notes. 2. Remotely install CU. 3. Remotely demonstrate any new delivered features as needed. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Witness the demonstration of newly installed features, as required. 2.Provision the additional functionality as desired, based on the release notes. 3. Educate users on new features. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Cumulative Upgrade installation 3.10.5 Client Software Installation Client software will be installed on the CAD/Records workstations/mobile devices to facilitate provisioning training and provide instruction to Consortium personnel who will complete software installation on the remaining workstations/devices. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Verify system readiness. 2. Request client software. 3. Deliver the Pre-Installation Preparation Checklist. 4. Provide instruction on client software installation and install client software on up to five (5) Client workstations and or Mobile devices. 5. Provide instruction on client software deployment utility. 6. Create Records client installation executable(s). 7. Verify Records Mobile client software functionality in offline mode. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide and install 0workstation/mobile device hardware in accordance with specifications. 2. Assign personnel to observe software installation training. 3. Complete installation of client software on remaining workstations and mobile devices. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Pre-Installation Preparation Checklist Installation Guide PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-25 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.11 INTERFACES AND INTEGRATION The installation, configuration, and demonstration of interfaces may be an iterative series of activities depending upon access to third-party systems. Interfaces will be installed and configured in accordance with the System Description and Project Schedule. Integrated functionality between Motorola developed products will be completed through the software installation and provisioning activities described herein. Integration activities that have specific requirements will be completed as outlined in this SOW. 3.11.1 Interface Development Development will be completed in accordance with an interface design document. The Consortium is responsible for engaging third-party vendors if and as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interfaces. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Develop interfaces in accordance with the interface design document. 2. Establish connectivity to external and third-party systems. 3. Configure interfaces to support the functionality described in the interface design document. 4. Demonstrate the interface usability. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendors or systems as required to establish interface connectivity with the Motorola system. 2. Provide personnel proficient with and authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support MotorolaÓs interface installation efforts. 3. Provide network connectivity between PremierOne and third-party systems. NOTE - Unknown circumstances, requirements, and anomalies at the time of initial design can present difficulties in interfacing to some third-party applications. These difficulties could result in a poorly performing or even a nonÎfunctional interface. When information and access to systems is provided, Motorola will be able to mitigate these difficulties. If Motorola mitigation requires additional thirdÎparty integration, application upgrades, API upgrades, and/or additional software licenses, those costs will need to be addressed through the change order provision of the Agreement. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Contracted Interfaces 3.11.2 Interface Deployment Connectivity will be established between the Motorola system and the external and/or third-party systems to which the contracted software will interface. Motorola will configure the system to support each contracted interface. The Consortium is responsible for engaging third-party vendors if and as required to facilitate connectivity and testing of the interfaces. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-26 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Motorola Responsibilities 1. Establish connectivity to external and third-party systems. 2. Configure interfaces to support the functionality described in the System Description and reviewed during the Interface Planning Session. 3.Validate each interface can transmit and/or receive data in accordance with the System Description. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Act as liaison between Motorola and third-party vendors or systems as required to establish interface connectivity with the Motorola system. 2. Provide personnel proficient with and authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support MotorolaÓs interface installation efforts. 3. Provide network connectivity between PremierOne and the third-party systems. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Contracted interfaces and integration 3.11.3 Integration Activities Proprietary processes enable the transfer and receipt of data between Motorola systems as described in the System Description. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Establish and validate connectivity between the Motorola systems. 2. Validate each system can transmit and/or receive data. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide personnel proficient with and authorized to make changes to the network and third-party systems to support MotorolaÓs integration efforts. 2. Provide network connectivity between the Motorola systems. 3.11.4 State Uniform Crime Reporting (UCR)/Incident Based Reporting System (NIBRS)/Interface Motorola will deliver contracted software to support federal UCR/NIBRS reporting requirements. Motorola Responsibilities: 1. Deliver the UCR/NIBRS reporting capability or Develop the state layer reporting capability. 2. Collaborate with the Consortium to understand any provisioning parameters that may be or are impacting UCR/NIBRS submission acceptance in the event of an initial failed submission. 3. Modify the state layer to account for any requirements necessary to be compliant with state specific reporting requirements, as required by the State, and upon receipt of an official state communication. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-27 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Consortium Responsibilities: 1. Serve as the intermediary between Motorola and the State in clarifying reporting requirements between state requirements and PremierOne Records state layer submission functionality. 2. Facilitate any required meetings between Motorola and the State. 3.Initiate a UCR/NIBRS submission to the State. 4. Resolve any provisioning issues impacting State submission acceptance. 5. In the event of a failed submission: a. Communicate the discrepancy in reporting requirement to the State. b.Obtain an official state communication clearly articulating the StateÓs requirement. c. Forward a copy of the official state communication to Motorola Motorola Deliverables Title/Description UCR/NIBRS Reporting 3.11.5 State Crash Report (Traffic Accident Reporting) Motorola will develop the Texas Crash Report and describe additional related forms here. Motorola Responsibilities: 1. Scan hard-copy forms into PremierOne Records and develop Crash Reporting functionality. 2. Integrate the Crash Report and PremierOne Records. 3. Submit the developed forms to gain State acceptance. 4. Collaborate with the Consortium to understand any provisioning parameters that may impact report submission acceptance, in the event of an initial failed submission. 5. Modify the crash report to account for compliance with state specific reporting requirements, as required by the State, and upon receipt of an official state communication. Consortium Responsibilities: 1. Initiate a submission of the Crash Reports to the State. 2. Resolve any provisioning issues that affect State submission acceptance. 3. Serve as the intermediary between Motorola and the State in clarifying reporting requirements between state requirements, Consortium requirements, and PremierOne Records Crash Report submission functionality. 4. Obtain an official state communication clearly articulating the StateÓs requirement. 5. Forward a copy of the official state communication to Motorola. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Texas Crash Report PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-28 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.12 REPORTS AND DASHBOARDS 3.12.1Reports Motorola will deliver the standard reports library and has not included the effort to develop any Consortium-specific or Consortium-defined reports. A list of the standard reports delivered with the installed version will be provided upon request. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description PremierOne Standard Reports 3.12.2 Intelligent Data Discovery The objective of this task is to introduce the functionality available via the Intelligent Data Discovery (IDD) tool. IDD Training will be conducted in accordance with the Training Plan. For CAD: Motorola will review the three (3) standard CAD dashboards and the View Only CAD IDD Bundle for a single agency as described in the System Description, and develop two (2) Consortium- defined dashboards as described in the System Description. For Records: Motorola will review the three (3) standard dashboards for a single agency and develop two (2) Consortium-defined dashboards as described in the System Description. This effort will utilize the ConsortiumÓs existing Microsoft SQL Server licenses and Business Intelligence tools to configure dashboards and data views using data available from the PremierOne environment. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct a two (2) day overview/consultation to review standard dashboards and reports. 2. Define and document requirements for the Consortium-defined dashboards. 3. Create Consortium-defined dashboards based on a list of 50 graphical elements (maps, charts, gauges, etc.) 4. Install the standard and Consortium-defined dashboards. (This task will occur during the IDD training course.) Consortium Responsibilities 1. Perform data entry (incident creation, dispatch, disposition, etc.) to confirm sufficient data exists for reporting. 2. Define requirements for the Consortium-defined dashboards within thirty (30) days of the overview/consultation. 3. Assign resource(s) that have received the CAD SSRS (Ad hoc) Reporting training to participate in the review of the dashboards. 4. Assign resource(s) that have received the Records Ad hoc Reporting training to participate in the initial dashboard consultation and review delivery of the dashboards. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-29 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Dashboards (standard and customer-defined) 3.13SYSTEM TRAINING The objective of this task is to prepare for and deliver the contracted training. Motorola training consists of both computer-based (on-line) and instructor-led (on-site or remote). Training delivery methods vary dependent on course content. Training is delivered in accordance with the Training Plan. 3.13.1Learning eXperience Portal (On-line Training) PremierOne training is made available to Consortium, in part, via MotorolaÓs LXP. This subscription service provides customers with continual access to MotorolaÓs library of on-line learning content and allows your users the benefit of learning at times convenient to them. Content is added and updated on a regular basis to keep information current. Courses delivered or supplemented by LXP content are described in the Training Plan. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Initial set up and addition of administrators. 2. Provide instruction to Consortium LXP Administrators on: a. Adding and maintaining users b. Adding and maintaining Groups c. Assign courses and Learning Paths d. Running reports Consortium Responsibilities 1. Provide Motorola with names (first and last) and emails of Consortium LXP administrators. 2. Provide access to learningservices.motorolasolutions.com. 3.Complete LXP Administrator training. 4. Advise users of the availability of the LXP. 5. Add/modify users, run reports, and add/modify groups. 3.13.2 Instructor-Led Training (On-site and/or Remote/virtual) Motorola Responsibilities 1. Deliver User Guides and training materials in electronic format. 2. Perform training in accordance with the Training Plan. 3. Provide Consortium with training Attendance Rosters and summarize any pertinent observations that may impact end user training. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-30 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Consortium Responsibilities 1. Supply classrooms with a workstation for the instructor and at least one (1) workstation for every two (2) students based on the requirements listed in the Training Plan. 2. Designate training representatives who will work with the Motorola trainers in the development and delivery of training. 3. Conduct/facilitate training of all end users not provided by Motorola in accordance with a Consortium-developed training delivery plan. Motorola Deliverables Title/Description Electronic versions of User Guides and training materials Attendance Rosters 3.13.3 Advanced Configuration Tool The Advanced Configuration Tool (ACT) is an application development tool designed to provide skilled PremierOne Records resources the ability to modify and develop records functionality. Using ACT, trained resources can design the navigation flow for modules and develop application components, such as search fields, data grids, default views, and in-module reports. ACT is also used to modify and develop modules in order to provide functionality to support Consortium-specific business processes. Unlike configuration or provisioning, development done in ACT creates additional database structures and application code. The skilled resource will be familiar with relational database logic, data types, and understand data theory. The skilled resource must understand the agency's end-to-end business operation, anticipate specific reporting needs, and envision the required inputs to support the desired reporting outputs. The Consortium representative(s) will attend ACT training. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Make ACT training available to the Consortium. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Attend the ACT training. NOTE - ACT changes made to the system outside of those captured in the Operational Design Document should be reviewed with the Motorola Application Specialist. Failure to do so prior to making changes using ACT could negatively impact the system and impair MotorolaÓs ability to support the system. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Advanced Configuration Tool Advanced Configuration Training PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-31 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.14 PRODUCT VALIDATION The system is exercised throughout the delivery of the project by both Motorola and the Consortium via provisioning and training activities. To solidify Consortium confidence in the system and prepare for live use operation, Motorola will perform prescribed system validations in accordance with a Product Validation Plan. Note that validation will occur prior to the intial agency go-live at the Consortium. Once validation has successfully been completed, the Consortium may conduct additional tests once each communication center has been brought online. These additional tests will not be staffed by Motorola resources. 3.14.1 Product Validation Plan The objective of this series of tasks is to finalize the activities to be conducted in accordance with the final Project Validation Plan. The Project Validation Plan will be finalized following system provisioning activities. The Project Validation Plan describes the scope and objectives of each type of demonstration executed by Motorola as well as the techniques used during each type of demonstration and the completion criteria. The Consortium may execute their own tests outside the scope of MotorolaÓs demonstration responsibility as desired. The Product Validation Plan covers the following types of demonstrations: Functional Validation Interface Validation Motorola Responsibilities 1. Finalize the Project Validation Plan based on information gathered throughout the project kickoff and provisioning phase of the project. 2. Distribute a copy of the plan to the ConsortiumÓs Project Manager. 3. Review the schedule of demonstration activities. 4. Execute the Product Validation Plan in accordance with the project schedule. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Receive the Project Validation Plan. 2. Review the Project Validation Plan activities. 3. Notify the Motorola Project Manager of any items that require discussion. 4. Initiate any desired user testing. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Product Validation Plan 3.14.2 Functional Validation The objective of Functional Validation is to demonstrate the features and functions of the system in the Consortiums provisioned environment . The functional demonstration may not exercise all PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-32 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 functions of the system, if identified as not being applicable to the ConsortiumÓs operations or for which the system has not been provisioned. The functional demonstration is estimated to span three (3) consecutive business days, on-site, during the ConsortiumÓs regular business hours. The functional demonstration is a critical activity that must occur following the completion of provisioning and no later than the completion of training. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct functional validation according to the Functional Validation Plan. 2. Develop a Remediation Plan for features and functions that do not perform preventing the Consortium from obtaining beneficial use of a module. 3. Manage the Remediation Plan and coordinate Motorola remediation actions. Note: The Remediation Plan will identify the remediation action and the action owner (the Consortium or Motorola). Remediation steps may involve provisioning modifications, system configuration changes and or software version update. Consortium Responsibilities 1. Ensure required resources are present for their specific area of responsibility. 2. Witness the functional demonstration and acknowledge its completion. 3. Participate in developing the Remediation Plan. 4. Coordinate and manage Consortium remediation actions. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Completed Functional Validation Results Remediation Plan 3.14.3 Interface Validation The objective of Interface Validation is to verify that the installed interfaces perform in accordance with ISDs as reviewed during the Interface Planning Session. Motorola is not responsible for issues arising from lack of engagement of third-party and/or Consortium resources to perform work required to enable/provision and/or configure an interface to a third-party system, or troubleshooting any issues on the ConsortiumÓs third-party systems. Interfaces that cannot be tested due to connectivity issues to external systems or the unavailability of any Consortium agencyÓs third-party system will be demonstrated to show that MotorolaÓs portion of an interface is enabled to send and/or receive data that in accordance with the interface ISD. In such cases, Motorola demonstrating the elements within MotorolaÓs control will constitute a successful demonstration and completion of the demonstration task. Motorola Responsibilities 1. Conduct Interface Validation demonstration. 2. Develop a Remediation Plan for anomalies that do not align with the functionality presented in the ISD. 3. Manage the Remediation Plan and take Motorola remediation actions. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-33 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Consortium Responsibilities 1. Ensure required resources are present for their specific area of responsibility. 2. Provide access to a resource with access to the interfacing system to validate functionality. 3. Witness the execution of the demonstration and acknowledge successful completion. 4.Participate in the documentation of anomalies and work with Motorola to develop remediation action(s). 5. Coordinate and manage Consortium remediation actions. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Completed Interface Validation Results Remediation Plan 3.15 GO LIVE 3.15.1 Go Live Planning Motorola will provide support of the ConsortiumÓs efforts with commencing live operational use of the system. Motorola resources are supplemental to Consortium resources and provide support to Consortium trainers and subject matter experts. Consortium trainers and subject matter experts are the first line of support to end users in the transition of live operations from the ConsortiumÓs legacy system to the Motorola system. Motorola will work with the Consortium to develop a detailed Cutover Plan. This plan includes the following information: Motorola and Consortium resources and staffing Pre-cutover tasks/activities to be performed leading up to go live Readiness review meetings Contingency/roll-back plans Go live tasks and responsibilities during and after the live cut Post live cut support resources and schedules Issue reporting process Escalation process Motorola Responsibilities: 1. Facilitate meetings with Consortium staff to develop and document the Cutover Plan. Consortium Responsibilities: 1. Coordinate the participation of Consortium technical and operational staff in cutover planning and development and documentation of the Cutover Plan. Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Cutover Plan PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-34 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.15.2 Motorola Support Engagement As part of go live planning, the Motorola Project Manager will complete a System Configuration workbook consisting of Consortium contact information and information required for remote access to the system. Motorola will schedule a Support Engagement meeting between the Project Manager, Customer Support Manager (ÐCSMÑ), Focal Support Technician and the ConsortiumÓs project team representatives. The CSM will review the Customer Support Plan with the Consortium, including contact information and the process for obtaining support. 3.15.3 Go Live Event In accordance with the Cutover Plan, Motorola and the Consortium will begin transitioning the Consortium from their legacy system to live operation use of the PremierOne system. Motorola will provide on-site support at one (1) communications center (League City) in accordance with the Cutover Plan. Limited remote support is available as the Consortium brings additional Consortium communication centers online. Motorola Responsibilities: 1. Work with the Consortium to schedule the date and time for the go live event. 2. Facilitate the Support Engagement Meeting between the Consortium and the Motorola Support organization. 3. Execute the Cutover Plan. 4. Provide on-site resources as specified in the Go Live Plan to support the ConsortiumÓs System Administrators, Trainers and SMEÓs as they provide first level support to end users. Unless otherwise documented in the Go Live Plan, support will be provided in accordance with the following: (Support commences upon cutover to the respective system.) Starting at Day of Live Cut Motorola Onsite Cutover Resources Product Job Classification Number of Daily Hours of Total # Live Cut Resources Coverage Support Days PremierOne Application 2 162 CAD/Mobile Specialist PremierOne Records Application 2 162 Specialist PremierOne CAD Solutions 1 8 2 and Records Architect Consortium Responsibilities: 1. Coordinate the participation of Consortium technical and operational staff in cutover planning and development and documentation of the Cutover Plan. 2. Identify Trainers and SMEÓs who will serve as first line support to end users during Go Live activities. 3. Manage Go Live activities. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Statement of Work 3-35 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 4. Perform and support the cutover activities defined in the Cutover Plan. 5. Inform Consortium staff about the Customer Support Plan and the process to contact Customer Support. 6. Engage Motorola Motorola Deliverable Title/Description Completion of Go Live Activities 3.15.4 Documentation As part of project completion, Motorola will validate the ConsortiumÓs receipt of electronic copies of the following documentation: User Guides (for the primary products) CAD BPR Workbook Records Operational Review Document System Administration Guide System Configuration Workbook As-Built System Design Documentation As-built system documentation is also archived with the System Support Center along with customer information and access procedures to facilitate efficient response and resolution of any reported system issues. 3.16 PROJECT CLOSURE Ï TRANSITION TO SUPPORT Following the initial Go-Live Event the system is transitioned to the support phase of the contract per the terms and conditions of the Maintenance and Support Agreement. The completion of the final communication center go-live ends the project implementation phase. Motorola and the Consortium certify the Software System Completion milestone and the implementation project is formally closed. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 3-36 Statement of Work Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 SECTION 4 TRAINING PLAN 4.1 COURSE LISTING The following matrix delineates the classes that have been proposed for the PremierOne product line. The matrix includes the number of classes per course type, the maximum number of participants per class and the location of each of the classes. Additional class modules may be obtained by the Consortium for an additional fee. Motorola Solutions offers in-person onsite, virtual, and Learning Management System (ÐLXPÑ) training. Computer-based LXP training is available on demand during the deployment process and for 30 days after live cut. Continued availability of the training module is based on the LXP training package included in the proposal. LXP-P Î students must complete LXP prerequisites before attending in-person training LXP-C Î these training classes are entirely conducted via LXP on demand with no in-person training component LXP-R Î this training offers refresher components that can be taken on demand after the in- person training is completed. Onsite Î in-person training from an onsite instructor conducted at the ConsortiumÓs facilities Virtual Î virtual instructor-led training (class will be recorded and made available for future Customer use) 4.1.1 Technical and Provisioning Training The following training is provided to the ConsortiumÓs provisioning committee (subject matter experts), and Application and System Administrators. Table 4-1: Technical and Provisioning Training Course Module Maximum Number of Total Method of Not To No. Classes Users Instruction Exceed Attendees Included Trained (hours) Per Class per Class PremierOne CAD/Mobile Client All All All LXP-C 4 Installation (201-C) subscribers subscribers subscribers PremierOne CAD/Mobile 8 1 8 Onsite & 80 Provisioning Training (202-O) LXP-R Managing GIS Data with 4 1 4 Onsite 24 PremierOne Import Tool (101- O) PremierOne 4 1 4 LXP-P & 24 CAD/Mobile/Records System Onsite Administrator (103-O) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Course Module Maximum Number of Total Method of Not To No. Classes Users Instruction Exceed Attendees Included Trained (hours) Per Class per Class SSRS Report Builder Training 6 1 6 LXP-P, 24 in PremierOne for CAD/Mobile Onsite & (205-O) LXP-R Intelligent Data Discovery in 6 1 6 LXP-P & 16 PremierOne CAD (206-O) Onsite PremierOne Records 6 1 6 LXP-P & 72 Provisioning Training (301-O) Onsite PremierOne Computer Aided 12 1 12 LXP-P & 32 Dispatch Train-the-Trainer Onsite (203-O) PremierOne Records 4 1 4 Onsite 40 Advanced Configuration Tool (ACT) Training (303-O) SSRS Report Builder Training 6 1 6 LXP-P, 24 in PremierOne for Records Onsite & (305-O) LXP-R Intelligent Data Discovery in 4 1 4 LSM-P & 24 PremierOne Records (306-O) Onsite 4.1.2 Functional Application Training The following training is provided to trainers and end-users in each deployment group. Agencies in these groups will schedule the training to occur close to the scheduled go-live for their respective group. If Galveston County and the Port of Galveston join the consortium and are included in the contract, some realignment of deployment groups may be required. 4.1.2.1 Application Training - Deployment Group 1 Agencies in this group include League City, Dickinson, Kemah, Webster, Nassau Bay, Lakeview and Southeast. CAD Dispatcher end-user training is provided at facilities provided by the Consortium. Table 4-2: Deployment Group 1 Training PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-2 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Course Module Maximum Number Total Method of Not To No. of Users InstructioExceed Attendees Classes Trained n (hours) Included Per Class per Class All All PremierOne Mobile Overview 1 Virtual 2 subscribers subscribers (210-V) PremierOne Mobile Train-the-12 1 12 Onsite 4 Trainer for Law Agencies (211-O) All All All PremierOne Mobile Train-the-LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Trainer for Law Agencies (211-C) All All All PremierOne Mobile End User LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Training for Law Agencies (213-C) Up to PremierOne Computer Aided 15 4 LXP-P, 32 Dispatch End User Training Virtual and 60 (204-O) Onsite PremierOne Records Train-the-12 1 12 LSM-P & 32 Trainer (302-O) Onsite 4.1.2.2 Application Training - Deployment Group 2 Agencies in this group include Galveston, Texas City, La Marque and UTMB, and includes CAD dispatcher end-user training provided at Consortium training facilities. Table 4-3: Deployment Group 2 Training Course Module Maximum Number Total Method of Not To No. of Users InstructioExceed Attendees Classes Trained n (hours) Included Per Class per Class All All PremierOne Mobile Overview Virtual 2 1 subscribers subscribers (210-V) All All All PremierOne Mobile Train-the-LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Trainer for Law Agencies (211-C) All All All PremierOne Mobile End User LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Training for Law Agencies (213-C) Up to PremierOne Computer Aided 15 4 LXP-P, 32 Dispatch End User Training Virtual and 60 (204-O) Onsite PremierOne Records Train-the-12 1 12 LSM-P & 32 Trainer (302-O) Onsite PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-3 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 4.1.2.3 Application Training - Deployment Group 3 Agencies in this group include Sugarland, Friendswood, Alvin and Santa Fe, and includes CAD dispatcher end-user training provided at Consortium training facilities. Table 4-4: Deployment Group 3 Training Course Module Maximum Number Total Method of Not To No. of Users InstructioExceed Attendees Classes Trained n (hours) Included Per Class per Class All All PremierOne Mobile Overview 1 Virtual 2 subscribers subscribers (210-V) All All All PremierOne Mobile Train-the-LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Trainer for Law Agencies (211-C) All All All PremierOne Mobile End User LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Training for Law Agencies (213-C) Up to PremierOne Computer Aided 15 5 LXP-P, 32 Dispatch End User Training Virtual and 75 (204-O) Onsite PremierOne Records Train-the-12 1 12 LSM-P & 32 Trainer (302-O) Onsite 4.1.2.4 Application Training Î Deployment Group 4 Agencies in this group include La Porte, Port of Houston, Deer Park, Seabrooke, MorganÓs Point and Shores Acres. Dispatcher end-user training is provided at Consortium training facilities. Table 4-5: Deployment Group 4 Training Course Module Maximum Number Total Method of Not To No. of Users InstructioExceed Attendees Classes Trained n (hours) Included Per Class per Class All All PremierOne Mobile Overview 1 Virtual 2 subscribers subscribers (210-V) All All All PremierOne Mobile Train-the-LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Trainer for Law Agencies (211-C) All All All PremierOne Mobile End User LXP-C 4 subscribers subscribers subscribers Training for Law Agencies (213-C) Up to PremierOne Computer Aided 15 4 LXP-P, 32 Dispatch End User Training Virtual and 60 (204-O) Onsite PremierOne Records Train-the-12 1 12 LSM-P & 32 Trainer (302-O) Onsite PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-4 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 4.2 TRAINING OVERVIEW Motorola considers training to be an extremely important aspect of the system installation and requires working closely with the Consortium. MotorolaÓs instructors are certified through the Learning and Performance InstituteÓs Trainer Performance Monitoring & Assessment (TPMA) program as well as their Online Learning Facilitators program. Motorola utilizes a Learning Management System for both online and on-site training. The Learning Management System will be demonstrated during the project kick-off. Shortly after kick off the Consortium will designate a Customer Training Representative. This individual will be the contact for the Learning Management System and Motorola trainers. Access to the Learning Management System will be provided to each Customer PremierOne User. The Consortium Training Representative will provide Motorola user names and email addresses so access to the LXP can be completed. The Consortium Training Representative should be familiar with the Consortium's daily operations and must attend (or designate a replacement) each Motorola educational course. Motorola trainers will rely on this representative to be the one point of contact for Motorola staff when policy and procedural questions arise, act as course facilitator, and act as the Consortium's educational monitor. The Consortium will also identify the personnel who will serve as trainers. These individuals must participate in all the Train-the-Trainer courses. In addition to the skills described below, the ConsortiumÓs trainers must have prior experience as a classroom instructor and a thorough understanding of the customer's operations. Other courses will require participants from different areas of the Consortium's operations as shown in the individual course descriptions, detailed in Motorola training course descriptions. 4.2.1 System Administrator The Consortium will appoint a key individual to act as the System Administrator. This individual will be responsible for reporting/verifying problems, completing and maintaining application configuration, and performing system administrative duties such as system back-ups, archives, etc. The designated individual should be proficient in Windows and possess database administration and PC and System knowledge. Motorola strongly recommends that the system administrator(s) be proficient in the prerequisites defined in the document. The Consortium is responsible for ensuring that its system administrators are proficient in the prerequisite technologies. These technologies are embedded in the Motorola applications; however, training in these technologies will not be provided by Motorola. Microsoft Technologies Windows Administration SQL Server 2017 SQL Server Reporting Services System Center 2016 (SCOM) 4.2.2 Training Facilities and Schedules The Consortium shall provide facilities for training courses which are alcohol and smoke-free. Both the classroom and workshop classes will require a projector that can be connected to a PremierOne System workstation, white-board for instructorÓs use and shall accommodate student note taking. The PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-5 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 workshop format also requires multi-monitor student workstations. Students and instructors will dedicate class time to training and will not be subject to interruptions. At least two days prior to each onsite training course, the instructor shall have access to the training facility and all workstations for setup and workstation configuration. All training will be held at the ConsortiumÓs site or online utilizing the Learning Management System; at least two weeks prior to onsite training courses, the Consortium must supply Motorola with a roster of course attendees and they will be provided access to Pre-Requisite training that must be completed prior to the onsite training course start date. Motorola and the Consortium shall mutually agree to training schedules to accommodate the ConsortiumÓs shift operations and other site-specific requirements. Evening courses will end by 11:00 p.m. Weekends and Holidays will not be used as training days. 4.2.2.1 Training Methods and Procedures Motorola offers on-site training and online training both coordinated with the Software Enterprise learning management system. Types of training courses include: Administrative workshops; focused on providing specialized users with in-depth knowledge on the features, operational, and administrative functions of the system. Train the Trainer; instructor-led classroom training that provides key individuals with extensive hands-on use of the system utilizing true-to-life incident scenarios so they can develop and provide training to new users. End User Training; Instructor-led classroom training that provides users with instruction on subject matter relevant to their respective role in using and or supporting the PremierOne System. In addition to facilitated discussion, End User training consist workshop elements where needed, to provide hands on demonstration of the material being presented. Instructor Led virtual online training using the Learning Management System. Online ÐAnytimeÑ training using the Learning Management System. Students have should a typing proficiency of 25 wpm, knowledge of PCs and Microsoft Windows, and have completed course prerequisites as listed in the course descriptions prior to the classroom training. Designated Motorola Instructors will provide application instruction using several techniques and materials. Instructor Lesson Plan: The instructorÓs tool for planning the detailed course content on a module-by-module basis. Training Course Agenda: The student handout that outlines the course sequence of events including duration, and course modules. Worksheets, Job-Aids, Quizzes, retention instructional activities. Training Course Objectives: The instructorÓs predefined course objectives. These are provided for Train-the-Trainer classes only. Evaluations: On the final day of a training class, the students will be asked to complete an Instructor Evaluation form. They are optional forms and anonymity is acceptable. Certificates of Attendance: Students completing the onsite and online classes will receive Certificates of Attendance. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-6 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Attendance Rosters: Customers will provide to the Motorola instructor a roster listing the names of training participants ten (10) days prior to the start of the course. Instructors will complete Attendance Rosters of actual participants for each day of training Prerequisite training for onsite courses using the Learning Management System to provide base knowledge for all students prior to the start of on the onsite class. Motorola PremierOne User Documentation: An electronic copy of the applicable Motorola Reference Manuals and documentation will be provided prior to training. The Consortium is responsible for duplicating and delivering manuals to participating students prior to class commencement. 4.2.3 Training Environment PremierOne has a fully functional second environment that can be used for training. This training environment will enable the Consortium's trainers to provide on-going training. This training environment also allows training to continue without interruption of the real time operations. Use of the training environment is covered in the Train the Trainer classes. 4.2.4 Session Attendance Motorola is committed to providing a quality training experience and desires that the Consortium receives the maximum benefit from each onsite training session. Each training session has been sized to provide the optimal training environment that meets the needs of the students in relation to the complexity of the material being presented. Given the nature of the material being presented and the intensity of the training, it is imperative that maximum course numbers not be exceeded. In the event the number of students in attendance exceeds the published maximum number of students and the list of participants identified on the training roster, Motorola will take corrective action, ensuring the integrity of the session is maintained and the studentÓs ability to learn is protected. Motorola corrective action may include: Delaying the start of training until the number of students in attendance is in line with the maximum number of students allowed for the session. Splitting the class into multiple sessions. In such a case, the Consortium will be charged for multiple occurrences of the class plus additional expenses, including travel related expenses, incurred by Motorola Solutions. Delaying the classroom training until the Prerequisite training has been completed in the LXP by each learner. 4.2.5 Learning Experience Portal (LXP) Requirements The LXP is accessed via internet browser. Motorola will set up an individual instance of the Learning Management System (known as a Panorama) that provides autonomy to the agency utilizing LXP. Accounts to access the LXP are created for each learner using their Email address. All learners accessing LXP content must have an account in the LXP. A learner will need to have access to the internet via workstation, laptop, tablet or smartphone to access learning. These may also be referred to as clients within the LXP. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-7 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Customer LXP Administrators will be given the ability to build Groups, a more granular segmentation of the LXP that is generally utilized to separate learners of like function (i.e. dispatchers, call takers, patrol, firefighter). Leaners can be assigned a Learning Path, a collection of courses that follow a logical order which may or may not enforce linear progress. Audio accompanies visual display; speakers or headsets for listening are recommended. Course assessment evaluations are also accessed via the LXP. Access to these evaluations in the classroom is suggested. 4.2.5.1 LXP Learner Subscription Package Learner-level subscriptions have been included for 2800 personnel who are expected to be users of one or more products. Customer resources will have access to the LXP training materials during deployment and as long as the post-live subscription is maintained during the warranty/maintenance period. Learner level subscriptions allow access to all materials available for the applications included in this Training Plan. Subscription Type Quantity of Subscriptions PremierOne Learning Management System 2800 4.3 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS The following tables provide detailed descriptions of training courses that will be provided as part of the system at the location indicated. Table 4-6: PremierOne CAD/Mobile Client Installation (201-C) Goal: Provide selected personnel with sufficient knowledge to install PremierOne CAD and/or Mobile client software on workstations. Includes prerequisite third- party software. If the customer desires, an imaging solution can be presented. Course LXP-C Materials: Location: On Demand Approximately 1 hour of online training material Duration: IT staff who are responsible for installing workstation software Participants : Class Size: N/A Knowledge of Microsoft operating systems and basic software installation Prerequisite practices : Environmen Each workstation or device must have an internet connection to the LXP t Setup: system PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-8 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-7: PremierOne CAD/Mobile Provisioning Training (202-O) Goal: Provide detailed instruction on Mobile and Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD) provisioning data files. Course PremierOne CAD/Mobile Provisioning Guide Materials: Course Outline Location: CustomerÓs facility Duration: Session 1: 40 hours over five consecutive days onsite Session 2: 40 hours over five consecutive days onsite Approximately 8 hours online prerequisite training Participants: Those responsible for making the decisions on configuration options and have participated in the business process review. Class Size: Maximum of six (6) students Prerequisite: LXP Prerequisite training courses Knowledge of current Mobile and CAD application and configuration and agency SOPs. Microsoft and ESRI proficiency as defined in the Prerequisites Section. Environment One (1) workstation for each participant Setup: Each workstation or device used for LXP prerequisites must have an internet connection CAD workstation for each participant with network connection to the PremierOne servers InstructorÓs workstation(s) Projector White board (if possible) Microsoft Excel should be installed on at least one training workstation PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-9 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-8: Managing GIS Data with PremierOne Import Tool (101-O) Goal: This course offers the skills and practice necessary to use the PremierOne Import tool and create the required databases and mxd docs for CAD and Mobile. The module covers the use of the import tool to build the required File Geodatabase and load to SQL databases for the PremierOne CAD system. CustomerÓs facilities Location: Format: Combined classroom and workshop Course PremierOne GIS System Administrator Training Guide Materials: Up to 24 hours over 3 continuous days Duration: Participants: GIS personnel and GIS System Administrator(s) Class Size: Maximum of 4 students Prerequisite: Computer knowledge and PC skills including DOS and Microsoft Windows, and basic PC functionality. Completion of Windows tutorials or equivalent training. Basic understanding of geographical data and proficient in the use of ArcGIS. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-10 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-9: PremierOne Computer Aided Dispatch Train-the-Trainer (203-O) Goal: Provide selected personnel with sufficient knowledge to support a comprehensive end user training program. Course CAD User Guide Materials: CAD Online Help (accessible through the CAD Client) Course Outline LXP refresher training courses Location: CustomerÓs facility Duration: Up to 32 hours over four consecutive business days onsite Approximately 8 hours of online prerequisite material Instructors who are responsible for the in house training of employees and for Participants: ongoing user training. Class Size: Maximum of twelve (12) students Prerequisite: Knowledge of current CAD application and customer operations. LXP Prerequisite training courses. PremierOne CAD Overview PremierOne CAD/Logging in PremierOne CAD/Logging Out PremierOne CAD/Info Panel PremierOne CAD/Dynamic Help PremierOne CAD/Function Keys PremierOne CAD/Keyboard Shortcuts PremierOne CAD/Command Line Syntax/Punctuation PremierOne CAD/Clearing the Work Area PremierOne CAD/Location Verification Environment Each workstation or device used for LXP prerequisites must have an internet Setup: connection CAD workstation for each participant with network connection to the PremierOne servers InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) NOTE: Allow two weeks from the end of train-the-trainer to the beginning of end user training to allow customer to build site-specific documentation and outline for end user classes. The Motorola Solutions Instructor will be available for remote consultation in producing documentation and outline. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-11 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-10: PremierOne Computer Aided Dispatch End User Training (204-O) Goal: Provide calltakers and dispatchers with the knowledge to effectively use PremierOne CAD Course CAD User Guide Materials: CAD Online Help (accessible through the CAD Client) Course Outline LMS training courses Location: CustomerÓs facility Duration: Up to 8 hours of online prerequisite material must be completed by students prior to start of virtual training. Up to 24 hours of instructor-led training comprised on one (1) 8-hour virtual session, followed by 16 hours of in-person training over two (2) consecutive business days onsite Calltakers, dispatchers, supervisors and other users of the PremierOne CAD Participants: system Class Size: Maximum of fifteen (15) students Prerequisite: Knowledge of current CAD application and customer operations. LMS Prerequisite training courses. PremierOne CAD Overview PremierOne CAD/Logging in PremierOne CAD/Logging Out PremierOne CAD/Info Panel PremierOne CAD/Dynamic Help PremierOne CAD/Function Keys PremierOne CAD/Keyboard Shortcuts PremierOne CAD/Command Line Syntax/Punctuation PremierOne CAD/Clearing the Work Area PremierOne CAD/Location Verification Environment Each workstation or device used for LMS prerequisites must have an internet Setup: connection CAD workstation for each participant with network connection to the PremierOne servers InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-12 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-11: PremierOne Mobile Overview (210-V) Provide a virtual instructor-led overview demonstration of the use of the Goal: PremierOne Mobile client. Course None Materials: Up to 2 hours in a single business day Duration: Participants: Any who will use the PremierOne Mobile client Class Size: No maximum Knowledge of current Mobile application and customer operations. Prerequisite: Environment InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Setup: Table 4-12: PremierOne Mobile Train-the-Trainer for Law Agencies (211-O) Provide selected personnel with sufficient knowledge to support a Goal: comprehensive end user training program. Course PremierOne Mobile User Guide Materials: Course Outline Duration: Up to 4 hours in a single business day Participants: Instructors who are responsible for the in-house training of employees and for ongoing user training. Class Size: Maximum of twelve (12) students Knowledge of current Mobile application and customer operations. Prerequisite: Environment A workstation or device for each participant with network connection Setup: InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-13 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-13: PremierOne Mobile Train-the-Trainer for Law Agencies (211-C) Provide selected personnel with sufficient knowledge to support a Goal: comprehensive end user training program. Course PremierOne Mobile User Guide Materials: Mobile End User Courses (Access to courses for functionality not being utilized can be restricted if requested.) PremierOne Mobile/Overview and Navigation PremierOne Mobile/Logging In PremierOne Mobile Logging Off PremierOne Mobile/Status Monitors PremierOne Mobile/Monitored Areas/Agencies PremierOne Mobile/Viewing and Updating Incidents PremierOne Mobile/Traffic Stops PremierOne Mobile/Unit Status PremierOne Mobile/Closing an Incident PremierOne Mobile/Incident Searches PremierOne Mobile/Syncing Mobile PremierOne Mobile/Field Initiated Incidents PremierOne Mobile/Incident Recall PremierOne Mobile/Follow Me Settings PremierOne Mobile/Incident Persons and Vehicles PremierOne Mobile/Premise Hazards PremierOne Mobile/Self Dispatching PremierOne Mobile/Queries PremierOne Mobile/Editing Capabilities and Skills PremierOne Mobile/Error Reports PremierOne Mobile/Assigning Report Number(s) PremierOne Mobile/Contractors PremierOne Mobile/Stacked Incidents PremierOne Mobile/Mapping PremierOne Mobile/Lock and Unlocking Session PremierOne Mobile/Switch Users PremierOne Mobile/Change Roles PremierOne Mobile/Incident Attachments PremierOne Mobile/Messaging PremierOne Mobile/Command Line PremierOne Mobile/Mobile Speech Location: On Demand Duration: Approximately 4 hours of online prerequisite training material Instructors who are responsible for the in house training of employees and for Participants: ongoing user training. Available to all LXP subscribers. Prerequisite: Knowledge of current Mobile application and customer operations. Environment Each workstation or device used for LXP courses must have an internet Setup: connection PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-14 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-14: PremierOne Mobile End User Training for Law Agencies (213-C) Goal: Self-paced end user training on the PremierOne Mobile client available through the Learning Management System Course PremierOne Mobile User Guide Materials: Mobile End User Courses (Access to courses for functionality not being utilized can be restricted if requested.) PremierOne Mobile/Overview and Navigation PremierOne Mobile/Logging In PremierOne Mobile Logging Off PremierOne Mobile/Status Monitors PremierOne Mobile/Monitored Areas/Agencies PremierOne Mobile/Viewing and Updating Incidents PremierOne Mobile/Traffic Stops PremierOne Mobile/Unit Status PremierOne Mobile/Closing an Incident PremierOne Mobile/Incident Searches PremierOne Mobile/Syncing Mobile PremierOne Mobile/Field Initiated Incidents PremierOne Mobile/Incident Recall PremierOne Mobile/Follow Me Settings PremierOne Mobile/Incident Persons and Vehicles PremierOne Mobile/Premise Hazards PremierOne Mobile/Self Dispatching PremierOne Mobile/Queries PremierOne Mobile/Editing Capabilities and Skills PremierOne Mobile/Error Reports PremierOne Mobile/Assigning Report Number(s) PremierOne Mobile/Contractors PremierOne Mobile/Stacked Incidents PremierOne Mobile/Mapping PremierOne Mobile/Lock and Unlocking Session PremierOne Mobile/Switch Users PremierOne Mobile/Change Roles PremierOne Mobile/Incident Attachments PremierOne Mobile/Messaging PremierOne Mobile/Command Line PremierOne Mobile/Mobile Speech On Demand Location: Duration: Approximately 4 hours of online training material Participants: Available to all LXP subscribers. Knowledge of current Mobile application and customer operations. Prerequisite: Environment Each workstation or device used for LXP courses must have an internet Setup: connection PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-15 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-15: PremierOne CAD/Mobile/Records System Administrator Training (103-O) Provides practical techniques for system administration and maintenance of Goal: the CAD, Mobile and Records components of the PremierOne system. Course PremierOne System Administration Guide Materials: Course Outline Location: CustomerÓs facility Up to 24 hours over three consecutive business days Duration: Participants: System Administrators - personnel responsible for the day-to-day management of the system. Class Size: Maximum of four (4) students Prerequisite: LXP pre-class testing to determine if the student has the appropriate skill levels LXP prerequisite training courses Knowledge of customer site network, IT policies and operations. Microsoft proficiency as defined in the Prerequisites Section. Environment Each workstation or device used for LXP prerequisites must have an internet Setup: connection InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection to the PremierOne servers Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-16 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-16: SSRS Report Builder Training in PremierOne CAD/Mobile (205-O) Goal: Provide selected personnel with knowledge on how to create custom reports against the PremierOne Reporting Data Warehouse using MicrosoftÓs SQL Server Reporting Service (SSRS) software. SSRS Training Guide Course Materials: CustomerÓs facility Location: Duration: Up to 24 hours over three consecutive business days Personnel who will create custom reports Participants: Class Size: Maximum of six (6) students Prerequisite: Class participants must have some knowledge/experience of creating Ðon demandÑ reports Class participants should have experience working with relational database structures as well as writing and understanding transact SQL code. Environment Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is installed, configured, and Setup: working CAD TTT or End User Training courses have already been conducted Data pre-exists in the Reporting Data Warehouse (data is typically propagated during the TTT course) All training workstations are installed with Microsoft IE browser, as Motorola has found some features do not work properly when using other browsers and training is conducted using IE only. InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-17 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-17: Intelligent Data Discovery in PremierOne CAD (206-O) Provide selected personnel with knowledge to create Business Intelligence Goal: dashboards in PremierOne using SQL Server Reporting Services tools (SSRS). Reporting and Analytics Intelligent Data Discovery Training Guide Course Materials: Location: CustomerÓs facility Up to 16 hours over two consecutive business days. Duration: Participants: Personnel who will be responsible for building Business Intelligence Dashboards and reports used for statistical analysis. Class Size: Maximum of six(6) students Prerequisite: Participation in ÐSSRS Reporting Training for PremierOne CADÑ. Experience in creating Reports using Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services. Familiarity with T-SQL statements for querying data within a SQL Server database Completion of LXP Refresher training courses for SSRS Report Builder Training Environment Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is installed, configured, and Setup: working. Workstations installed with Microsoft IE browser (training is conducted using IE only, as some features do not work properly when using other browsers). All Training workstations are installed with SQL Server Management Studio. Existing data in the Reporting Data Warehouse (data is typically propagated during the TTT course) InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-18 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-18: PremierOne Records Provisioning Training (301-O) Goal: Provide selected personnel with sufficient knowledge to configure PremierOne Records to meet the agencyÓs needs, including security, agency code tables, personnel, and other administrator items Course PremierOne Records Provisioning Guide Materials: LXP prerequisite training courses Course Outline CustomerÓs facility Location: Duration: Session 1: Up to 24 hours over three consecutive business days Session 2: Up to 24 hours over three consecutive business days Session 3: Up to 24 hours over three consecutive business days Participants: Administrators who are responsible for configuring agency information Class Size: Maximum of six (6) students Knowledge of current business practices Prerequisite: LXP Prerequisite training courses Environment Each workstation or device used for LXP prerequisites must have an internet Setup: connection Records workstation for each participant with network connection to the PremierOne servers InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) NOTE: Allow at least four weeks from the end of provisioning training to perform the necessary work prior to the PremierOne Records Train-the-Trainer classes This course can be broken down into modules based on which personnel need to be in attendance. There will also be working sessions to aid the Agency with proper provisioning PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-19 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-19: PremierOne Records Train-the-Trainer (302-O) Provide selected personnel with sufficient knowledge to support a Goal: comprehensive end user training program. Course PremierOne Users Guide Materials: LXP prerequisite training courses Course Outline Location: CustomerÓs facility Duration: Up to 32 hours over four consecutive business days Instructors who are responsible for the in house training of employees and for Participants: ongoing user training. Class Size: Maximum of twelve (12) students Prerequisite: Knowledge of current FBR application and customer operations LXP Prerequisite training courses Environment Each workstation or device used for LXP prerequisites must have an internet Setup: connection Records workstation for each participant with network connection to the PremierOne servers InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) NOTE: Allow two weeks from the end of train-the-trainer to the beginning of end user training to allow customer to build site-specific documentation and outline for end user classes. The Motorola Solutions Instructor will be available for remote consultation in producing documentation and outline. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-20 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-20: PremierOne Records Advanced Configuration Tool (ACT) Training (303-O) Goal: To learn to make user interface (UI) modifications in PremierOne Records using the Advanced Configuration Tool (ACT). ACT is a development tool provided for the CustomerÓs use to make changes to forms, printouts, and navigation. The class will provide guidelines for the allowable changes. Course PremierOne Records Advanced Configuration Guide Materials: Course Outline Location: CustomerÓs facility Duration: 40 hours Personnel responsible for system configuration Participants: Class Size: Maximum of four (4) students Prerequisite: Knowledge of current Records application and customer operations. Participants should have a working knowledge of computer systems. Database knowledge is preferable. Environment A workstation for each participant with network connection Setup: InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) This training will include hands on work with the on-site trainer to help NOTE: configure the application. Not all configuration may be accomplished during class, so please allow additional time after the end of training in order to configure the application further. This class is not an extension of the PremierOne Records Provisioning class, and requires an advanced level of expertise. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-21 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-21: SSRS Report Builder Training in PremierOne Records (305-O) Provide selected personnel with knowledge on how to create custom reports Goal: against the PremierOne Reporting Data Warehouse using MicrosoftÓs SQL Server Reporting Service (SSRS) software. SSRS Training Guide Course Materials: Location: CustomerÓs facility Up to 24 hours over three consecutive business days Duration: Participants: Personnel who will create custom reports Class Size: Maximum of six (6) students Prerequisite: Class participants must have some knowledge/experience of creating Ðon demandÑ reports Class participants should have experience working with relational database structures as well as writing and understanding transact SQL code. Environment Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is installed, configured, and Setup: working CAD TTT or End User Training courses have already been conducted Data pre-exists in the Reporting Data Warehouse (data is typically propagated during the TTT course) All training workstations are installed with Microsoft IE browser, as Motorola has found some features do not work properly when using other browsers and training is conducted using IE only. InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 4-22 Training Plan Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Table 4-22: Intelligent Data Discovery (IDD) Training in PremierOne Records (306-O) Goal: Provide selected personnel with knowledge to create Business Intelligence dashboards and analytical reports in PremierOne using SSRS. Course Reporting and Analytics Intelligent Data Discovery Training Guide for Records Materials: Location: CustomerÓs facility Duration: Up to 16 hours over two consecutive business days. Participants: Personnel who will create Business Intelligence Dashboards or reports used for statistical analysis Class Size: Maximum of six (6) students Prerequisite: Participation in ÐSSRS Reporting Training for PremierOne RecordsÑ. Completion of LXP Refresher training courses for SSRS. Experience in creating Reports using Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services. Familiarity with T-SQL statements for querying data within a SQL Server database. Environment Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services is installed, configured, and Setup: working All training workstations are installed with Microsoft IE browser, as Motorola has found some features do not work properly when using other browsers and training is conducted using IE only. All Training workstations are installed with SQL Server Management Studio. Data pre-exist in the Reporting Data Warehouse (data is typically propagated during the TTT course) InstructorÓs workstation(s) with network connection Projector White board (if possible) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Training Plan 4-23 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 SECTION 5 PREMIERONE GIS REQUIREMENTS 5.1 OVERVIEW This document contains information regarding Motorola PremierOne GIS data requirements. A Geographic Information System (GIS) is a system used to collect, manage, analyze, and display geographic data. This document is intended for use by personnel who are responsible for administering the GIS components of the PremierOne suite. System administration requires an understanding of both current agency system administration rules and procedures and how PremierOne functions. 5.2 GIS DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR BASIC FUNCTIONALITY 5.2.1 Street Centerline Street Centerlines are features that are geometrically represented as lines which represent an imaginary line running lengthwise along the center of street segments. Street segments are typically portions of a street that are bound on either side by an intersection with another street segment or dead end (cul-de-sac). A source feature class containing street centerlines must contain the following fields: Left Low House Left High House Right Low House Right High House Street Name Parts Fields (may include parsed fields or may be stored entirely in a single concatenated field). Left Subdivision (optional) Right Subdivision (optional) Left City Right City Left Zip Code Right Zip Code State Description (optional) Low Cross Street Override (optional) High Cross Street Override (optional) Cross Street Bypass (optional) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions PremierOne GIS Requirements 5-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Ў͵Ћ͵Ћ Common Place Location Points Common Places are features that are represented geometrically by a point which represents the precise map location associated with a specific place. The difference between a Common Place and an Address Point is that Common Places are used for locations that are more commonly referred to by name rather than address. Not all Common Places will have an address associated with them (mile markers, call boxes, recreational points of interest etc.). A source feature class containing common place points must contain the following fields: Place Name Place Type (optional) Address (optional) Subhouse (optional) Building (optional) City Subdivision (optional) Zip Code State 5.2.2.1 Address Point Feature Class Address Points are features that are represented geometrically by a point which represents the precise map location associated with a specific address. A source feature class containing address points must contain the following fields: Address Subhouse (optional) Building (optional) City Subdivision (optional) Description (optional) Zip Code State Ў͵Ћ͵Ќ Response Boundary(s) Response Boundaries are features that are represented geometrically by a polygon (area) which represent the smallest named geographic areas used to determine which agency and beat-assigned resources are responsible for responding to incidents created within a specific area. Each response boundary feature is specific to a single agency. A Response Boundary data sourcer requires the following attributes: Boundary Name Agency ID PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 5-2 PremierOne GIS Requirements Motorola Solutions Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Ў͵Ћ͵Ѝ Optional Support Tables 5.2.4.1 Street Name Alias Table Street name aliases must be maintained in a separate table. This table must contain at a minimum the real street name, the associated alias street name as well as the City ID. 5.2.4.2 Common Place Alias Table Common place aliases may reside in the common place feature class or they may be maintained in a separate table. If alias data resides in a separate table the table must contain both the real common place name and the associated alias name. Ў͵Ћ͵Ў Additional Boundary Data Types Ў͵Ћ͵Џ Contractor Boundary Contractor Boundaries are polygon (area) features which represent the geographical area used to define contractor rotations. Each contractor boundary feature is specific to a single agency. A contractor boundary data source requires the following attributes: Boundary Name Agency ID Contractor Type 5.2.7 Reporting District Map Book Page boundaries are polygon (area) features which represent the geographical areas defined in a paper map book. Typically, these polygons are square or rectangular depending on the pages of the physical map book. Reporting District boundaries is specific to a single agency. A Map Book boundary data source requires the following attributes: Map Book Name Page Number Field (optional) Grid Reference 5.2.8 Map Book Map Book Page boundaries are polygon (area) features which represent the geographical areas defined in a paper map book. Typically, these polygons are square or rectangular depending on the pages of the physical map book. Map Book Page boundaries are not specific to agency. A Map Book boundary data source requires the following attributes: PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions PremierOne GIS Requirements 5-3 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Map Book Name Page Number Field (optional) Grid Reference 5.2.9Premise Hazard Areas Premise Hazard Areas are polygon (area) features which represent geographical areas associated with specific premise/hazard information. The initial use case for Premise Hazard areas was for the purpose of associating gate codes with incidents created within gated communities. Premise Hazards are not specific to agency. A Premise Hazard Area data source requires the following attributes: Area Name Area Description (optional) PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A 5-4 PremierOne GIS Requirements Motorola Solutions SECTION 6 PROPOSAL PRICING Motorola pricing is based on a complete system solution. The addition or deletion of any component(s) may subject the total system price to modifications. The proposal is priced as a single system. All prices and discounts are given as a bundle purchase. 6.1 DEVELOPMENT GROUP 1 PRICING League City Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 8 $116,000 $116,000 CAD Low Use 5 $6,000 $6,000 Licenses CAD Mobile 170 $157,420 $157,420 RMS Licenses 100 $75,000 $75,000 RMS Mobile 100 $75,000 $75,000 Interface Fees $39,200 $39,200 Hardware/Software $155,751 $155,694 Implementation $393,052 $356,127 Total $1,017,423 $980,441 Software/Hardware Discount $382,767 $352,055 PremierOne Pricing $634,656 $628,336 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 150 $114,750 $114,750 CC Responder 25 $10,382 $10,382 eCitation PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-1 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Description Count List Price List Price Integrated Call Control 8 $110,352 $110,352 Astro25 Responder 400 $160,000 $160,000 Location GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $97,291 $87,433 Year 3 $102,871 $98,992 Year 4 $105,678 $103,320 Year 5 $111,058 $109,511 Year 6 $116,729 $105,316 Year 7 $110,572 $109,763 Year 8 $116,484 $115,914 Year 9 $123,317 $122,049 Year 10 $131,751 $128,165 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Annual Maintenance Pricing Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld $4,375 Warranty Warranty Year 1 Warranty Included $4,375 $15,840 $3,448 Year 2 Year 3 Included $4,375 $16,632 $3,660 Included $4,375 $17,464 $3,824 Year 4 Included $4,375 $18,336 $4,016 Year 5 Year 6 Included $4,375 $19,256 $4,216 Year 7 Included $4,375 $20,216 $4,428 Included $4,375 $21,227 $4,648 Year 8 Year 9 Included $4,375 $22,288 $4,880 Included $4,375 $23,403 $5,124 Year 10 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-2 Dickinson Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 3 $43,500 $43,500 CAD Low Use 8 $9,600 $9,600 Licenses CAD Mobile 25 $23,150 $23,150 RMS Licenses 38 $28,500 $28,500 RMS Mobile 21 $15,750 $15,750 Interface Fees $28,000 $28,000 Hardware/Software $43,770 $44,135 Implementation $110,457 $100,952 Total $302,727 $289,456 Software/Hardware Discount $107,567 $99,812 PremierOne Pricing $195,160 $193,775 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 27 $20,655 $20,655 CC Responder 18 $7,475 $7,475 eCitation Integrated Call Control 3 $41,382 $41,382 Astro25 Responder 100 $40,00 $40,00 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-3 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $27,341 $24,785 Year 3 $28,909 $28,062 Year 4 $29,698 $29,288 Year 5 $31,210 $31,043 Year 6 $32,804 $29,854 Year 7 $31,073 $31,115 Year 8 $32,735 $32,858 Year 9 $34,655 $34,597 Year 10 $37,025 $36,331 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $3,150 Warranty Warranty $3,150 $5,940 $862 Year 2 Included $3,150 $6,237 $915 Year 3 Included Year 4 $3,150 $6,549 $956 Included $3,150 $6,876 $1,004 Year 5 Included $3,150 $7,221 $1,054 Year 6 Included Year 7 $3,150 $7,581 $1,107 Included $3,150 $7,960 $1,162 Year 8 Included $3,150 $8,358 $1,220 Year 9 Included Year 10 $3,150 $8,776 $1,281 Included PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-4 Kemah Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 2 $29,000 $29,000 CAD Low Use 3 $3,600 $3,600 Licenses CAD Mobile 7 $6,482 $6,482 RMS Licenses 10 $7,500 $7,500 RMS Mobile 7 $5,250 $5,250 Interface Fees $19,600 $19,600 Hardware/Software $19,705 $19,603 Implementation $49,726 $44,839 Total $140,863 $135,874 Software/Hardware Discount $48,425 $44,332 PremierOne Pricing $92,438 $91,541 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 5 $3,825 $3,825 CC Responder 7 $2,907 $2,907 eCitation Integrated Call Control 2 $27,588 $27,588 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-5 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $12,309 $11,008 Year 3 $13,015 $12,464 Year 4 $13,370 $13,009 Year 5 $14,050 $13,788 Year 6 $14,768 $13,260 Year 7 $13,989 $13,820 Year 8 $14,737 $14,594 Year 9 $15,601 $15,367 Year 10 $16,668 $16,137 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Handheld Year 1 Warranty $1,225 Warranty $1,225 $3,960 Year 2 Included Included $1,225 $4,158 Year 3 Year 4 Included $1,225 $4,366 Included $1,225 $4,584 Year 5 Included $1,225 $4,814 Year 6 Year 7 Included $1,225 $5,054 Included $1,225 $5,307 Year 8 Included $1,225 $5,572 Year 9 Year 10 Included $1,225 $5,851 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-6 Webster Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 4 $58,000 $58,000 CAD Low Use 2 $2,400 $2,400 Licenses CAD Mobile 40 $37,040 $37,040 RMS Licenses 30 $33,750 $33,750 RMS Mobile 11 $22,500 $22,500 Interface Fees $30,800 $30,800 Hardware/Software $59,824 $60,248 Implementation $150,972 $137,808 Total $395,286 $382,546 Software/Hardware Discount $147,022 $136,252 PremierOne Pricing $248,265 $246,294 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 9 $6,885 $6,885 CC Responder 10 $4,153 $4,153 eCitation Integrated Call Control 4 $55,175 $55,175 Astro25 Responder 85 $34,000 $34,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-7 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $37,370 $33,833 Year 3 $39,513 $38,306 Year 4 $40,591 $39,981 Year 5 $42,657 $42,377 Year 6 $44,836 $40,754 Year 7 $42,471 $42,474 Year 8 $44,742 $44,855 Year 9 $47,366 $47,229 Year 10 $50,606 $49,595 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $1,750 Warranty Warranty $1,750 $7,920 $733 Year 2 Included Included $1,750 $8,316 $778 Year 3 Year 4 Included $1,750 $8,732 $813 Included $1,750 $9,168 $853 Year 5 Included $1,750 $9,628 $896 Year 6 Year 7 Included $1,750 $10,108 $941 Included $1,750 $10,614 $988 Year 8 Included $1,750 $11,144 $1,037 Year 9 Year 10 Included $1,750 $11,701 $1,089 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-8 Nassau Bay Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 1 $14,500 $14,500 CAD Low Use Licenses CAD Mobile 11 $10,186 $10,186 RMS Licenses 2 $1,500 $1,500 RMS Mobile 10 $7,500 $7,500 Interface Fees $2,800 $2,800 Hardware/Software $17,953 $17,989 Implementation $45,305 $41,147 Total $99,744 $95,622 Software/Hardware Discount $44,120 $40,683 PremierOne Pricing $55,624 $54,940 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 7 $5,355 $5,355 CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 1 $13,794 $13,794 Astro25 Responder 16 $6,400 $6,400 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-9 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $11,214 $10,102 Year 3 $11,857 $11,438 Year 4 $12,181 $11,938 Year 5 $12,801 $12,653 Year 6 $13,455 $12,168 Year 7 $12,745 $12,682 Year 8 $13,427 $13,393 Year 9 $14,214 $14,102 Year 10 $15,186 $14,808 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Warranty Warranty Year 2 Included $1,980 $138 Included Year 3 $2,079 $146 Included Year 4 $2,183 $153 Included Year 5 $2,292 $161 Included Year 6 $2,407 $169 Included Year 7 $2,527 $177 Included Year 8 $2,653 $186 Included Year 9 $2,786 $195 Included Year 10 $2,925 $205 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-10 Lakeview Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses CAD Low Use 1 $1,200 $1,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 8 $7,408 $7,408 RMS Licenses 7 $5,250 $5,250 RMS Mobile 8 $6,000 $6,000 Interface Fees $2,800 $2,800 Hardware/Software $8,677 $8,693 Implementation $21,896 $19,883 Total $53,231 $51,234 Software/Hardware Discount $21,323 $19,659 PremierOne Pricing $31,908 $31,575 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 5 $3,825 $3,825 CC Responder 5 $2,076 $2,076 eCitation Integrated Call Control Astro25 Responder 16 $6,400 $6,400 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-11 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $5,420 $4,882 Year 3 $5,731 $5,527 Year 4 $5,887 $5,769 Year 5 $6,187 $6,114 Year 6 $6,503 $5,880 Year 7 $6,160 $6,128 Year 8 $6,489 $6,472 Year 9 $6,870 $6,814 Year 10 $7,340 $7,156 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld $875 Warranty Year 1 Warranty $875 Year 2 Included $138 Year 3 Included $875 $146 Included $875 Year 4 $153 Included $875 Year 5 $161 Year 6 Included $875 $169 Included $875 Year 7 $177 Included $875 Year 8 $186 Year 9 Included $875 $195 Year 10 Included $875 $205 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-12 City of Galveston Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price GRID w/Galveston PremierOne Pricing Consortium County CAD Licenses 7 $101,500 $101,500 CAD Low Use 4 $4,800 $4,800 Licenses CAD Mobile 105 $97,230 $97,230 RMS Licenses 75 $56,250 $56,250 RMS Mobile 85 $63,750 $63,750 Interface Fees $22,400 $22,400 Hardware/Software $237,768 $238,602 Implementation $600,029 $545,767 Total $1,183,727 $1,130,298 Software/Hardware Discount $584,328 $539,603 PremierOne Pricing $599,399 $590,696 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder 7 $2,907 $2,907 eCitation Integrated Call Control 6 $82,764 $82,764 Astro25 Responder 200 $80,000 $80,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-13 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $148,523 $133,991 Year 3 $157,041 $151,706 Year 4 $161,327 $158,339 Year 5 $169,539 $167,826 Year 6 $178,197 $161,398 Year 7 $168,798 $168,213 Year 8 $177,823 $177,639 Year 9 $188,254 $187,041 Year 10 $201,129 $196,414 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 $1,225 Warranty Warranty $1,225 Year 2 $11,880 $1,724 $1,225 Year 3 $12,474 $1,830 Year 4 $1,225 $13,098 $1,912 $1,225 Year 5 $13,752 $2,008 $1,225 Year 6 $14,442 $2,108 Year 7 $1,225 $15,162 $2,214 $1,225 Year 8 $15,920 $2,324 $1,225 Year 9 $16,716 $2,440 Year 10 $1,225 $17,552 $2,562 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-14 La Marque Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 4 $58,000 $58,000 CAD Low Use 2 $2,400 $2,400 Licenses CAD Mobile 30 $27,780 $27,780 RMS Licenses 24 $18,000 $18,000 RMS Mobile 30 $22,500 $22,500 Interface Fees $16,800 $16,800 Hardware/Software $49,871 $50,045 Implementation $125,854 $114,469 Total $321,205 $309,994 Software/Hardware Discount $122,561 $113,177 PremierOne Pricing $198,644 $196,817 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 3 $2,295 $2,295 CC Responder 7 $2,907 $2,907 eCitation Integrated Call Control 2 $27,588 $27,588 Astro25 Responder 43 $17,200 $17,200 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-15 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $31,152 $28,103 Year 3 $32,939 $31,819 Year 4 $33,838 $33,210 Year 5 $35,560 $35,200 Year 6 $37,376 $33,852 Year 7 $35,405 $35,281 Year 8 $37,298 $37,258 Year 9 $39,486 $39,230 Year 10 $42,186 $41,196 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $1,225 Warranty Warranty $1,225 Year 2 Included $3,960 $371 Included $1,225 Year 3 $4,158 $393 Year 4 Included $1,225 $4,366 $411 Included $1,225 Year 5 $4,584 $432 Included $1,225 Year 6 $4,814 $453 Year 7 Included $1,225 $5,054 $476 Included $1,225 Year 8 $5,307 $500 Included $1,225 Year 9 $5,572 $525 Year 10 Included $1,225 $5,851 $551 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-16 UTMB Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 2 $29,000 $29,000 CAD Low Use 1 $1,200 $1,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 16 $14,816 $14,816 RMS Licenses 20 $15,000 $15,000 RMS Mobile 16 $12,000 $12,000 Interface Fees $14,000 $14,000 Hardware/Software $41,196 $41,376 Implementation $103,962 $94,641 Total $231,174 $222,032 Software/Hardware Discount $101,241 $93,572 PremierOne Pricing $129,932 $128,460 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control Astro25 Responder 90 $36,000 $36,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-17 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $25,733 $23,235 Year 3 $27,209 $26,307 Year 4 $27,952 $27,457 Year 5 $29,375 $29,102 Year 6 $30,875 $27,988 Year 7 $29,246 $29,170 Year 8 $30,810 $30,804 Year 9 $32,617 $32,434 Year 10 $34,848 $34,060 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $776 Year 3 $824 Year 4 $860 Year 5 $904 Year 6 $949 Year 7 $996 Year 8 $1,046 Year 9 $1,098 Year 10 $1,153 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-18 Texas City Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 4 $58,000 $58,000 CAD Low Use 1 $1,200 $1,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 93 $86,118 $86,118 RMS Licenses 31 $23,250 $23,250 RMS Mobile 70 $52,500 $52,500 Interface Fees $33,600 $33,600 Hardware/Software $173,073 $172,285 Implementation $436,764 $394,077 Total $864,505 $821,031 Software/Hardware Discount $425,336 $389,627 PremierOne Pricing $439,169 $431,404 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 46 $35,190 $35,190 CC Responder 15 $6,229 $6,229 eCitation Integrated Call Control 3 $41,382 $41,382 Astro25 Responder 200 $118,400 $118,400 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-19 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $108,111 $96,750 Year 3 $114,311 $109,541 Year 4 $117,431 $114,330 Year 5 $123,409 $121,181 Year 6 $129,711 $116,539 Year 7 $122,869 $121,460 Year 8 $129,439 $128,266 Year 9 $137,031 $135,055 Year 10 $146,403 $141,823 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $2,625 Warranty Warranty $2,625 Year 2 Included $5,940 $1,724 Included $2,625 Year 3 $6,237 $1,830 Year 4 Included $2,625 $6,549 $1,912 Included $2,625 Year 5 $6,876 $2,008 Included $2,625 Year 6 $7,221 $2,108 Year 7 Included $2,625 $7,581 $2,214 Included $2,625 Year 8 $7,960 $2,324 Included $2,625 Year 9 $8,358 $2,440 Year 10 Included $2,625 $8,776 $2,562 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-20 Jamaica Beach Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses CAD Low Use Licenses CAD Mobile 5 $4,630 $4,630 RMS Licenses RMS Mobile Interface Fees Hardware/Software $8,615 $8,629 Implementation $21,740 $19,738 Total $34,985 $32,997 Software/Hardware Discount $21,171 $19,515 PremierOne Pricing $13,814 $13,482 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control Astro25 Responder Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-21 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $5,381 $4,846 Year 3 $5,690 $5,487 Year 4 $5,845 $5,726 Year 5 $6,143 $6,070 Year 6 $6,456 $5,837 Year 7 $6,116 $6,084 Year 8 $6,443 $6,424 Year 9 $6,821 $6,765 Year 10 $7,287 $7,103 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-22 Friendswood Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 3 $43,500 $43,500 CAD Low Use 6 $7,200 $7,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 80 $74,050 $74,050 RMS Licenses 30 $22,500 $22,500 RMS Mobile 55 $41,250 $41,250 Interface Fees $25,200 $25,200 Hardware/Software $114,062 $113,776 Implementation $287,847 $260,247 Total $615,639 $587,753 Software/Hardware Discount $280,315 $257,308 PremierOne Pricing $335,324 $330,446 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 10 $7,650 $7,650 CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 3 $41,382 $41,382 Astro25 Responder 90 $36,000 $36,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-23 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $71,250 $63,893 Year 3 $75,336 $72,341 Year 4 $77,392 $75,503 Year 5 $81,332 $80,027 Year 6 $85,485 $76,962 Year 7 $80,976 $80,212 Year 8 $85,306 $84,706 Year 9 $90,310 $89,190 Year 10 $96,486 $93,659 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Warranty Warranty Year 2 Included $5,940 $776 Included Year 3 $6,237 $824 Included Year 4 $6,549 $860 Included Year 5 $6,876 $904 Included Year 6 $7,221 $949 Included Year 7 $7,581 $996 Included Year 8 $7,960 $1,046 Included Year 9 $8,358 $1,098 Included Year 10 $8,776 $1,153 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-24 Alvin Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 3 $43,500 $43,500 CAD Low Use 6 $7,200 $7,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 35 $32,410 $32,410 RMS Licenses 39 $29,250 $29,250 RMS Mobile 35 $26,250 $26,250 Interface Fees $25,200 $25,200 Hardware/Software $85,853 $86,118 Implementation $235,752 $216,077 Total $485,415 $466,005 Software/Hardware Discount $210,988 $194,757 PremierOne Pricing $274,427 $271,248 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 60 $45,900 $45,900 CC Responder 60 $24,917 $24,917 eCitation Integrated Call Control 3 $41,382 $41,382 Astro25 Responder 148 $58,800 $58,800 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-25 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $56,128 $50,861 Year 3 $59,329 $57,380 Year 4 $61,008 $59,905 Year 5 $64,111 $63,467 Year 6 $67,382 $61,292 Year 7 $64,140 $63,904 Year 8 $67,559 $67,466 Year 9 $71,493 $71,027 Year 10 $76,318 $74,586 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $10,500 Warranty Warranty $10,500 Year 2 Included $5,940 $1,276 Included $10,500 Year 3 $6,237 $1,354 Year 4 Included $10,500 $6,549 $1,415 Included $10,500 Year 5 $6,876 $1,486 Included $10,500 Year 6 $7,221 $1,560 Year 7 Included $10,500 $7,581 $1,638 Included $10,500 Year 8 $7,960 $1,720 Included $10,500 Year 9 $8,358 $1,806 Year 10 Included $10,500 $8,776 $1,896 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-26 Santa Fe Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 2 $29,000 $29,000 CAD Low Use 1 $1,200 $1,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 12 $11,112 $11,112 RMS Licenses 20 $15,000 $15,000 RMS Mobile 12 $9,000 $9,000 Interface Fees $11,200 $11,200 Hardware/Software $33,452 $33,368 Implementation $84,420 $76,324 Total $194,385 $186,203 Software/Hardware Discount $82,211 $75,462 PremierOne Pricing $112,173 $110,742 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 4 $3,060 $3,060 CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 2 $27,588 $27,588 Astro25 Advanced Messaging & Responder Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-27 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $20,896 $18,738 Year 3 $22,095 $21,216 Year 4 $22,698 $22,143 Year 5 $23,853 $23,470 Year 6 $25,071 $22,571 Year 7 $23,749 $23,524 Year 8 $25,019 $24,842 Year 9 $26,486 $26,157 Year 10 $28,298 $27,468 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Warranty Year 2 Included $3,960 Included Year 3 $4,158 Included Year 4 $4,366 Included Year 5 $4,584 Included Year 6 $4,814 Included Year 7 $5,054 Included Year 8 $5,307 Included Year 9 $5,572 Included Year 10 $5,851 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-28 Sugar Land Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 8 $116,000 $116,000 CAD Low Use 4 $4,800 $4,800 Licenses CAD Mobile 180 $166,680 $166,680 RMS Licenses 26 $19,500 $19,500 RMS Mobile 91 $68,250 $68,250 Interface Fees $28,000 $28,000 Hardware/Software $217,749 $217,929 Implementation $549,508 $498,480 Total $1,174,087 $1,123,239 Software/Hardware Discount $535,130 $492,851 PremierOne Pricing $638,957 $630,389 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 20 $15,300 $15,300 CC Responder 20 $8,306 $8,306 eCitation Integrated Call Control 6 $82,764 $82,764 Astro25 Responder 280 $112,000 $112,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-29 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $136,018 $122,382 Year 3 $143,819 $138,562 Year 4 $147,744 $144,620 Year 5 $155,265 $153,285 Year 6 $163,194 $147,414 Year 7 $154,586 $153,638 Year 8 $162,851 $162,248 Year 9 $172,404 $170,835 Year 10 $184,195 $179,396 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $3,500 Warranty Warranty $3,500 Year 2 Included $11,880 $2,414 Included $3,500 Year 3 $12,474 $2,562 Year 4 Included $3,500 $13,098 $2,677 Included $3,500 Year 5 $13,752 $2,811 Included $3,500 Year 6 $14,442 $2,951 Year 7 Included $3,500 $15,162 $3,100 Included $3,500 Year 8 $15,920 $3,254 Included $3,500 Year 9 $16,716 $3,416 Year 10 Included $3,500 $17,552 $3,587 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-30 Deer Park Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 4 $58,000 $58,000 CAD Low Use 3 $4,800 $4,800 Licenses CAD Mobile 46 $42,596 $42,596 RMS Licenses 48 $36,000 $36,000 RMS Mobile 34 $25,500 $25,500 Interface Fees $39,200 $39,200 Hardware/Software $115,910 $115,797 Implementation $292,508 $264,869 Total $614,514 $586,762 Software/Hardware Discount $284,854 $261,878 PremierOne Pricing $329,660 $324,885 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 23 $121,440 $121,440 CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 4 $55,176 $55,176 Astro25 Responder 200 $80,000 $80,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-31 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $72,404 $65,028 Year 3 $76,556 $73,625 Year 4 $78,645 $76,844 Year 5 $82,649 $81,449 Year 6 $86,870 $78,329 Year 7 $82,287 $81,636 Year 8 $86,687 $86,211 Year 9 $91,772 $90,774 Year 10 $98,049 $95,323 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Warranty Warranty Year 2 Included $7,920 $1,724 Included Year 3 $8,316 $1,830 Included Year 4 $8,732 $1,912 Included Year 5 $9,168 $2,008 Included Year 6 $9,628 $2,108 Included Year 7 $10,108 $2,214 Included Year 8 $10,614 $2,324 Included Year 9 $11,144 $2,440 Included Year 10 $11,701 $2,562 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-32 La Porte Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 6 $87,000 $87,000 CAD Low Use 7 $8,400 $8,400 Licenses CAD Mobile 100 $92,600 $92,600 RMS Licenses 40 $30,000 $30,000 RMS Mobile 55 $41,250 $41,250 Interface Fees $30,800 $30,800 Hardware/Software $134,584 $135,229 Implementation $339,635 $309,317 Total $764,269 $734,597 Software/Hardware Discount $330,748 $305,824 PremierOne Pricing $433,521 $428,773 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 100 $76,500 $76,500 CC Responder 10 $4,153 $4,153 eCitation Integrated Call Control 5 $68,970 $68,970 Astro25 Responder 82 $32,800 $32,800 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-33 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $84,069 $75,940 Year 3 $88,890 $85,981 Year 4 $91,316 $89,740 Year 5 $95,965 $95,117 Year 6 $100,865 $91,473 Year 7 $95,545 $95,336 Year 8 $100,653 $100,678 Year 9 $106,558 $106,007 Year 10 $113,846 $111,319 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty $1,750 Warranty Warranty $1,750 Year 2 Included $9,900 $707 Included $1,750 Year 3 $10,395 $750 Year 4 Included $1,750 $10,915 $784 Included $1,750 Year 5 $11,460 $823 Included $1,750 Year 6 $12,035 $864 Year 7 Included $1,750 $12,635 $908 Included $1,750 Year 8 $13,267 $953 Included $1,750 Year 9 $13,930 $1,000 Year 10 Included $1,750 $14,627 $1,050 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-34 Port of Houston Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 5 $72,500 $72,500 CAD Low Use 6 $7,200 $7,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 43 $39,818 $39,818 RMS Licenses 16 $12,000 $12,000 RMS Mobile 25 $18,750 $18,750 Interface Fees $25,200 $25,200 Hardware/Software $28,033 $28,008 Implementation $110,074 $103,394 Total $313,575 $306,870 Software/Hardware Discount $68,893 $63,340 PremierOne Pricing $244,682 $243,529 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 5 $68,970 $68,970 Astro25 Responder 50 $20,000 $20,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-35 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $22,511 $22,728 Year 3 $23,765 $23,058 Year 4 $24,533 $24,098 Year 5 $25,777 $25,488 Year 6 $27,088 $25,023 Year 7 $26,283 $26,127 Year 8 $27,668 $27,554 Year 9 $29,195 $28,993 Year 10 $31,103 $23,446 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Warranty Year 2 $9,900 $431 Year 3 $10,395 $458 Year 4 $10,915 $478 Year 5 $11,460 $502 Year 6 $12,035 $527 Year 7 $12,635 $554 Year 8 $13,267 $581 Year 9 $13,930 $610 Year 10 $14,627 $641 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-36 Seabrook Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses 2 $29,000 $29,000 CAD Low Use 3 $3,600 $3,600 Licenses CAD Mobile 25 $23,150 $23,150 RMS Licenses 17 $12,750 $12,750 RMS Mobile 1 $750 $750 Interface Fees $22,400 $22,400 Hardware/Software $39,153 $38,958 Implementation $98,807 $89,110 Total $229,610 $219,718 Software/Hardware Discount $96,221 $88,104 PremierOne Pricing $133,389 $131, 614 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 2 $27,588 $27,588 Astro25 Responder Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-37 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $24,457 $21,877 Year 3 $25,860 $24,770 Year 4 $26,566 $25,853 Year 5 $27,918 $27,402 Year 6 $29,344 $26,352 Year 7 $27,796 $27,465 Year 8 $29,282 $29,004 Year 9 $31,000 $30,539 Year 10 $33,120 $32,069 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $3,960 Year 3 $4,158 Year 4 $4,366 Year 5 $4,584 Year 6 $4,814 Year 7 $5,054 Year 8 $5,307 Year 9 $5,572 Year 10 $5,851 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-38 MorganÓs Pointe Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID w/Galveston Consortium County CAD Licenses CAD Low Use Licenses CAD Mobile 4 $3,704 $3,704 RMS Licenses 4 $3,000 $3,000 RMS Mobile 4 $3,000 $3,000 Interface Fees $2,800 $2,800 Hardware/Software $4,723 $4,721 Implementation $11,919 $10,798 Total $29,146 $28,022 Software/Hardware Discount $11,607 $10,676 PremierOne Pricing $17,539 $17,347 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder 4 $1,661 $1,661 eCitation Integrated Call Control Astro25 Responder 8 $3,200 $3,200 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-39 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID W/Galveston Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium County Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $2,950 $2,651 Year 3 $3,119 $3,001 Year 4 $3,205 $3,133 Year 5 $3,368 $3,320 Year 6 $3,540 $3,193 Year 7 $3,353 $3,328 Year 8 $3,532 $3,514 Year 9 $3,740 $3,700 Year 10 $3,995 $3,886 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 $700 Warranty $700 Year 2 $69 $700 Year 3 $73 Year 4 $700 $76 $700 Year 5 $80 $700 Year 6 $84 Year 7 $700 $89 $700 Year 8 $93 $700 Year 9 $98 Year 10 $700 $102 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-40 Galveston County Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID Consortium CAD Licenses 5 $72,500 CAD Low Use 5 $9,600 Licenses CAD Mobile 140 $198,576 RMS Licenses 400 $37,500 RMS Mobile 115 $126,000 Interface Fees $19,600 CommandCentral Jail $934,141 Hardware/Software $306,076 Implementation $700,103 Total $2,554,310 Software/Hardware Discount $822,196 PremierOne Pricing $1,732,113 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld 3 $2,295 CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control 5 $68,970 Astro25 Responder 800 $320,000 Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-41 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing PremierOne CommandCentral Standard Maintenance Summary Suite Jail Warranty Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $171,882 $30,238 Year 3 $194,607 $30,238 Year 4 $203,115 $30,238 Year 5 $215,285 $30,238 Year 6 $207,039 $30,238 Year 7 $215,781 $30,238 Year 8 $227,873 $30,238 Year 9 $239,934 $30,238 Year 10 $251,957 $30,238 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Warranty Warranty Warranty Year 2 Included $9,900 $6,896 Included Year 3 $10,395 $7,320 Included Year 4 $10,915 $7,648 Included Year 5 $11,460 $8,032 Included Year 6 $12,035 $8,432 Included Year 7 $12,635 $8,856 Included Year 8 $13,267 $9,296 Included Year 9 $13,930 $9,760 Included Year 10 $14,627 $10,248 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-42 Port of Galveston Software, Services & Hardware Pricing This pricing includes the modules that we identified as being important for your agencies. The price will change if you decide to add or remove modules. A summary of the purchase price for all modules identified in the proposal is as follows: Description Count List Price PremierOne Pricing GRID Consortium CAD Licenses 2 $29,000 CAD Low Use 1 $1,200 Licenses CAD Mobile 23 $21,298 RMS Licenses 5 $3,750 RMS Mobile 23 $17,250 Interface Fees $11,200 Hardware/Software $87,825 Implementation $200,887 Total $372,410 Software/Hardware Discount $198,618 PremierOne Pricing $173,792 OPTIONS PremierOne Handheld CC Responder eCitation Integrated Call Control Astro25 Advanced Messaging & Responder Location PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-43 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Annual Maintenance Pricing GRID Standard Maintenance Summary Consortium Year 1 Warranty Year 2 $49,320 Year 3 $55,840 Year 4 $58,282 Year 5 $61,774 Year 6 $59,408 Year 7 $61,916 Year 8 $65,386 Year 9 $68,846 Year 10 $72,296 Note: Maintenance pricing is based on 2021 rates, subject to then current rates upon commencement. Changes to configuration or count will result in a change to maintenance pricing. Maintenance for Third Party products is subject to change based on prices quoted from the partners for first year of maintenance. Integrated Astro25 PremierOne Options Maintenance eCitation Call Control Integration Handheld Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-44 6.2 OPTIONAL COMMANDCENTRAL EVIDENCE PRICING 6.2.1 (Digital Evidence) Proposal Item Description Total $ Amount Vault Application Subscription (Year 1 through 10), $49,960 Implementation and Interfaces Implementation & Installation Services $10,385 Total $60,345 $60,345 (See Annual Pricing Detail below) Grand Total Yearly Pricing Breakdown Upfront Costs for Hardware, Accessories and $15,381 Implementation plus Year 1 Subscription Fee Year 2 $4,996 Year 3 $4,996 Year 4 $4,996 Year 5 $4,996 Year 6 $4,996 Year 7 $4,996 Year 8 $4,996 Year 9 $4,996 Year 10 $4,996 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Proposal Pricing 6-45 SECTION 7 H-GAC MASTER CUSTOMER AGREEMENT H-GAC Master Customer Agreement This Master Customer Agreement (the Ð MCA Ñ) is entered into between Motorola Solutions, Inc., with offices at 500 W. Monroe Street, Suite 4400, Chicago, IL 60661 (Ð Motorola Ñ) and the entity set forth in the signature block below (Ð Customer Ñ). Motorola and Customer will each be referred to herein as a Ð Party Ñ and collectively as the Ð Parties Ñ. This Agreement (as defined below) is effective as of the date of the last signature (the Ð Effective Date Ñ). WHEREAS, the Customer desires to purchase communications products and services; and WHEREAS, Motorola desires to sell communications products and services to Customer; and WHEREAS, Houston-Galveston Area Council (ÐH-GACÑ), acting as the agent for various local governmental entities who are ÐEnd UsersÑ under interlocal agreements (including the Customer) has solicited proposals for radio communications equipment and conducted discussions with Motorola concerning its proposal and, where applicable, in accordance with the competitive procurement procedures of Texas law; and WHEREAS, H-GAC and Motorola entered into that certain Contract No. RA05-18 dated May 1, 2018, (the ÐH-GAC ContractÑ), which provided that End Users may purchase radio communications equipment from Motorola pursuant to certain terms contained therein; WHEREAS, on or about March 1, 2021, Motorola and H-GAC agreed upon Amendment 1 of the H-GAC Contract wherein the H-GAC Contract was extended; and WHEREAS, pursuant to Articles 2 and 6 of the Special Provisions of the H-GAC Contract, Motorola and Customer now wish to enter into this Agreement to delineate the specific terms of the purchase of communications products and services from Motorola by the Customer. For good and valuable consideration, the Parties agree as follows: 1. Agreement. 1.1. Scope; Agreement Documents. This MCA governs CustomerÓs purchase of Products (as defined below) and Services (as defined below) from Motorola. The H-GAC Contract, as amended, is attached hereto as Exhibit A and is incorporated into this Agreement in full by this reference. Additional terms and conditions applicable to specific Products and Services are set forth in one or more addenda attached to this MCA (each an Ð Addendum Ñ, and collectively the Ð Addenda Ñ). In addition, the Parties may agree upon solution descriptions, equipment lists, statements of work, schedules, technical specifications, and other ordering documents setting forth the Products and Services to be purchased by Customer and provided by Motorola and additional rights and obligations of the Parties (the Ð Ordering Documents Ñ). To the extent required by applicable procurement law, a proposal submitted by Motorola in response to a competitive procurement process will be included within the meaning of the term Ordering Documents. This MCA, its exhibit, the Addenda, and any Ordering Documents collectively form the PartiesÓ Ð Agreement Ñ. H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 1 1.2. Order of Precedence. In interpreting this Agreement and resolving any ambiguities, Exhibit A shall prevail over this entire Agreement in the event of a conflict. Each Addendum will control with respect to conflicting terms in the MCA, but only as applicable to the Products and Services described in such Addendum. Each Ordering Document will control with respect to conflicting terms in the MCA or any Addenda, but only as applicable to the Products and Services described on such Ordering Document. 2. Products and Services. 2.1. Products. Motorola will (a) sell hardware provided by Motorola (Ð Equipment Ñ), (b) license software which is either preinstalled on Equipment or installed on Customer-Provided Equipment (as defined below) and licensed to Customer by Motorola for a perpetual or other defined license term (Ð Licensed Software Ñ), and (c) license cloud-based software as a service products and other software which is either preinstalled on Equipment or installed on Customer-Provided Equipment, but licensed to Customer by Motorola on a subscription basis (Ð Subscription Software Ñ) to Customer, to the extent each is set forth in an Ordering Document, for CustomerÓs own use in accordance with this Agreement. The Equipment, Licensed Software, and Subscription Software shall collectively be referred to herein as Ð Products Ñ, or individually as a Ð Product Ñ. At any time during the Term (as defined below), Motorola may substitute any Products at no cost to Customer, if the substitute is substantially similar to the Products set forth in the applicable Ordering Documents. 2.2. Services. 2.2.1. Motorola will provide services related to purchased Products (Ð Services Ñ), to the extent set forth in an Ordering Document. 2.2.2. Integration Services; Maintenance and Support Services. If specified in an Ordering Document, Motorola will provide, for the term of such Ordering Document, (a) design, deployment, and integration Services in order to design, install, set up, configure, and/or integrate the applicable Products at the applicable locations (Ð Sites Ñ), agreed upon by the Parties (Ð Integration Services Ñ), or (b) break/fix maintenance, technical support, or other Services (such as software integration Services) (Ð Maintenance and Support Services Ñ), each as further described in the applicable statement of work. Maintenance and Support Services and Integration Services will each be considered ÐServicesÑ, as defined above. 2.2.3. Service Ordering Documents. The Fees for Services will be set forth in an Ordering Document and any applicable project schedules. A Customer point of contact will be set forth in the applicable statement of work for the Services. For purposes of clarity, each statement of work will be incorporated into, and form an integral part of, the Agreement. 2.2.4. Service Completion. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable Ordering Document, Services described in an Ordering Document will be deemed complete upon MotorolaÓs performance of all Services listed in such Ordering Document (Ð Service Completion Date Ñ); provided, however, that Maintenance and Support Services may be offered on an ongoing basis during a given Ordering Document term, in which case such Maintenance and Support Services will conclude upon the expiration or termination of such Ordering Document. 2.3. Non-Preclusion. If, in connection with the Products and Services provided under this Agreement, Motorola makes recommendations, including a recommendation to purchase other products or services, nothing in this Agreement precludes Motorola from participating in a future competitive bidding process or otherwise offering or selling the recommended products or other services to Customer. Customer represents that this paragraph does not violate its procurement standards or other laws, regulations, or policies. 2.4. Customer Obligations. Customer will ensure that information Customer provides to Motorola in connection with receipt of Products and Services are accurate and complete in all material respects. Customer will make timely decisions and obtain any required management approvals that are reasonably necessary for Motorola to provide the Products and Services and perform its other duties under this Agreement. Unless the applicable Ordering Document states otherwise, Motorola may rely upon and is not required to evaluate, confirm, reject, modify, or provide advice concerning any assumptions or Customer information, decisions, or approvals described in this Section. If any assumptions in the Ordering Documents or information provided by Customer prove to be incorrect, or if Customer fails to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement, MotorolaÓs ability to perform its obligations may be impacted and changes to the Agreement, including the scope, Fees, and performance schedule may be required. 2.5. Documentation. Products and Services may be delivered with documentation for the Equipment, software Products, or data that specifies technical and performance features, capabilities, users, or operation, including training manuals, and other deliverables, such as reports, specifications, designs, plans, drawings, analytics, or other information (collectively, Ð Documentation Ñ). Documentation is and will be owned by Motorola, unless otherwise expressly agreed in an Addendum or Ordering Document that certain Documentation will be owned by Customer. Motorola hereby grants Customer a limited, royalty-free, worldwide, non-exclusive license to use the Documentation solely for its internal business purposes in connection with the Products and Services. 2.6. Motorola Tools and Equipment. As part of delivering the Products and Services, Motorola may provide certain tools, equipment, models, and other materials of its own. Such tools and equipment will remain the sole property of Motorola unless they are to be purchased by Customer as Products and are explicitly listed on an Ordering Document. The tools and equipment may be held by Customer for MotorolaÓs use without charge and may be removed from CustomerÓs premises by Motorola at any time without restriction. Customer will safeguard all tools and equipment while in CustomerÓs custody or control, and be liable for any loss or damage. Upon the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, Customer, at its expense, will return to Motorola all tools and equipment in its possession or control. 2.7. Authorized Users. Customer will ensure its employees and Authorized Users comply with the terms of this Agreement and will be liable for all acts and omissions of its employees and Authorized Users. Customer is responsible for the secure management of Authorized UsersÓ names, passwords and login credentials for access to Products and Services. Ð Authorized Users Ñ are CustomerÓs employees, full-time contractors engaged for the purpose of supporting the Products and Services that are not competitors of Motorola, and the entities (if any) specified in an Ordering Document or otherwise approved by Motorola in writing (email from an authorized Motorola signatory accepted), which may include affiliates or other Customer agencies. 2.8. Export Control. Customer, its employees, and any other Authorized Users will not access or use the Products and Services in any jurisdiction in which the provision of such Products and Services is prohibited under applicable laws or regulations (a Ð Prohibited Jurisdiction Ñ), and Customer will not provide access to the Products and Services to any government, entity, or individual located in a Prohibited Jurisdiction. Customer represents and warrants that (a) it and its Authorized Users are not named on any U.S. government list of persons prohibited from receiving U.S. exports, or transacting with any U.S. person; (b) it and its Authorized Users are not H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 3 a national of, or a company registered in, any Prohibited Jurisdiction; (c) Customer will not permit its Authorized Users to access or use the Products or Services in violation of any U.S. or other applicable export embargoes, prohibitions or restrictions; and (d) Customer and its Authorized Users will comply with all applicable laws regarding the transmission of technical data exported from the U.S. and the country in which Customer, its employees, and the Authorized Users are located. 2.9. Change Orders. Unless a different change control process is agreed upon in writing by the Parties, a Party may request changes to an Addendum or an Ordering Document by submitting a change order to the other Party (each, a Ð Change Order Ñ). If a requested change in a Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the Products or Services, the Parties by means of the Change Order will make appropriate adjustments to the Fees, project schedule, or other matters. Change Orders are effective and binding on the Parties only upon execution of the Change Order by an authorized representative of both Parties. 3. Term and Termination. 3.1. Term. The term of this MCA (Ð Term Ñ) will commence on the Effective Date and continue until six (6) months after the later of (a) the termination, expiration, or discontinuance of services under the last Ordering Document in effect, or (b) the expiration of all applicable warranty periods, unless the MCA is earlier terminated as set forth herein. The applicable Addendum or Ordering Document will set forth the term for the Products and Services governed thereby. 3.2. Termination. Either Party may terminate the Agreement or the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document if the other Party breaches a material obligation under the Agreement and does not cure such breach within thirty (30) days after receipt of notice of the breach or fails to produce a cure plan within such period of time. Each Addendum and Ordering Document may be separately terminable as set forth therein. Customer may terminate this Agreement for any reason upon giving Motorola 30 days advanced written notice. 3.3. Cancellation Fee. In the event the Customer terminates for any reason other than default, the Customer will be required to pay to Motorola a cancellation fee of 25% of the remaining balance of the contract price including future subscription and/or maintenance fees due for the remainder of the 10 year term. 3.4. Suspension of Services. Motorola may terminate or suspend any Products or Services under an Ordering Document if Motorola determines: (a) the related Product license has expired or has terminated for any reason; (b) the applicable Product is being used on a hardware platform, operating system, or version not approved by Motorola; (c) Customer fails to make any payments when due; or (d) Customer fails to comply with any of its other obligations or otherwise delays MotorolaÓs ability to perform. 3.5. Effect of Termination or Expiration. Upon termination for any reason or expiration of this Agreement, an Addendum, or an Ordering Document, Customer and the Authorized Users will return or destroy (at MotorolaÓs option) all Motorola Materials and MotorolaÓs Confidential Information in their possession or control and, as applicable, provide proof of such destruction, except that Equipment purchased by Customer should not be returned. If Customer has any outstanding payment obligations under this Agreement, Motorola may accelerate and declare all such obligations of Customer immediately due and payable by Customer. Notwithstanding the reason for termination or expiration, Customer must pay Motorola for Products and Services already delivered. Customer has a duty to mitigate any damages under this Agreement, including in the event of default by Motorola and CustomerÓs termination of this Agreement. 4. Payment and Invoicing. 4.1. Fees. Fees and charges applicable to the Products and Services (the Ð Fees Ñ) will be as set forth in the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document, and such Fees may be changed by Motorola at any time, except that Motorola will not change the Fees for Products and Services purchased by Customer during the term of an active Ordering Document or during a Subscription Term (as defined and further described in the applicable Addendum). The fees and charges include the H-GAC administrative fee. Motorola will pay H-GACÓs administrative fee in accordance with the payment terms of the H-GAC Contract. Changes in the scope of Services described in an Ordering Document may require an adjustment to the Fees due under such Ordering Document. If a specific invoicing or payment schedule is set forth in the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document, such schedule will apply solely with respect to such Addendum or Ordering Document. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable Ordering Document, the Fees for any Services exclude expenses associated with unusual and costly Site access requirements (e.g., if Site access requires a helicopter or other equipment), and Customer will reimburse Motorola for these or other expenses incurred by Motorola in connection with the Services. 4.2. Taxes. The Fees do not include any excise, sales, lease, use, property, or other taxes, assessments, duties, or regulatory charges or contribution requirements (collectively, Ð Taxes Ñ), all of which will be paid by Customer, except as exempt by law, unless otherwise specified in an Ordering Document. If Motorola is required to pay any Taxes, Customer will reimburse Motorola for such Taxes (including any interest and penalties) within thirty (30) days after CustomerÓs receipt of an invoice therefore. Customer will be solely responsible for reporting the Products for personal property tax purposes, and Motorola will be solely responsible for reporting taxes on its income and net worth. 4.3. Invoicing. Motorola will invoice Customer at the frequency set forth in the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document, and Customer will pay all invoices within thirty (30) days of the invoice date or as otherwise specified in the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document. Late payments will be subject to interest charges at the maximum rate permitted by law, commencing upon the due date. Motorola may invoice electronically via email, and Customer agrees to receive invoices via email at the email address set forth in an Ordering Document. Customer acknowledges and agrees that a purchase order or other notice to proceed is not required for payment for Products or Services. 5. Sites; Customer-Provided Equipment; Non-Motorola Content. 5.1. Access to Sites. Customer will be responsible for providing all necessary permits, licenses, and other approvals necessary for the installation and use of the Products and the performance of the Services at each applicable Site, including for Motorola to perform its obligations hereunder, and for facilitating MotorolaÓs access to the Sites. No waivers of liability will be imposed on Motorola or its subcontractors by Customer or others at Customer facilities or other Sites, but if and to the extent any such waivers are imposed, the Parties agree such waivers are void. 5.2. Site Conditions. Customer will ensure that (a) all Sites are safe and secure, (b) Site conditions meet all applicable industry and legal standards (including standards promulgated by OSHA or other governmental or regulatory bodies), (c) to the extent applicable, Sites have adequate physical space, air conditioning, and other environmental conditions, electrical power outlets, distribution, equipment, connections, and telephone or other communication lines (including modem access and interfacing networking capabilities), and (d) Sites are suitable for the installation, use, and maintenance of the Products and Services. This Agreement is predicated upon normal soil conditions as defined by the version of E.I.A. standard RS-222 in effect on the Effective Date. H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 5 5.3. Site Issues. Upon reasonable advanced written notice to Customer, Motorola will have the right to inspect the Sites and advise Customer of any deficiencies or non-conformities with the requirements of this Section 5 Î Sites; Customer-Provided Equipment; Non-Motorola Content. If Motorola or Customer identifies any deficiencies or non-conformities, Customer will promptly remediate such issues or the Parties will select a replacement Site. If a Party determines that a Site identified in an Ordering Document is not acceptable or desired, the Parties will cooperate to investigate the conditions and select a replacement Site or otherwise adjust the installation plans and specifications as necessary. A change in Site or adjustment to the installation plans and specifications may cause a change in the Fees or performance schedule under the applicable Ordering Document. 5.4. Customer-Provided Equipment. Certain components, including equipment and software, not provided by Motorola may be required for use of the Products and Services (Ð Customer- Provided Equipment Ñ). Customer will be responsible, at its sole cost and expense, for providing and maintaining the Customer-Provided Equipment in good working order. Customer represents and warrants that it has all rights in Customer-Provided Equipment to permit Motorola to access and use the applicable Customer-Provided Equipment to provide the Products and Services under this Agreement, and such access and use will not violate any laws or infringe any third- party rights (including intellectual property rights). Customer (and not Motorola) will be fully liable for Customer-Provided Equipment, and Customer will immediately notify Motorola of any Customer-Provided Equipment damage, loss, change, or theft that may impact MotorolaÓs ability to provide the Products and Services under this Agreement, and Customer acknowledges that any such events may cause a change in the Fees or performance schedule under the applicable Ordering Document. 5.5. Non-Motorola Content. In certain instances, Customer may be permitted to access, use, or integrate Customer or third-party software, services, content, and data that is not provided by Motorola (collectively, Ð Non-Motorola Content Ñ) with or through the Products and Services. If Customer accesses, uses, or integrates any Non-Motorola Content with the Products or Services, Customer will first obtain all necessary rights and licenses to permit CustomerÓs and its Authorized UsersÓ use of the Non-Motorola Content in connection with the Products and Services. Customer will also obtain the necessary rights for Motorola to use such Non-Motorola Content in connection with providing the Products and Services, including the right for Motorola to access, store, and process such Non-Motorola Content (e.g., in connection with Subscription Software), and to otherwise enable interoperation with the Products and Services. Customer represents and warrants that it will obtain the foregoing rights and licenses prior to accessing, using, or integrating the applicable Non-Motorola Content with the Products and Services, and that Customer and its Authorized Users will comply with any terms and conditions applicable to such Non-Motorola Content. If any Non-Motorola Content require access to Customer Data (as defined below), Customer hereby authorizes Motorola to allow the provider of such Non-Motorola Content to access Customer Data, in connection with the interoperation of such Non-Motorola Content with the Products and Services. Customer acknowledges and agrees that Motorola is not responsible for, and makes no representations or warranties with respect to, the Non-Motorola Content (including any disclosure, modification, or deletion of Customer Data resulting from use of Non- Motorola Content or failure to properly interoperate with the Products and Services). If Customer receives notice that any Non-Motorola Content must be removed, modified, or disabled within the Products or Services, Customer will promptly do so. Motorola will have the right to disable or remove Non-Motorola Content if Motorola believes a violation of law, third-party rights, or MotorolaÓs policies is likely to occur, or if such Non-Motorola Content poses or may pose a security or other risk or adverse impact to the Products or Services, Motorola, MotorolaÓs systems, or any third party (including other Motorola customers). Nothing in this Section will limit the exclusions set forth in Section 7.2 Î Intellectual Property Infringement. 6. Representations and Warranties. 6.1. Mutual Representations and Warranties. Each Party represents and warrants to the other Party that (a) it has the right to enter into the Agreement and perform its obligations hereunder, and (b) the Agreement will be binding on such Party. 6.2. Motorola Warranties. Subject to the disclaimers and exclusions below, Motorola represents and warrants that (a) Services will be provided in a good and workmanlike manner and will conform in all material respects to the descriptions in the applicable Ordering Document; and (b) for a period of ninety (90) days commencing upon the Service Completion Date for one- time Services, the Services will be free of material defects in materials and workmanship. Other than as set forth in subsection (a) above, recurring Services are not warranted but rather will be subject to the requirements of the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document. Motorola provides other express warranties for Motorola-manufactured Equipment, Motorola-owned software Products, and certain Services. Such express warranties are included in the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document. Such representations and warranties will apply only to the applicable Product or Service that is the subject of such Addendum or Ordering Document. 6.3. Warranty Claims; Remedies. To assert a warranty claim, Customer must notify Motorola in writing of the claim prior to the expiration of any warranty period set forth in this MCA or the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document. Unless a different remedy is otherwise expressly set forth for a particular warranty under an Addendum, upon receipt of such claim, Motorola will investigate the claim and use commercially reasonable efforts to repair or replace any confirmed materially non-conforming Product or re-perform any non-conforming Service, at its option. Such remedies are CustomerÓs sole and exclusive remedies for MotorolaÓs breach of a warranty. MotorolaÓs warranties are extended by Motorola to Customer only, and are not assignable or transferrable. 6.4. Pass-Through Warranties. Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, Motorola will have no liability for third-party software or hardware provided by Motorola; provided, however, that to the extent offered by third-party providers of software or hardware and to the extent permitted by law, Motorola will pass through express warranties provided by such third parties. 6.5. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS AND PASS THROUGH WARRANTIES IN THIS AGREEMENT, PRODUCTS AND SERVICES PURCHASED HEREUNDER ARE PROVIDED ÐAS ISÑ AND WITH ALL FAULTS. WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THE AGREEMENT ARE THE COMPLETE WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES AND MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND QUALITY. MOTOROLA DOES NOT REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT USEOF THEPRODUCTS ANDSERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, ERROR-FREE, OR FREE OFSECURITY VULNERABILITIES, OR THAT THEY WILL MEET CUSTOMERÓS PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS. 7. Indemnification. 7.1. General Indemnity. Motorola will defend, indemnify, and hold Customer harmless from and against any and all damages, losses, liabilities, and expenses (including reasonable fees and expenses of attorneys) arising from any actual third-party claim, demand, action, or proceeding (Ð Claim Ñ) for personal injury, death, or direct damage to tangible property to the extent caused by MotorolaÓs negligence, gross negligence or willful misconduct while performing its duties under an Ordering Document or an Addendum, except to the extent the claim arises from CustomerÓs H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7 negligence or willful misconduct. MotorolaÓs duties under this Section 7.1 Î General Indemnity are conditioned upon: (a) Customer promptly notifying Motorola in writing of the Claim; (b) Motorola having sole control of the defense ; and (c) Customer cooperating with Motorola and, if requested by Motorola, providing reasonable assistance in the defense of the Claim. Motorola will not settle any claims without the prior approval of Customer. 7.2. Intellectual Property Infringement. Motorola will defend Customer against any third-party claim alleging that a Motorola-developed or manufactured Product or Service (the Ð Infringing Product Ñ) directly infringes a United States patent or copyright (Ð Infringement Claim Ñ), and Motorola will pay all damages finally awarded against Customer by a court of competent jurisdiction for an Infringement Claim, or agreed to in writing by Motorola in settlement of an Infringement Claim. MotorolaÓs duties under this Section 7.2 Î Intellectual Property Infringement are conditioned upon: (a) Customer promptly notifying Motorola in writing of the Infringement Claim; (b) Motorola having sole control of the defense of the suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and (c) Customer cooperating with Motorola and, if requested by Motorola, providing reasonable assistance in the defense of the Infringement Claim. 7.2.1. If an Infringement Claim occurs, or in MotorolaÓs opinion is likely to occur, Motorola may at its option and expense: (a) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Infringing Product; (b) replace or modify the Infringing Product so that it becomes non-infringing; or (c) grant Customer (i) a pro-rated refund of any amounts pre-paid for the Infringing Product (if the Infringing Product is a software Product, i.e., Licensed Software or Subscription Software) or (ii) a credit for the Infringing Product, less a reasonable charge for depreciation (if the Infringing Product is Equipment, including Equipment with embedded software). 7.2.2. In addition to the other damages disclaimed under this Agreement, Motorola will have no duty to defend or indemnify Customer for any Infringement Claim that arises from or is based upon: (a) Customer Data, Customer-Provided Equipment, Non-Motorola Content, or third-party equipment, hardware, software, data, or other third-party materials; (b) the combination of the Product or Service with any products or materials not provided by Motorola; (c) a Product or Service designed, modified, or manufactured in accordance with CustomerÓs designs, specifications, guidelines or instructions; (d) a modification of the Product or Service by a party other than Motorola; (e) use of the Product or Service in a manner for which the Product or Service was not designed or that is inconsistent with the terms of this Agreement; or (f) the failure by Customer to use or install an update to the Product or Service that is intended to correct the claimed infringement. In no event will MotorolaÓs liability resulting from an Infringement Claim extend in any way to any payments due on a royalty basis, other than a reasonable royalty based upon revenue derived by Motorola from Customer from sales or license of the Infringing Product. 7.2.3. This Section 7.2 Î Intellectual Property Infringement provides CustomerÓs sole and exclusive remedies and MotorolaÓs entire liability in the event of an Infringement Claim. For clarity, the rights and remedies provided in this Section are subject to, and limited by, the restrictions set forth in Section 8 Î Limitation of Liability below. 7.3. Reserved. 8. Limitation of Liability. 8.1. DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. EXCEPT FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, MOTOROLA, ITS AFFILIATES, AND ITS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SUCCESSORS, AND ASSIGNS (COLLECTIVELY, THE Ð MOTOROLA PARTIES Ñ) WILL NOT BE LIABLE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT (WHETHER UNDER MOTOROLAÓS INDEMNITY OBLIGATIONS, A CAUSE OF ACTION FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, UNDER TORT THEORY, OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES, EVEN IF MOTOROLA HAS BEEN ADVISED BY CUSTOMER OR ANY THIRD PARTY OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR LOSSES AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARE FORESEEABLE. 8.2. DIRECT DAMAGES. EXCEPT FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, THE TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY OF THE MOTOROLA PARTIES, WHETHER BASED ON A CLAIM IN CONTRACT OR IN TORT, LAW OR EQUITY, RELATING TO OR ARISING OUT OF THE AGREEMENT WILL NOT EXCEED THE FEES SET FORTH IN THE ORDERING DOCUMENT UNDER WHICH THE CLAIM AROSE. NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, FOR ANY SUBSCRIPTION SOFTWARE OR FOR ANY RECURRING SERVICES, THE MOTOROLA PARTIESÓ TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ALL CLAIMS RELATED TO SUCH PRODUCT OR RECURRING SERVICES IN THE AGGREGATE WILL NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL FEES PAID FOR SUCH SUBSCRIPTION SOFTWARE OR RECURRING SERVICE, AS APPLICABLE, DURING THE CONSECUTIVE TWELVE (12) MONTH PERIOD IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE EVENT FROM WHICH THE FIRST CLAIM AROSE. 8.3. ADDITIONAL EXCLUSIONS. NOTWITHSTANDINGANY OTHER PROVISIONOF THIS AGREEMENT,MOTOROLA WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF (A) CUSTOMER DATA, INCLUDING ITS TRANSMISSION TO MOTOROLA, OR ANY OTHER DATA AVAILABLE THROUGH THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES; (B) CUSTOMER-PROVIDED EQUIPMENT, NON-MOTOROLA CONTENT, THE SITES, OR THIRD-PARTY EQUIPMENT, HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, DATA, OR OTHER THIRD-PARTY MATERIALS, OR THE COMBINATIONOF PRODUCTS AND SERVICES WITH ANY OF THE FOREGOING; (C) LOSS OF DATA OR HACKING; (D) MODIFICATION OFPRODUCTSOR SERVICESBY ANY PERSON OTHERTHANMOTOROLA;(E)RECOMMENDATIONSPROVIDEDINCONNECTIONWITHOR BY THE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES; (F) DATA RECOVERY SERVICESOR DATABASE MODIFICATIONS; OR (G) CUSTOMERÓS OR ANY AUTHORIZED USERÓS BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR MISUSE OF THE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES. 8.4. Voluntary Remedies. Motorola is not obligated to remedy, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price for the disclaimed issues in Section 8.3 Î Additional Exclusions above, but if Motorola agrees to provide Services to help resolve such issues, Customer will reimburse Motorola for its reasonable time and expenses, including by paying Motorola any Fees set forth in an Ordering Document for such Services, if applicable. 8.5. Reserved. 9. Confidentiality. 9.1. Confidential Information. Ð Confidential Information Ñ means any and all non-public information provided by one Party (Ð Discloser Ñ) to the other (Ð Recipient Ñ) that is disclosed under this Agreement in oral, written, graphic, machine recognizable, or sample form, being clearly designated, labeled or marked as confidential or its equivalent or that a reasonable H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 9 businessperson would consider non-public and confidential by its nature. In order to be considered Confidential Information, information that is disclosed orally must be identified as confidential at the time of disclosure and confirmed by Discloser by submitting a written document to Recipient within thirty (30) days after such disclosure. The written document must contain a summary of the Confidential Information disclosed with enough specificity for identification purpose and must be labeled or marked as confidential or its equivalent. 9.2. Obligations of Confidentiality. During the Term and for a period of three (3) years from the expiration or termination of this Agreement, Recipient will (a) not disclose Confidential Information to any third party, except as expressly permitted in this Section 9 - Confidentiality; (b) restrict disclosure of Confidential Information to only those employees (including, employees of any wholly owned subsidiary, a parent company, any other wholly owned subsidiaries of the same parent company), agents or consultants who must access the Confidential Information for the purpose of, and who are bound by confidentiality terms substantially similar to those in, this Agreement; (c) not copy, reproduce, reverse engineer, de-compile or disassemble any Confidential Information; (d) use the same degree of care as for its own information of like importance, but at least use reasonable care, in safeguarding against disclosure of Confidential Information; (e) promptly notify Discloser upon discovery of any unauthorized use or disclosure of the Confidential Information and take reasonable steps to regain possession of the Confidential Information and prevent further unauthorized actions or other breach of this Agreement; and (f) only use the Confidential Information as needed to fulfill its obligations and secure its rights under this Agreement. 9.3. Exceptions. Recipient is not obligated to maintain as confidential any information that Recipient can demonstrate by documentation (a) is publicly available at the time of disclosure or becomes available to the public without breach of this Agreement; (b) is lawfully obtained from a third party without a duty of confidentiality to Discloser; (c) is otherwise lawfully known to Recipient prior to such disclosure without a duty of confidentiality to Discloser; or (d) is independently developed by Recipient without the use of, or reference to, any of DiscloserÓs Confidential Information or any breach of this Agreement. Additionally, Recipient may disclose Confidential Information to the extent required by law, including a judicial or legislative order or proceeding. 9.4. Ownership of Confidential Information. All Confidential Information is and will remain the property of Discloser and will not be copied or reproduced without the express written permission of Discloser (including as permitted herein). Within ten (10) days of receipt of DiscloserÓs written request, Recipient will return or destroy all Confidential Information to Discloser along with all copies and portions thereof, or certify in writing that all such Confidential Information has been destroyed. However, Recipient may retain (a) one (1) archival copy of the Confidential Information for use only in case of a dispute concerning this Agreement and (b) Confidential Information that has been automatically stored in accordance with RecipientÓs standard backup or recordkeeping procedures, provided, however that Recipient will remain subject to the obligations of this Agreement with respect to any Confidential Information retained subject to clauses (a) or (b). No license, express or implied, in the Confidential Information is granted to the Recipient other than to use the Confidential Information in the manner and to the extent authorized by this Agreement. Discloser represents and warrants that it is authorized to disclose any Confidential Information it discloses pursuant to this Agreement. 10. Proprietary Rights; Data; Feedback. 10.1. Data Definitions. The following terms will have the stated meanings: Ð Customer Contact Data Ñ means data Motorola collects from Customer, its Authorized Users, and their end users for business contact purposes, including marketing, advertising, licensing and sales purposes; Ð Service Use Data Ñ means data generated by CustomerÓs use of the Products and Services or by MotorolaÓs support of the Products and Services, including personal information, product performance and error information, activity logs and date and time of use; Ð Customer Data Ñ means data, information, and content, including images, text, videos, documents, audio, telemetry, location and structured data base records, provided by, through, or on behalf of Customer, its Authorized Users, and their end users through the use of the Products and Services. Customer Data does not include Customer Contact Data, Service Use Data, or information from publicly available sources or other Third-Party Data or Motorola Data; ÐThird-Party DataÑ means information obtained by Motorola from publicly available sources or its third party content providers and made available to Customer through the Products or Services; Ð Motorola Data Ñ means data owned or licensed by Motorola; Ð Feedback Ñ means comments or information, in oral or written form, given to Motorola by Customer or Authorized Users, including their end users, in connection with or relating to the Products or Services; and ÐProcessÑ or ÐProcessingÑ means any operation or set of operations which is performed on personal information or on sets of personal information, whether or not by automated means, such as collection, recording, copying, analyzing, caching, organization, structuring, storage, adaptation, or alteration, retrieval, consultation, use, disclosure by transmission, dissemination or otherwise making available, alignment or combination, restriction, erasure or destruction. 10.2. Motorola Materials. Customer acknowledges that Motorola may use or provide Customer with access to software, tools, data, and other materials, including designs, utilities, models, methodologies, systems, and specifications, which Motorola has developed or licensed from third parties (including any corrections, bug fixes, enhancements, updates, modifications, adaptations, translations, de-compilations, disassemblies, or derivative works of the foregoing, whether made by Motorola or another party) (collectively, Ð Motorola Materials Ñ). The Products and Services, Motorola Data, Third-Party Data, and Documentation, are considered Motorola Materials. Except when Motorola has expressly transferred title or other interest to Customer by way of an Addendum or Ordering Document, the Motorola Materials are the property of Motorola or its licensors, and Motorola or its licensors retain all right, title and interest in and to the Motorola Materials (including, all rights in patents, copyrights, trademarks, trade names, trade secrets, know-how, other intellectual property and proprietary rights, and all associated goodwill and moral rights). For clarity, this Agreement does not grant to Customer any shared development rights in or to any Motorola Materials or other intellectual property, and Customer agrees to execute any documents and take any other actions reasonably requested by Motorola to effectuate the foregoing. Motorola and its licensors reserve all rights not expressly granted to Customer, and no rights, other than those expressly granted herein, are granted to Customer by implication, estoppel or otherwise. Customer will not modify, disassemble, reverse engineer, derive source code or create derivative works from, merge with other software, distribute, sublicense, sell, or export the Products and Services or other Motorola Materials, or permit any third party to do so. 10.3. Ownership of Customer Data. Customer retains all right, title and interest, including intellectual property rights, if any, in and to Customer Data. Motorola acquires no rights to Customer Data except those rights granted under this Agreement including the right to Process and use the Customer Data as set forth in Section 10.4 Î Processing Customer Data below and in other applicable Addenda. The Parties agree that with regard to the Processing of personal information which may be part of Customer Data, Customer is the controller and Motorola is the processor, and may engage sub-processors pursuant to Section 10.4.3 Î Sub-processors. 10.4. Processing Customer Data. 10.4.1. Motorola Use of Customer Data. To the extent permitted by law, Customer grants Motorola and its subcontractors a right to use Customer Data and a royalty-free, worldwide, non-exclusive license to use Customer Data (including to process, host, H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 11 cache, store, reproduce, copy, modify, combine, analyze, create derivative works from such Customer Data and to communicate, transmit, and distribute such Customer Data to third parties engaged by Motorola) to (a) perform Services and provide Products under the Agreement, (b) analyze the Customer Data to operate, maintain, manage, and improve Motorola Products and Services, and (c) create new products and services. Customer agrees that this Agreement, along with the Documentation, are CustomerÓs complete and final documented instructions to Motorola for the processing of Customer Data. Any additional or alternate instructions must be agreed to according to the Change Order process. Customer represents and warrants to Motorola that CustomerÓs instructions, including appointment of Motorola as a processor or sub-processor, have been authorized by the relevant controller. 10.4.2. Collection, Creation, Use of Customer Data. Customer further represents and warrants that the Customer Data, CustomerÓs collection, creation, and use of the Customer Data (including in connection with MotorolaÓs Products and Services), and MotorolaÓs use of such Customer Data in accordance with the Agreement, will not violate any laws or applicable privacy notices or infringe any third-party rights (including intellectual property and privacy rights). Customer also represents and warrants that the Customer Data will be accurate and complete, and that Customer has obtained all required consents, provided all necessary notices, and met any other applicable legal requirements with respect to collection and use (including MotorolaÓs and its subcontractorsÓ use) of the Customer Data as described in the Agreement. 10.4.3. Sub-processors. Customer agrees that Motorola may engage sub-processors who in turn may engage additional sub-processors to Process personal data in accordance with this Agreement. When engaging sub-processors, Motorola will enter into agreements with the sub-processors to bind them to data processing obligations to the extent required by law. 10.5. Data Retention and Deletion. Except for anonymized Customer Data, as described above, or as otherwise provided under the Agreement, Motorola will delete all Customer Data following termination or expiration of this MCA or the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document, with such deletion to occur no later than ninety (90) days following the applicable date of termination or expiration, unless otherwise required to comply with applicable law. Any requests for the exportation or download of Customer Data must be made by Customer to Motorola in writing before expiration or termination, subject to Section 13.9 Î Notices. Motorola will have no obligation to retain such Customer Data beyond expiration or termination unless the Customer has purchased extended storage from Motorola through a mutually executed Ordering Document. 10.6. Service Use Data. Customer understands and agrees that Motorola may collect and use Service Use Data for its own purposes, including the uses described below. Motorola may use Service Use Data to (a) operate, maintain, manage, and improve existing and create new products and services, (b) test products and services, (c) to aggregate Service Use Data and combine it with that of other users, and (d) to use anonymized or aggregated data for marketing, research or other business purposes. Service Use Data may be disclosed to third parties. It is CustomerÓs responsibility to notify Authorized Users of MotorolaÓs collection and use of Service Use Data and to obtain any required consents, provide all necessary notices, and meet any other applicable legal requirements with respect to such collection and use, and Customer represents and warrants to Motorola that it has complied and will continue to comply with this Section. 10.7. Third-Party Data and Motorola Data. Motorola Data and Third-Party Data may be available to Customer through the Products and Services. Customer and its Authorized Users may use Motorola Data and Third-Party Data as permitted by Motorola and the applicable Third-Party Data provider, as described in the applicable Addendum. Unless expressly permitted in the applicable Addendum, Customer will not, and will ensure its Authorized Users will not: (a) use the Motorola Data or Third-Party Data for any purpose other than CustomerÓs internal business purposes; (b) disclose the data to third parties; (c) Ðwhite labelÑ such data or otherwise misrepresent its source or ownership, or resell, distribute, sublicense, or commercially exploit the data in any manner; (d) use such data in violation of applicable laws; (e) remove, obscure, alter, or falsify any marks or proprietary rights notices indicating the source, origin, or ownership of the data; or (f) modify such data or combine it with Customer Data or other data or use the data to build databases. Additional restrictions may be set forth in the applicable Addendum. Any rights granted to Customer or Authorized Users with respect to Motorola Data or Third-Party Data will immediately terminate upon termination or expiration of the applicable Addendum, Ordering Document, or this MCA. Further, Motorola or the applicable Third-Party Data provider may suspend, change, or terminate CustomerÓs or any Authorized UserÓs access to Motorola Data or Third-Party Data if Motorola or such Third-Party Data provider believes CustomerÓs or the Authorized UserÓs use of the data violates the Agreement, applicable law or MotorolaÓs agreement with the applicable Third-Party Data provider. Upon termination of CustomerÓs rights to use any Motorola Data or Third-Party Data, Customer and all Authorized Users will immediately discontinue use of such data, delete all copies of such data, and certify such deletion to Motorola. Notwithstanding any provision of the Agreement to the contrary, Motorola will have no liability for Third-Party Data or Motorola Data available through the Products and Services. Motorola and its Third-Party Data providers reserve all rights in and to Motorola Data and Third-Party Data not expressly granted in an Addendum or Ordering Document. 10.8. Feedback. Any Feedback provided by Customer is entirely voluntary, and will not create any confidentiality obligation for Motorola, even if designated as confidential by Customer. Motorola may use, reproduce, license, and otherwise distribute and exploit the Feedback without any obligation or payment to Customer or Authorized Users and Customer represents and warrants that it has obtained all necessary rights and consents to grant Motorola the foregoing rights. 10.9. Improvements; Products and Services. The Parties agree that, notwithstanding any provision of this MCA or the Agreement to the contrary, all fixes, modifications and improvements to the Services or Products conceived of or made by or on behalf of Motorola that are based either in whole or in part on the Feedback, Customer Data, or Service Use Data (or otherwise) are the exclusive property of Motorola and all right, title and interest in and to such fixes, modifications or improvements will vest solely in Motorola. Customer agrees to execute any written documents necessary to assign any intellectual property or other rights it may have in such fixes, modifications or improvements to Motorola. 11. Force Majeure; Delays Caused by Customer. 11.1. Force Majeure. Except for CustomerÓs payment obligations hereunder, neither Party will be responsible for nonperformance or delayed performance due to events outside of its reasonable control. If performance will be significantly delayed, the affected Party will provide notice to the other Party, and the Parties will agree (in writing) upon a reasonable extension to any applicable performance schedule. 11.2. Delays Caused by Customer. In the event of a delay under this Section 11.2 Î Delays Caused by Customer, (a) Customer will continue to pay the Fees as required hereunder, (b) the Parties will agree (in writing) upon a reasonable extension to any applicable performance H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 13 schedule, and (c) Customer will compensate Motorola for its out-of-pocket costs incurred due to the delay (including those incurred by MotorolaÓs affiliates, vendors, and subcontractors). 12. Disputes. The Parties will use the following procedure to resolve any disputes relating to or arising out of this Agreement (each, a Ð Dispute Ñ): 12.1. Governing Law. All matters relating to or arising out of the Agreement are governed by the laws of the State of Texas. The terms of the U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and the Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act will not apply. 12.2. Reserved. 12.3. Litigation, Venue, Jurisdiction. If the Dispute has not been resolved by mediation within sixty (60) days from the notice of mediation, either Party may submit the Dispute exclusively to a court in Galveston County, Texas. Each Party expressly consents to the exclusive jurisdiction of such courts for resolution of any Dispute and to enforce the outcome of any mediation. 13. General. 13.1. Compliance with Laws. Each Party will comply with applicable laws in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, including that Customer will ensure its and its Authorized UsersÓ use of the Products and Services complies with law (including privacy laws), and Customer will obtain any FCC and other licenses or authorizations (including licenses or authorizations required by foreign regulatory bodies) required for its and its Authorized UsersÓ use of the Products and Services. Motorola may, at its discretion, cease providing or otherwise modify Products and Services (or any terms related thereto in an Addendum or Ordering Document), in order to comply with any changes in applicable law. 13.2. Audit; Monitoring. Motorola will have the right to monitor and audit use of the Products, which may also include access by Motorola to Customer Data and Service Use Data. Customer will provide notice of such monitoring to its Authorized Users and obtain any required consents, including individual end users, and will cooperate with Motorola in any monitoring or audit. Customer will maintain during the Term, and for two (2) years thereafter, accurate records relating to any software licenses granted under this Agreement to verify compliance with this Agreement. Motorola or a third party (Ð Auditor Ñ) may inspect CustomerÓs and, as applicable, Authorized UsersÓ premises, books, and records. Motorola will pay expenses and costs of the Auditor, unless Customer is found to be in violation of the terms of the Agreement, in which case Customer will be responsible for such expenses and costs. 13.3. Assignment and Subcontracting. Neither Party may assign or otherwise transfer this Agreement without the prior written approval of the other Party. Motorola may assign or otherwise transfer this Agreement or any of its rights or obligations under this Agreement without consent (a) for financing purposes, (b) in connection with a merger, acquisition or sale of all or substantially all of its assets, (c) as part of a corporate reorganization, or (d) to a subsidiary corporation. Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement will be binding upon the Parties and their respective successors and assigns. 13.4. Waiver. A delay or omission by either Party to exercise any right under this Agreement will not be construed to be a waiver of such right. A waiver by either Party of any of the obligations to be performed by the other, or any breach thereof, will not be construed to be a waiver of any succeeding breach or of any other obligation. All waivers must be in writing and signed by the Party waiving its rights. 13.5. Severability. If any provision of the Agreement is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, illegal, or otherwise unenforceable, such provision will be deemed to be modified to reflect as nearly as possible the original intentions of the Parties in accordance with applicable law. The remaining provisions of this Agreement will not be affected, and each such provision will be valid and enforceable to the full extent permitted by applicable law. 13.6. Independent Contractors. Each Party will perform its duties under this Agreement as an independent contractor. The Parties and their personnel will not be considered to be employees or agents of the other Party. Nothing in this Agreement will be interpreted as granting either Party the right or authority to make commitments of any kind for the other. This Agreement will not constitute, create, or be interpreted as a joint venture, partnership, or formal business organization of any kind. 13.7. Third-Party Beneficiaries. The Agreement is entered into solely between, and may be enforced only by, the Parties. Each Party intends that the Agreement will not benefit, or create any right or cause of action in or on behalf of, any entity other than the Parties. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a licensor or supplier of third-party software included in the software Products will be a direct and intended third-party beneficiary of this Agreement. 13.8. Interpretation. The section headings in this Agreement are included only for convenience The words ÐincludingÑ and ÐincludeÑ will be deemed to be followed by the phrase Ðwithout limitationÑ. This Agreement will be fairly interpreted in accordance with its terms and conditions and not for or against either Party. 13.9. Notices. Notices required under this Agreement to be given by one Party to the other must be in writing and either personally delivered or sent to the address provided by the other Party by certified mail, return receipt requested and postage prepaid (or by a recognized courier service, such as FedEx, UPS, or DHL), and will be effective upon receipt. 13.10. Cumulative Remedies. Except as specifically stated in this Agreement, all remedies provided for in this Agreement will be cumulative and in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other remedies available to either Party at law, in equity, by contract, or otherwise. Except as specifically stated in this Agreement, the election by a Party of any remedy provided for in this Agreement or otherwise available to such Party will not preclude such Party from pursuing any other remedies available to such Party at law, in equity, by contract, or otherwise. 13.11. Survival. The following provisions will survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement for any reason: Section 2.4 Î Customer Obligations; Section 3.4 Î Effect of Termination or Expiration; Section 4 Î Payment and Invoicing; Section 6.5 Î Warranty Disclaimer; Section 7.3 Î Customer Indemnity; Section 8 Î Limitation of Liability; Section 9 Î Confidentiality; Section 10 Î Proprietary Rights; Data; Feedback; Section 11 Î Force Majeure; Delays Caused by Customer; Section 12 Î Disputes; and Section 13 Î General. 13.12. Shared Agency. Other public entities may purchase off of this Agreement under the same terms and conditions set forth herein through the use of a Shared Agency Addendum, a copy of which is attached hereto. 13.13. Entire Agreement. This Agreement, including all Addenda and Ordering Documents, constitutes the entire agreement of the Parties regarding the subject matter hereto, and supersedes all previous agreements, proposals, and understandings, whether written or oral, relating to this subject matter. This Agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, and will have the same legal force and effect as if the Parties had executed it as a single document. The Parties may sign in writing or by electronic signature. An electronic signature, facsimile copy, or H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 15 computer image of a signature, will be treated, and will have the same effect as an original signature, and will have the same effect, as an original signed copy of this document. This Agreement may be amended or modified only by a written instrument signed by authorized representatives of both Parties. The preprinted terms and conditions found on any Customer purchase order, acknowledgment, or other form will not be considered an amendment or modification or part of this Agreement, even if a representative of each Party signs such document. 13.14. Prohibition on Boycotting Energy Companies: Pursuant to Section 2274.002 of the Texas Government Code, by executing this Agreement Contractor verifies that Contractor (1) does not boycott energy companies; and (2) will not boycott energy companies during the term of this Agreement. 13.15. Prohibition on Discrimination against Firearm Industries: Pursuant to Section 2274.002 of the Texas Government Code, by executing this Agreement Contractor verifies that Contractor (1) does not have a practice, policy, guidance, or directive that discriminates against a firearm entity or firearm trade association; and (2) will not discriminate during the term of this Agreement against a firearm entity or firearm trade association. The Parties hereby enter into this MCA as of the Effective Date. Motorola: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Customer: \[___________\] By: ______________________________ By: ______________________________ Name: ___________________________ Name: ____________________________ Title: ____________________________ Title: _____________________________ Date: ____________________________ Date: ____________________________ City Secretary:____________________ Name:___________________________ Date:____________________________ City Attorney:______________________ Name:____________________________ Date:_____________________________ Exhibit A H-GAC Contract No. RA05-18, as Amended Equipment Purchase and Software License Addendum This Equipment Purchase and Software License Addendum (this Ð EPSLA Ñ) is entered into between Motorola Solutions, Inc., with offices at 500 W. Monroe Street, Suite 4400, Chicago, IL 60661 (Ð Motorola Ñ) and the entity set forth in the signature block below or in the MCA (Ð Customer Ñ), and will be subject to, and governed by, the terms of the Master Customer Agreement entered into between the Parties, effective as of \[________\] (the Ð MCA Ñ). Capitalized terms used in this EPSLA, but not defined herein, will have the meanings set forth in the MCA. 1. Addendum. This EPSLA governs CustomerÓs purchase of Equipment and license of Licensed Software (and, if set forth in an Ordering Document, related Services) from Motorola, and will form part of the PartiesÓ Agreement. 2. Delivery of Equipment and Licensed Software. 2.1. Delivery and Risk of Loss. Motorola will provide to Customer the Products (and, if applicable, related Services) set forth in an Ordering Document, in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. Motorola will, using commercially reasonable practices, pack the ordered Equipment and ship such Equipment to the Customer address set forth in the applicable Ordering Document or otherwise provided by Customer in writing, using a carrier selected by Motorola. Notwithstanding the foregoing, delivery of Equipment (and any incorporated Licensed Software) will occur, and title and risk of loss for the Equipment will pass to Customer, upon shipment by Motorola in accordance with Ex Works, MotorolaÓs premises (Incoterms 2020). Customer will pay all shipping costs, taxes, and other charges applicable to the shipment and import or export of the Products and Services, as applicable, and Customer will be responsible for reporting the Products for personal property tax purposes. Delivery of Licensed Software for installation on Equipment or Customer-Provided Equipment will occur upon the earlier of (a) electronic delivery of the Licensed Software by Motorola, and (b) the date Motorola otherwise makes the Licensed Software available for download by Customer. If agreed upon in an Ordering Document, Motorola will also provide Services related to such Products. 2.2. Delays. Any shipping dates set forth in an Ordering Document are approximate, and while Motorola will make reasonable efforts to ship Products by any such estimated shipping date, Motorola will not be liable for any delay or related damages to Customer. Time for delivery will not be of the essence, and delays will not constitute grounds for cancellation, penalties, termination, or a refund. 2.3. Beta Services. If Motorola makes any beta version of a software application (Ð Beta Service Ñ) available to Customer, Customer may choose to use such Beta Service at its own discretion, provided, however, that Customer will use the Beta Service solely for purposes of CustomerÓs evaluation of such Beta Service, and for no other purpose. Customer acknowledges and agrees that all Beta Services are offered Ðas-isÑ and without any representations or warranties or other commitments or protections from Motorola. Motorola will determine the duration of the evaluation period for any Beta Service, in its sole discretion, and Motorola may discontinue any Beta Service at any time. Customer acknowledges that Beta Services, by their nature, have not been fully tested and may contain defects or deficiencies. 3. Licensed Software License and Restrictions. 3.1. Licensed Software License. Subject to CustomerÓs and its Authorized UsersÓ compliance with the Agreement (including payment terms), Motorola hereby grants Customer and its Authorized Users a limited, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable, and non-exclusive license to Equipment Purchase and Software License Addendum 1 use the Licensed Software identified in an Ordering Document, in object code form only, and the associated Documentation, solely in connection with the Equipment provided by Motorola or authorized Customer-Provided Equipment (as applicable, the Ð Designated Products Ñ) and solely for CustomerÓs internal business purposes. Unless otherwise stated in an Addendum or the Ordering Document, the foregoing license grant will be limited to the number of licenses set forth in the applicable Ordering Document and will continue for the life of the applicable Designated Product. Except as otherwise permitted in an applicable Addendum or Ordering Document, Customer may install, access, and use Licensed Software only in CustomerÓs owned or controlled facilities, including any authorized mobile sites; provided, however, that Authorized Users using authorized mobile or handheld devices may also log into and access the Licensed Software remotely from any location. 3.2. Subscription License Model. If the Parties mutually agree that any Licensed Software purchased under this EPSLA will be replaced with or upgraded to Subscription Software, then upon such time which the Parties execute the applicable Ordering Document, the licenses granted under this EPSLA will automatically terminate, and such Subscription Software will be governed by the terms of the applicable Addendum under this Agreement. 3.3. End User Licenses. Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in the Agreement, certain Licensed Software is governed by a separate license, EULA, or other agreement, including terms governing third-party equipment or software, such as open source software, included in the Products and Services. Customer will comply, and ensure its Authorized Users comply, with any such additional terms applicable to third-party equipment or software. 3.4. Customer Restrictions. Customers and Authorized Users will comply with the applicable Documentation in connection with their use of the Products. Customer will not and will not allow others, including the Authorized Users, to: (a) make the Licensed Software available for use by unauthorized third parties, including via a commercial rental or sharing arrangement; (b) reverse engineer, disassemble, or reprogram the Licensed Software or any portion thereof to a human- readable form; (c) modify, create derivative works of, or merge the Licensed Software with other software or equipment; (d) copy, reproduce, distribute, lend, lease, or transfer the Licensed Software or Documentation for or to any third party without the prior express written permission of Motorola; (e) take any action that would cause the Licensed Software or Documentation to be placed in the public domain; (f) use the Licensed Software to compete with Motorola; or (g) remove, alter, or obscure, any copyright or other notice. 3.5. Copies. Customer may make one (1) copy of the Licensed Software solely for archival, back-up, or disaster recovery purposes during the term of the applicable Licensed Software license. Customer may make as many copies of the Documentation reasonably required for the internal use of the Licensed Software during such Licensed SoftwareÓs license term. Unless otherwise authorized by Motorola in writing, Customer will not, and will not enable or allow any third party to: (a) install a licensed copy of the Licensed Software on more than one (1) unit of a Designated Product; or (b) copy onto or transfer Licensed Software installed in a unit of a Designated Product onto another device. Customer may temporarily transfer Licensed Software installed on a Designated Product to another device if the Designated Product is inoperable or malfunctioning, if Customer provides written notice to Motorola of the temporary transfer and identifies the device on which the Licensed is transferred. Temporary transfer of the Licensed Software to another device must be discontinued when the original Designated Product is returned to operation and the Licensed Software must be removed from the other device. Customer must provide prompt written notice to Motorola at the time temporary transfer is discontinued. 3.6. Resale of Equipment. Equipment contains embedded Licensed Software. If Customer desires to sell its used Equipment to a third party, Customer must first receive prior written authorization from Motorola and obtain written acceptance of the applicable Licensed Software license terms, including the obligation to pay relevant license fees, from such third party. 4. Term. 4.1. Term. The term of this EPSLA (the Ð EPSLA Term Ñ) will commence upon either (a) the Effective Date of the MCA, if this EPSLA is attached to the MCA as of such Effective Date, or (b) the EPSLA Date set forth on the signature page below, if this EPSLA is executed after the MCA Effective Date, and will continue until the later of (i) three (3) years after the first order for Products is placed via an Ordering Document, or (ii) the expiration of all applicable warranty periods (as set forth in Section 6.1 Î Motorola Warranties below) under this EPSLA, unless this EPSLA or the Agreement is earlier terminated in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. 4.2. Termination. Notwithstanding the termination provisions of the MCA, Motorola may terminate this EPSLA (and any Ordering Documents hereunder) immediately upon notice to Customer if Customer breaches Section 3 Î Licensed Software License and Restrictions of this EPSLA, or any other provision related to Licensed Software license scope or restrictions set forth in an Ordering Document, EULA, or other applicable Addendum. For clarity, upon termination or expiration of the EPSLA Term, all Motorola obligations under this EPSLA (including with respect to Equipment and Licensed Software delivered hereunder) will terminate. If Customer desires to purchase additional Services in connection with such Equipment or Licensed Software, Customer may enter into a separate Addendum with Motorola, governing such Services. Customer acknowledges that Motorola made a considerable investment of resources in the development, marketing, and distribution of the Licensed Software and Documentation, and that CustomerÓs breach of the Agreement will result in irreparable harm to Motorola for which monetary damages would be inadequate. If Licensee breaches this Agreement, in addition to termination, Motorola will be entitled to all available remedies at law or in equity, including immediate injunctive relief and repossession of all non-embedded Licensed Software and associated Documentation. 4.3. Equipment as a Service. In the event that Customer purchases any Equipment at a price below the MSRP for such Equipment in connection Customer entering into a fixed- or minimum required-term agreement for Subscription Software, and Customer or Motorola terminates the Agreement, this EPSLA, or other applicable Addendum (such as the Addendum governing the purchase of such Subscription Software) prior to the expiration of such fixed- or minimum required-term, then Motorola will have the right to invoice Customer for, and Customer will pay, the amount of the discount to the MSRP for the Equipment or such other amount set forth in the applicable Addendum or Ordering Document. This Section will not limit any other remedies Motorola may have with respect to an early termination. 5. Payment. Customer will pay invoices for the Products and Services provided under this EPSLA in accordance with the invoice payment terms set forth in the MCA. Generally, invoices are issued after shipment of Equipment or upon MotorolaÓs delivery of Licensed Software (in accordance with Section 2.1 Î Delivery and Risk of Loss), as applicable, but if a specific invoicing or payment schedule is set forth in the applicable Ordering Document, EULA or other Addendum, such schedule will control with respect to the applicable Products and Services referenced therein. Motorola will have the right to suspend future deliveries of Products and Services if Customer fails to make any payments when due. 6. Representations and Warranties; Liability. Equipment Purchase and Software License Addendum 3 6.1. Motorola Warranties. Subject to the disclaimers and exclusions set forth in the MCA and this EPSLA, (a) for a period of one (1) year commencing upon the delivery of Motorola- manufactured Equipment under Section 2.1 Î Delivery and Risk of Loss, Motorola represents and warrants that such Motorola-manufactured Equipment, under normal use, will be free from material defects in materials and workmanship; (b) to the extent permitted by the providers of third-party software or hardware included in the Products and Services, Motorola will pass through to Customer any warranties provided by such third parties, which warranties will apply for the period defined by the applicable third party; and (c) for a period of ninety (90) days commencing upon the delivery of Motorola-owned Licensed Software under Section 2.1 Î Delivery and Risk of Loss, Motorola represents and warrants that such Licensed Software, when used in accordance with the Documentation and the Agreement, will be free from reproducible defects that prevent operation of features critical to the primary functionality or successful operation of the Motorola-developed Licensed Software (as determined by Motorola). The warranty set forth in subsection (c) will be referred to as the Ð Motorola Licensed Software Warranty Ñ. As CustomerÓs sole and exclusive remedy for any breach of the Motorola Licensed Software Warranty, Motorola will use commercially reasonable efforts to remedy the material defect in the applicable Licensed Software; provided, however, that if Motorola does not remedy such material defect within a reasonable time, then at MotorolaÓs sole option, Motorola will either replace the defective Licensed Software with functionally-equivalent software, provide substitute software to Customer, or terminate the applicable software license and refund any paid license fees to Customer on a pro-rata basis. For clarity, the Motorola Licensed Software Warranty applies only to the most current version of the Licensed Software issued by Motorola, and issuance of updated versions of any Licensed Software does not result in a renewal or extension of the Motorola Licensed Software Warranty beyond the ninety (90) day warranty period. 6.2. ADDITIONAL EXCLUSIONS. IN ADDITION TO THE EXCLUSIONS FROM DAMAGES SETFORTH IN THEMCA, ANDNOTWITHSTANDING ANY PROVISION OF THE AGREEMENT TO THE CONTRARY, MOTOROLAWILL HAVE NOLIABILITY FOR (A) DEFECTS IN OR DAMAGE TO PRODUCTS RESULTING FROM USEOTHER THAN IN THE NORMAL AUTHORIZED MANNER,OR FROMACCIDENT,LIQUIDS,OR NEGLECT; (B) TESTING, MAINTENANCE, REPAIR, INSTALLATION, OR MODIFICATION BY PARTIES OTHER THAN MOTOROLA;(C) CUSTOMERÓS OR ANYAUTHORIZEDUSERÓS FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH INDUSTRY AND OSHA OR OTHERLEGAL STANDARDS; (D) DAMAGE TO RADIO ANTENNAS, UNLESS CAUSED BY DEFECTS IN MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP; (E) EQUIPMENT WITHNOSERIAL NUMBER;(F)BATTERIES ORCONSUMABLES; (G) FREIGHT COSTS FOR SHIPMENT TO REPAIR DEPOTS; (H) COSMETIC DAMAGE THAT DOES NOT AFFECTOPERATION; (I)NORMAL WEARAND TEAR; (J) ISSUES OROBSOLESCENCE OF LICENSED SOFTWARE DUE TO CHANGES IN CUSTOMER OR AUTHORIZED USER REQUIREMENTS, EQUIPMENT,OR SYSTEMS; (K) TRACKING AND LOCATION-BASED SERVICES; OR (L)BETA SERVICES. 6.3. Voluntary Remedies. Motorola is not obligated to remedy, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price for the disclaimed or excluded issues in the MCA or Section 6.2 Î Additional Exclusions above, but if Motorola agrees to provide Services to help resolve such issues, Customer will reimburse Motorola for its reasonable time and expenses, including by paying Motorola any Fees set forth in an Ordering Document for such Services, if applicable. 7. Copyright Notices. The existence of a copyright notice on any Licensed Software will not be construed as an admission or presumption of publication of the Licensed Software or public disclosure of any trade secrets associated with the Licensed Software. 8. Survival. The following provisions will survive the expiration or termination of this EPSLA for any reason: Section 3 Î Licensed Software License and Restrictions; Section 4 Î Term; Section 5 Î Payment; Section 6.2 Î Additional Exclusions; Section 8 Î Survival. Equipment Purchase and Software License Addendum 5 Software Products Addendum This Software Products Addendum (this Ð SPA Ñ) is entered into between Motorola Solutions, Inc., with offices at 500 W. Monroe Street, Suite 4400, Chicago, IL 60661 (Ð Motorola Ñ) and the entity set forth in the signature block below or in the MCA (Ð Customer Ñ), and will be subject to, and governed by, the terms of the Master Customer Agreement entered into between the Parties, effective as of \[________\] (the Ð MCA Ñ), and the applicable Addenda. Capitalized terms used in this SPA, but not defined herein, will have the meanings set forth in the MCA or the applicable Addenda. 9. Addendum. This SPA governs CustomerÓs purchase of certain Motorola software Products, including Software Systems, and will form part of the PartiesÓ Agreement. A Ð Software System Ñ is a solution that includes at least one command center software Product and requires Integration Services to deploy such software Product at a Customer Site or onto any Customer- Provided Equipment or Equipment provided to Customer. In addition to the MCA, other Addenda may be applicable to the Software System or other software Products, including the Subscription Software Addendum (Ð SSA Ñ), with respect to Subscription Software, and the Equipment Purchase and Software License Addendum (Ð EPSLA Ñ), with respect to Licensed Software and Equipment, as further described below. This SPA will control with respect to conflicting terms in the MCA or any other applicable Addendum, but only as applicable to the Software System or other software Products purchased under this SPA and not with respect to other Products and Services. 10. Software Systems; Applicable Terms and Conditions. 10.1. On-Premise Software System. If Customer purchases an Ðon-premises Software System,Ñ where Equipment and Licensed Software are installed at Customer Sites or on Customer- Provided Equipment, then, unless the Ordering Document(s) specify that any software is being purchased on a subscription basis (i.e., as Subscription Software), such Equipment and Licensed Software installed at Customer Sites or on Customer-Provided Equipment are subject to the EPSLA. On-premises Software Systems described in this Section qualify for the System Warranty as described in Section 5 Î On-Premises Software System Warranty (the Ð System Warranty Ñ). In connection with the on-premises Software System, Customer may also purchase additional Subscription Software that integrates with its on-premises Software System (e.g., CommandCentral Aware) (each, an Ð Add-On Subscription Ñ). Any Add-On Subscription will be subject to the terms and conditions of the SSA and excluded from the System Warranty. 10.2. On-Premise Software System as a Service. If Customer purchases an Ðon-premises Software System as a service,Ñ where Equipment and software Products are installed at Customer Sites or on Customer-Provided Equipment, and such software is generally licensed on a subscription basis (i.e., as Subscription Software), then such Subscription Software will be subject to the SSA and not the EPSLA. Any (a) Equipment purchased, (b) firmware preinstalled on such Equipment, and (c) Microsoft operating system Licensed Software are subject to the EPSLA. On-premises Software Systems as a service described in this Section are provided as a service and, accordingly, do not qualify for the System Warranty. System completion, however, is determined in accordance with the provisions of Section 3 Î Software System Completion below. 10.3. Cloud Hosted Software System. If Customer purchases a Ðcloud hosted Software System,Ñ where the applicable software is hosted in a data center and provided to Customer as a service (i.e., as hosted Subscription Software), including CommandCentral Products, then such Subscription Software is subject to the SSA. Any Equipment purchased in connection with a cloud Software System is subject to the EPSLA. Cloud hosted Software Systems described in this Software Products Addendum 1 Section do not qualify for the System Warranty. System completion, however, is determined in accordance with the provisions of Section 3 Î Software System Completion below. 10.4. Services. Any Integration Services or Maintenance and Support Services purchased in connection with, or included as a part of, a Software System are subject to the MCA, and as described in the applicable Ordering Document. 11. Software System Completion. Any Software System described in an Ordering Document hereunder (including the Products, Integration Services, and all other components thereof) will be deemed completed upon CustomerÓs (or the applicable Authorized UserÓs) Beneficial Use of each Product that is included in the Software System (unless alternative acceptance procedures are set forth in the applicable Ordering Document) (the Ð System Completion Date Ñ). Customer will not unreasonably delay Beneficial Use of any Product within a Software System, and in any event, the Parties agree that Beneficial Use of a Product will be deemed to have occurred thirty (30) days after functional demonstration. For clarity, if a Software System is comprised of more than one Product, Motorola may notify Customer that all Integration Services for a particular Product within the Software System have been completed, and Customer may have Beneficial Use of such Product prior to having Beneficial Use of other Products in the Software System, or of the Software System as a whole. In such case, the Integration Services applicable to such Product will be deemed complete upon CustomerÓs Beneficial Use of the Product (Ð Product Completion Date Ñ), which may occur before the System Completion Date. As used in this Section, Ð Beneficial Use Ñ means use by Customer or at least one (1) Authorized User of the material features and functionalities of a Product within a Software System, in material conformance with Product descriptions in the applicable Ordering Document. This Section applies to Products purchased as part of a Software System notwithstanding the delivery provisions of the Addendum applicable to such Products, such as the SSA or EPSLA, and this Section will control over such other delivery provisions to the extent of a conflict. 12. Payment. Customer will pay invoices for the Products and Services covered by this SPA in accordance with the invoice payment terms set forth in the MCA. Fees for Software Systems will be invoiced as of the System Completion Date, unless another payment process or schedule or milestones are set forth in an Ordering Document or applicable Addendum. In addition to Equipment, Licensed Software, Subscription Software and Integration Services (as applicable) sold as part of a Software System, the Ordering Documents for a Software System may also include post-deployment Integration Services or other Services which are to be provided following the date of functional demonstration (Ð Post-Deployment Services Ñ). Post-Deployment Services will be invoiced upon their completion and paid by Customer in accordance with the terms of the MCA. 13. On-Premises Software System Warranty. Subject to the disclaimers in the MCA and any other applicable Addenda, Motorola represents and warrants that, on the System Completion Date for an on-premises Software System described in Section 2.1 Î On-Premises Software System, or on the applicable Product Completion Date for a specific Product within such on- premises Software System, if earlier, (a) such Software System or Product will perform in accordance with the descriptions in the applicable Ordering Documents in all material respects, and (b) if Customer has purchased any Equipment or Motorola Licensed Software (but, for clarity, excluding Subscription Software) as part of such on-premises Software System, the warranty period applicable to such Equipment and Motorola Licensed Software will continue for a period of one (1) year commencing upon the System Completion Date for the Software System that includes such Products, or on the applicable Product Completion Date, if earlier, instead of commencing upon delivery of the Products in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in Section 6 Î Representations and Warranties; Liabilities of the EPSLA. The warranties set forth in the applicable Addenda are not otherwise modified by this SPA. 14. Prohibited Use. Customer will not integrate or use, or permit a third party or an Authorized User to integrate or use, any Non-Motorola Content with or in connection with a Software System or other software Product provided by Motorola under this SPA, without the express written permission of Motorola. 15. API Support. Motorola will use commercially reasonable efforts to maintain its Application Programming Interface (Ð API Ñ) offered sold in connection with any Software System. APIs will evolve and mature over time, requiring changes and updates. Motorola will use reasonable efforts to continue supporting any version of an API for 6 months after such version is introduced, but if Motorola determines, in its sole discretion, determines to discontinue support of an API for any reason, Motorola will provide reasonable advance notification to Customer. If an API presents a security risk, Motorola may discontinue an API without prior notice. 16. Support of Downloaded Clients. If Customer purchases any software Product that requires a client installed locally on any Customer-Provided Equipment or Equipment in possession of Customer, Customer will be responsible for downloading and installing the current version of such client, as it may be updated from time to time. Motorola will use reasonable efforts to continue supporting any version of a client for forty-five (45) days following its release, but Motorola may update the current version of its client at any time, including for bug fixes, product improvements, and feature updates, and Motorola makes no representations or warranties that any software Product will support prior versions of a client. 17. Applicable End User Terms. Additional license terms apply to third-party software included in CAD and Records Products which are available online at: www.motorolasolutions.com/legal-flow-downs . Customer will comply, and ensure its Authorized Users comply, with all such additional license terms. 18. Additional Terms for On-Premise Software System as a Service. The terms set forth in this Section 10 Î Additional Terms for On-Premise Software System as a Service apply in the event Customer purchases an on-premises Software System as a service under this SPA. 18.1. Transition to Subscription License Model. If the Parties mutually agree that any on- premises Subscription Software purchased under this SPA as part of an on-premises Software System as a service will be replaced with or upgraded to Subscription Software hosted in a data center, then upon such time which the Parties execute the applicable Ordering Document, (a) the licenses granted to such on-premises Subscription Software under the applicable Ordering Document will automatically terminate, (b) Customer and its Authorized Users will cease use of the applicable on-premises copies of Subscription Software, and (c) the replacement hosted Subscription Software provided hereunder will be governed by the terms of the SSA and this SPA. 18.2. Transition Fee. Motorola will not charge additional Fees for Services related to the transition to hosted Subscription Software, as described in Section 10.1 Î Transition to Subscription License Model. Notwithstanding the foregoing, subscription Fees for the applicable hosted Subscription Software are subject to the SSA and the applicable Ordering Document, and may be greater than Fees paid by Customer for on-premises Subscription Software. 18.3. Software Decommissioning. Upon (a) transition of the on-premises Software System as a service to Subscription Software hosted in a data center or (b) any termination of the Subscription Software license for the on-premises Software System as a service, Motorola will have the right Software Products Addendum 3 to enter Customer Sites and decommission the applicable on-premises Subscription Software that is installed at CustomerÓs Site or on Customer-Provided Equipment. For clarity, Customer will retain the right to use Licensed Software that is firmware incorporated into Equipment purchased by Customer from Motorola and any Microsoft operating system Licensed Software. 19. Additional Terms for CAD and Records Products. The terms set forth in this Section 11 Î Additional Terms for CAD and Records Products apply in the event Customer purchases any Computer Aided Dispatch (Ð CAD Ñ) or Records Products under this SPA. 19.1. Support Required. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the licenses granted by Motorola under the Agreement to CAD and Records Products for on-premises Software Systems are conditioned upon Customer purchasing Maintenance and Support Services for such Products during the term of the applicable license. If at any time during the term of any such license, Customer fails to purchase associated Maintenance and Support Services (or pay the fees for such Services), Motorola will have the right to terminate or suspend the software licenses for CAD and Record Products, and this SPA or the applicable Ordering Document. 19.2. CJIS Security Policy. Motorola agrees to support CustomerÓs obligation to comply with the Federal Bureau of Investigation Criminal Justice Information Services (Ð CJIS Ñ) Security Policy and will comply with the terms of the CJIS Security Addendum for the term of the Addendum or Ordering Document for the applicable Product. Customer hereby consents to Motorola screened personnel serving as the ÐescortÑ within the meaning of CJIS Security Policy for unscreened Motorola personnel that require access to unencrypted Criminal Justice Information for purposes of Product support and development. 20. Additional Cloud Terms. The terms set forth in this Section 12 Î Additional Cloud Terms apply in the event Customer purchases any cloud hosted software. 20.1. Data Storage. Motorola will determine, in its sole discretion, the location of the stored content for cloud hosted software. All data, replications, and backups will be stored at a location in the United States for Customers in the United States. 20.2. Data Retrieval. Cloud hosted software will leverage different types of storage to optimize software, as determined in MotorolaÓs sole discretion. For multimedia data, such as videos, pictures, audio files, Motorola will, in its sole discretion, determine the type of storage medium used to store the content. The type of storage and medium selected by Motorola will determine the data retrieval speed. Access to content in archival storage may take up to 24 hours to be viewable. 20.3. Maintenance. Scheduled maintenance of cloud hosted Software will be performed periodically. Motorola will make commercially reasonable efforts to notify customers one (1) week in advance of any such maintenance. Unscheduled and emergency maintenance may be required from time to time. Motorola will make commercially reasonable efforts to notify customers of any unscheduled or emergency maintenance 24 hours in advance. 21. Survival. The following provisions will survive the expiration or termination of this SPA for any reason: Section 1 Î Addendum; Section 2 Î Software Systems; Applicable Terms and Conditions; Section 6 Î Prohibited Use; Section 9 Î Applicable End User Terms; Section 13 Î Survival. Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Subscription Software Addendum This Subscription Software Addendum (this Ð SSA Ñ) is entered into between Motorola Solutions, Inc., with offices at 500 W. Monroe Street, Suite 4400, Chicago, IL 60661 (Ð Motorola Ñ) and the entity set forth in the signature block below or in the MCA (Ð Customer Ñ), and will be subject to, and governed by, the terms of the Master Customer Agreement entered into between the Parties, effective as of \[________\] (the Ð MCA Ñ). Capitalized terms used in this SSA, but not defined herein, will have the meanings set forth in the MCA. 1. Addendum. This SSA governs CustomerÓs purchase of Subscription Software (and, if set forth in an Ordering Document, related Services) from Motorola, and will form part of the PartiesÓ Agreement. Additional Subscription Software-specific Addenda or other terms and conditions may apply to certain Subscription Software, where such terms are provided or presented to Customer. 2. Delivery of Subscription Software. 2.1. Delivery. During the applicable Subscription Term (as defined below), Motorola will provide to Customer the Subscription Software set forth in an Ordering Document, in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. Motorola will provide Customer advance notice (which may be provided electronically) of any planned downtime. Delivery will occur upon CustomerÓs receipt of credentials required for access to the Subscription Software or upon Motorola otherwise providing access to the Subscription Software. If agreed upon in an Ordering Document, Motorola will also provide Services related to such Subscription Software. 2.2. Modifications. In addition to other rights to modify the Products and Services set forth in the MCA, Motorola may modify the Subscription Software, any associated recurring Services and any related systems so long as their functionality (as described in the applicable Ordering Document) is not materially degraded. Documentation for the Subscription Software may be updated to reflect such modifications. For clarity, new features or enhancements that are added to any Subscription Software may be subject to additional Fees. 2.3. User Credentials. If applicable, Motorola will provide Customer with administrative user credentials for the Subscription Software, and Customer will ensure such administrative user credentials are accessed and used only by CustomerÓs employees with training on their proper use. Customer will protect, and will cause its Authorized Users to protect, the confidentiality and security of all user credentials, including any administrative user credentials, and maintain user credential validity, including by updating passwords. Customer will be liable for any use of the Subscription Software through such user credential (including through any administrative user credentials), including any changes made to the Subscription Software or issues or user impact arising therefrom. To the extent Motorola provides Services to Customer in order to help resolve issues resulting from changes made to the Subscription Software through user credentials, including through any administrative user credentials, or issues otherwise created by Authorized Users, such Services will be billed to Customer on a time and materials basis, and Customer will pay all invoices in accordance with the payment terms of the MCA. 2.4. Beta Services. If Motorola makes any beta version of a software application (Ð Beta Service Ñ) available to Customer, Customer may choose to use such Beta Service at its own discretion, provided, however, that Customer will use the Beta Service solely for purposes of CustomerÓs evaluation of such Beta Service, and for no other purpose. Customer acknowledges and agrees that all Beta Services are offered Ðas-isÑ and without any representations or warranties PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-1 or other commitments or protections from Motorola. Motorola will determine the duration of the evaluation period for any Beta Service, in its sole discretion, and Motorola may discontinue any Beta Service at any time. Customer acknowledges that Beta Services, by their nature, have not been fully tested and may contain defects or deficiencies. 3. Subscription Software License and Restrictions. 3.1. Subscription Software License. Subject to CustomerÓs and its Authorized UsersÓ compliance with the Agreement, including payment terms, Motorola hereby grants Customer and its Authorized Users a limited, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable, and non-exclusive license to use the Subscription Software identified in an Ordering Document, and the associated Documentation, solely for CustomerÓs internal business purposes. The foregoing license grant will be limited to use in the territory and to the number of licenses set forth in an Ordering Document (if applicable), and will continue for the applicable Subscription Term. Customer may access, and use the Subscription Software only in CustomerÓs owned or controlled facilities, including any authorized mobile sites; provided, however, that Authorized Users using authorized mobile or handheld devices may also log into and access the Subscription Software remotely from any location. No custom development work will be performed under this Addendum. 3.2. End User Licenses. Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in the Agreement, certain Subscription Software is governed by a separate license, EULA, or other agreement, including terms governing third-party software, such as open source software, included in the Subscription Software. Customer will comply, and ensure its Authorized Users comply, with such additional license agreements. 3.3. Customer Restrictions. Customers and Authorized Users will comply with the applicable Documentation and the copyright laws of the United States and all other relevant jurisdictions (including the copyright laws where Customer uses the Subscription Software) in connection with their use of the Subscription Software. Customer will not, and will not allow others including the Authorized Users, to make the Subscription Software available for use by unauthorized third parties, including via a commercial rental or sharing arrangement; reverse engineer, disassemble, or reprogram software used to provide the Subscription Software or any portion thereof to a human-readable form; modify, create derivative works of, or merge the Subscription Software or software used to provide the Subscription Software with other software; copy, reproduce, distribute, lend, or lease the Subscription Software or Documentation for or to any third party; take any action that would cause the Subscription Software, software used to provide the Subscription Software, or Documentation to be placed in the public domain; use the Subscription Software to compete with Motorola; remove, alter, or obscure, any copyright or other notice; share user credentials (including among Authorized Users); use the Subscription Software to store or transmit malicious code; or attempt to gain unauthorized access to the Subscription Software or its related systems or networks. 4. Term. 4.1. Subscription Terms.The duration of CustomerÓs subscription to the first Subscription Software and any associated recurring Services ordered under this SSA (or the first Subscription Software or recurring Service, if multiple are ordered at once) will commence upon delivery of such Subscription Software (and recurring Services, if applicable) and will continue for a twelve (12) month period or such longer period identified in an Ordering Document (the Ð Initial Subscription Period Ñ). Following the Initial Subscription Period, CustomerÓs subscription to the Subscription Software and any recurring Services will automatically renew for additional twelve (12) month periods (each, a Ð Renewal Subscription Year Ñ), unless either Party notifies the other Party of its intent not to renew at least thirty (30) days before the conclusion of the then-current Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Subscription Term. (The Initial Subscription Period and each Renewal Subscription Year will each be referred to herein as a Ð Subscription Term Ñ.) Motorola may increase Fees prior to any Renewal Subscription Year. In such case, Motorola will notify Customer of such proposed increase no later than thirty (30) days prior to commencement of such Renewal Subscription Year. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable Ordering Document, if Customer orders any additional Subscription Software or recurring Services under this SSA during an in-process Subscription Term, the subscription for each new Subscription Software or recurring Service will (a) commence upon delivery of such Subscription Software or recurring Service, and continue until the conclusion of CustomerÓs then-current Subscription Term (a Ð Partial Subscription Year Ñ), and (b) automatically renew for Renewal Subscription Years thereafter, unless either Party notifies the other Party of its intent not to renew at least thirty (30) days before the conclusion of the then-current Subscription Term. Thus, unless otherwise specified in the applicable Ordering Document, the Subscription Terms for all Subscription Software and recurring Services hereunder will be synchronized. 4.2. Term. The term of this SSA (the Ð SSA Term Ñ) will commence upon either (a) the Effective Date of the MCA, if this SSA is attached to the MCA as of such Effective Date, or (b) the SSA Date set forth on the signature page below, if this SSA is executed after the MCA Effective Date, and will continue until the expiration or termination of all Subscription Terms under this SSA, unless this SSA or the Agreement is earlier terminated in accordance with the terms of the Agreement. 4.3. Termination. Notwithstanding the termination provisions of the MCA, Motorola may terminate this SSA (or any Addendum or Ordering Documents hereunder), or suspend delivery of Subscription Software or Services, immediately upon notice to Customer if (a) Customer breaches Section 3 Î Subscription Software License and Restrictions of this SSA, or any other provision related to Subscription Software license scope or restrictions set forth in an Addendum or Ordering Document, or (b) it determines that CustomerÓs use of the Subscription Software poses, or may pose, a security or other risk or adverse impact to any Subscription Software, Motorola, MotorolaÓs systems, or any third party (including other Motorola customers). Customer acknowledges that Motorola made a considerable investment of resources in the development, marketing, and distribution of the Subscription Software and Documentation, and that CustomerÓs breach of the Agreement will result in irreparable harm to Motorola for which monetary damages would be inadequate. If Customer breaches this Agreement, in addition to termination, Motorola will be entitled to all available remedies at law or in equity (including immediate injunctive relief). 4.4. Wind Down of Subscription Software. In addition to the termination rights in the MCA, Motorola may terminate any Ordering Document and Subscription Term, in whole or in part, in the event Motorola plans to cease offering the applicable Subscription Software or Service to customers. 5. Payment. 5.1. Payment. Unless otherwise provided in an Ordering Document (and notwithstanding the provisions of the MCA), Customer will prepay an annual subscription Fee set forth in an Ordering Document for each Subscription Software and associated recurring Service, before the commencement of each Subscription Term. For any Partial Subscription Year, the applicable annual subscription Fee will be prorated based on the number of months in the Partial Subscription Year. The annual subscription Fee for Subscription Software and associated recurring Services may include certain one-time Fees, such as start-up fees, license fees, or other PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-3 fees set forth in an Ordering Document. Motorola will have the right to suspend the Subscription Software and any recurring Services if Customer fails to make any payments when due. 5.2. License True-Up. Motorola will have the right to conduct an audit of total user licenses credentialed by Customer for any Subscription Software during a Subscription Term, and Customer will cooperate with such audit. If Motorola determines that CustomerÓs usage of the Subscription Software during the applicable Subscription Term exceeded the total number of licenses purchased by Customer, Motorola may invoice Customer for the additional licenses used by Customer, pro-rated for each additional license from the date such license was activated, and Customer will pay such invoice in accordance with the payment terms in the MCA. 6. Liability. 6.1. ADDITIONAL EXCLUSIONS. IN ADDITIONTO THE EXCLUSIONS FROM DAMAGES SETFORTHINTHEMCA,ANDNOTWITHSTANDINGANYPROVISIONOFTHEAGREEMENT TO THE CONTRARY,MOTOROLA WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR (A) INTERRUPTION OR FAILURE OF CONNECTIVITY, VULNERABILITIES, ORSECURITYEVENTS; (B) DISRUPTION OF OR DAMAGE TO CUSTOMERÓS ORTHIRD PARTIESÓ SYSTEMS, EQUIPMENT, ORDATA, INCLUDING DENIAL OF ACCESS TO USERS,OR SHUTDOWN OFSYSTEMS CAUSEDBY INTRUSION DETECTION SOFTWAREOR HARDWARE; (C) AVAILABILITY OR ACCURACY OF ANY DATA AVAILABLETHROUGH THE SUBSCRIPTION SOFTWARE OR SERVICES, OR INTERPRETATION, USE, OR MISUSE THEREOF; (D) TRACKING AND LOCATION-BASED SERVICES; OR (E)BETA SERVICES. 6.2. Voluntary Remedies. Motorola is not obligated to remedy, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price for the disclaimed or excluded issues in the MCA or Section 6.1 Î Additional Exclusions above, but if Motorola agrees to provide Services to help resolve such issues, Customer will reimburse Motorola for its reasonable time and expenses, including by paying Motorola any Fees set forth in an Ordering Document for such Services, if applicable. 7. Motorola as a Controller or Joint Controller. In all instances where Motorola acts as a controller of data, it will comply with the applicable provisions of the Motorola Privacy Statement at https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/privacy-policy.html#privacystatement, as may be updated from time to time. Motorola holds all Customer Contact Data as a controller and shall Process such Customer Contact Data in accordance with the Motorola Privacy Statement. In instances where Motorola is acting as a joint controller with Customer, the Parties will enter into a separate Addendum to the Agreement to allocate the respective roles as joint controllers. 8. Survival. The following provisions will survive the expiration or termination of this SSA for any reason: Section 4 Î Term; Section 5 Î Payment; Section 6.1 Î Additional Exclusions; Section 8 Î Survival. Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Shared Agency Addendum This Shared Agency Agreement (Ð SAAÑ) is entered into between Motorola Solutions Inc. (Ð Motorola Ñ) and the entity set forth below or in the MCA (Ð Customer Ñ or Ð Host Agency Ñ) and will be subject to and governed by the terms of the Master Customer Agreement (Ð MCA Ñ) and any addendum (Ð Addendum Ñ and collectively, the Ð AddendaÑ) entered into between the Parties, effective as of _______________. Capitalized terms used in this SAA, but not defined herein, will have the meanings as set forth in the MCA. By entering into this SAA, the Shared Agency affirms that they will fund their shared costs of the system and services, per the terms of the MCA and as identified in the pricing section of the attached Addenda. Shared Agency agrees that a purchase order or other notice to proceed is not required for contract performance or for subsequent years of service, if any, and that Customer will appropriate funds according to the Payment Schedule. Motorola will invoice the Shared Agency upon contract execution for the shared costs of the up-front implementation of the system and Motorola will invoice the Shared Agency annually for their portion (if any) of ongoing annual maintenance and subscription services identified in the Addenda. Section 1: Definitions 1. 1 Shared Agency - A ÐShared AgencyÑ is an agency that has purchased the right and license to use the same copy of the Software currently licensed by Motorola to the Host Agency, as set forth in the MCA. 1. 2 Host Agency Î The ÐHost AgencyÑ is a current Motorola licensee and customer that is authorized by Motorola and has agreed to share its use of the Software installed at its facilities with the Shared Agency. 1. 3 Software ÏÐSoftwareÑ means the software licensed hereunder. Section 2: License 2. 1 Grant of License. Motorola grants to Shared Agency a non-exclusive, non- transferable license to use the same copy of the Software, its Documentation and other related materials, which are presently licensed to the Host Agency, subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the MCA, as well as the terms and conditions specified in this SAA. The license fees paid by Shared Agency to Motorola shall be the same as those paid to Motorola by the Host Agency. Shared Agency agrees to comply with all such terms and conditions of the MCA and this SAA. 2. 2 Termination. This SAA will terminate automatically if and when the MCA terminates for any reason. Motorola or the Host Agency may immediately terminate this SAA and license at any time if the Shared Agency breaches the terms of this SAA or the MCA. The Host Agency may terminate this SAA at any time, with or without cause, upon ninety (90) days prior written notice to Motorola and the Shared Agency, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Host Agency. 2. 3 No Assignment. The Shared Agency may not assign or transfer this SAA to any other entity or agency, including by operation of law, without the prior written consent of the Host Agency and Motorola, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Section 3: Scope of Rights PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-5 3. 1 Support and Services. Shared Agency understands that, unless otherwise agreed in writing by all parties, all assistance, support and maintenance services for the Software may be obtained by Shared Agency only through the Host Agency. This SAA does not entitle Shared Agency to any Motorola services beyond the license to use the Software. 3. 2 Warranty. The Representations and Warranties for the Software is defined in Section 6 of the MCA is limited to the remaining time, if any, originally granted under the MCA. Accepted and Approved: \[Shared Agency\]Motorola Solutions, Inc. Signature: Signature: ____________________________ ____________________________ Print Name: Print Name: ___________________________ ___________________________ Title: Title: ________________________________________________________________ Date: Date: ________________________________________________________________ Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Addendum The purpose of this addendum is to memorialize the goals identified between Motorola and League City consortium members. The vision for the partnership is outlined in detail below. Year 1 Î Review Hardware utilization with Motorola Support League City will review and update user agency usage Motorola and League City will review and update provisioning Year 3 Î Review and suggest software version upgrade with Motorola Support Review Cloud options for possible move in year 5 with Motorola account manager Review Hardware utilization with Motorola Support Year 6 Î (if the system remains on premise) Review and suggest software version upgrade with Motorola Support Refresh Hardware Year 9 - (if the system remains on premise) Review and suggest software version upgrade with Motorola Support Review contract Î update as necessary Partnership During the ongoing implementation of the project, there will be Quarterly Scorecard Board Reviews Regular Monthly meeting with Motorola Support Î changed as needed. League City system administrators will teach classes (APCO, NENA, Motorola Summit) Î Annually League City work with Motorola to prepare for site reference visits and marketing videos League City would like to be a beta test site for future product releases. League City system administrators will attend the Annual technology summit keeping up to date on latest technology Annual Scorecard Review with Motorola Executive leadership League City will be involved in User Experience Team Motorola will proactively assist in emergency preparations for planned events such as hurricanes PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-7 Maintenance and Support Agreement This Maintenance and Support Agreement (the Ð Agreement Ñ) is entered into between Motorola Solutions, Inc., with offices at 500 W. Monroe Street, Suite 4400, Chicago, IL (ÐMotorolaÑ) and the entity set forth in the signature block below(Ð Customer Ñ). Motorola and Customer will each be referred herein as a Ð Party Ñ and collectively as the Ð Parties Ñ. This Agreement is effective as of the date of the last signature (the Ð Effective Date Ñ) For good and valuable consideration, the Parties agree as follows: Section 1 EXHIBITS The Exhibits listed below are incorporated into and made a part of this Agreement. In interpreting this Agreement and resolving any ambiguities, the main body of this Agreement will take precedence over the Exhibits and any inconsistency between the Exhibits will be resolved in the order in which they are listed below. Exhibit A ÐCovered Products, Support Options and PricingÑ Exhibit B ÐCustomer Support PlanÑ Exhibit C ÐLabor RatesÑ Section 2 DEFINITIONS ÐCSRÑ means Motorola Solutions Customer Service Request System. ÐEquipmentÑ means the physical hardware purchased by Customer from Motorola pursuant to a separate System Agreement, Products Agreement, or other form of Agreement. ÐMotorolaÑ means Motorola Solutions, Inc., a Delaware corporation. ÐMotorola Solutions SoftwareÑ means Software that Motorola owns and is covered in this Maintenance and Support Agreement. . ÐNon-Motorola Solutions SoftwareÑ means Software that a Third Party other than Motorola owns. ÐOptional Technical Support ServicesÑ means fee-based technical support services that are not covered as part of the standard Technical Support Services. ÐPrincipal Period of MaintenanceÑ or ÑPPMÑ means the specified days and times during the days, that maintenance and support services will be provided under this Agreement. The PPM selected by the Customer is indicated in the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit. ÐPatchÑ means a specific change to the Software that does not require a Release. ÐProductsÑ means the Equipment (as indicated in the Covered Products Exhibit) and Software provided by Motorola. ÐProduct ReleaseÑ means the release of Motorola Software considered to be the next generation of an existing product or a new product offering. ÐReleasesÑ means an Upgrade to the Motorola Software. ÐResidual ErrorÑ means a software malfunction or a programming, coding, or syntax error that causes the Software to fail to conform to the Specifications. Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 ÐServicesÑ means those maintenance and support services described in the Customer Support Plan Exhibit and provided under this Agreement. ÐSoftwareÑ means the Motorola Solutions Software and Non-Motorola Solutions Software (Third Party) that is furnished with the System or Equipment. ÐSpecificationsÑ means the design, form, functionality, or performance requirements described in published descriptions of the Software, and if also applicable, in any modifications to the published specifications as expressly agreed to in writing by the parties. ÐStandard Business DayÑ means Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. local time, excluding established Motorola holidays. ÐStandard Business HourÑ means a sixty (60) minute period of time starting at notification within a Standard Business Day(s). ÐStart DateÑ means the date upon which this Agreement begins. The Start Date is specified in the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit. ÐSystemÑ means the Products and Services provided by Motorola as a system and are more fully described in the Technical and Implementation Documents attached as Exhibits to the applicable system agreement between Customer and Motorola. ÐTechnical Support ServicesÑ means the remote support provided by Motorola on a standard and centralized basis concerning the Covered Products, including diagnostic services and troubleshooting to assist the Customer in ascertaining the nature of a problem being experienced by the Customer. Technical Support Services includes minor assistance concerning the use of the Software (including advising or assisting the Customer in attempting data/database recovery, database set up, client-server advice), and minor assistance or advice on installation of Releases provided under this Agreement. ÐUpgradeÑ means the process of installing the latest or generally available version of the installed solution product. Section 3 SCOPE AND TERM OF SERVICES 3.1. In accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and in consideration of the payment by Customer of the price for the Services, Motorola will provide to the Customer the Services as described in the Customer Support Plan Exhibit for the Support Services package listed above and as indicated in the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit. Services will apply only to the Products described in the Covered Products Exhibit. 3.2. Unless the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit expressly provides to the contrary, the term of this Agreement is Number spelled out (xxx) year(s), beginning on the Start Date. Following the initial term period, this Maintenance and Support Agreement will automatically renew upon the anniversary date for successive one (1) year periods unless either party notifies the other of its intention to not renew the Agreement (in whole or part) not less than thirty (30) days before the anniversary date or requests an alternate term or this Agreement is terminated for default by a party. 3.3. This Agreement covers all copies of the specified Products listed in the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit that are licensed by Motorola to the Customer. If the price for Services is based upon a per unit fee, such price will be calculated on the total number of units of the Products that are licensed to Customer as of the beginning of the maintenance and support period. If, during a maintenance and support period, Customer acquires additional Products that will be covered by this Agreement, the price for maintenance and support services for the additional Products will be calculated and added to the total price either (1) if and when the maintenance and support period is renewed or (2) immediately when PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-9 Customer acquires additional Products, as determined by Motorola. Motorola may adjust the price of the maintenance and support services at the time of a renewal if it provides to Customer notice of the price adjustment at least forty-five (45) days before the expiration of the maintenance and support period. If Customer notifies Motorola of its intention not to renew this Agreement as permitted by Section 3.2 and later wishes to reinstate this Agreement, it may do so with MotorolaÓs consent provided (a) Customer pays to Motorola the amount that it would have paid if Customer had kept this Agreement current, (b) Customer ensures that all applicable Equipment is in good operating conditions at the time of reinstatement, and (c) all copies of the specified Software listed in the Description of Covered Products are covered. 3.4. When Motorola performs Services at the location of installed Products, Customer agrees to provide to Motorola, at no charge, a non-hazardous environment for work with shelter, heat, light, and power, and with full and free access to the covered Products. Customer will provide all information pertaining to the hardware and software with which the Products are interfacing to enable Motorola to perform its obligations under this Agreement. 3.5. All Customer requests for covered Services will be made initially with the call intake center identified in the Customer Support Plan. 3.6. Motorola will provide to the Customer Technical Support Services and Releases as follows: 3.6.1. Motorola will provide Technical Support Services and correction of Residual Errors during the PPM in accordance with the Exhibits. The level of Technical Support depends upon the CustomerÓs selection as indicated in this agreement and the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit. Any Technical Support Services that are performed by Motorola outside the contracted PPM and any Residual Error corrections that are outside the scope will be billed at the then current hourly rates. The objective of Technical Support Services will be to investigate specifics about the functioning of covered Products and to determine whether there is a defect in the Product. Technical Support Services will not be used in lieu of training on the covered Products. 3.6.2. Unless the Covered Products, Support Options and Pricing Exhibit expressly provides to the contrary, Motorola will provide to Customer without additional license fees an available Software Upgrade after receipt of a request from the Customer. The Customer must pay for any installation or other services and any necessary Equipment or third party software or training provided by Motorola in connection with any onsite installation of the Software Upgrade. Software Upgrades, as defined in the Customer Support Plan, are designed to be delivered remotely. Services for onsite delivery requested by Customer will be quoted at the time of the request. Any services will be performed in accordance with a mutually agreed schedule. 3.6.3. Motorola will provide to Customer an available Product Release after receipt of a request from Customer, but Customer must pay for all additional license fees, any onsite installation or other services, and any necessary Equipment provided by Motorola in connection with such Product Release. MotorolaÓs duty as described in this paragraph is contingent upon CustomerÓs then-current installation at the time of CustomerÓs request being within two (2) Standard Release versions of the new Standard Release available for general release. Any services will be performed in accordance with a mutually agreed schedule. 3.6.4. Along with maintenance Software Releases, Motorola will make available new purchasable products, features and modules which are separate and distinct from the mainstream Motorola Solutions Software line of Products. Newly released Products may have {Product Name} as a pre-requisite and/or share some portion of the {Product Name} code base. Customers are not entitled to these products, features and modules, or upgrades to them within this Maintenance and Support Agreement, if they have not purchased the required licenses. 3.6.5. As part of the Software development process Motorola makes every reasonable effort to lessen impact to customer operations. Any change to existing functionality is done after thorough review of customer feedback and with announcement of said change. When itÓs not technically feasible to meet a particular requirement Motorola will proactively communicate the changes. Beyond these efforts Motorola Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 does not warrant that a Release will meet CustomerÓs particular requirement, be uninterrupted or error-free, be backward compatible, or that all errors will be corrected. Errors addressed as part of the Software Release will be corrected. Full compatibility of a Release with the capabilities and functions of earlier versions of the Software may not be technically feasible. If it is technically feasible, Motorola will make available services to integrate these capabilities and functions to the upgraded version of the Software, which services may be fee based. 3.6.6. To the extent that the customer purchases an on-premise solution, MotorolaÓs responsibilities under this Agreement to provide Technical Support Services in accordance with the package selected by the customer and as further detailed in the statement of work, customer support plan will be limited to the current Standard Release plus the two (2) prior Standard Releases (collectively referred to in this section as ÐCovered Standard ReleasesÑ). Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, Motorola will provide Technical Support Services for a Severity Level 1 or 2 error concerning a Standard Release that precedes the Covered Standard Releases unless such error has been corrected by a Covered Standard Release (in which case Customer will need to have the Standard Release that fixes the reported error installed or terminate this Agreement as to the applicable Software). 3.6.7. 3.7. The maintenance and support Services described in this Agreement are the only covered services. Unless optional or a la carte Technical Support Services are purchased, these Services specifically exclude and Motorola will not be responsible for: 3.7.1. Any service work required due to incorrect or faulty operational conditions, including but not limited to Equipment not connected directly to an electric surge protector, or not properly maintained in accordance with the manufacturerÓs guidelines. Other services may be available for an additional fee and will be addressed with an amendment to the Agreement. 3.7.2. The repair or replacement of Products or parts resulting from failure of the CustomerÓs facilities, CustomerÓs personal property and/or devices connected to the System (or interconnected to devices) whether or not installed by MotorolaÓs representatives. 3.7.3. The repair or replacement of Equipment that has become defective or damaged due to physical or chemical misuse or abuse, CustomerÓs negligence, or from causes such as lightning, power surges, or liquids. 3.7.4. Any transmission medium, such as telephone lines, computer networks, or the ISP, or for Equipment malfunction caused by such transmission medium. 3.7.5. Accessories, custom or Special Products; modified units; or modified Software. 3.7.6. The repair or replacement of parts resulting from the tampering by persons unauthorized by Motorola or the failure of the System due to extraordinary uses. 3.7.7. Operation and/or functionality of CustomerÓs personal property, equipment, and/or peripherals and any application software not provided by Motorola. 3.7.8. Services for any replacement of Products or parts directly related to the removal, relocation, or reinstallation of the System or any System component. 3.7.9. Services to diagnose technical issues caused by the installation of unauthorized components or misuse of the System. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-11 3.7.10. Services to diagnose malfunctions or inoperability of the Software caused by changes, additions, enhancements, or modifications in the CustomerÓs platform or customer provided software. 3.7.11. Services to correct errors found to be caused by Customer-supplied data, machines, or operator failure. 3.7.12. Operational supplies, including but not limited to, printer paper, printer ribbons, toner, photographic paper, magnetic tapes and any supplies in addition to that delivered with the System; battery replacement for uninterruptible power supply (UPS); office furniture including chairs or workstations. 3.7.13. Third-party software unless specifically listed on the Covered Products Exhibit. 3.7.14. Support of any interface(s) beyond Motorola-provided port or cable, or any services that are necessary because third party hardware, software or supplies fail to conform to the specifications concerning the Products. 3.7.15. Services related to customerÓs failure to use a UPS system to protect against power interruptions as related to their on-premise equipment. 3.7.16. Any design consultation such as, but not limited to, configuration analysis, consultation with CustomerÓs third-party provider(s), and System analysis for modifications or Upgrades which are not directly related to a Residual Error report. 3.8. The Customer hereby agrees to: 3.8.1. Maintain any and all electrical and physical environments in accordance with the System manufacturerÓs specifications. 3.8.2. Provide standard industry precautions (e.g. back-up files) ensuring database security, per MotorolaÓs recommended backup procedures. 3.8.3. Ensure System accessibility, which includes physical access to buildings as well as remote electronic access. Remote access can be stipulated and scheduled with the Customer; however, remote access is required and will not be substituted with on-site visits or proxies if access is not allowed or available. 3.8.4. Appoint one or more qualified employees to perform System Administration duties, including acting as a primary point of contact to MotorolaÓs Technical Support organization for reporting and verifying problems and performing System backup. At least one member of the System Administrators group must have completed MotorolaÓs End-User training and System Administrator training (if available). The combined skills of this System Administrators group includes proficiency with: the Products, the system platform upon which the Products operate, the operating system, database administration, network capabilities such as backing up, updating, adding, and deleting System and user information, and the client, server and stand alone personal computer hardware. The System Administrator will follow the Residual Error reporting process described herein and make all reasonable efforts to duplicate and verify problems and assign a Severity Level according to definitions provided herein. Customer agrees to use reasonable efforts to ensure that all problems are reported and verified by the System Administrator before reporting them to Motorola. Customer will assist Motorola to confirm that errors are not the product of the operation of an external system, data links between system, or network administration issues. If a Severity Level 1 or 2 Residual Error occurs, any Customer representative may contact MotorolaÓs Customer Support by telephone, but the System Administrator must follow up with MotorolaÓs Customer Support as soon as practical thereafter. A full list of customer system management responsibilities is provided in the Customer Support Plan section 5.2. 3.9. In performing repairs under this Agreement, Motorola may use parts that are not newly manufactured but which are warranted to be equivalent to new in performance. Parts replaced by Motorola will become MotorolaÓs property. Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 3.10. Customer will permit and cooperate with Motorola so that Motorola may periodically conduct audits of CustomerÓs records and operations pertinent to the Services, Products, and usage of application and database management software. If the results of any such audit indicate that price has been understated, Motorola may correct the price and immediately invoice Customer for the difference (as well as any unpaid but owing license fees). 3.11. If Customer replaces, upgrades, or modifies equipment, or replaces, upgrades, or modifies hardware or software that interfaces with the covered Products, Motorola will have the right to adjust the price for the Services to the appropriate current price for the new configuration. 3.12. Customer agrees not to attempt or apply any upgrades(s), alteration(s), or change(s) to the database software without the prior approval of Motorola. Section 9. CERTIFICATION DISCLAIMER Motorola specifically disclaims all certifications regarding the manner in which Motorola conducts its business or performs its obligations under this Agreement, unless such certifications have been expressly accepted and signed by an authorized signatory of Motorola. Section 10. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS The Parties will at all times comply with all applicable regulations, licenses and orders of their respective countries relating to or in any way affecting this Agreement and the performance by the Parties of this Agreement. Each Party, at its own expense, will obtain any approval or permit required in the performance of its obligations. Neither Motorola nor any of its employees is an agent or representative of Customer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have caused this Agreement as of the Effective Date. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. CUSTOMER By: _ By: _ Name: _ Name: _ Title: _ Title: _ Date: _ Date: _ PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-13 Maintenance and Support Agreement - Exhibit A COVERED PRODUCTS, SUPPORT OPTIONS AND PRICING MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT AGREEMENT TERM: CUSTOMER AGENCY BILLING AGENCY Address Address City, State, Zip City, State, Zip Contact NameContact Name Contact Title Contact Title Telephone Number Telephone Number Email Address Email Address For support and updates on products below, please contact MotorolaÓs Public Safety ApplicationÓs Customer Support: (800) MSI-HELP (800-674-4357) Option 4 Software Products/Public Safety Applications: Option 2) Computer Aided Dispatch and Mobile Option 2) PremierOne, Legacy CAD/Mobile or Option 4) Records/Jail Management Option 2) PremierOne, Legacy Records Option 5) Offendertrak Site Identification Numbers Product Group Site Identification Number Phone Prompt Motorola Solutions Essential Support Services Include: Customer Support Plan Virtual Private Network VPN Tool Case Management 24x7 HPE Defective Media Retention Technical Support 9x5 Software Releases, as defined Third-party Vendor Coordination Access to Users Group Site On-site Support (when applicable) Motorola Solutions Advanced Support Services Include: All services noted above for Essential Support Services PremierOne Solution Monitoring & Response MOTOROLA SUPPORTED PRODUCTS Technical Product Description Service Level Qty Term Fees $.00 $.00 $.00 TOTAL$.00 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Maintenance and Support Agreement - Exhibit A Continued COVERED PRODUCTS, SUPPORT OPTIONS AND PRICING THIRD-PARTY VENDOR SUPPORTED PRODUCTS Vendor Vendor Description Service Level Qty Term Fees $.00 $.00 $.00 TOTAL $.00 Optional Services Available: Hardware Refresh* User Conference Advanced Purchase** Professional Services Upgrades* Dedicated On-site Support Resource Professional Service Training Dedicated On-site Support Resource - GeoFile Services Professional Services Consultation *Require Multi-Year Agreement **USERS CONFERENCE ADVANCE PURCHASE OPTION Users Conference Attendance Year Attendees Qty Fees 1 Standard Attendance Registration Only Standard Attendance Fees Include the following: Registration fee Round trip travel for event (booked by Motorola) Hotel accommodations (booked by Customer Agency per Motorola website instructions) Ground Transportation (booked by Motorola) 2 Daily meal allowance 1 Standard Attendance includes above accommodations for the regular conference days. Any offer for pre-training outside of the standard conference days is not included in this offer. Customers who wish to attend pre-conference training may do so at their own lodging and food expense. Adjustment to travel dates and times to attend pre-conference training is allowed 2 Daily meal allowance is determined by Motorola based on published guidelines. In no event will the amount provided exceed attendeeÓs applicable Agency rules regarding meal expenses, provided the attendee or his/her agency notifies Motorola in advance of the conference of any restrictions, prohibitions or limitations that apply. OPTIONAL SUPPORT SERVICES Service Description SOW Reference Qty Term Fees $.00 $.00 $.00 TOTAL $.00 PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-15 Maintenance and Support Agreement - Exhibit A Continued COVERED PRODUCTS, SUPPORT OPTIONS AND PRICING SUPPORT FEES SUMMARY Product Service Level Term Fees TM Motorola Product xx $.00 TM Added Motorola Product xx $.00 Multi-System Discount - x% ($.00) Multi-Year Discount - 2%($.00) SUBTOTAL MOTOROLA SUPPORT $.00 Vendor Product xx $.00 Added Vendor Product xx $.00 SUBTOTAL THIRD PARTY SUPPORT $.00 Optional Support Service xx $.00 Added Optional Support Service xx $.00 SUBTOTAL OPTIONAL SUPPORT SERVICES $.00 GRAND TOTAL $.00 MONTHLY FEES (remove if not applicable) $.00 Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 Maintenance and Support Agreement - Exhibit B CUSTOMER SUPPORT PLAN MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT AGREEMENT TERM: CUSTOMER: See Customer Support Plan on the following pages PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions H-GAC Master Customer Agreement 7-17 Maintenance and Support Agreement - Exhibit C LABOR RATES MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT AGREEMENT TERM: CUSTOMER: The following are MotorolaÓs current labor rates, subject to an annual change. The following rates apply to Customers with a current, active Maintenance and Support Agreement. Billable rates apply to services provided outside of the scope of the Maintenance and Support Agreement and outside the selected Service Level PPM: SERVICE HOURS LABOR RATES 8 a.m.-5 p.m. M-F (local time)$223 per hour, 2 hours minimum After 5 p.m., Saturday, Sunday, Motorola Holidays $334 per hour, 2 hours minimum The following rates apply to Customers without a current, active Maintenance and Support Agreement and apply to services available on a Time and Material basis: SERVICE HOURS LABOR RATES 8 a.m.-5 p.m. M-F (local time) $446 per hour, 2 hours minimum After 5 p.m., Saturday, Sunday, Motorola Holidays $668 per hour, 2 hours minimum Above rates reflect labor rate only. Additional fees for on-site travel expenses, third party expenses and /or materials will be quoted at the time of customer request for services. Gulf Coast Regional Information and Dispatch (GRID) September 16, 2021 SECTION 8 APPENDIX A: INTERFACE SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS The Interface Specification Documents are on the following pages. PremierOne CAD and Records Management System 21-121967 / TXP20P249A Motorola Solutions Appendix A: Interface Specification Documents 8-1 Shared Agency Agreement This Shared Agency Agreement ) Motorola set forth below or in the MCA Customer Host Agency) and will be subject to and governed by the terms of the MCA AddendumAddend entered into between the Parties, effective as of _November 9, 2021__. Capitalized terms used in this SAA, but not defined herein, will have the meanings as set forth in the MCA. By entering into this SAA, the Shared Agency affirms that they will fund their shared costs of the system and services, per the terms of the MCA and as identified in the pricing section of the attached Addenda. Shared Agency agrees that a purchase order or other notice to proceed is not required for contract performance or for subsequent years of service, if any, and that Customer will appropriate funds according to the Payment Schedule. Motorola will invoice the Shared Agency upon contract execution for the shared costs of the up-front implementation of the system and Motorola will invoice the Shared Agency annually for their portion (if any) of ongoing annual maintenance and subscription services identified in the Addenda. Section 1: Definitions 1. 1 Shared Agency - A n agency that has purchased the right and license to use the same copy of the Software currently licensed by Motorola to the Host Agency, as set forth in the MCA. 1. 2 Host Agency current Motorola licensee and customer that is authorized by Motorola and has agreed to share its use of the Software installed at its facilities with the Shared Agency. 1. 3 Software software licensed hereunder. Section 2: License 2. 1 Grant of License. Motorola grants to Shared Agency a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the same copy of the Software, its Documentation and other related materials, which are presently licensed to the Host Agency, subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the MCA, as well as the terms and conditions specified in this SAA. T he license fees paid by Shared Agency to Motorola shall be the same as those paid to Motorola by the Host Agency. Shared Agency agrees to comply with all such terms and conditions of the MCA and this SAA. 2. 2 Termination. This SAA will terminate automatically if and when the MCA terminates for any reason. Motorola or the Host Agency may immediately terminate this SAA and license at any time if the Shared Agency breaches the terms of this SAA or the MCA. The Host Agency may terminate this SAA at any time, with or without cause, upon ninety (90) days prior written notice to Motorola and the Shared Agency, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Host Agency. 2. 3 No Assignment. The Shared Agency may not assign or transfer this SAA to any other entity or agency, including by operation of law, without the prior written consent of the Host Agency and Motorola, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Section 3: Scope of Rights 3. 1 Support and Services. Shared Agency understands that, unless otherwise agreed in writing by all parties, all assistance, support and maintenance services for the Software may be obtained by Shared Agency only through the Host Agency. This SAA does not entitle Shared Agency to any Motorola services beyond the license to use the Software. 3. 2 Warranty. The Representations and Warranties for the Software is defined in Section 6 of the MCA is limited to the remaining time, if any, originally granted under the MCA. 1 8/3/2021 Accepted and Approved: City of La Porte Motorola Solutions, Inc. Signature: ____________________________ Signature: ____________________________ Print Name: ___________________________ Print Name: ___________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ 2 8/3/2021 REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November8, 2021 001 -General Fund Requested By:Teresa Evans, Director Source of Funds: Department:Planning and Development 001-9090-519-5007 Account Number: $253,460 Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance $206,637 Amount Requested: Exhibits:Tyler SaaS Agreement; Planning and Budgeted Item:YesNo Development FY 22 BudgetSlide; Tyler EnerGov PowerPoint Presentation SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION The La Porte City Council approvedtheFY 2021-22 Budgetwithfunding forEnerGov, software, NaviLine.NaviLine is an older, limited systemthat does not interface with other programs. EnerGov, by comparison, connects,streamlines, centralizes and automates all the work flows for the planning, permitting, inspections, licensing, enforcement and land managementreview and approval processes into one location. EnerGov is a GIS, cloud based, mobileapplication that provides 24/7 real time reporting for automated processes, and can be accessed from anywhere on any device. This features a user friendly, intuitive screen that will plug directly into the Cityand Cs 311 providerfor the public sector, and transitioning the City to EnerGov will improvetheinternal and external communications, accountability and transparency onplanning and development items. Other local government EnerGov clientsinclude Deer Park, League City, Missouri City, Friendswood, Katy, SugarLand, Baytownand Pasadena. Attached is the proposed Software As A Service Agreement(SaaS)between Tyler Technologies, Inc.and theCity of La Porte, a member of the Sourcewellcooperative. Tyler Technology has participated in a competitive bid process for Public Sector Administration Software through the cooperative, Sourcewell, and the City of La Porte has an agreement with Sourcewell that allows the Cityto utilize their contracts. Exhibit A, the Investment Summary, details the Tyler Technology software and service terms. Included in the first year costs is a $138,890 one-time fee for the design and implementation of EnerGov over an approximate 12-14 month period. There is also an annual, reoccurring Software As A Service (SaaS) subscription fee of $93,646. Tyler Technologies will begin billingthe City the annual subscription feeto access EnerGov about 4-5 months into the first year, on a quarterly basis,for staff access and training purposes.The SaaS Agreement also allows the City to add on additional services as requested. Please note, the contract proposal does not include any fees for data migration. Instead, the permit and inspections data in Naviline will be downloaded into spreadsheets for archival purposes. The Tyler EnerGov three (3) year contract amount is $419,828, not including travel expenses. City Council approved $253,4 to cover the design and implementation services, annual subscription fee, training, and travel expenses. Staff anticipates the first year costs will come in below the budgeted amount. Contract costs for years 2 and 3, including any additional services, will be included in the respective FY 23 and FY 24 budget proposals. Staff recommends approval of a three (3) year software service agreement with Tyler Technologies, utilizing Sourcewell contract #090320-TTI, not to exceed the budgeted amount for each year. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Approve a three (3) year software service agreement with Tyler Technologies, utilizing Sourcewell contract #090320-TTI, not to exceed the budgeted amount for each year. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date SOFTWARE AS A SERVICE AGREEMENT This Software as a Service Agreement is made between Tyler Technologies, Inc. and Client. WHEREAS, Client is a member of Sourcewell (formerly known as National Joint Powers Alliance) (“Sourcewell”) under member number 116086; WHEREAS, Tyler participated in the competitive bid process in response to Sourcewell RFP #090320 by submitting a proposal, on which Sourcewell awarded Tyler a Sourcewell contract, numbered 090320-TTI (hereinafter, the “Sourcewell Contract”); WHEREAS, documentation of the Sourcewell competitive bid process, as well as Tyler’s contract with and pricing information for Sourcewell is available at https://sourcewell-mn.gov/cooperative- purchasing/; and WHEREAS, Client desires to purchase off the Sourcewell Contract to procure EnerGov software functionality from Tyler, which Tyler agrees to deliver pursuant to the Sourcewell Contract and under the terms and conditions set forth below; NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and of the mutual covenants and promises set forth in this Agreement, Tyler and Client agree as follows: SECTION A – DEFINITIONS “Agreement” means this Software as a Service Agreement. “Business Travel Policy” means our business travel policy. A copy of our current Business Travel Policy is attached as Schedule 1 to Exhibit B. “Client” means the City of La Porte, Texas. “Data” means your data necessary to utilize the Tyler Software. “Data Storage Capacity” means the contracted amount of storage capacity for your Data identified in the Investment Summary. “Defect” means a failure of the Tyler Software to substantially conform to the functional descriptions set forth in our written proposal to you, or their functional equivalent. Future functionality may be updated, modified, or otherwise enhanced through our maintenance and support services, and the governing functional descriptions for such future functionality will be set forth in our then-current Documentation. “Defined Users” means the number of users that are authorized to use the SaaS Services. The Defined Users for the Agreement are as identified in the Investment Summary. If Exhibit A contains EnerGov labeled software, defined users mean the maximum number of named users that are authorized to use the EnerGov labeled modules as indicated in the Investment Summary. “Developer” means a third party who owns the intellectual property rights to Third Party 1 Software. “Documentation” means any online or written documentation related to the use or functionality of the Tyler Software that we provide or otherwise make available to you, including instructions, user guides, manuals and other training or self-help documentation. “Effective Date” means the date by which both your and our authorized representatives have signed the Agreement. “Force Majeure” means an event beyond the reasonable control of you or us, including, without limitation, governmental action, war, riot or civil commotion, fire, natural disaster, or any other cause that could not with reasonable diligence be foreseen or prevented by you or us. “Investment Summary” means the agreed upon cost proposal for the products and services attached as Exhibit A. “Invoicing and Payment Policy” means the invoicing and payment policy. A copy of our current Invoicing and Payment Policy is attached as Exhibit B. “Order Form” means an ordering document that includes a quote or investment summary and specifying the items to be provided by Tyler to Client, including any addenda and supplements thereto. “SaaS Fees” means the fees for the SaaS Services identified in the Investment Summary. “SaaS Services” means software as a service consisting of system administration, system management, and system monitoring activities that Tyler performs for the Tyler Software, and includes the right to access and use the Tyler Software, receive maintenance and support on the Tyler Software, including Downtime resolution under the terms of the SLA, and Data storage and archiving. SaaS Services do not include support of an operating system or hardware, support outside of our normal business hours, or training, consulting or other professional services. “SLA” means the service level agreement. A copy of our current SLA is attached hereto as Exhibit C. “Statement of Work” means the industry standard implementation plan describing how our professional services will be provided to implement the Tyler Software, and outlining your and our roles and responsibilities in connection with that implementation. The Statement of Work is attached as Exhibit D. “Support Call Process” means the support call process applicable to all of our customers who have licensed the Tyler Software. A copy of our current Support Call Process is attached as Schedule 1 to Exhibit C. “Third Party Hardware” means the third party hardware, if any, identified in the Investment Summary. “Third Party Products” means the Third Party Software and Third Party Hardware. “Third Party Services” means the third party services, if any, identified in the Investment Summary. “Third Party Software” means the third party software, if any, identified in the Investment Summary. “Third Party Terms” means, if any, the end user license agreement(s) or similar terms for the Third Party Products or other parties’ products or services, as applicable, and attached or indicated at Exhibit D. “Tyler” means Tyler Technologies, Inc., a Delaware corporation. “Tyler Software” means our proprietary software, including any integrations, custom modifications, and/or other related interfaces identified in the Investment Summary and licensed by us to you through this Agreement. “we”, “us”, “our” and similar terms mean Tyler. 2 “you” and similar terms mean Client. SECTION B – SAAS SERVICES 1. Rights Granted. We grant to you the non-exclusive, non-assignable limited right to use the SaaS Services solely for your internal business purposes for the number of Defined Users only. The Tyler Software will be made available to you according to the terms of the SLA. You acknowledge that we have no delivery obligations and we will not ship copies of the Tyler Software as part of the SaaS Services. You may use the SaaS Services to access updates and enhancements to the Tyler Software, as further described in Section C(9). The foregoing notwithstanding, to the extent we have sold you perpetual licenses for Tyler Software, if and listed in the Investment Summary, for which you are receiving SaaS Services, your rights to use such Tyler Software are perpetual, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement including, without limitation, Section B(4). We will make any such software available to you for download. 2. SaaS Fees. You agree to pay us the SaaS Fees. Those amounts are payable in accordance with our Invoicing and Payment Policy. The SaaS Fees are based on the number of Defined Users and amount of Data Storage Capacity. You may add additional users or additional data storage capacity on the terms set forth in Section H(1). In the event you regularly and/or meaningfully exceed the Defined Users or Data Storage Capacity, we reserve the right to charge you additional fees commensurate with the overage(s). 3. Ownership. 3.1 We retain all ownership and intellectual property rights to the SaaS Services, the Tyler Software, and anything developed by us under this Agreement. You do not acquire under this Agreement any license to use the Tyler Software in excess of the scope and/or duration of the SaaS Services. 3.2 The Documentation is licensed to you and may be used and copied by your employees for internal, non-commercial reference purposes only. 3.3 You retain all ownership and intellectual property rights to the Data. You expressly recognize that except to the extent necessary to carry out our obligations contained in this Agreement, we do not create or endorse any Data used in connection with the SaaS Services. 4. Restrictions. You may not: (a) make the Tyler Software or Documentation resulting from the SaaS Services available in any manner to any third party for use in the third party’s business operations; (b) modify, make derivative works of, disassemble, reverse compile, or reverse engineer any part of the SaaS Services; (c) access or use the SaaS Services in order to build or support, and/or assist a third party in building or supporting, products or services competitive to us; or (d) license, sell, rent, lease, transfer, assign, distribute, display, host, outsource, disclose, permit timesharing or service bureau use, or otherwise commercially exploit or make the SaaS Services, Tyler Software, or Documentation available to any third party other than as expressly permitted by this Agreement. 5. Software Warranty. We warrant that the Tyler Software will perform without Defects during the term of this Agreement. If the Tyler Software does not perform as warranted, we will use all 3 reasonable efforts, consistent with industry standards, to cure the Defect in accordance with the maintenance and support process set forth in Section C(9), below, the SLA and our then current Support Call Process. 6.SaaS Services. 6.1 Our SaaS Services are audited at least yearly in accordance with the AICPA’s Statement on Standards for Attestation Engagements (“SSAE”) No. 18. We have attained, and will maintain, SOC 1 and SOC 2 compliance, or its equivalent, for so long as you are timely paying for SaaS Services. The scope of audit coverage varies for some Tyler Software solutions. Upon execution of a mutually agreeable Non-Disclosure Agreement (“NDA”), we will provide you with a summary of our compliance report(s) or its equivalent. Every year thereafter, for so long as the NDA is in effect and in which you make a written request, we will provide that same information. If our SaaS Services are provided using a 3rd party data center, we will provide available compliance reports for that data center. 6.2 You will be hosted on shared hardware in a Tyler data center or in a third-party data center. In either event, databases containing your Data will be dedicated to you and inaccessible to our other customers. 6.3 Our Tyler data centers have fully-redundant telecommunications access, electrical power, and the required hardware to provide access to the Tyler Software in the event of a disaster or component failure. In the event of a data center failure, we reserve the right to employ our disaster recovery plan for resumption of the SaaS Services. In that event, we commit to a Recovery Point Objective (“RPO”) of one (1) hour and a Recovery Time Objective (“RTO”) of 24 hours. RPO represents the maximum duration of time between the most recent recoverable copy of your hosted Data and subsequent data center failure. RTO represents the maximum duration of time following data center failure within which your access to the Tyler Software must be restored. 6.4 We conduct annual penetration testing of either the production network and/or web application to be performed. We will maintain industry standard intrusion detection and prevention systems to monitor malicious activity in the network and to log and block any such activity. We will provide you with a written or electronic record of the actions taken by us in the event that any unauthorized access to your database(s) is detected as a result of our security protocols. We will undertake an additional security audit, on terms and timing to be mutually agreed to by the parties, at your written request. You may not attempt to bypass or subvert security restrictions in the SaaS Services or environments related to the Tyler Software. Unauthorized attempts to access files, passwords or other confidential information, and unauthorized vulnerability and penetration test scanning of our network and systems (hosted or otherwise) is prohibited without the prior written approval of our IT Security Officer. 6.5 We test our disaster recovery plan on an annual basis. Our standard test is not client-specific. Should you request a client-specific disaster recovery test, we will work with you to schedule and execute such a test on a mutually agreeable schedule. At your written request, we will provide test results to you within a commercially reasonable timeframe after receipt of the request. 4 6.6 We will be responsible for importing back-up and verifying that you can log-in. You will be responsible for running reports and testing critical processes to verify the returned Data. 6.7 We provide secure Data transmission paths between each of your workstations and our servers. 6.8 Tyler data centers are accessible only by authorized personnel with a unique key entry. All other visitors to Tyler data centers must be signed in and accompanied by authorized personnel. Entry attempts to the data center are regularly audited by internal staff and external auditors to ensure no unauthorized access. 6.9 Where applicable with respect to our applications that take or process card payment data, we are responsible for the security of cardholder data that we possess, including functions relating to storing, processing, and transmitting of the cardholder data and affirm that, as of the Effective Date, we comply with applicable requirements to be considered PCI DSS compliant and have performed the necessary steps to validate compliance with the PCI DSS. We agree to supply the current status of our PCI DSS compliance program in the form of an official Attestation of Compliance, which can be found at https://www.tylertech.com/about- us/compliance, and in the event of any change in our status, will comply with applicable notice requirements. SECTION C – PROFESSIONAL SERVICES 1. Professional Services. We will provide you the various implementation-related services itemized in the Investment Summary and described in the Statement of Work. 2. Professional Services Fees. You agree to pay us the professional services fees in the amounts set forth in the Investment Summary. Those amounts are payable in accordance with our Invoicing and Payment Policy. You acknowledge that the fees stated in the Investment Summary are good-faith estimates of the amount of time and materials required for your implementation. We will bill you the actual fees incurred based on the in-scope services provided to you. Any discrepancies in the total values set forth in the Investment Summary will be resolved by multiplying the applicable hourly rate by the quoted hours. 3.Additional Services. The Investment Summary contains, and the Statement of Work describes,the scope of services and related costs (including programming and/or interface estimates) required for the project based on our understanding of the specifications you supplied. If additional work is required, or if you use or request additional services, we will provide you with an addendum or change order, as applicable, outlining the costs for the additional work. The price quotes in the addendum or change order will be valid for thirty (30) days from the date of the quote. 4. Cancellation. If travel is required, we will make all reasonable efforts to schedule travel for our personnel, including arranging travel reservations, at least two (2) weeks in advance of commitments. Therefore, if you cancel services less than two (2) weeks in advance (other than for Force Majeure or breach by us), you will be liable for all (a) non-refundable expenses incurred by us on your behalf, and (b) daily fees associated with cancelled professional services if we are unable to reassign our personnel. We will make all reasonable efforts to reassign personnel in the event you cancel within two (2) weeks of scheduled commitments. 5 5. Services Warranty. We will perform the services in a professional, workmanlike manner, consistent with industry standards. In the event we provide services that do not conform to this warranty, we will re-perform such services at no additional cost to you. 6.Site Access and Requirements. At no cost to us, you agree to provide us with full and free access to your personnel, facilities, and equipment as may be reasonably necessary for us to provide implementation services, subject to any reasonable security protocols or other written policies provided to us as of the Effective Date, and thereafter as mutually agreed to by you and us. 7.Background Checks. For at least the past twelve (12) years, all of our employees have undergone criminal background checks prior to hire. All employees sign our confidentiality agreement and security policies. 8. Client Assistance. You acknowledge that the implementation of the Tyler Software is a cooperative process requiring the time and resources of your personnel. You agree to use all reasonable efforts to cooperate with and assist us as may be reasonably required to meet the agreed upon project deadlines and other milestones for implementation. This cooperation includes at least working with us to schedule the implementation-related services outlined in this Agreement. We will not be liable for failure to meet any deadlines and milestones when such failure is due to Force Majeure or to the failure by your personnel to provide such cooperation and assistance (either through action or omission). 9. Maintenance and Support. For so long as you timely pay your SaaS Fees according to the Invoicing and Payment Policy, then in addition to the terms set forth in the SLA and the Support Call Process, we will: 9.1 perform our maintenance and support obligations in a professional, good, and workmanlike manner, consistent with industry standards, to resolve Defects in the Tyler Software (subject to any applicable release life cycle policy); 9.2 provide support during our established support hours; 9.3 maintain personnel that are sufficiently trained to be familiar with the Tyler Software and Third Party Software, if any, in order to provide maintenance and support services; 9.4 make available to you all releases to the Tyler Software (including updates and enhancements) that we make generally available without additional charge to customers who have a maintenance and support agreement in effect; and 9.5 provide non-Defect resolution support of prior releases of the Tyler Software in accordance with any applicable release life cycle policy. We will use all reasonable efforts to perform support services remotely. Currently, we use a third-party secure unattended connectivity tool called Bomgar, as well as GotoAssist by Citrix. Therefore, you agree to maintain a high-speed internet connection capable of connecting us to your PCs and server(s). You agree to provide us with a login account and local administrative privileges as we may reasonably require to perform remote services. We will, at our option, use the secure connection to assist with proper diagnosis and resolution, subject to any reasonably applicable security protocols. If we cannot 6 resolve a support issue remotely, we may be required to provide onsite services. In such event, we will be responsible for our travel expenses, unless it is determined that the reason onsite support was required was a reason outside our control. Either way, you agree to provide us with full and free access to the Tyler Software, working space, adequate facilities within a reasonable distance from the equipment, and use of machines, attachments, features, or other equipment reasonably necessary for us to provide the maintenance and support services, all at no charge to us. We strongly recommend that you also maintain your VPN for backup connectivity purposes. For the avoidance of doubt, SaaS Fees do not include the following services: (a) onsite support (unless Tyler cannot remotely correct a Defect in the Tyler Software, as set forth above); (b) application design; (c) other consulting services; or (d) support outside our normal business hours as listed in our then- current Support Call Process. Requested services such as those outlined in this section will be billed to you on a time and materials basis at our then current rates. You must request those services with at least one (1) weeks’ advance notice. SECTION D – THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS 1. Third Party Hardware. We will sell, deliver, and install onsite the Third Party Hardware, if you have purchased any, for the price set forth in the Investment Summary. Those amounts are payable in accordance with our Invoicing and Payment Policy. 2. Third Party Software. As part of the SaaS Services, you will receive access to the Third Party Software and related documentation for internal business purposes only. Your rights to the Third Party Software will be governed by the Third Party Terms. 3. Third Party Products Warranties. 3.1 We are authorized by each Developer to grant access to the Third Party Software. 3.2 The Third Party Hardware will be new and unused, and upon payment in full, you will receive free and clear title to the Third Party Hardware. 3.3 You acknowledge that we are not the manufacturer of the Third Party Products. We do not warrant or guarantee the performance of the Third Party Products. However, we grant and pass through to you any warranty that we may receive from the Developer or supplier of the Third Party Products. 4. Third Party Services. If you have purchased Third Party Services, those services will be provided independent of Tyler by such third-party at the rates set forth in the Investment Summary and in accordance with our Invoicing and Payment Policy. SECTION E - INVOICING AND PAYMENT; INVOICE DISPUTES 1. Invoicing and Payment. We will invoice you the SaaS Fees and fees for other professional services in the Investment Summary per our Invoicing and Payment Policy, subject to Section E(2). 2. Invoice Disputes. If you believe any delivered software or service does not conform to the warranties in this Agreement, you will provide us with written notice within thirty (30) days of your 7 receipt of the applicable invoice. The written notice must contain reasonable detail of the issues you contend are in dispute so that we can confirm the issue and respond to your notice with either a justification of the invoice, an adjustment to the invoice, or a proposal addressing the issues presented in your notice. We will work with you as may be necessary to develop an action plan that outlines reasonable steps to be taken by each of us to resolve any issues presented in your notice. You may withhold payment of the amount(s) actually in dispute, and only those amounts, until we complete the action items outlined in the plan. If we are unable to complete the action items outlined in the action plan because of your failure to complete the items agreed to be done by you, then you will remit full payment of the invoice. We reserve the right to suspend delivery of all SaaS Services, including maintenance and support services, if you fail to pay an invoice not disputed as described above within fifteen (15) days of notice of our intent to do so. SECTION F – TERM AND TERMINATION 1. Term. The initial term of this Agreement is equal to the number of years indicated for SaaS Services in Exhibit A, commencing on the first day of the first month following the date Tyler makes the SaaS environment available to you, unless earlier terminated as set forth below. If no duration is indicated in Exhibit A, the initial term is one (1) year. Upon expiration of the initial term, this Agreement will renew automatically for additional one (1) year renewal terms at our then-current SaaS Fees unless terminated in writing by either party at least sixty (60) days prior to the end of the then-current renewal term. Your right to access or use the Tyler Software and the SaaS Services will terminate at the end of this Agreement. 2. Termination. This Agreement may be terminated as set forth below. In the event of termination, you will pay us for all undisputed fees and expenses related to the software, products, and/or services you have received, or we have incurred or delivered, prior to the effective date of termination. Disputed fees and expenses in all terminations other than your termination for cause must have been submitted as invoice disputes in accordance with Section E(2). 2.1 Failure to Pay SaaS Fees. You acknowledge that continued access to the SaaS Services is contingent upon your timely payment of SaaS Fees. If you fail to timely pay the SaaS Fees, we may discontinue the SaaS Services and deny your access to the Tyler Software. We may also terminate this Agreement if you don’t cure such failure to pay within forty-five (45) days of receiving written notice of our intent to terminate. 2.2 For Cause. If you believe we have materially breached this Agreement, you will invoke the Dispute Resolution clause set forth in Section H(3). You may terminate this Agreement for cause in the event we do not cure, or create a mutually agreeable action plan to address, a material breach of this Agreement within the thirty (30) day window set forth in Section H(3). 2.3 Force Majeure. Either party has the right to terminate this Agreement if a Force Majeure event suspends performance of the SaaS Services for a period of forty-five (45) days or more. 2.4 Lack of Appropriations. If you should not appropriate or otherwise make available funds sufficient to utilize the SaaS Services, you may unilaterally terminate this Agreement upon thirty (30) days written notice to us. You will not be entitled to a refund or offset of previously paid, but unused SaaS Fees. You agree not to use termination for lack of appropriations as a substitute for termination for convenience. 8 SECTION G – INDEMNIFICATION, LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND INSURANCE 1.Intellectual Property Infringement Indemnification. 1.1 We will defend you against any third party claim(s) that the Tyler Software or Documentation infringes that third party’s patent, copyright, or trademark, or misappropriates its trade secrets, and will pay the amount of any resulting adverse final judgment (or settlement to which we consent). You must notify us promptly in writing of the claim and give us sole control over its defense or settlement. You agree to provide us with reasonable assistance, cooperation, and information in defending the claim at our expense. 1.2 Our obligations under this Section G(1) will not apply to the extent the claim or adverse final judgment is based on your use of the Tyler Software in contradiction of this Agreement, including with non-licensed third parties, or your willful infringement. 1.3 If we receive information concerning an infringement or misappropriation claim related to the Tyler Software, we may, at our expense and without obligation to do so, either: (a) procure for you the right to continue its use; (b) modify it to make it non-infringing; or (c) replace it with a functional equivalent, in which case you will stop running the allegedly infringing Tyler Software immediately. Alternatively, we may decide to litigate the claim to judgment, in which case you may continue to use the Tyler Software consistent with the terms of this Agreement. 1.4 If an infringement or misappropriation claim is fully litigated and your use of the Tyler Software is enjoined by a court of competent jurisdiction, in addition to paying any adverse final judgment (or settlement to which we consent), we will, at our option, either: (a) procure the right to continue its use; (b) modify it to make it non-infringing; or (c) replace it with a functional equivalent. This section provides your exclusive remedy for third party copyright, patent, or trademark infringement and trade secret misappropriation claims. 2. General Indemnification. 2.1 We will indemnify and hold harmless you and your agents, officials, and employees from and against any and all third-party claims, losses, liabilities, damages, costs, and expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees and costs) for (a) personal injury or property damage to the extent caused by our negligence or willful misconduct; or (b) our violation of PCI-DSS requirements or a law applicable to our performance under this Agreement. You must notify us promptly in writing of the claim and give us sole control over its defense or settlement. You agree to provide us with reasonable assistance, cooperation, and information in defending the claim at our expense. 2.2 To the extent permitted by applicable law, you will indemnify and hold harmless us and our agents, officials, and employees from and against any and all third-party claims, losses, liabilities, damages, costs, and expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees and costs) for personal injury or property damage to the extent caused by your negligence or willful misconduct; or (b) your violation of a law applicable to your performance under this Agreement. 9 We will notify you promptly in writing of the claim and will give you sole control over its defense or settlement. We agree to provide you with reasonable assistance, cooperation, and information in defending the claim at your expense. 3.DISCLAIMER. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, WE HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, DUTIES, OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 4. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, OUR LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER BASED ON A THEORY OF CONTRACT OR TORT, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY, SHALL BE LIMITED TO YOUR ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED (A) DURING THE INITIAL TERM, AS SET FORTH IN SECTION F(1), TOTAL FEES PAID AS OF THE TIME OF THE CLAIM; OR (B) DURING ANY RENEWAL TERM, THE THEN-CURRENT ANNUAL SAAS FEES PAYABLE IN THAT RENEWAL TERM. THE PARTIES ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE PRICES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE SET IN RELIANCE UPON THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN DAMAGES, AND EACH SHALL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE FAILURE OF AN ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO CLAIMS THAT ARE SUBJECT TO SECTIONS G(1) AND G(2). 5. EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN DAMAGES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL WE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 6. Insurance. During the course of performing services under this Agreement, we agree to maintain the following levels of insurance: (a) Commercial General Liability of at least $1,000,000; (b) Automobile Liability of at least $1,000,000; (c) Professional Liability of at least $1,000,000; (d) Workers Compensation complying with applicable statutory requirements; and (e) Excess/Umbrella Liability of at least $5,000,000. We will add you as an additional insured to our Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability policies, which will automatically add you as an additional insured to our Excess/Umbrella Liability policy as well. We will provide you with copies of certificates of insurance upon your written request. SECTION H – GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 1. Additional Products and Services. You may purchase additional products and services at the rates set forth in the Investment Summary for twelve (12) months from the Effective Date by executing a mutually agreed addendum. If no rate is provided in the Investment Summary, or those twelve (12) months have expired, you may purchase additional products and services at our then-current list price, also by executing a mutually agreed addendum. The terms of this Agreement will control any such additional purchase(s), unless otherwise specifically provided in the addendum. 2. Optional Items. Pricing for any listed optional products and services in the Investment Summary will be valid for twelve (12) months from the Effective Date. 10 3. Dispute Resolution. You agree to provide us with written notice within thirty (30) days of becoming aware of a dispute. You agree to cooperate with us in trying to reasonably resolve all disputes, including, if requested by either party, appointing a senior representative to meet and engage in good faith negotiations with our appointed senior representative. Senior representatives will convene within thirty (30) days of the written dispute notice, unless otherwise agreed. All meetings and discussions between senior representatives will be deemed confidential settlement discussions not subject to disclosure under Federal Rule of Evidence 408 or any similar applicable state rule. If we fail to resolve the dispute, then the parties shall participate in non-binding mediation in an effort to resolve the dispute. If the dispute remains unresolved after mediation, then either of us may assert our respective rights and remedies in a court of competent jurisdiction. Nothing in this section shall prevent you or us from seeking necessary injunctive relief during the dispute resolution procedures. 4. Taxes. The fees in the Investment Summary do not include any taxes, including, without limitation, sales, use, or excise tax. If you are a tax-exempt entity, you agree to provide us with a tax-exempt certificate. Otherwise, we will pay all applicable taxes to the proper authorities and you will reimburse us for such taxes. If you have a valid direct-pay permit, you agree to provide us with a copy. For clarity, we are responsible for paying our income taxes, both federal and state, as applicable, arising from our performance of this Agreement. 5. Nondiscrimination. We will not discriminate against any person employed or applying for employment concerning the performance of our responsibilities under this Agreement. This discrimination prohibition will apply to all matters of initial employment, tenure, and terms of employment, or otherwise with respect to any matter directly or indirectly relating to employment concerning race, color, religion, national origin, age, sex, sexual orientation, ancestry, disability that is unrelated to the individual's ability to perform the duties of a particular job or position, height, weight, marital status, or political affiliation. We will post, where appropriate, all notices related to nondiscrimination as may be required by applicable law. 6. E-Verify. We have complied, and will comply, with the E-Verify procedures administered by the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services Verification Division for all of our employees assigned to your project. 7.Subcontractors. We will not subcontract any services under this Agreement without your prior written consent, not to be unreasonably withheld. 8. Binding Effect; No Assignment. This Agreement shall be binding on, and shall be for the benefit of, either your or our successor(s) or permitted assign(s). Neither party may assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of the other party; provided, however, your consent is not required for an assignment by us as a result of a corporate reorganization, merger, acquisition, or purchase of substantially all of our assets. 9. Force Majeure. Except for your payment obligations, neither party will be liable for delays in performing its obligations under this Agreement to the extent that the delay is caused by Force Majeure; provided, however, that within ten (10) business days of the Force Majeure event, the party whose performance is delayed provides the other party with written notice explaining the cause and extent thereof, as well as a request for a reasonable time extension equal to the estimated duration of the Force Majeure event. 11 10. No Intended Third Party Beneficiaries. This Agreement is entered into solely for the benefit of you and us. No third party will be deemed a beneficiary of this Agreement, and no third party will have the right to make any claim or assert any right under this Agreement. This provision does not affect the rights of third parties under any Third Party Terms. 11.Entire Agreement; Amendment. This Agreement represents the entire agreement between you and us with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes any prior agreements, understandings, and representations, whether written, oral, expressed, implied, or statutory. Purchase orders submitted by you, if any, are for your internal administrative purposes only, and the terms and conditions contained in those purchase orders will have no force or effect. This Agreement may only be modified by a written amendment signed by an authorized representative of each party. 12. Severability. If any term or provision of this Agreement is held invalid or unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement will be considered valid and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law. 13. No Waiver. In the event that the terms and conditions of this Agreement are not strictly enforced by either party, such non-enforcement will not act as or be deemed to act as a waiver or modification of this Agreement, nor will such non-enforcement prevent such party from enforcing each and every term of this Agreement thereafter. 14. Independent Contractor. We are an independent contractor for all purposes under this Agreement. 15. Notices. All notices or communications required or permitted as a part of this Agreement, such as notice of an alleged material breach for a termination for cause or a dispute that must be submitted to dispute resolution, must be in writing and will be deemed delivered upon the earlier of the following: (a) actual receipt by the receiving party; (b) upon receipt by sender of a certified mail, return receipt signed by an employee or agent of the receiving party; (c) upon receipt by sender of proof of email delivery; or (d) if not actually received, five (5) days after deposit with the United States Postal Service authorized mail center with proper postage (certified mail, return receipt requested) affixed and addressed to the other party at the address set forth on the signature page hereto or such other address as the party may have designated by proper notice. The consequences for the failure to receive a notice due to improper notification by the intended receiving party of a change in address will be borne by the intended receiving party. 16. Client Lists. You agree that we may identify you by name in client lists, marketing presentations, and promotional materials. 17. Confidentiality. Both parties recognize that their respective employees and agents, in the course of performance of this Agreement, may be exposed to confidential information and that disclosure of such information could violate rights to private individuals and entities, including the parties. Confidential information is nonpublic information that a reasonable person would believe to be confidential and includes, without limitation, personal identifying information (e.g., social security numbers) and trade secrets, each as defined by applicable state law. Each party agrees that it will not disclose any confidential information of the other party and further agrees to take all reasonable and appropriate action to prevent such disclosure by its employees or agents. The confidentiality covenants contained herein will survive the termination or cancellation of this Agreement. This 12 obligation of confidentiality will not apply to information that: (a) is in the public domain, either at the time of disclosure or afterwards, except by breach of this Agreement by a party or its employees or agents; (b) a party can establish by reasonable proof was in that party's possession at the time of initial disclosure; (c) a party receives from a third party who has a right to disclose it to the receiving party; or (d) is the subject of a legitimate disclosure request under the open records laws or similar applicable public disclosure laws governing this Agreement; provided, however, that in the event you receive an open records or other similar applicable request, you will give us prompt notice and otherwise perform the functions required by applicable law. 18. Quarantining of Client Data. Some services provided by Tyler require us to be in possession of your Data. In the event we detect malware or other conditions associated with your Data that are reasonably suspected of putting Tyler resources or other Tyler clients’ data at risk, we reserve the absolute right to move your Data from its location within a multi-tenancy Tyler hosted environment to an isolated “quarantined” environment without advance notice. Your Data will remain in such quarantine for a period of at least six (6) months during which time we will review the Data, and all traffic associated with the Data, for signs of malware or other similar issues. If no issues are detected through such reviews during the six (6) month period of quarantine, we will coordinate with you the restoration of your Data to a non-quarantined environment. In the event your Data must remain in quarantine beyond this six (6) month period through no fault of Tyler’s, we reserve the right to require payment of additional fees for the extended duration of quarantine. We will provide an estimate of what those costs will be upon your request. 19. Business License. In the event a local business license is required for us to perform services hereunder, you will promptly notify us and provide us with the necessary paperwork and/or contact information so that we may timely obtain such license. 20. Governing Law. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of State of Texas, without regard to its rules on conflicts of law. 21. Multiple Originals and Authorized Signatures. This Agreement may be executed in multiple originals, any of which will be independently treated as an original document. Any electronic, faxed, scanned, photocopied, or similarly reproduced signature on this Agreement or any amendment hereto will be deemed an original signature and will be fully enforceable as if an original signature. Each party represents to the other that the signatory set forth below is duly authorized to bind that party to this Agreement. 22. Cooperative Procurement. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, we agree that this Agreement may be used as a cooperative procurement vehicle by eligible jurisdictions. We reserve the right to negotiate and customize the terms and conditions set forth herein, including but not limited to pricing, to the scope and circumstances of that cooperative procurement. 23. Contract Documents. This Agreement includes the following exhibits: Exhibit A Investment Summary Exhibit B Invoicing and Payment Policy Schedule 1: Business Travel Policy 13 Exhibit C Service Level Agreement Schedule 1: Support Call Process Exhibit D Statement of Work IN WITNESS WHEREOF, a duly authorized representative of each party has executed this Agreement as of the date(s) set forth below. Tyler Technologies, Inc. City of La Porte, Texas By: By: Name: Name: Title: Title: Date: Date: Address for Notices: Address for Notices: Tyler Technologies, Inc. City of La Porte One Tyler Drive 604 W Fairmont Pkwy Yarmouth, ME 04096 La Porte, Texas 77571 Attention: Chief Legal Officer Attention: ______________________________ 14 Exhibit A Exhibit A Investment Summary The following Investment Summary details the software and services to be delivered by us to you under the Agreement. This Investment Summary is effective as of the Effective Date. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined will have the meaning assigned to such terms in the Agreement. REMAINDER OF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 Rvpufe!Cz;Dsbjh!Ejypo! Rvpuf!Fyqjsbujpo;2304203132! Rvpuf!Obnf;Djuz!pg!Mb!Qpsuf.FH.DE! Rvpuf!Ovncfs;3132.241:55! Rvpuf!Eftdsjqujpo;Uzmfs!FofsHpw!qspqptbm-!Mb!Qpsuf-!TbbT!3132! Tbmft!Rvpubujpo!Gps Djuz!pg!Mb!Qpsuf! 715!X!Gbjsnpou!Qlxz! Mb!Qpsuf!-!UY!88682.7326! Qipof;!,2!)392*!582.6131! TbbT Pof!Ujnf!Gfft Eftdsjqujpo!$!ZfbstBoovbm!GffEbub!Dpowfstjpo Djwjd!Tfswjdft! FofsHpw!Bewbodfe!Bvupnbujpo!Cvoemf!!4/1%6-141%1 FofsHpw!Cvtjoftt!Nbobhfnfou!Tvjuf!)!3!*!!4/1%5-515%1 FofsHpw!Djuj{fo!Tfmg!Tfswjdf!.!Dpnnvojuz!Efwfmpqnfou!!4/1%9-5:3%1 FofsHpw!Dpnnvojuz!Efwfmpqnfou!Tvjuf!)!36!*!!4/1%66-161%1 FofsHpw!Dpsf!Gpvoebujpo!Cvoemf!!4/1%3-258%1 FofsHpw!f.Sfwjfxt!!4/1%21-97:%1 FofsHpw!jH!Xpslgpsdf!Bqqt!!4/1%845%1 Uzmfs!HJT!)!38!*!!4/1%8-536%1 Ebub!boe!Sfqpsujoh! FofsHpw!Sfrvftu!boe!Fogpsdfnfou!Nbobhfnfou!BQJ!Uppmlju!!4/1%5-539%1 Tvc.Upubm;%:9-68:%1 Mftt!Ejtdpvou;%5-:44%1 %1 UPUBM;%:4-757 Puifs!Tfswjdft EftdsjqujpoRvboujuzVoju!QsjdfFyufoefe!QsjdfNbjoufobodf Djwjd!Tfswjdft!.!Potjuf!Ipvst271%321%44-711%1 Djwjd!Tfswjdft!.!Sfnpuf!Ipvst553%296%92-881%1 FofsHpw!Cvtjoftt!Nbobhfnfou!Gpsnt!Mjcsbsz!)7!Gpsnt*!2%6-211%6-211%1 FofsHpw!Dpnnvojuz!Efwfmpqnfou!Gpsnt!Mjcsbsz!)6!Gpsnt*!2%6-211%6-211%1 Qspkfdu!Nbobhfnfou!83%296%24-431%1 Upubm;%249-9:1%1 3132.241:55!.Uzmfs!FofsHpw!qspqptbm-!Mb!Qpsuf-!TbbT!3132!DPOGJEFOUJBM 2!pg!!6! TvnnbszPof!Ujnf!GfftSfdvssjoh!Gfft Upubm!Uzmfs!Tpguxbsf%1/11%1/11 Upubm!Uzmfs!TbbT!!%:4-757/11! Upubm!Uzmfs!Tfswjdft%249-9:1/11%1/11 Upubm!Uijse!Qbsuz!Ibsexbsf-!Tpguxbsf!boe!Tfswjdft%1/11%1/11 Tvnnbsz!Upubm!%249-9:1/11!!%:4-757/11! Dpousbdu!Upubm!)Fydmvejoh!Ftujnbufe!Usbwfm*%52:-939/11 Uzmfs!TbbT!0!Tvctdsjqujpo!Ejtdpvou!Efubjm EftdsjqujpoBoovbm!GffBoovbm!Gff!EjtdpvouBoovbm!Gff!Ofu Djwjd!Tfswjdft FofsHpw!Bewbodfe!Bvupnbujpo!Cvoemf!%6-141%363%5-889 FofsHpw!Cvtjoftt!Nbobhfnfou!Tvjuf!%5-515.%2-:93%5-295 FofsHpw!Djuj{fo!Tfmg!Tfswjdf!.!Dpnnvojuz!Efwfmpqnfou!%9-5:3%536%9-178 FofsHpw!Dpnnvojuz!Efwfmpqnfou!Tvjuf!%66-161.%61-1:9%63-411 FofsHpw!Dpsf!Gpvoebujpo!Cvoemf!%3-258%218%3-151 FofsHpw!f.Sfwjfxt!%21-97:%654%21-437 FofsHpw!jH!Xpslgpsdf!Bqqt!%845%48%7:8 Uzmfs!HJT!%8-536.%7-883%8-158 Ebub!boe!Sfqpsujoh FofsHpw!Sfrvftu!boe!Fogpsdfnfou!Nbobhfnfou!BQJ!Uppmlju!%5-539%332%5-318 Upubm;%:9-68:%5-:44%:4-757 3132.241:55!.Uzmfs!FofsHpw!qspqptbm-!Mb!Qpsuf-!TbbT!3132!DPOGJEFOUJBM 3!pg!!6! Vomftt!puifsxjtf!joejdbufe!jo!uif!dpousbdu!ps!bnfoenfou!uifsfup-!qsjdjoh!gps!pqujpobm!jufnt!xjmm!cf!ifme gps!tjy!)7*!npouit!gspn!uif!Rvpuf!ebuf!ps!uif!Fggfdujwf!Ebuf!pg!uif!dpousbdu-!xijdifwfs!jt!mbufs/ Dmjfou!Bqqspwbm;Ebuf; Qsjou!Obnf;Q/P/$; 3132.241:55!.Uzmfs!FofsHpw!qspqptbm-!Mb!Qpsuf-!TbbT!3132!DPOGJEFOUJBM 4!pg!!6! 3132.241:55!.Uzmfs!FofsHpw!qspqptbm-!Mb!Qpsuf-!TbbT!3132!DPOGJEFOUJBM 5!pg!!6! 3132.241:55!.Uzmfs!FofsHpw!qspqptbm-!Mb!Qpsuf-!TbbT!3132!DPOGJEFOUJBM 6!pg!!6! Exhibit B Invoicing and Payment Policy We will provide you with the software and services set forth in the Investment Summary of the Agreement. Capitalized terms not otherwise defined will have the meaning assigned to such terms in the Agreement. Invoicing: We will invoice you for the applicable software and services in the Investment Summary as set forth below. Your rights to dispute any invoice are set forth in the Agreement. 1. SaaS Fees. SaaS Fees are invoiced on a quarterly basis during the initial term, beginning on the commencement of the initial term as set forth in Section F (1) of this Agreement. Thereafter, SaaS Fees will be invoiced on an annual basis at our then-current rates. 2. Other Tyler Software and Services. 2.1 VPN Device: The fee for the VPN device will be invoiced upon installation of the VPN. 2.2 Implementation and Other Professional Services (including training): Implementation and other professional services (including training) are billed and invoiced as delivered, at the rates set forth in the Investment Summary. 2.3 Consulting Services: If you have purchased any Business Process Consulting services, if they have been quoted as fixed-fee services, they will be invoiced 50% upon your acceptance of the Best Practice Recommendations, by module, and 50% upon your acceptance of custom desktop procedures, by module. If you have purchased any Business Process Consulting services and they are quoted as an estimate, then we will bill you the actual services delivered on a time and materials basis. 2.4 Conversions: Fixed-fee conversions are invoiced 50% upon initial delivery of the converted Data, by conversion option, and 50% upon Client acceptance to load the converted Data into Live/Production environment, by conversion option. Where conversions are quoted as estimated, we will bill you the actual services delivered on a time and materials basis. 2.5 Requested Modifications to the Tyler Software: Requested modifications to the Tyler Software are invoiced 50% upon delivery of specifications and 50% upon delivery of the applicable modification. You must report any failure of the modification to conform to the specifications within thirty (30) days of delivery; otherwise, the modification will be deemed to be in compliance with the specifications after the 30-day window has passed. You may still report Defects to us as set forth in this Agreement. 2.6 Other Fixed Price Services: Other fixed price services are invoiced as delivered, at the rates 1 Exhibit B set forth in the Investment Summary. For the avoidance of doubt, where “Project Planning Services” are provided, payment will be due upon delivery of the Implementation Planning document. 2.7 Annual Services: Unless otherwise indicated in this Exhibit B, fees for annual services are due annually, in advance, commencing on the availability of the service.Your annual fees for the initial term are set forth in the Investment Summary. Upon expiration of the initial term, your annual fees will be at our then-current rates. 3.Third Party Products. 3.1 Third Party Software License Fees: License fees for Third Party Software, if any, are invoiced when we make it available to you for downloading. 3.2 Third Party Software Maintenance: The first year maintenance for the Third Party Software is invoiced when we make it available to you for downloading. 3.3 Third Party Hardware: Third Party Hardware costs, if any, are invoiced upon delivery. 3.4 Third Party Services: Fees for Third Party Services, if any, are invoiced as delivered, along with applicable expenses, at the rates set forth in the Investment Summary. 4. Transaction Fees. Unless paid directly by an end user at the time of transaction, per transaction (call, message, etc.) fees are invoiced on a quarterly basis. Fees are indicated in Schedule A and may be increased by Tyler upon notice of no less than thirty (30) days. 5. Expenses. The service rates in the Investment Summary do not include travel expenses. Expenses for Tyler delivered services will be billed as incurred and only in accordance with our then-current Business Travel Policy, plus a 10% travel agency processing fee. Our current Business Travel Policy is attached to this Exhibit B as Schedule 1. Copies of receipts will be provided upon request; we reserve the right to charge you an administrative fee depending on the extent of your requests. Receipts for miscellaneous items less than twenty-five dollars and mileage logs are not available. Payment. Payment for undisputed invoices is due within forty-five (45) days of the invoice date. We prefer to receive payments electronically. Our electronic payment information is available by contacting AR@tylertech.com. 2 Exhibit B Schedule 1 Schedule 1 Business Travel Policy 1. Air Travel A. Reservations & Tickets The Travel Management Company (TMC) used by Tyler will provide an employee with a direct flight within two hours before or after the requested departure time, assuming that flight does not add more than three hours to the employee’s total trip duration and the fare is within $100 (each way) of the lowest logical fare. If a net savings of $200 or more (each way) is possible through a connecting flight that is within two hours before or after the requested departure time and that does not add more than three hours to the employee’s total trip duration, the connecting flight should be accepted. Employees are encouraged to make advanced reservations to take full advantage of discount opportunities. Employees should use all reasonable efforts to make travel arrangements at least two (2) weeks in advance of commitments. A seven (7) day advance booking requirement is mandatory. When booking less than seven (7) days in advance, management approval will be required. Except in the case of international travel where a segment of continuous air travel is six (6) or more consecutive hours in length, only economy or coach class seating is reimbursable. Employees shall not be reimbursed for “Basic Economy Fares” because these fares are non-refundable and have many restrictions that outweigh the cost-savings. B. Baggage Fees Reimbursement of personal baggage charges are based on trip duration as follows: • Up to five (5) days = one (1) checked bag • Six (6) or more days = two (2) checked bags Baggage fees for sports equipment are not reimbursable. 1 Exhibit B Schedule 1 2. Ground Transportation A. Private Automobile Mileage Allowance – Business use of an employee’s private automobile will be reimbursed at the current IRS allowable rate, plus out of pocket costs for tolls and parking. Mileage will be calculated by using the employee's office as the starting and ending point, in compliance with IRS regulations. Employees who have been designated a home office should calculate miles from their home. B. Rental Car Employees are authorized to rent cars only in conjunction with air travel when cost, convenience, and the specific situation reasonably require their use. When renting a car for Tyler business, employees should select a “mid-size” or “intermediate” car. “Full” size cars may be rented when three or more employees are traveling together. Tyler carries leased vehicle coverage for business car rentals; except for employees traveling to Alaska and internationally (excluding Canada), additional insurance on the rental agreement should be declined. C. Public Transportation Taxi or airport limousine services may be considered when traveling in and around cities or to and from airports when less expensive means of transportation are unavailable or impractical. The actual fare plus a reasonable tip (15-18%) are reimbursable. In the case of a free hotel shuttle to the airport, tips are included in the per diem rates and will not be reimbursed separately. D. Parking & Tolls When parking at the airport, employees must use longer term parking areas that are measured in days as opposed to hours. Park and fly options located near some airports may also be used. For extended trips that would result in excessive parking charges, public transportation to/from the airport should be considered. Tolls will be reimbursed when receipts are presented. 3. Lodging Tyler’s TMC will select hotel chains that are well established, reasonable in price, and conveniently located in relation to the traveler's work assignment. Typical hotel chains include Courtyard, Fairfield Inn, Hampton Inn, and Holiday Inn Express. If the employee has a discount rate with a local hotel, the hotel reservation should note that discount and the employee should confirm the lower rate with the hotel upon arrival. Employee memberships in travel clubs such as AAA should be noted in their travel profiles so that the employee can take advantage of any lower club rates. “No shows” or cancellation fees are not reimbursable if the employee does not comply with the hotel’s cancellation policy. Tips for maids and other hotel staff are included in the per diem rate and are not reimbursed separately. 2 Exhibit B Schedule 1 Employees are not authorized to reserve non-traditional short-term lodging, such as Airbnb, VRBO, and HomeAway. Employees who elect to make such reservations shall not be reimbursed. 4. Meals and Incidental Expenses Employee meals and incidental expenses while on travel status within the continental U.S. are in accordance with the federal per diem rates published by the General Services Administration. Incidental expenses include tips to maids, hotel staff, and shuttle drivers and other minor travel expenses. Per diem rates are available at www.gsa.gov/perdiem. Per diem for Alaska, Hawaii, U.S. protectorates and international destinations are provided separately by the Department of State and will be determined as required. A. Overnight Travel For each full day of travel, all three meals are reimbursable. Per diems on the first and last day of a trip are governed as set forth below. Departure Day Depart before 12:00 noon Lunch and dinner Depart after 12:00 noon Dinner Return Day Return before 12:00 noon Breakfast Return between 12:00 noon & 7:00 p.m. Breakfast and lunch Return after 7:00 p.m.* Breakfast, lunch and dinner *7:00 p.m. is defined as direct travel time and does not include time taken to stop for dinner. The reimbursement rates for individual meals are calculated as a percentage of the full day per diem as follows: Breakfast 15% Lunch 25% Dinner 60% B. Same Day Travel Employees traveling at least 100 miles to a site and returning in the same day are eligible to claim lunch on an expense report. Employees on same day travel status are eligible to claim dinner in the event they return home after 7:00 p.m.* *7:00 p.m. is defined as direct travel time and does not include time taken to stop for dinner. 3 Exhibit B Schedule 1 5. Internet Access – Hotels and Airports Employees who travel may need to access their e-mail at night. Many hotels provide free high speed internet access and Tyler employees are encouraged to use such hotels whenever possible. If an employee’s hotel charges for internet access it is reimbursable up to $10.00 per day. Charges for internet access at airports are not reimbursable. 6. International Travel All international flights with the exception of flights between the U.S. and Canada should be reserved through TMC using the “lowest practical coach fare” with the exception of flights that are six (6) or more consecutive hours in length. In such event, the next available seating class above coach shall be reimbursed. When required to travel internationally for business, employees shall be reimbursed for photo fees, application fees, and execution fees when obtaining a new passport book, but fees related to passport renewals are not reimbursable. Visa application and legal fees, entry taxes and departure taxes are reimbursable. The cost of vaccinations that are either required for travel to specific countries or suggested by the U.S. Department of Health & Human Services for travel to specific countries, is reimbursable. Section 4, Meals & Incidental Expenses, and Section 2.b., Rental Car, shall apply to this section. 4 Exhibit C Exhibit C Service Level Agreement I. Agreement Overview ThisSLAoperates in conjunction with, and does not supersede or replace any part of, the Agreement. It outlines the information technology service levels that we will provide to you to ensure the availability of the application services that you have requested us to provide. All other support services are documented in the Support Call Process. II. Definitions. Except as defined below, all defined terms have the meaning set forth in the Agreement. Actual Attainment: The percentage of time the Tyler Software is available during a calendar quarter, calculated as follows: (Service Availability – Downtime) ÷ Service Availability. Client Error Incident: Any service unavailability resulting from your applications, content or equipment, or the acts or omissions of any of your service users or third-party providers over whom we exercise no control. Downtime: Those minutes during Service Availability, as defined below, when all users cannot launch, login, search or save primary data in the Tyler Software. Downtime does not include those instances in which only a Defect is present. Emergency Maintenance: (1) maintenance that is required to patch a critical security vulnerability; (2) maintenance that is required to prevent an imminent outage of Service Availability; or (3) maintenance that is mutually agreed upon in writing by Tyler and the Client. Planned Downtime: Downtime that occurs during a Standard or Emergency Maintenance window. Service Availability: The total number of minutes in a calendar quarter that the Tyler Software is capable of receiving, processing, and responding to requests, excluding Planned Downtime, Client Error Incidents, denial of service attacks and Force Majeure. Standard Maintenance: Routine maintenance to the Tyler Software and infrastructure. Standard Maintenance is limited to five (5) hours per week. III. Service Availability a. Your Responsibilities Whenever you experience Downtime, you must make a support call according to the procedures outlined in the Support Call Process. You will receive a support case number. b. Our Responsibilities When our support team receives a call from you that Downtime has occurred or is occurring, we will work with you to identify the cause of the Downtime (including whether it may be the result of Planned 1 Exhibit C Downtime, a Client Error Incident, Denial of Service attack or Force Majeure). We will also work with you to resume normal operations. c. Client Relief Our targeted Attainment Goal is 100%. You may be entitled to credits as indicated in the Client Relief Schedule found below. Your relief credit is calculated as a percentage of the SaaS fees paid for the calendar quarter. In order to receive relief credits, you must submit a request through one of the channels listed in our Support Call Process within fifteen days (15) of the end of the applicable quarter. We will respond to your relief request within thirty (30) day(s) of receipt. The total credits confirmed by us will be applied to the SaaS Fee for the next billing cycle. Issuing of such credit does not relieve us of our obligations under the Agreement to correct the problem which created the service interruption. Client Relief Schedule Actual AttainmentClient Relief 99.99% -99.50% Remedial action will be taken 99.49% -98.50% 2% 98.49% -97.50% 4% 97.49% -96.50% 6% 96.49% -95.50% 8% Below 95.50%10% * Notwithstanding language in the Agreement to the contrary, Recovery Point Objective is one (1) hour. IV. Maintenance Notifications We perform Standard Maintenance during limited windows that are historically known to be reliably low-traffic times. If and when maintenance is predicted to occur during periods of higher traffic, we will provide advance notice of those windows and will coordinate to the greatest extent possible with you. Not all maintenance activities will cause application unavailability. However, if Tyler anticipates that activities during a Standard or Emergency Maintenance window may make the Tyler Software unavailable, we will provide advance notice, as reasonably practicable that the Tyler Software will be unavailable during the maintenance window. 2 Exhibit C Schedule 1 Exhibit C Schedule 1 Support Call Process Support Channels Tyler Technologies, Inc. provides the following channels of software support*: (1) Tyler Community – an on-line resource, Tyler Community provides a venue for all Tyler clients with current maintenance agreements to collaborate with one another, share best practices and resources, and access documentation. (2) On-line submission (portal) – for less urgent and functionality-based questions, users may create unlimited support incidents through the customer relationship management portal available at the Tyler Technologies website. (3) Email – for less urgent situations, users may submit unlimited emails directly to the software support group. (4) Telephone – for urgent or complex questions, users receive toll-free, unlimited telephone software support. * Channel availability may be limited for certain applications. Support Resources A number of additional resources are available to provide a comprehensive and complete support experience: (1) Tyler Website – www.tylertech.com – for accessing client tools and other information including support contact information. (2)Tyler Community –available through login, Tyler Community provides a venue for clients to support one another and share best practices and resources. (3) Knowledgebase – A fully searchable depository of thousands of documents related to procedures, best practices, release information, and job aides. (4) Program Updates – where development activity is made available for client consumption. Support Availability Standard Support Tyler Technologies standard support is available during the local business hours of 8 AM to 5 PM (Monday – Friday) across four US time zones (Pacific, Mountain, Central and Eastern). Clients may receive coverage across these time zones. Additionally, some clients may obtain support for certain Tyler solutions outside of standard times as further detailed below. Availability and cost of support outside of standard times is at Tyler’s discretion. Tyler’s holiday schedule is outlined below. There will be no standard support coverage on these days. 1 Exhibit C Schedule 1 New Year’s Day Thanksgiving Day Memorial Day Day after Thanksgiving Independence Day Christmas Day Labor Day Support Outside of Standard Times For clients who obtain 24 x 7 support, we will provide you with procedures for contacting support staff outside standard support times for reporting Priority Level 1 Defects only. Upon receipt of such a Defect notification, we will use commercially reasonable efforts to meet the resolution targets set forth below. For some Tyler solutions, we will also make commercially reasonable efforts to be available for one pre- scheduled Saturday of each month to assist your IT staff with applying patches and release upgrades, as well as consulting with them on server maintenance and configuration of the Tyler Software environment. Issue Handling Incident Tracking Every support incident is logged into Tyler’s Customer Relationship Management System and given a unique incident number. This system tracks the history of each incident. The incident tracking number is used to track and reference open issues when clients contact support. Clients may track incidents, using the incident number, through the portal at Tyler’s website or by calling software support directly. Incident Priority Each incident is assigned a priority number, which corresponds to the client’s needs and deadlines. The client is responsible for reasonably setting the priority of the incident per the chart below. This chart is not intended to address every type of support incident, and certain “characteristics” may or may not apply depending on whether the Tyler software has been deployed on customer infrastructure or the Tyler cloud. The goal is to help guide the client towards clearly understanding and communicating the importance of the issue and to describe generally expected responses and resolutions. Priority Characteristics of Support Incident Resolution Targets Level Support incident that causes (a) Tyler shall provide an initial response to Priority complete application failure or Level 1 incidents within one (1) business hour of application unavailability; (b) receipt of the support incident. Tyler shall use application failure or unavailability in commercially reasonable efforts to resolve such 1 one or more of the client’s remote support incidents or provide a circumvention Critical location; or (c) systemic loss of multiple procedure within one (1) business day. For non- essential system functions. hosted customers, Tyler’s responsibility for lost or corrupted data is limited to assisting the client in restoring its last available database. 2 Exhibit C Schedule 1 Priority Characteristics of Support Incident Resolution Targets Level Support incident that causes (a) Tyler shall provide an initial response to Priority repeated, consistent failure of essential Level 2 incidents within four (4) business hours of functionality affecting more than one receipt of the support incident. Tyler shall use user or (b) loss or corruption of data. commercially reasonable efforts to resolve such 2 support incidents or provide a circumvention High procedure within ten (10) business days. For non- hosted customers, Tyler’s responsibility for loss or corrupted data is limited to assisting the client in restoring its last available database. Priority Level 1 incident with an existing Tyler shall provide an initial response to Priority circumvention procedure, or a Priority Level 3 incidents within one (1) business day of Level 2 incident that affects only one receipt of the support incident. Tyler shall use user or for which there is an existing commercially reasonable efforts to resolve such 3 circumvention procedure.support incidents without the need for a Medium circumvention procedure with the next published maintenance update or service pack. For non- hosted customers, Tyler’s responsibility for lost or corrupted data is limited to assisting the client in restoring its last available database. Support incident that causes failure of Tyler shall provide an initial response to Priority 4 non-essential functionality or a Level 4 incidents within two (2) business Non-cosmetic or other issue that does not days. Tyler shall use commercially reasonable critical qualify as any other Priority Level. efforts to resolve such support incidents, as well as cosmetic issues, with a future version release. Incident Escalation Tyler Technology’s software support consists of four levels of personnel: (1) Level 1: front-line representatives (2) Level 2: more senior in their support role, they assist front-line representatives and take on escalated issues (3) Level 3: assist in incident escalations and specialized client issues (4) Level 4: responsible for the management of support teams for either a single product or a product group If a client feels they are not receiving the service needed, they may contact the appropriate Software Support Manager. After receiving the incident tracking number, the manager will follow up on the open issue and determine the necessary action to meet the client’s needs. On occasion, the priority or immediacy of a software support incident may change after initiation. Tyler encourages clients to communicate the level of urgency or priority of software support issues so that we can respond appropriately. A software support incident can be escalated by any of the following methods: 3 Exhibit C Schedule 1 (1) Telephone – for immediate response, call toll-free to either escalate an incident’s priority or to escalate an issue through management channels as described above. (2) Email – clients can send an email to software support in order to escalate the priority of an issue (3) On-line Support Incident Portal – clients can also escalate the priority of an issue by logging into the client incident portal and referencing the appropriate incident tracking number. Remote Support Tool Some support calls require further analysis of the client’s database, process, or setup to diagnose a problem or to assist with a question. Tyler will, at its discretion, use an industry-standard remote support tool. Support is able to quickly connect to the client’s desktop and view the site’s setup, diagnose problems, or assist with screen navigation. More information about the remote support tool Tyler uses is available upon request. 4 Exhibit D Exhibit D Statement of Work REMAINDER OF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 City of La Porte, TX SOW from Tyler Technologies, Inc. 10/29/2021 Presented to: City of La Porte, TX 604 W Fairmont Pkwy La Porte, TX 77571 Contact: Mike Dehghanian Email: Mike.Dehghanian@TylerTech.com One Tyler Drive, Yarmouth, ME 04096 TableofContents 0!24 ΐȀ %8%#54)6% 35--!29...............................................................................................................1 Project Overview.............................................................................................................................1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................1 Project Goals.......................................................................................................................................1 Methodology.......................................................................................................................................1 0!24 ΑȀ 02/*%#4 &/5.$!4)/..............................................................................................................3 Project Governance.........................................................................................................................3 Project Scope Control......................................................................................................................4 Managing Scope and Project Change.................................................................................................4 Change Control...................................................................................................................................4 Change Request Management............................................................................................................4 Acceptance Process.........................................................................................................................6 Roles and Responsibilities................................................................................................................6 Tyler Roles & Responsibilities.............................................................................................................6 Tyler Executive Manager.............................................................................................................7 Tyler Implementation Manager..................................................................................................7 Tyler Project Manager.................................................................................................................7 Tyler Implementation Consultant...............................................................................................8 Tyler Sales...................................................................................................................................8 Tyler Technical Services..............................................................................................................8 Tyler SaaS Technicians................................................................................................................9 City Roles & Responsibilities...............................................................................................................9 City Executive Sponsor................................................................................................................9 City Steering Committee.............................................................................................................9 City Project Manager................................................................................................................10 City Functional Leads................................................................................................................11 City Power Users.......................................................................................................................12 City End Users...........................................................................................................................12 City Technical Lead....................................................................................................................12 City Change Management Lead................................................................................................13 0!24 ΒȀ 02/*%#4 0,!............................................................................................................................14 Project Stages.................................................................................................................................14 Initiate andPlan................................................................................................................................15 Initial Coordination...................................................................................................................15 Project/Phase Planning.............................................................................................................16 City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | i Infrastructure Planning.............................................................................................................17 Stakeholder Meeting.................................................................................................................18 GIS Preparation.........................................................................................................................19 Control Point 1: Initiate & Plan Stage Acceptance....................................................................20 Assess & Define.................................................................................................................................20 Solution Orientation..................................................................................................................20 Current & Future State Analysis................................................................................................21 Intentionally left blank..............................................................................................................22 Intentionally left blank..............................................................................................................22 Intentionally left blank..............................................................................................................22 Control Point 2: Assess & Define Stage Acceptance.................................................................22 Prepare Solution...............................................................................................................................23 Initial System Deployment........................................................................................................23 Configuration............................................................................................................................24 Process Refinement..................................................................................................................25 Intentionally left blank..............................................................................................................26 Intentionally left blank..............................................................................................................26 Intentionally left blank..............................................................................................................26 Control Point 3: Prepare Solution Stage Acceptance................................................................26 Production Readiness.......................................................................................................................27 Solution Validation....................................................................................................................27 Go-Live Readiness.....................................................................................................................28 End User Training......................................................................................................................29 Control Point 4: Production Readiness Stage Acceptance........................................................30 Production.........................................................................................................................................30 Go-Live......................................................................................................................................30 Transition to Client Services......................................................................................................31 Post Go-Live Activities...............................................................................................................32 Control Point 5: Production Stage Acceptance.........................................................................33 Close..................................................................................................................................................33 Phase Closeout..........................................................................................................................34 Project Closeout........................................................................................................................35 Control Point 6: Close Stage Acceptance..................................................................................36 General Assumptions......................................................................................................................36 Project...............................................................................................................................................36 Organizational Change Management...............................................................................................36 Resources and Scheduling................................................................................................................37 Intentionally left blank......................................................................................................................37 Facilities.............................................................................................................................................37 Glossary.........................................................................................................................................38 0!24 ΓȀ !00%.$)#%3...............................................................................................................................41 No Conversion -Intentionally left blank..........................................................................................41 City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | ii Additional Appendices................................................................................................................42 EnerGov Definitions..........................................................................................................................42 “Template Business Transactions”............................................................................................42 “Unique Business Transactions”...............................................................................................42 “Geo-Rules”...............................................................................................................................42 “Automation Events”................................................................................................................43 “EnerGov SDK/API (Toolkits)”...................................................................................................43 Project Timeline...........................................................................................................................1 ERP Project Timeline...........................................................................................................................1 City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | iii Part 1: Executive Summary ProjectOverview Introduction Tyler Technologies (“Tyler”) is the largest and most established provider of integrated software and technology services focused solely on the public sector. Tyler’s end-to-end solutions empower public sector entities including local, state, provincial andfederal government, to operate more efficiently and connect more transparently with their constituents and with each other. By connecting data and processes across disparate systems, Tyler’s solutions transform how clients gain actionable insights that solve problems in their communities. ProjectGoals This Statement of Work (“SOW”) documents the methodology, implementation stages, activities, and roles and responsibilities, and project scope listed in the Investment Summary of the Agreement between Tyler andtheCity (collectively the “Project”). The overall goals of the project are to: Successfully implement the contracted scope on time and on budget Increase operational efficiencies and empower users to be more productive Improve accessibility and responsiveness to external and internal customer needs Overcome current challenges and meet future goals Methodology This is accomplished bytheCityand Tyler working as a partnership and Tyler utilizing its depth of implementation experience. While each Project is unique, all will follow Tyler’s six-stage methodology. Each of the six stages is comprised of multiple work packages, and each work package includes a narrative description, objectives, tasks, inputs, outputs/deliverables, assumptions, and a responsibility matrix. Tailored specifically for Tyler’s public sector clients, the project methodology contains Stage Acceptance Control Points throughout each Phase to ensure adherence to scope, budget, timeline controls, effective communications, and quality standards. Clearly defined, the project methodology repeats consistently across Phases, and is scaled to meet the City’s complexity and organizational needs. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 1 The methodology adapts to both single-phase and multiple-phase projects. To achieve Project success, it is imperative that both the Cityand Tyler commit to including the necessary leadership and governance. During each stage of the Project, it is expected that the Cityand Tyler Project teams work collaboratively to complete tasks. An underlying principle of Tyler’s Implementation process is to employ an iterative model where the City’s business processes are assessed, configured, validated, and refined cyclically in line with the project budget. This approach is used in multiple stages and work packages as illustrated in the graphic below. The delivery approach is systematic, which reduces variability and mitigates risks to ensure Project success. As illustrated, some stages, along with work packages and tasks, are intended tobe overlapping by nature to complete the Project efficiently and effectively. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 2 Part 2: Project Foundation ProjectGovernance Project governanceis the management framework within which Project decisions are made. The role of Project governance is to provide a decision-making approach that is logical, robust, and repeatable. This allows organizations to have a structured approach for conducting its daily business in addition to project related activities. This section outlines the resources required to meetthe business needs, objectives, and priorities for the Project, communicate the goals to other Project participants, and provide support and guidance to accomplish these goals. Project governance defines the structure for escalation of issues and risks, Change Control review and authority, and Organizational Change Management activities. Throughout the Statement of WorkTyler has provided RACI Matrices for activities to be completed throughout the implementation which will further outline responsibilities of different roles in each stage. Further refinement of the governance structure, related processes, and specific roles and responsibilities occurs during the Initiate & Plan Stage. The chart below illustrates an overall team perspective where Tyler and the Citycollaborate to resolve Project challenges according to defined escalation paths. If project managers do not possess authority to determine a solution, resolve an issue, or mitigate a risk, Tyler implementation management and the CitySteering Committee become the escalation points to triage responses prior to escalation to the Cityand Tyler executive sponsors. Aspart of the escalation process, each Project governance tier presents recommendations and supporting information to facilitate knowledge transfer and issue resolution. The City and Tyler executive sponsors serve as the final escalation point. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 3 ProjectScopeControl ManagingScopeandProjectChange Project Management governance principles contend that there are three connected constraints on a Project: budget, timeline,and scope. These constraints, known as the “triple constraints”or project management triangle, define budget in terms of financial cost, labor costs, and other resource costs. Scope is defined as the work performed to deliver a product, service or result with the specified features and functions, while time is simply defined as the schedule. The Triple Constraint theory states that if you change one side of the triangle, the other two sides must be correspondingly adjusted. For example, if the scope of the Project is increased, cost and time to complete will also need to increase. The Project and executive teams will need to remain cognizant of these constraints when making impactful decisions to the Project. A simple illustration of this triangle is included here, showing the connection of each item and their relational impact to the overall Scope. A pillar of any successful project is the ability to properly manage scope while allowing the appropriate level of flexibility to incorporate approved changes. Scope and changes within the project will be managed using the change control process outlined in the following section. ChangeControl It may become necessary to change the scope of this Project due to unforeseeable circumstances (e.g., new constraints or opportunities are discovered). This Project is being undertaken with the understanding that Project scope, schedule, and/or cost may need to change to produce optimal results for stakeholders. Changes to contractual requirements will follow the change control process specified in the final contract, and as described below. ChangeRequestManagement Should the need for a change to Project scope, schedule, and/or cost be identified during the Project, the change will be brought to the attention of the Steering Committee and an assessment of the change will occur. While such changes may result in additional costs and delays relative to the schedule, some changes may result in less cost to the City; for example, the Citymay decide it no longer needs a deliverable originally defined in the Project. The Change Request will include thefollowing information: City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 4 The nature of the change. A goodfaith estimate of the additional cost or associated savings to the City, if any. The timetable for implementing the change. The effect on and/or risk to the schedule, resource needs or resource responsibilities. The Citywill use its good faith efforts to either approve or disapprove any Change Request within ten (10) Business Days (or other period as mutually agreeable between Tyler and the City). Any changes to the Project scope, budget, or timeline must be documented and approved in writing using a Change Request form. These changes constitute a formal amendment to the Statement of Work and will supersede any conflicting term in the Statement of Work. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 5 AcceptanceProcess The implementation of a Project involves many decisions to be made throughout its lifecycle. Decisions will vary from higher level strategy decisions to smaller, detailed Project level decisions. It is critical to the success of the Project that each Cityoffice or department designates specific individuals for making decisions on behalf of their offices or departments. Both Tyler and the Citywill identify representative project managers. These individuals will represent the interests of all stakeholders and serve as the primary contacts between the two organizations. The coordination of gaining City feedback and approval on Project deliverables will be critical to the success of the Project. The Cityproject manager will strive to gain deliverable and decision approvals from allauthorized Cityrepresentatives. Given that the designated decision-maker for each department may not always be available, there must be a designated proxy for each decision point in the Project. Assignment of each proxy will be the responsibility of the leadership from each Citydepartment. The proxies will be named individuals that have the authorization to make decisions on behalf of their department. The following process will be used for accepting Deliverables and Control Points: The Cityshall have five (5) business days from the date of delivery, or as otherwise mutually agreed upon by the parties in writing, to accept each Deliverable or Control Point. IftheCitydoes not provide acceptance or acknowledgement within five (5) business days, or the otherwise agreed upon timeframe, not to be unreasonably withheld, Tyler deems the Deliverable or Control Point as accepted. If the Citydoes not agree the Deliverable or Control Point meets requirements,theCityshall notify Tyler project manager(s), in writing, with reasoning within five (5) business days, or the otherwise agreed-upon timeframe, not to be unreasonably withheld, of receipt of the Deliverable. Tyler shall address any deficiencies and redeliver the Deliverable or Control Point. The Cityshall then have two (2) business days from receipt of the redelivered Deliverable or Control Point to accept or again submit written notification of reasons for rejecting the milestone. If the Citydoes not provide acceptance within two (2) business days, or the otherwise agreed upon timeframe, not to be unreasonably withheld, Tyler deems the Deliverable or Control Point as accepted. RolesandResponsibilities The following defines the roles and responsibilities of each Project resource for the Cityand Tyler. Roles and responsibilities may not follow the organizational chart or position descriptions at the City, but are roles defined within the Project. It is common for individual resources on both the Tyler and City project teams to fill multiple roles. Similarly, it is common for some roles to be filled by multiple people. TylerRoles&Responsibilities Tyler assigns a project manager prior to the start of each Phase of the Project (some Projects may only be one Phase in duration). Additional Tyler resources are assigned as the schedule develops and as needs arise. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 6 TylerExecutiveManager Tyler executive management has indirect involvement with the Project andis part of the Tyler escalation process. This team member offers additional support to the Project team and collaborates with other Tyler department managers as needed to escalate and facilitate implementation Project tasks and decisions. Provides clear direction for Tyler staff on executing on the Project Deliverables to align with satisfying the City’s overall organizational strategy. Authorizes required Project resources. Resolves all decisions and/or issues not resolved at the implementation management level as part of the escalation process. Acts as the counterpart to the City’s executive sponsor. TylerImplementationManager Tyler implementation management has indirect involvement with the Project and is part of the Tyler escalation process. The Tyler project managers consult implementation management on issues and outstanding decisions critical to the Project. Implementation management works toward a solution with the Tyler Project Manager or with Citymanagement as appropriate. Tyler executive management is the escalation point for any issues not resolved at this level. Assigns Tyler Project personnel. Provides support for the Project team. Provides management support for the Project to ensure it is staffed appropriately and staff have necessary resources. Monitors Project progress including progress towards agreed upon goals and objectives. TylerProjectManager The Tyler project manager(s) provides oversight of the Project, coordination of Tyler resources between departments, management of the Project budget and schedule, effective risk, and issue management, and is the primary point of contact for all Project related items.As requested by the City, the Tyler Project Manager provides regular updates to the City Steering Committee and other Tyler governance members. Tyler Project Manager’s role includes responsibilities in the following areas: ContractManagement Validates contract compliance throughout the Project. Ensures Deliverables meet contract requirements. Acts as primary point of contact for all contract and invoicing questions. Prepares and presents contract milestone sign-offs for acceptance by the Cityproject manager(s). Coordinates Change Requests, if needed, to ensure proper Scope and budgetary compliance. Planning Delivers project planning documents. Defines Project tasks and resource requirements. Develops initial Project schedule and Project Management Plan. Collaborates with the Cityproject manager(s) to plan and schedule Project timelines to achieve on- time implementation. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 7 ImplementationManagement Tightly manages Scope and budget of Project to ensure Scope changes and budget planned versus actual are transparent and handled effectively and efficiently. Establishes and manages a schedule and Tyler resources that properly support the Project Schedule and are also in balance with Scope/budget. Establishes risk/issue tracking/reporting process between the Cityand Tyler and takes all necessary steps to proactively mitigate these items or communicate with transparency to the Cityany items that may impact the outcomes of the Project. Collaborates with the City’s project manager(s) to establish key business drivers and success indicators that will help to govern Project activities and key decisions to ensure a quality outcome of the project. Collaborates with the City’s project manager(s) to set a routine communication plan that will aide all Project team members, of both the Cityand Tyler, in understanding the goals, objectives, status, and health of the Project. ResourceManagement Acts as liaison between Project team and Tyler manager(s). Identifies and coordinates all Tyler resources across all applications, Phases, and activities including development, forms, installation, reports, implementation, and billing. Provides direction and support to Project team. Manages the appropriate assignment and timely completion of tasks as defined in the Project Schedule, task list, and Go-LiveChecklist. Assesses team performance and adjusts as necessary. Consulted on in Scope 3rd party providers to align activities with ongoing Project tasks. TylerImplementationConsultant Completes tasks as assigned by theTyler project manager(s). Documents activities for services performed by Tyler. Guides the Citythrough software validation process following configuration. Assists during Go-Liveprocess and provides support until the Citytransitions to Client Services. Facilitates training sessions and discussions with the Cityand Tyler staff to ensure adequate discussion of the appropriate agenda topics during the allotted time. TylerSales Supports Sales to Implementation knowledge transfer during Initiate & Plan. Provides historical information, as needed, throughout implementation. Participates in pricing activities if additional licensing and/or services are needed. TylerTechnicalServices Maintains Tyler infrastructure requirements and design document(s). Involved in system infrastructure planning/review(s). Provides first installation of licensed software with initial database on servers. Supports and assists the project team with technical/environmental issues/needs. Deploys Tyler products. Conducts GIS Planning. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 8 Reviews GIS data and provides feedback to the City. Loads City provided GIS data into the system. TylerSaaSTechnicians Sets up Tyler-hosted servers. Provides maintenance of hosted server hardware, operating system, and software upgrades. Provides IT-related services for server environment. Provides remote technical assistance and tracks issues. Provides system management and disaster recovery services within hosting services. Performs Tyler software upgrades through coordination with the City. CityRoles&Responsibilities Cityresources will be assigned prior to the start of each Phase of the Project. One person may be assigned to multiple Project roles. CityExecutiveSponsor The Cityexecutive sponsor provides support to the Project by providing strategic direction and communicating key issues about the Project and its overall importance to the organization. When called upon, the executive sponsor also acts as the final authority on all escalated Project issues. The executive sponsor engages in the Project, as needed, to provide necessary support, oversight, guidance, and escalation, but does not participate in day-to-day Project activities. The executive sponsor empowers the Citysteering committee, project manager(s), and functional leads to make critical business decisions for the City. Champions the project at the executive level to secure buy-in. Authorizes required project resources. Actively participates in organizational change communications. CitySteeringCommittee The Citysteering committee understands and supports the cultural change necessary for the Project and fosters an appreciation for the Project’s value throughout the organization. The steering committee oversees the Cityproject manager and Project through participation in regular internal meetings. The Citysteering committee remains updated on all Project progress, Project decisions, and achievement of Project milestones. The Citysteering committee also serves as primary level of issue resolution for the Project. Works to resolve all decisions and/or issues not resolved at the project manager level as part of the escalation process. Attends all scheduled steering committee meetings. Provides support for the project team. Assists with communicating key project messages throughout the organization. Prioritizes the project within the organization. Ensures the project staffed appropriately and that staff have necessary resources. Monitors project progress including progress towards agreed upon goals and objectives. Has the authority to approve or deny changes impacting the following areas: o Cost o Scope o Schedule City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 9 o Project Goals o CityPolicies o Needs of other client projects CityProjectManager The Cityshall assign project manager(s) prior to the start of this project with overall responsibility and authority to make decisions related to Project Scope, scheduling, and task assignment. The CityProject Manager should communicate decisions and commitmentsto the Tyler project manager(s) in a timely and efficient manner. When the Cityproject manager(s) do not have the knowledge or authority to make decisions, he or she engages the necessary resources to participate in discussions and make decisions in a timely fashion to avoid Project delays. The City project manager(s) are responsible for reporting to the City steering committee and determining appropriate escalation points. ContractManagement Validates contract compliance throughout the project. Ensures that invoicing and Deliverables meet contract requirements. Acts as primary point of contact for all contract and invoicing questions. Collaborates on and approves Change Requests, if needed, to ensure proper scope and budgetary compliance. Planning Reviews and accepts project planning documents. Defines project tasks and resource requirements for the Cityproject team. Collaborates in the development and approval of the project schedule. Collaborates with Tyler project manager(s) to plan and schedule project timelines to achieve on-time implementation. ImplementationManagement Tightly manages project budget and scope. Collaborates with Tyler project manager(s) to establish a process and approval matrix to ensure that scope changes and budget (planned versus actual) are transparent and handled effectively and efficiently. Collaborates with Tyler project manager to establish and manage a schedule and resource plan that properly supports the project schedule as a whole and is also in balance with scope and budget. Collaborates with Tyler project manager(s) to establish risk and issue tracking and reporting process between the Cityand Tyler and takes all necessary steps to proactively mitigate these items or communicate with transparency to Tyler any items thatmay impact the outcomes of the project. Collaborates with Tyler project manager(s) to establish key business drivers and success indicators that will help to govern project activities and key decisions to ensure a quality outcome of the project. Routinelycommunicates with both the Citystaff and Tyler, aiding in the understanding of goals, objectives, current status, and health of the project by all team members. Manages the requirements gathering process and ensure timely and quality business requirements are being provided to Tyler. ResourceManagement Acts as liaison between project team and stakeholders. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 10 Identifies and coordinates all Cityresources across all modules, phases, and activities including data conversions, forms design, hardware and software installation, reports building, and satisfying invoices. Provides direction and support to project team. Builds partnerships among the various stakeholders, negotiating authority to move the project forward. Manages the appropriate assignment and timelycompletion of tasks as defined. Assesses team performance and takes corrective action, if needed. Provides guidance to Citytechnical teams to ensure appropriate response and collaboration with Tyler Technical Support Teams to ensure timely response and appropriate resolution. Owns the relationship with in-Scope 3rd party providers and aligns activities with ongoing project tasks. Ensures that users have appropriate access to Tyler project toolsets as required. Conducts training on proper use of toolsets. Validates completion of required assignments using toolsets. CityFunctionalLeads Makes business process change decisions under time sensitive conditions. Communicates existing business processes and procedures to Tyler consultants. Assists in identifying business process changes that may require escalation. Contributes business process expertise for Current & Future State Analysis. Identifies and includes additional subject matter experts to participate in Current & Future State Analysis. Validates that necessary skills have been retained by end users. Provides End Users with dedicated time to complete required homework tasks. Actsas an ambassador/champion of change for the new process and provide business process change support. Identifies and communicates any additional training needs or scheduling conflicts to the Cityproject manager. Actively participates in all aspects of theimplementation, including, but not limited to, the following key activities: o Task completion o Stakeholder Meeting o Project Management Plan development o Schedule development o Maintenance and monitoring of risk register o Escalation of issues o Communication with Tyler project team o Coordination of Cityresources o Attendance at scheduled sessions o Change management activities o Modification specification, demonstrations, testing and approval assistance o Data analysis assistance o Decentralized end user training o Process testing o SolutionValidation City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 11 CityPowerUsers Participate in project activities as required by the project team and project manager(s). Provide subject matter expertise on the Citybusiness processes and requirements. Act as subject matter experts and attend Current & Future State Analysis sessions as needed. Attend all scheduled training sessions. Participate in all required post-training processes as needed throughout project. Test all application configuration to ensure it satisfies business process requirements. Become application experts. Participate in Solution Validation. Adopt and support changed procedures. Complete all deliverables by the due dates defined in the project schedule. Demonstrate competency with Tyler products processing prior to Go-live. Provide knowledge transfer to the Citystaff during and after implementation. CityEndUsers Attend all scheduled training sessions. Become proficient in application functions related to job duties. Adopt and utilize changed procedures. Complete all deliverables by the due dates defined in the project schedule. Utilize software to perform job functions at and beyond Go-live. CityTechnicalLead Coordinates updates and releases with Tyler as needed. Coordinates the copying of source databases to training/testing databases as needed for training days. Coordinates and adds new users, printers and other peripherals as needed. Validates that all users understand log-on process and have necessary permission for all training sessions. Coordinates interface development for Citythird party interfaces. Develops or assists in creating reports as needed. Ensures on-site system meets specifications provided by Tyler. Assists with software installation as needed. CityGIS Participates in GISplanning activities. Responsible for management and maintenance of CityGIS infrastructure and data. Ensures GIS data/service endpoints are in alignment with Tyler software requirements. Provides Tyler implementation team with GIS data/service access information. CityUpgradeCoordination Becomes familiar with the software upgrade process and required steps. Becomes familiar with Tyler’s releases and updates. Utilizes Tyler resourcesto stay abreast of the latest Tyler releases and updates, as well as the latest helpful tools to manage the City’s software upgrade process. Assists with the software upgrade process during implementation. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 12 Manages software upgrade activities post-implementation. Manages software upgrade plan activities. Coordinates software upgrade plan activities with Cityand Tyler resources. Communicates changes affecting users and department stakeholders. Obtains department stakeholder acceptance to upgrade production environment. CityChangeManagementLead Validates that users receive timely and thorough communication regarding process changes. Provides coaching to supervisors to prepare them to support users through the project changes. Identifies the impact areas resulting from project activities and develops a plan to addressthem proactively. Identifies areas of resistance and develops a plan to reinforce the change. Monitors post-production performance and new process adherence. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 13 Part 3: Project Plan ProjectStages WorkBreakdownStructure The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is a hierarchical representation of a Project or Phase broken down into smaller, more manageable components. The top-level components are called “Stages” and the second level components are called “Work Packages”. The work packages, shown below each stage, contain the high-level work to be done. The detailed Project Schedule, developed during Project/Phase Planning and finalized during subsequent stages, lists the tasks to be completed within each work package. Each stage ends with a “Control Point”, confirming the work performed during that stage of the Project has been accepted by the City. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 14 InitiateandPlan The Initiate and Plan stageinvolvesProject initiation, infrastructure,and planning.This stagecreates a foundation for the Project by identifying and establishing sequence andtimingfor each Phase as well as verifying scope for the Project.This stage will be conducted at the onset of the Project, with a few unique items being repeated for the additional Phases as needed. InitialCoordination Prior to Project commencement, Tyler management assigns project manager(s). Additional Project resources will be assigned later in the Project as a Project schedule is developed. Tyler provides the Citywith initial Project documents used to gather names of key personnel, their functional role as it pertains to the Project, as well as any blackout dates to consider for future planning. the Citygathers the information requested by the provided deadline ensuring preliminary planning and scheduling can be conducted moving the Project forward in a timely fashion. Internally, the Tyler Project Manager(s) coordinate with sales to ensure transfer of vital information from the sales process prior to scheduling a Project Planning Meeting with the City’s team. During this step, Tyler will work with the Cityto establish the date(s) for the Project and Phase Planning session. Objectives: Formally launch the project. Establish project governance. Define and communicate governance for Tyler. Identify City project team. STAGE1InitialCoordination TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Tyler project team is assignedARCIIIIII Cityproject team is assignedAIRIII Provide initial project ARCCII documents to the City Gather preliminary information IARCCCC requested Sales to implementation ARIIIII knowledge transfer Create Project Portal to store project artifacts and facilitate ARI communication City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 15 InputsContract documents Statement of Work Outputs/DeliverablesCompleted initial project documents Project portal Workpackageassumptions: Project activities begin after the agreement has been fully executed. Project/PhasePlanning Project and Phase planning provides an opportunity to review the contract, software, data conversions and services purchased, identify applications to implement in each Phase (if applicable), and discuss implementation timeframes. During this work packageTyler will work with the Cityto coordinate and plan a formal Project planning meeting(s). This meeting signifies the start of the Project and should be attended by all CityProject team members and the Tyler Project Manager. The meeting provides an opportunity for Tyler to introduce its implementation methodology, terminology, and Project management best practices to the City’s Project Team. This will also present an opportunity for project managers and Project sponsors to begin to discuss Project communication, metrics, status reporting and tools to be used to measure Project progress and manage change. Tyler will work with the CityProject Team to prepare and deliver the Project Management Plan as an output of the planning meeting. This plan will continue to evolve and grow as the Project progresses and will describe how the project will be executed, monitored, and controlled. During project planning, Tyler will introduce the tools that will be used throughout the implementation. Tyler will familiarize the City with these tools during project planning and make them available for review and maintenance as applicable throughout the project. Some examples are Solution validation plan, issue log, and go-live checklist. STAGE1Project/PhasePlanning TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Schedule and ARICCI conduct planning session(s) Develop Project ARICCI Management Plan City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 16 Develop initial ARIIIIIICCIICI project schedule InputsContract documents Statement of Work Guide to Starting Your Project Outputs / DeliverablesAcceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Project Management PlanDelivery of document Project Operational PlanDelivery of document Initial Project ScheduleCityprovides acceptance of schedule based on resource availability, project budget, and goals. Workpackageassumptions: Cityhas reviewed and completed the Guide to Starting Your Project document. InfrastructurePlanning Procuring required hardware and setting it up properly is a critical part of a successful implementation. This task isespeciallyimportant for Tyler-hosted/SaaS deployment models. Tyler will be responsible for building the environments for a hosted/SaaS deployment, unless otherwise identified in the Agreement. Tyler will install Licensed Software on application server(s) or train the Cityto install License Software. TheCityis responsible for the installation and setup of all peripheral devices. Objectives: Ensure the City’s infrastructure meets Tyler’s application requirements. Ensure the City’s infrastructure is scheduled to be in place and available for use on time. STAGE1InfrastructurePlanning TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Provide Infrastructure Requirements and Design ARCCII Document Initial Infrastructure ARCCCC Meeting *Schedule SaaS ARCI Environment Availability City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 17 *Schedule Hardware to be Available for IIARC Installation Schedule Installation of ARCII All Licensed Software Infrastructure AuditARCIC Inputs1. Initial Infrastructure Requirements and Design Document Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables 1. Completed Infrastructure Requirements Delivery of Document and Design Document 2. Infrastructure AuditSystem Passes Audit Criteria StakeholderMeeting Communication of the Project planning outcomes to the CityProject team, executives and other key stakeholders is vital to Project success. The Stakeholder meeting is a strategic activity to inform, engage, gain commitment,and instill confidence in the Cityteam. During the meeting,the goals and objectives of the Project will be reviewed along with detail on Project scope, implementation methodology, roles and responsibilities, Project timeline and schedule, and keys to Project success. Objectives: Formally present and communicate the project activities and timeline. Communicate project expectations. STAGE1StakeholderMeeting TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Create Stakeholder IARIIIICI Meeting Presentation Review Stakeholder ICARC Meeting Presentation Perform Stakeholder IARIIIICIIIIII Meeting Presentation InputsAgreement SOW Project Management Plan City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 18 Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Stakeholder Meeting Presentation Workpackageassumptions: None GISPreparation GIS data is a core part of many Tyler applications. Other Cityoffices/products may also use this data and have different GIS requirements. A key focus of this preparation will be the process for developing the GIS data for use with Tyler applications. This can be an iterative process, so it is important to begin preparation early. Objectives: Identify all CityGIS data sources and formats. Tyler to understand the City’s GIS needs and practices. Ensure the City’s GIS data meets Tyler product requirements. STAGE1GISPreparation TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Initial GIS Planning ARCCC Meeting Determine all GIS Data IIARC Sources Provide Source GIS DataIIARC Review GIS Data and ARCIC Provide Feedback InputsGIS Requirements Document Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Production Ready Map DataMeets Tyler GIS Requirements. Workpackageassumptions: GIS data provided to Tyler is accurate and complete. GIS data provided to Tyler is current. Cityis responsible for maintaining the GIS data. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 19 ControlPoint1:Initiate&PlanStageAcceptance Acceptance criteria for this stage includes completion of all criteria listed below. Note: Advancement to the Assess & Define stage is not dependent upon Tyler’s receipt of this stage acceptance. Initiate&PlanStageDeliverables: Project Management Plan Initial Project Schedule Initiate&Planstageacceptancecriteria: All stage deliverables accepted based on acceptance criteria previously defined Project governance defined Project portal made available to the City Stakeholder meeting complete GIS Data Production Ready Completed Infrastructure Requirements and Design Document System Passes Infrastructure Audit (as applicable) Assess&Define The Assess & Define stage will provide an opportunity to gather information related to current Citybusiness processes. This information will be used to identify and define business processes utilized with Tyler software. TheCitycollaborates with Tyler providing complete and accurate information to Tyler staff and assisting in analysis, understanding current workflows and business processes. SolutionOrientation The Solution Orientation provides the Project stakeholders a high-level understanding of the solution functionality prior to beginning the current and future state analysis. The primary goal is to establish a foundation for upcoming conversations regarding the design and configuration of the solution. Tyler utilizes a variety of tools for the Solution Orientation, focusing on Cityteam knowledge transfer such as: eLearning, documentation, or walkthroughs. The Cityteam will gain a better understanding of the major processes and focus on data flow, the connection between configuration options and outcome, integration, and terminology that may be unique to Tyler’s solution. Objectives: Provide a basic understanding of system functionality. Prepare the Cityfor current and future state analysis. STAGE2SolutionOrientation TylerCity City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 20 RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Provide pre-requisitesARIIIII Complete pre-requisitesARCC Conduct orientationARIIIII InputsSolution orientation materials Training Plan Current&FutureStateAnalysis The Current & Future State Analysis provides the Project stakeholders and Tyler an understanding of process changes that will be achieved with the new system. The Cityand Tyler will evaluate current state processes, options within the new software, pros and cons of each based on current or desired state and make decisions about the future state configuration and processing. This may occur before or within the same timeframe as the configuration work package. The options within the new software will be limited to the scope of this implementation and will make use of standard Tyler functionality. The Citywill adopt the existing Tyler solution wherever possible to avoid project schedule and quality risk from over customization of Tyler products. It is the City’s responsibility to verify that in-scope requirements are being met throughout the implementation if functional requirements are defined as part of the contract. The following guidelines will be followed when evaluating if a modification to theproduct is required: A reasonable business process change is available. Functionality exists which satisfies the requirement. Configuration of the application satisfies the requirement. An in-scope modification satisfies the requirement. Requirements that are not met will follow the agreed upon change control process and can have impacts on the project schedule, scope, budget, and resource availability. STAGE2Current&FutureStateAnalysis TylerCity City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 21 RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Current State process ARIIICCCCC review Discuss future-state ARCCCCCCCC options Make future-state CCCCCARICC decisions (non-COTS) Document anticipated configuration options ARCCCIIIII required to support future state InputsCitycurrentstate documentation Solution Orientation completion Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Documentation that describes future-state Delivery of document decisions and configuration options to support future-state decisions. Workpackageassumptions: Cityattendees possess sufficient knowledge and authority to make future state decisions. The Cityis responsible for any documentation of current state business processes. The Citycan effectively communicate current state processes. Intentionallyleftblank. Intentionallyleftblank. Intentionallyleftblank. ControlPoint2:Assess&DefineStageAcceptance Acceptance criteria for this Stage includes completion of all criteria listed below. Note: Advancement to the Prepare Solution Stage is dependent upon Tyler’s receipt of the Stage Acceptance. Assess&DefineStageDeliverables: Documentation of future state decisions and configuration options to support future state decisions. Modification specification document. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 22 Assess & Define Stage Acceptance Criteria: All stage deliverables accepted based on criteria previously defined. Solution Orientation is delivered. PrepareSolution During the Prepare Solution stage, information gathered during the Initiate & Plan and Assess & Define stages will be used to install and configure the Tyler software solution. Software configuration will be validated by the City against future state decisions defined in previous stages and processes refined as needed to ensure business requirements are met. InitialSystemDeployment The timely availability of the Tyler Solution is important to a successful Project implementation.The success and timeliness of subsequent work packages are contingent upon the initial system deployment of Tyler Licensed Software on an approved network and infrastructure. Delays in executing this work package can affect the project schedule. Objectives: All licensed software is installed and operational. The Citycan access the software. STAGE3InitialSystemDeployment(Hosted/SaaS)* TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Prepare hosted ARIC environment Install Licensed Software with Initial Database on ARIC Server(s) for Included Environments Install Licensed Software on City ICAR Devices (if applicable) Tyler System Administration ARIC Training (if applicable) City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 23 Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Licensed Software is Installed on the Server(s)Software is accessible Licensed Software is Installed on City DevicesSoftware is accessible (if applicable) Installation Checklist/System DocumentSystem Passes Infrastructure Design Document (C&J –If Applicable) Workpackageassumptions: The most current available version of the Tyler Licensed Software will be installed. The Citywill provide network access for Tyler modules, printers, and Internet access to all applicable Cityand Tyler Project staff. Configuration The purpose of Configuration is to prepare the software product for validation. Tyler staff collaborates with the Cityto complete software configuration based on the outputs of the future state analysis performed during the Assess and Define Stage. The Citycollaborates with Tyler staff iteratively to validate software configuration. Objectives: Software is ready for validation. Educate the CityPower Userhow to configure and maintain software. Prepare standard interfaces for process validation (if applicable). STAGE3Configuration TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Conduct configuration ARICC training Complete Tyler configuration tasks ARIII (whereapplicable) Complete City configuration tasks ICARC (where applicable) City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 24 Standard interfaces configuration and ARCICCC training (if applicable) Updates to Solution CCARCC Validation testing plan InputsDocumentation that describes future state decisions and configuration options to support future state decisions. Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Configured SystemN/A Workpackageassumptions: Tyler provides guidance for configuration options available within the Tyler software. The Cityis responsible for making decisions when multiple options are available. ProcessRefinement Tyler will educate the Cityusers on how to execute processes in the system to prepare them for the validation of the software. The Citycollaborates with Tyler staff iteratively to validate software configuration options to support future state. Objectives: Ensure that the Cityunderstands future state processes and howto execute the processes in the software. Refine each process to meet the business requirements. Validate standard interfaces, where applicable. Validate forms and reports, where applicable. STAGE3ProcessRefinement TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Conduct process ARICIC training Confirm process ICARCIC decisions Test configurationICARC City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 25 Refine configuration (City ICARC Responsible) Refine configuration(Tyler ARIII Responsible) Validate interface ICCARCC process and results Update City- specificprocess ICARC documentation (if applicable) Updates to Solution Validation CCARCC testing plan InputsInitial Configuration Documentation that describes future state decisions and configuration options to support future state decisions. Solution validation test plan Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Updated solution validation test plan Completed City-specificprocess documentation (completed by City) Workpackageassumptions: None Intentionallyleftblank. Intentionallyleftblank. Intentionallyleftblank. ControlPoint3:PrepareSolutionStageAcceptance Acceptance criteria for this Stage includes all criteria listed below in each Work Package. Note: Advancement to the Production Readiness Stage is dependent upon Tyler’s receipt of the Stage Acceptance. PrepareSolutionStageDeliverables: Licensed software is installed. Installation checklist/system document. PrepareSolutionStageAcceptanceCriteria: All stage deliverables accepted based on criteria previously defined. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 26 Software is configured. Solution validation test plan has been reviewed and updated if needed. ProductionReadiness Activities in the Production Readiness stage will prepare the City team for go-live through solution validation, the development of a detailed go-live plan and end user training. A readiness assessment will be conducted with the City to review the status of the project and the organizations readiness for go-live. SolutionValidation Solution Validation is the end-to-end software testing activity to ensure that the Cityverifies all aspects of the Project (hardware, configuration, business processes, etc.) are functioning properly, and validates that all features and functions per the contract have been deployed for system use. Objectives: Validate that the solution performs as indicated in the solution validation plan. Ensure the Cityorganization is ready to move forward with go-live and training (if applicable). STAGE4SolutionValidation TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Update Solution ARCCCC Validation plan Update test scripts (as CCCARC applicable) Perform testingCCCARC Document issues from CCCARC testing Perform required follow- ARCCCC up on issues InputsSolution Validation plan Completed work product from prior stages (configuration, business process, etc.) Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Solution Validation ReportCityupdates report with testing results Workpackageassumptions: City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 27 Designated testing environment has been established. Testing includes current phase activities or deliverables only. Go-LiveReadiness Tyler and the Citywill ensure that all requirements defined in Project planning have been completed and the Go-Live event can occur, as planned. A go-live readiness assessment will be completed identifying risks or actions items to be addressed to ensure the City has considered its ability to successfully Go-Live. Issues and concerns will be discussed, and mitigation options documented. Tyler and the Citywill jointly agree to move forward with transition to production. Expectations for final preparation and critical dates for the weeks leading into and during the Go-Liveweek will be planned in detail and communicated to Project teams. Objectives: Action plan for go-live established. Assess go-live readiness. Stakeholders informed of go-live activities. STAGE4Go-LiveReadiness TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Perform Readiness IARCCICIIIIII Assessment Conduct Go-Liveplanning ARCCCCCCC session Order peripheral IARC hardware (if applicable) Confirm procedures for Go-Liveissue reporting & ARIIIICCIIIII resolution Develop Go-LivechecklistARCCCCICC Final system infrastructure reviewARCC (where applicable) InputsFuture state decisions Go-live checklist Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Updated go-live checklistUpdated Action plan and Checklist for go-live delivered to the City City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 28 Workpackageassumptions: None EndUserTraining End User Training is a critical part of any successful software implementation. Using a training plan previously reviewed and approved, the Project team will organize and initiate the training activities. Train the Trainer: Tyler provides one occurrence of each scheduled training or implementation topic. City users who attended the Tyler sessions may train additional users. Additional Tyler led sessions may be contracted at the applicable rates for training. Tyler will provide standard application documentation for the general use of the software. It is not Tyler’s responsibility to develop City specific business process documentation. City-led training labs using City specific business process documentation if created by the City can be added to the regular training curriculum, enhancing the training experiences of the end users. Objectives: End users are trained on how to use the software prior to go-live. The Cityis prepared for on-going training and support of the application. STAGE4EndUserTraining TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Update training planARCCIC End User training (Tyler- ARCCCICCC led) Train-the-trainerARCCCIC End User training (City- CCARICCC led) InputsTraining Plan List of End Users and their Roles / Job Duties Configured Tyler System Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables End User TrainingCitysignoff that training was delivered Workpackageassumptions: City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 29 The Cityproject team will work with Tyler to jointly develop a training curriculum that identifies the size, makeup, and subject-area of each of the training classes. Tyler will work with the Cityas much as possible to provide end-user training in a manner that minimizes the impact to the daily operations of Citydepartments. The Citywill be responsible for training new users after go-live (exception—previously planned or regular training offerings by Tyler). ControlPoint4:ProductionReadinessStageAcceptance Acceptance criteria for this stage includes all criteria listed below. Advancement to the Production stage is dependent upon Tyler’s receipt of the stage acceptance. ProductionReadinessstagedeliverables: Solution Validation Report. Update go-live action plan and checklist. End user training. ProductionReadinessstageacceptancecriteria: All stage deliverables accepted based on criteria previously defined. Go-Live planning session conducted. Production Following end user training the production system will be fully enabled and made ready for daily operational use as of the scheduled date. Tyler and the Citywill follow the comprehensive action plan laid out during Go- LiveReadiness to support go-live activities and minimize risk to the Project duringgo-live. Following go-live, Tyler will work with the Cityto verify that implementation work is concluded, post go-live activities are scheduled, and the transition to Client Services is complete for long-term operations and maintenance of the Tyler software. Go-Live Following the action plan for Go-Live, defined in the Production Readiness stage, the Cityand Tyler will complete work assigned to prepare for Go-Live. Tyler staff collaborates with the Cityduring Go-Liveactivities. The Citytransitions to Tyler software for day-to day business processing. Some training topics are better addressed following Go-Live when additional data is available in the system or based on timing of applicable business processes and will be scheduled following Go-Live per the Project Schedule. Objectives: Execute day to day processing in Tyler software. City data available in Production environment. STAGE5Go-Live City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 30 TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Provide final source data CCAR extract, if applicable Final source data pushed into production ACRICCC environment, if applicable Proof final converted CCCARC data, if applicable Complete Go-Live activities as defined in CCCARCIC the Go-Live action plan Provide Go-Live ARCCICCICIC assistance InputsComprehensive Action Plan for Go-Live Final source data (if applicable) Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Data is available in production environmentCity confirms data is available in production environment Workpackageassumptions: The Citywill complete activities documented in the action plan for Go-Live as scheduled. External stakeholders will be available to assist in supporting the interfaces associated with the Go- Live live process. The City business processes required for Go-Live are fully documented and tested. The CityProject team and subject matter experts are the primary point of contact for the end users when reporting issues during Go-Live. The CityProject Team and Power User’s provide business process context to the end users during Go- Live. The Tyler Go-Live support team is available to consult with the Cityteams as necessary. The Tyler Go-Live support team provides standard functionality responses, which may not be tailored to the local business processes. TransitiontoClientServices This work package signals the conclusion of implementation activities for the Phase or Project with the exception of agreed-upon post Go-Liveactivities. The Tyler project manager(s) schedules a formal transition City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 31 of the Cityonto the Tyler Client Services team, who provides the Citywith assistance following Go-Live, officially transitioning the Cityto operations and maintenance. Objectives: Ensure no critical issues remain for the project teams to resolve. Confirm proper knowledge transfer to the Cityteams for key processes and subject areas. STAGE5TransitiontoClientServices TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Transfer City to Client Services and review IIAIIRIICCC issue reporting and resolution processes Review long term maintenance and ARCCC continuous improvement InputsOpen item/issues List Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Client Services Support Document Workpackageassumptions: No material project issues remain without assignment and plan. PostGo-LiveActivities Some implementation activities are provided post-production due to the timing of business processes, the requirement of actual production data to complete the activities, or the requirement of the system being used in a live production state. Objectives: Schedule activities that are planned for after Go-Live. Ensure issues have been resolved or are planned for resolution before phase or project close. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 32 STAGE5PostGo-LiveActivities TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Schedule contracted activities that are ARCCCCICCICC planned for delivery after go-live Determine resolution plan in preparation for ARCCCICCIC phase or project close out InputsList of post Go-Live activities Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for DeliverablesDeliverables Updated issues log Workpackageassumptions: System is being used in a live production state. ControlPoint5:ProductionStageAcceptance Acceptance criteria for this Stage includes completion of all criteria listed below: Advancement to the Close stage is not dependent upon Tyler’s receipt of this Stage Acceptance. Converted data is available in production environment. Production Stage Acceptance Criteria: All stage deliverables accepted based on criteria previously defined. Go-Live activities defined in the Go-Live action plan completed. Client services support document is provided. Close The Close stage signifies full implementation of all products purchased and encompassed in the Phase or Project. The Citytransitions to the next cycle of their relationship with Tyler (next Phase of implementation or long-term relationship with Tyler Client Services). City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 33 PhaseCloseout This work package represents Phase completion and signals the conclusion of implementation activities for the Phase. The Tyler Client Services team will assume ongoing support of the Cityfor systems implemented in the Phase. Objectives: Agreement from Tyler and the Cityteams that activities within this phase are complete. STAGE6PhaseCloseOut TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Reconcile project budget and status of contract IARIIC Deliverables Hold post phase review ARCCCCCCCCC meeting Release phase- dependent Tyler project ARII resources ParticipantsTylerCity Project LeadershipProject Manager Project ManagerProject Sponsor(s) Implementation ConsultantsFunctional Leads, Power Users, Technical Leads Technical Consultants (Conversion, Deployment, Development) Client Services InputsContract Statement of Work Project artifacts Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Final action plan (for outstanding items) Reconciliation Report Post Phase Review Workpackageassumptions: City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 34 Tyler deliverables for the phase have been completed. ProjectCloseout Completion of this work package signifies final acceptance and formal closing of the Project. At this time the Citymay choose to begin working with Client Services to look at continuous improvement Projects, building on the completed solution. Objectives: Confirm no critical issues remain for the project teams to resolve. Determine proper knowledge transfer to the Cityteams for key processes and subject areas has occurred. Verify all deliverables included in the Agreement are delivered. STAGE6ProjectCloseOut TylerCity RACI MATRIX KEY: R = Responsible A = Accountable C = Consulted I = Informed Conduct post project ARCCCCCCCCC review Deliver post project report to Cityand Tyler IARIIC leadership Release Tyler project ARII resources InputsContract Statement of Work Outputs / Acceptance Criteria \[only\] for Deliverables Deliverables Post Project ReportCity acceptance;Completed report indicating all project Deliverables and milestones have been completed Workpackageassumptions: All project implementation activities have been completed and approved. No critical project issues remain that have not been documented andassigned. Final project budget has been reconciled and invoiced. All Tyler deliverables have been completed. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 35 ControlPoint6:CloseStageAcceptance Acceptance criteria for this Stage includes completion of all criteria listed below. CloseStageDeliverables: Post Project Report. CloseStageAcceptanceCriteria: Completed report indicating all Project deliverables and milestones have been completed. GeneralAssumptions Tyler and the Citywill use this SOW as a guide for managing the implementation of the Tyler Project as provided and described in the Agreement. There are a few assumptions which, when acknowledged and adhered to, will support a successful implementation. Assumptions related to specific work packages are documented throughout the SOW. Included here are general assumptions which should be considered throughout the overall implementation process. Project Project activities will begin after the Agreement has been fully executed. The CityProject Team will complete their necessary assignments in a mutually agreed upon timeframe to meet the scheduled go-live date, as outlined in the Project Schedule. Sessions will be scheduled and conducted at a mutually agreeable time. Additional services, software modules and modifications not describedin the SOW or Agreement will be considered a change to this Project and will require a Change Request Form as previously referenced in the definition of the Change Control Process. Tyler will provide a written agenda and notice of any prerequisites to theCityproject manager(s) ten (10) business days or as otherwise mutually agreed upon time frame prior to any scheduled on-site or remote sessions, as applicable. Tyler will provide guidance for configuration and processing options available within the Tyler software. If multiple options are presented by Tyler, the Cityis responsible for making decisions based on the options available. Implementation of new software may require changes to existing processes, both business and technical, requiring the Cityto make process changes. The Cityis responsible for defining, documenting, and implementing their policies that result from any business process changes. OrganizationalChangeManagement Unless otherwise contracted by Tyler, Cityis responsible for managing Organizational Change. Impacted City resources will need consistent coaching and reassurance from their leadership team to embrace and accept the changes being imposed by the move to new software. An important part of change is ensuring that impactedCity resources understand the value of the change, and why they are being asked to change. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 36 ResourcesandScheduling Cityresources will participate in scheduled activities as assigned in the Project Schedule. The Cityteam will complete prerequisites prior to applicable scheduled activities. Failure to do so may affect the schedule. Tyler and the Citywill provide resources to support the efforts to complete the Project as scheduled and within the constraints of the Project budget. Abbreviated timelines and overlapped Phases require sufficient resources to complete all required work as scheduled. Changes to the Project Schedule, availability of resources or changes in Scope will be requested through a Change Request. Impacts to the triple constraints (scope, budget, and schedule) will be assessed and documented as part of the change control process. The Citywill ensure assigned resources will follow the change control process and possess the required business knowledge to complete their assigned tasks successfully. Should there be a change in resources, the replacement resource should have a comparable level of availability, change control process buy-in, and knowledge. The Citymakes timely Project related decisions to achieve scheduled due dates on tasks and prepare for subsequent training sessions. Failure to do so may affect the schedule, as each analysis and implementation session is dependent on the decisions made in prior sessions. The Citywill respond to information requests in a comprehensive and timely manner, in accordance with the Project Schedule. The Citywill provide adequate meeting space or facilities, including appropriate system connectivity, to the project teams including Tyler team members. For on-site visits, Tyler will identify a travel schedule that balances the needs of the project and the employee. Intentionallyleftblank. Facilities The Citywill provide dedicated space for Tyler staff to work with Cityresources for both on-site and remote sessions. If Phases overlap, Citywill provide multiple training facilities to allow for independent sessions scheduling without conflict. The Citywill provide staff with a location to practice what they have learned without distraction. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 37 Glossary WordorTermDefinition AcceptanceConfirming that the output or deliverable is suitable and conforms to the agreed upon criteria. AccountableThe one who ultimately ensures a task or deliverable is completed; the one who ensures the prerequisites of the task are met and who delegates the work to those responsible. \[Also see RACI\] ApplicationA computer program designed to perform a group of coordinated functions, tasks, or activities for the benefit of the user. ApplicationProgrammingInterfaceA defined set of tools/methods to pass data to and (API)received data from Tyler software products AgreementThis executed legal contract that defines the products and services to be implemented or performed. BusinessProcessThe practices, policy, procedure, guidelines, or functionality that the client uses to complete a specific job function. BusinessRequirementsDocumentA specification document used to describe Client requirements for contracted software modifications. ChangeRequestA form used as part of the Change Control process whereby changes in the scope of work, timeline, resources, and/or budget are documented and agreed upon by participating parties. ChangeManagementGuides how we prepare, equip and support individuals to successfully adopt change in order to drive organizational success & outcomes CodeMapping\[whereapplicable\]An activity that occurs during the data conversion process whereby users equate data (field level) values from the old system to the values available in the new system. These may be one to one or many to one. Example: Old System \[Field = eye color\] \[values = BL, Blu, Blue\] maps to New Tyler System \[Field = Eye Color\] \[value = Blue\]. ConsultedThose whose opinions are sought, typically subject matter experts, and with whom there is two-way communication. \[Also see RACI\] ControlPointThis activity occurs at the end of each stage and serves as a formal and intentional opportunity to review stage deliverables and required acceptance criteria for the stage have been met. DataMapping\[whereapplicable\]The activity determining and documenting where data from the legacy system will be placed in the new system; this typically involves prior data analysis to understand how the data is currently used in the legacy system and how it will be used in the new system. DeliverableA verifiable document or service produced as part of the Project, as defined in the work packages. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 38 Go-LiveThe point in time when the Client is using the Tyler software to conduct daily operations in Production. InformedThose who are kept up-to-date on progress, often only on completion of the task or deliverable, and with whom there is just one-way communication. \[Also see RACI\] InfrastructureThe composite hardware, network resources and services required for the existence, operation, and management of the Tyler software. InterfaceA connection to and potential exchange of data with an external system or application. Interfaces may be one way, with data leaving the Tyler system to another system or data entering Tyler from another system, or they may be bi-directional with data both leaving and entering Tyler and another system. IntegrationA standard exchange or sharing of common data within the Tyler system or between Tyler applications LegacySystemThe software from which a client is converting. ModificationCustom enhancement of Tyler’s existing software to provide features or functions to meet individual client requirements documented within the scope of the Agreement. On-siteIndicates the work location is at one or more of the client’s physical office or work environments. OrganizationalChangeThe process of changing an organization's strategies, processes, procedures, technologies, and culture, as well as the effect of such changes on the organization. OutputA product, result or service generated by a process. PeripheraldevicesAn auxiliary devicethat connects to and works with the computer in some way.Some examples: scanner,digital camera, printer. PhaseA portion of the Project in which specific set of related applications are typically implemented. Phases each have an independent start, Go-Liveand closure dates but use the same Implementation Plans as other Phases of the Project. Phases may overlap or be sequential and may have different Tyler resources assigned. ProjectThe delivery of the software and services per the agreement and the Statement of Work. A Project may be broken down into multiple Phases. RACIA matrix describingthe level of participation by various roles in completing tasks or Deliverables for a Project or process. Individuals or groups are assigned one and only City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 39 one of the following roles for a given task: Responsible (R), Accountable (A), Consulted (C), or Informed (I). RemoteIndicates the work location is at one or more of Tyler’s physical offices or work environments. ResponsibleThose who ensure a task is completed, either by themselves or delegating to another resource. \[Also see RACI\] ScopeProducts and services that are included in the Agreement. SolutionThe implementation of the contracted software product(s) resulting in the connected system allowing users to meet Project goals and gain anticipated efficiencies. StageThe top-level components of the WBS. Each Stage is repeated for individual Phases of the Project. StandardSoftware functionality that is included in the base software (off-the-shelf) package; is not customized or modified. StatementofWork(SOW)Document which will provide supporting detail to the Agreement defining Project-specific activities, services, and Deliverables. SystemThe collective group of software and hardware that is used by the organization to conduct business. TestScriptsThe steps or sequence of steps that will be used to validate or confirm a piece of functionality, configuration, enhancement, or Use Case Scenario. TrainingPlanDocument(s) that indicate how and when users of the system will be trained relevant to their role in the implementation or use of the system. Validation(ortovalidate)The process of testing and approving that a specific Deliverable, process, program, or product is working as expected. WorkBreakdownStructure(WBS)A hierarchical representation of a Project or Phase broken down into smaller, more manageable components. WorkPackageA group of related tasks within a project. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 40 Part 4: Appendices NoConversion-Intentionallyleftblank. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 41 AdditionalAppendices EnerGovDefinitions “TemplateBusinessTransactions” A pre-defined and pre-configured EnerGov business process from EnerGov’s “Best Management Template”. The following modifications to Template Business Transactions are considered within scope: o Any changes to required inspections within the workflow o Any changes to the required plan reviews within the workflow o Adding up to2 additional actions to the workflow o Configuration of fees, allowing creation of up to 3 new fees to accommodate o Any changes to custom field layouts that aredirectlyrelated to fees or included reports Customization/Configurationof any of these parameters beyond the scope listed above will require the respective business process to be considered a “Unique Business Transaction”, as described below. Note:AlltransactioncountsarequantifiedinthecommentsoftheInvestmentSummary. “UniqueBusinessTransactions” Uniqueconfiguration of workflow or business process steps & actions, including output actions Unique Fee configuration Unique Custom field configuration “Geo-Rules” An automation event that references GIS data. Current geo-rule action types are: AlertDisplays a pop-up with a custom message to the user, notifying them of certain spatial data (i.e., noise abatement zones; flood zones; etc.). BlockPlaces a block on the case and prevents any progress or updates from occurring on the record (i.e., no status changes can be completed, no fees can be paid, the workflow cannot be managed, etc.) BlockwithPlaces a block on the case and prevents any progress or updates from occurring on the record (i.e., no Overridestatus changes can be completed, no fees can be paid, the workflow cannot be managed, etc.) However, the block can be overridden by end-users who have been given the proper securities. FeeDatePopulates the CPI vesting date on the record if vesting maps are used by the jurisdiction. FieldMappingA custom field or any field inherentin the EnerGovapplication can automatically populate with informationbased on spatial data. RequiredActionA workflow action can automatically populate in the workflow details for the particular record (i.e., plan, permit, code case, etc.) that requires the action based on certain spatial data related to the case. RequiredStepA workflow step can automatically populate in the workflow details for the particular record (i.e., plan, permit, code case, etc.) that requires the step based on certain spatial data related to the case. ZoneMappingThe zone(s) automatically populate on the “Zones” tab of the record (i.e., plan, permit, code case, etc.). City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 42 “AutomationEvents” “IntelligentObjects(IO)” Key components for automatically and reactively triggering geo-rules, computing fees, and generating emails, alerts, and other notifications. “IntelligentAutomationAgents(IAA)” A tool designed to automate task in a proactive manner by setting values and generating emails and other tasks. On a nightly basis, a Windows service sweeps the EnerGov system looking for IAA tasks that need to be run, then the associated actions are performed. The IAA does not generate alerts or errors. Custom SQL queries are not Tyler deliverables. “EnerGovSDK/API(Toolkits)” APIs developed by Tyler Technologies for extending the EnerGovFramework and functionality to external agencies and systems.Full documentation is available for each toolkit upon request. Note:TheEnerGovtoolkitsandrelateddocumentationaresimplytoolsthatallowclientstocreate applicationsandintegrations.Thepurchaseofatoolkit/APIdoesnotimplyanydevelopmentrelated servicesfromTylerTechnologies.TheCityisresponsibleforworkingwiththeirITstaffandVARsto developanynecessaryapplicationsandintegrationsexceptasotherwisenotedintheInvestment Summaryorforany“in-scope”integrations. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 43 ProjectTimeline ERPProjectTimeline The Project Timeline establishes a target start and end date for each Phase of the Project. The timeline needs to account for resource availability, business goals, size and complexity of the Project, and task duration requirements. These will be reviewed and adjusted, if needed, during the Initiate and Plan Stage. Refer to the ProjectStages section of this SOW for information onwork packages associated with each stage of the implementation. The following dates may be revised based on the date the Agreement is signed and further refined during the course of the project. Tyler requiresup toninety(90) days to move from Agreement signing to the Initiate & Plan Stage. The planned timeline for this EnerGov implementation, from project kick-off to go-live, is estimated to take twelve (12) full months. City of La Porte, TX Tyler Technologies, Inc.Page | 1 PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT –MAJOR BUDGET CHANGES Planning $253,460 for Tyler Technologies software $13,500 for tablets for field inspectors $175,000 for comprehensive plan update GIS $10,000 for ArcGIS Enterprise standard migration (includes unlimited view licenses for city employees) Inspection Services Need to delete $55,000 increase for contracted services for inspection services/plan review (Service no longer necessary) Tyler Technologies Local Government Software Solutions CityofLaPorte,TX Tyler & La Porte •Tyler Incode Municipal Court •Tyler Content Manager •Tyler Incode Cash Collections •Tyler Brazos •Tyler ExecuTime The largest company in the nation solely focused on providing software and services to local governments, empowering our clients to build and sustain safe, vibrant and connected communities © Tyler Technologies 2018 Tyler Headquarters: Plano, TX •Nationwide offices: Plano,TXHeadquarters Texas: Plano (Corporate HQ), Lubbock, College Station Otherlocations: Atlanta GA, Denver CO, Renton WA, Yarmouth ME, Phoenix AZ, Detroit MI •2020 Revenues: $1.2B •Serving over 11,000 government agencies Lubbock,TXOffice Acivic services solution for building, planning, & licensing management © Tyler Technologies 2019 The Connected Community Tyler EnerGov Users in Texas Dallas/Fort Worth area Houston & Southeast area •City of Allen •City of Cedar Hill•City of Brenham •City of Coppell•City of Baytown •City of Granbury•City of Dayton •City of Grand Prairie•City of Deer Park •City of Hurst•City of Friendswood •City of Farmers Branch•City of Katy •City of McKinney•City of League City •City of Mesquite•City of Missouri City •City of North Richland Hills•City of Navasota •City of Richardson•City of Port Arthur •City of Rowlett•City of Pasadena •City of Southlake•City of Rosenburg •City of Waco•City of Santa Fe •City of Waxahachie•City of Sugar Land •City of Woodway•Chambers County •Collin County •Denton County Water San Antonio & Southcentral area •Town of Addison •City of Bastrop •Town of Trophy Club •City of Del Rio •Town of Prosper •City of Edinburg •DFW Airport •City of Hutto •City of Kyle West Texas •City of Rio Grande City •City of Andrews•City of Seguin •City of Amarillo•City of Victoria •City of Big Spring•City of Weslaco •City of Dalhart•Cameron County •City of Lubbock •City of Midland •City of Seminole Winning Texas’s Trust •65+ New TX EnerGov Users in 7 Years •EnerGov Texas Users Group •Auto-Integration with Texas DLR •Regular Sponsors of –BOAT –TXAPA –BPI –TAGITM –Texas GIS Forum (TNRIS) –TML EnerGov User Interface Clean Intuitive Role-Based © Tyler Technologies 2019 Personalized Reporting & Benchmarking Enterprise-wide analytics engine Configurable Performance Dashboards Enhanced visibility and service-level monitoring. © Tyler Technologies 2019 Mobile © Tyler Technologies 2019 Citizen Engagement 24x7accessfor citizens, businesses and contractors ADAcompliant(WCAG 2.0 AA) Multilingualand responsiveinterface © Tyler Technologies 2019 Mobile © Tyler Technologies 2019 SaaS (Software as a Service) Cloud Hosted © Tyler Technologies 2018 Tyler Implementation © Tyler Technologies 2018 Post-Production Support and Continuing Education Account Educational Tyler Management ResourcesEvergreen® © Tyler Technologies 2018 Tyler’sEvergreenProgram Future upgrades and new versions with no additional license fees Committed to ongoing product development and enhancements Clients always have access to the latestandgreatest toolsand functionality Account Management UnlimitedPhone, Email & Online Submission 7:00 A.M to 8:00 P.M. Central Online, comprehensiveHelping clients to benefit Tyler Connect user training programfrom new technologyconference, regional conferences, and user group OneSupport Channel meetings © Tyler Technologies 2019 Support offerings Tyler Connect user Online Online, conference, regional community for on-demand conferences, and user support & training group meetings information © Tyler Technologies 2019 REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested: November 8, 2021 Requested By:Ray Mayo, Director Source of Funds:Various 009 Department: Public Works Account Number:N/A Amount Budgeted:$567,118.00 ReportResolutionOrdinance Amount Requested:$483,765.79 Exhibits:Vehicle and Equipment Quotes Budgeted Item:YesNo SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION Quotes were received through the Texas BuyBoardand GSA cooperative Purchasing Programs for vehicles, equipmentand up-fittingeligible for replacement in the FY2021 22Vehicle Replacement Program.This is the thirdround of FY 2021-22 equipment replacement purchase approvals. There will be a replacement with the same type vehicle forone(1) full-size pickupand one (1) Fairway Mower. There are 18police patrol vehicles being up-fitted with lighting, sirens, electronic controls and safety enhancements.One (1) full-size pickup is being added to the fleet. There will befive (5)full-size pickupsandtwo(2) mid-size SUVsreplaced with mid-size trucks. Stock of regular full-size pickups is limited and resulted in significant price increases for Ford and Dodge. Chevrolet stock for single cab full-size trucks was very limited for this production yearand currently difficult to obtain. It was confirmed with the division managers thatthe mid-size trucks will meet the needs of the user departments and also remain within budget constraints. VENDORBUDGET ITEMBUDGETEDBIDUSER Chastang (2) Ford F-150 P/U$51,308.00$50,876.00Parks / PW Ford Caldwell (7)Chevrolet Colorado $159,684.00$157,110.00PW/ CountryP/UStreets/ Customer Service/ Inspections Brookside (1)John Deere 7700 $81,132.00$52,047.56Golf EquipmentFairway Mower Dana Up-fitting $274,994.00223,732.23PD Patrol Safety equipment for (18) SupplyVehicles Totals$567,118.00$483,765.79 Miscellaneous: a) The vehicles to be purchased with this agenda request will replace existing vehicles that are now at the end of their service lives with funding from the Vehicle Replacement Fund, with the exception of one Ford F-150 being added to the fleet. b) The budgeted amount listed in the table for the replacement vehicles represents the total funds deposited by each department through FY 2020-21 in the form of lease fees paid by the department over the lease term designated for each vehicle. c) The amounts listed in the table for vehicles/equipment are the funding amounts approved by Council for the FY 2021-22 budget for equipment replacement. Each division will pay lease fees over the life of the units to establish a funded amount for future replacements. d) The balance remaining (funded amount minus replacement costs) either remains in the divisional motor pool account to pre-fund a portion of the replacement vehicle or is sometimes utilized by the division for up-fitting equipment. (e.g. light bar, trailer hitch, patrol unit up-fitting). Staff recommends purchase of the listed vehicles and equipment through cooperative purchasing programs. The Purchasing Division of the Finance Department has reviewed the recommendation for vehicle and equipment purchases and is in support of this recommendation. Contract pricing was checked on Cooperative Purchasing Programs. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Approval or other action awarding the following purchases: 1. Two (2) Ford F-150s to Chastang Ford for $50,876.00; 2. Seven (7) Chevrolet Colorados to Caldwell Country for $157,110.00; 3. One (1) John Deere 7700 Fairway Mower deck to Brookside Equipment for $52,047.56, and 4. Vehicle up-fitting for 18 patrol vehicles to Dana Safety Supply for $223,732.23 Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 Customer No.LAPORTEPD 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered BySalespersonOrdered By Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 BUYBOARD 603-20 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 66NINSTALL0.00000.00 INSTALL Patrol X 6 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6BK2019TAH21899.00005,394.00 PB450L4 BUMPER whelen ION R/W B/W Warehouse: HOUSVin #: PB450L4 W/IONS FOR 2021 TAHOE PPV AND Z71 GRILLE ONLY 6Y6EVP2,530.000015,180.00 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PACKAGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6GB2DEDEY0.00000.00 WEC LEGACY WC 54" RW/BW/RW/BW W/TD SMOKED LENS Warehouse: HOUSVin #: W/TAKESDOWN AND SMOKED LENSES 6Y6MKAJ1010.00000.00 WEC ADJ LIGHTBAR MOUNT KIT TAHOE 2021 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:35:19 PM Print Time 1 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 6Y6CCSRN50.00000.00 / WEC CARBIDE AMP CONTROL MOD WCANPORT OBDII INTRFACE M Warehouse: HOUSVin #: ORDER CONTROL HEAD SEPSEATELY ORDER INSTALLATION KIT SEPERATELY DOES NOT HAVE TRAFFIC ADVISOR CONTROL MODULE ********************************************* 6Y6CC5K60.00000.00 WEC CCSRN5 INSTALL KIT TAHOE/SUB Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6CANCTL60.00000.00 WEC CANTROL REMOTE ROTARY SWITCH CONTROL HEA ONLY Warehouse: HOUSVin #: p/n #01-0687496-01C NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CENCOM CARBIDE AMP *************************** 6Y6SA315P0.00000.00 Whelen 100W Compact Black Composite 122DB Speaker Warehouse: HOUSVin #: MOUNTING BRACKET SOLD SEPERATELY- *********************************** Print Date 09/17/21 02:35:19 PM Print Time 2 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 6Y6SAK10.00000.00 WEC UNIVERSAL "L" SPEAKER BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 24Y24TLI2J102.05002,449.20 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/B Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6TIONBKT222.1000132.60 WEC UNIVERSAL ADJUSTABLE T-ION LICENSE PLATE BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: BRACKET WILL MOUNT2T-ION HEADS ************************************ 6Y6OEWD54-KM806.76004,840.56 WEC ION OUTER EDGE WC DUO 21 TAHOE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6CP-21TAH-SC1,079.08006,474.48 LUND CP-21TAH-SC CONSOLE PACKAGE 21 TAHOE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: CP-21TAH-SC 6Y6MK-2CL16.210097.26 LUND MIC CLIP & BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:35:19 PM Print Time 3 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 6Y6CG-X66.2800397.68 HAV CHARGE GARD, UNIVERSAL, CONTROL MODULE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INFINITE TIMER, SURGE PROTECTOR12VDC,30a ************************************************************ ******* 6Y6UNVTAB3-MT-0222.95001,337.70 LUND Universal Mount for Tablets features Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6ARM-TELS225.90001,355.40 LUND 9-13" TELESCOPING SLIDE ARM W/SWIVEL Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6SECUR-TAB2165.3700992.22 LUND SECUR-TAB2 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: REPLACEMENT FOR SECURETAB-MT 6Y6PK1156TAH21590.85003,545.10 SMC 10 XL COATED POLY 21 TAHOE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6QK2024TAH211,006.85006,041.10 SMC 2021 TAHOE #12 VS Coated Poly w/ Replacement Seat Warehouse: HOUSVin #: OEM Full Replacement Transport Seat TPO Plastic, with Center Pull Seat Belts & #12Coated Polycarbonate Cargo Partition Print Date 09/17/21 02:35:19 PM Print Time 4 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 6Y6GRAPHICS-LAPORTEPD11,450.00008,700.00 GRAPHICS City Of Laporte Police Departmnet Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6WK0514TAH21181.35001,088.10 SMC REAR WINDOW BARRIER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: WK0514TAH21 6Y6LOFT-21TAH-EC581.25003,487.50 LUND 21+ Tahoe Loft Electronic Equipment Tray Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOFT-21TAH-EC 21+Tahoe Loft Electronic Equipment Tray-Interior Dimension16.5"x40" LOFT-21TAH-EC Includes removable stand-off electronics installation platform, allowing "bench"prep prior to installation. (Optional Accessories Available) 6Y6DK0598TAH21122.8500737.10 SMC ALUMINUM DOOR PANELS Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6ENT3B3D193.70001,162.20 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG RED/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6ENT3B3E193.70001,162.20 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG BLUE/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:35:19 PM Print Time 5 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 6Y6PMP2BKUMB5-D0.00000.00 SOI 2021 TAH DRIVER INTERSECTOR BKT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 6Y6PMP2BKUMB5-P0.00000.00 SOI 2021 TAH PAS INTERSECTOR BKT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 12Y12WEC-IOND70.0000840.00 Whelen ION W/Universal Mount - Red/White Warehouse: HOUSVin #: N 66INFO0.00000.00 Customer supplied Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Radio,Coban Video,Printer Radar,Tablet Keyboard, sHARKEE aNTENNA gps,wifi lte 6Y6INSTALL KIT225.00001,350.00 MISC INSTALLATION SUPPLIES I.E. Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOOM, WIRE, HARDWARE, CONNECTORS, ETC ************************************************ 66NINSTALL2,800.000016,800.00 DSS INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:35:19 PM Print Time 6 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407957-A Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice Approved By: Approve All Items & Quantities Quote Good for 30 Days Print Date 09/17/21 83,564.40 Subtotal 02:35:19 PM Print Time 1,800.00 Freight 7 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris 85,364.40 Order Total DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 Customer No.LAPORTEPD 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered BySalespersonOrdered By Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 BUYBOARD 603-20 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INSTALL 22N0.00000.00 INSTALL Patrol X Dodge Chargers Slick Top X 2 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2BK2007CGR15899.00001,798.00 SMC PB450L4 - PUSH BUMPER - WEC ION - 2016+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2EVP2,730.00005,460.00 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PACKAGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2IW35UFX0.00000.00 WEC INNER EDGE 12 6-LED DUO+ FOR 2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2WEC-ITRAYW8-35KM0.00000.00 WEC INNER EDGE RST DODGE CHARGER DUO R/A/BA Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/06/21 04:49:19 PM Print Time 1 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 2Y2CCSRN50.00000.00 / WEC CARBIDE AMP CONTROL MOD WCANPORT OBDII INTRFACE M Warehouse: HOUSVin #: ORDER CONTROL HEAD SEPSEATELY ORDER INSTALLATION KIT SEPERATELY DOES NOT HAVE TRAFFIC ADVISOR CONTROL MODULE ********************************************* 2Y2CC5K30.00000.00 WEC CARBIDE INSTALL KIT - 2018+ CHGR, DURANGO, & R Warehouse: HOUSVin #: NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CARBIDE ********************************** 2Y2CANCTL60.00000.00 WEC CANTROL REMOTE ROTARY SWITCH CONTROL HEA ONLY Warehouse: HOUSVin #: p/n #01-0687496-01C NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CENCOM CARBIDE AMP *************************** 2Y2SA315P0.00000.00 Whelen 100W Compact Black Composite 122DB Speaker Warehouse: HOUSVin #: MOUNTING BRACKET SOLD SEPERATELY- *********************************** Print Date 10/06/21 04:49:19 PM Print Time 2 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 2Y2SAK10.00000.00 WEC UNIVERSAL "L" SPEAKER BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4TLI2J102.0500408.20 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/B Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2TIONBKT222.100044.20 WEC UNIVERSAL ADJUSTABLE T-ION LICENSE PLATE BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: BRACKET WILL MOUNT2T-ION HEADS ************************************ 2Y2MISC331.2900662.58 LUND VH-CGR2415 CONSOLE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2MK-2CL16.210032.42 LUND MIC CLIP & BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2CG-X66.2800132.56 HAV CHARGE GARD, UNIVERSAL, CONTROL MODULE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INFINITE TIMER, SURGE PROTECTOR12VDC,30a ************************************************************ ******* Print Date 10/06/21 04:49:19 PM Print Time 3 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 2Y2UNVTAB3-MT-0222.9500445.90 LUND Universal Mount for Tablets features Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2ARM-TELS225.9000451.80 LUND 9-13" TELESCOPING SLIDE ARM W/SWIVEL Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2SECUR-TAB2165.3700330.74 LUND SECUR-TAB2 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: REPLACEMENT FOR SECURETAB-MT 2Y2PK0315CGR11512.85001,025.70 #10S Recessed Panel Coated Polycarbonate Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2ST0380CGR1159.8000119.60 SMC 2-PIECE LOWER EXTENTION PANELS FOR CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: STATE YEAR, MAKE, & MODEL OF VEHICLE-2011+DODGE CHARGER ********************************************************** Print Date 10/06/21 04:49:19 PM Print Time 4 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 2Y2QK0634CGR11584.35001,168.70 SMC REPLACEMENT CONTOUR TRANSPORT SEAT2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INCLUDES CENTER PULL SEAT BELT SYSTEM ************************************ 2Y2GK10342UHKSSCAXL317.8500635.70 SETINA DUAL T-RAIL W/2 UNIV XL LOCKS H/C KEY OVRR Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2GRAPHICS-LAPORTEPD11,450.00002,900.00 GRAPHICS City Of Laporte Police Departmnet Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2WK0513CGR11168.3500336.70 SMC STEEL WINDOW BARRIER FOR 2011+ DODGE CHARGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: WK0513CGR11 2Y2DK0100CGR11181.3500362.70 SMC MOLDED DOOR SKINS FOR 2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: VEHICLE-DODGE CHARGER YEAR- ************************************************************ *** Print Date 10/06/21 04:49:19 PM Print Time 5 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 2Y2TK1189CGR11246.3500492.70 SMC ALUMINUM TRUNK TRAY 2011+ DODGE CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: WILL FIT2011+DODGE CHARGERS ********************************** 2Y2ENT3B3D193.7000387.40 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG RED/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2ENT3B3E193.7000387.40 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG BLUE/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2C3RNRDC-60L-RWBW230.0000460.00 CODE 3 60"RUNNING BOARD,LEFT WIRE EXIT,DC,RWBW Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2C3RNRDC-60R-BWRW230.0000460.00 CODE 3 60" RUNNING BOARD,RIGHT WIRE EXIT,DC,BWRW Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2RNRBKT-CH20.000040.00 CODE 3 INLINE RUNNER LIGHT BRACKETS FOR DODGE CH Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/06/21 04:49:19 PM Print Time 6 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 410463 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 10/06/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 22NINFO0.00000.00 Customer supplied Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Radio, Coban, Keyboard, Body Worn Camera system to be removed from existing units. 2Y2INSTALL KIT225.0000450.00 MISC INSTALLATION SUPPLIES I.E. Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOOM, WIRE, HARDWARE, CONNECTORS, ETC ************************************************ N 22INSTALL2,600.00005,200.00 DSS INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 2Y2REMOVAL200.0000400.00 REMOVAL OF BELOW LISTED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: PER CUSTOMER REQUESTS removal of body worn camera system Approved By: Approve All Items & Quantities Quote Good for 30 Days Print Date 10/06/21 24,593.00 Subtotal 04:49:19 PM Print Time 400.00 Freight 7 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris 24,993.00 Order Total DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 Customer No.LAPORTEPD 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered BySalespersonOrdered By Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 BUYBOARD 603-20 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INSTALL 44N0.00000.00 INSTALL Patrol X Dodge Chargers SRO x 4 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4BK2007CGR15899.00003,596.00 SMC PB450L4 - PUSH BUMPER - WEC ION - 2016+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4EVP2,530.000010,120.00 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PACKAGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4GB8DEDEY0.00000.00 WEC-LEGACY BAR 48'' RW/BW SMOKE AND TD Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4MKAJ1010.00000.00 WEC ADJ LIGHTBAR MOUNT KIT TAHOE 2021 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4MKAJ820.00000.00 WEC ADJ LIGHTBAR MOUNT KIT #82 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/06/21 04:36:13 PM Print Time 1 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4CCSRN50.00000.00 / WEC CARBIDE AMP CONTROL MOD WCANPORT OBDII INTRFACE M Warehouse: HOUSVin #: ORDER CONTROL HEAD SEPSEATELY ORDER INSTALLATION KIT SEPERATELY DOES NOT HAVE TRAFFIC ADVISOR CONTROL MODULE ********************************************* 4Y4CC5K30.00000.00 WEC CARBIDE INSTALL KIT - 2018+ CHGR, DURANGO, & R Warehouse: HOUSVin #: NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CARBIDE ********************************** 4Y4CANCTL60.00000.00 WEC CANTROL REMOTE ROTARY SWITCH CONTROL HEA ONLY Warehouse: HOUSVin #: p/n #01-0687496-01C NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CENCOM CARBIDE AMP *************************** 4Y4SA315P0.00000.00 Whelen 100W Compact Black Composite 122DB Speaker Warehouse: HOUSVin #: MOUNTING BRACKET SOLD SEPERATELY- *********************************** Print Date 10/06/21 04:36:13 PM Print Time 2 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4SAK10.00000.00 WEC UNIVERSAL "L" SPEAKER BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 8Y8TLI2J102.0500816.40 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/B Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4TIONBKT222.100088.40 WEC UNIVERSAL ADJUSTABLE T-ION LICENSE PLATE BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: BRACKET WILL MOUNT2T-ION HEADS ************************************ 4Y4MISC331.29001,325.16 LUND VH-CGR2415 CONSOLE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4MK-2CL16.210064.84 LUND MIC CLIP & BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4CG-X66.2800265.12 HAV CHARGE GARD, UNIVERSAL, CONTROL MODULE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INFINITE TIMER, SURGE PROTECTOR12VDC,30a ************************************************************ ******* Print Date 10/06/21 04:36:13 PM Print Time 3 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4UNVTAB3-MT-0222.9500891.80 LUND Universal Mount for Tablets features Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4ARM-TELS225.9000903.60 LUND 9-13" TELESCOPING SLIDE ARM W/SWIVEL Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4SECUR-TAB2165.3700661.48 LUND SECUR-TAB2 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: REPLACEMENT FOR SECURETAB-MT 4Y4PK0315CGR11512.85002,051.40 #10S Recessed Panel Coated Polycarbonate Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4ST0380CGR1159.8000239.20 SMC 2-PIECE LOWER EXTENTION PANELS FOR CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: STATE YEAR, MAKE, & MODEL OF VEHICLE-2011+DODGE CHARGER ********************************************************** Print Date 10/06/21 04:36:13 PM Print Time 4 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4QK0634CGR11584.35002,337.40 SMC REPLACEMENT CONTOUR TRANSPORT SEAT2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INCLUDES CENTER PULL SEAT BELT SYSTEM ************************************ 4Y4GK10342UHKSSCAXL317.85001,271.40 SETINA DUAL T-RAIL W/2 UNIV XL LOCKS H/C KEY OVRR Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4GRAPHICS-LAPORTEPD11,450.00005,800.00 GRAPHICS City Of Laporte Police Departmnet Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4WK0513CGR11168.3500673.40 SMC STEEL WINDOW BARRIER FOR 2011+ DODGE CHARGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: WK0513CGR11 4Y4DK0100CGR11181.3500725.40 SMC MOLDED DOOR SKINS FOR 2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: VEHICLE-DODGE CHARGER YEAR- ************************************************************ *** Print Date 10/06/21 04:36:13 PM Print Time 5 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4TK1189CGR11246.3500985.40 SMC ALUMINUM TRUNK TRAY 2011+ DODGE CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: WILL FIT2011+DODGE CHARGERS ********************************** 4Y4ENT3B3D193.7000774.80 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG RED/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4ENT3B3E193.7000774.80 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG BLUE/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4C3RNRDC-60L-RWBW230.0000920.00 CODE 3 60"RUNNING BOARD,LEFT WIRE EXIT,DC,RWBW Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4C3RNRDC-60R-BWRW230.0000920.00 CODE 3 60" RUNNING BOARD,RIGHT WIRE EXIT,DC,BWRW Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4RNRBKT-CH20.000080.00 CODE 3 INLINE RUNNER LIGHT BRACKETS FOR DODGE CH Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/06/21 04:36:13 PM Print Time 6 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408501 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 66NINFO0.00000.00 Customer supplied Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Radio, Coban, Keyboard, Body Worn Camera system to be removed from existing units. 6Y6INSTALL KIT225.00001,350.00 MISC INSTALLATION SUPPLIES I.E. Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOOM, WIRE, HARDWARE, CONNECTORS, ETC ************************************************ N 66INSTALL2,600.000015,600.00 DSS INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1REMOVAL200.0000200.00 REMOVAL OF BELOW LISTED EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: PER CUSTOMER REQUESTS removal of body worn camera system Approved By: Approve All Items & Quantities Quote Good for 30 Days Print Date 10/06/21 53,436.00 Subtotal 04:36:13 PM Print Time 0.00 Freight 7 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris 53,436.00 Order Total DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407937 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 Customer No.LAPORTEPD 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered BySalespersonOrdered By Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 BUYBOARD 603-20 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: DOT No prsioner partition or related equipment 44NINSTALL0.00000.00 INSTALL DOT X Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4BK2019TAH21899.00003,596.00 PB450L4 BUMPER whelen ION R/W B/W Warehouse: HOUSVin #: PB450L4 W/IONS FOR 2021 TAHOE PPV AND Z71 GRILLE ONLY 4Y4EVP2,530.000010,120.00 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PACKAGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4GB2DEDEY0.00000.00 WEC LEGACY WC 54" RW/BW/RW/BW W/TD SMOKED LENS Warehouse: HOUSVin #: W/TAKESDOWN AND SMOKED LENSES 4Y4MKAJ1010.00000.00 WEC ADJ LIGHTBAR MOUNT KIT TAHOE 2021 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:29:43 PM Print Time 1 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407937 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 Customer No.LAPORTEPD 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered BySalespersonOrdered By Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4CCSRN50.00000.00 WEC CARBIDE AMP CONTROL MOD W/CANPORT OBDII INTRFACE M Warehouse: HOUSVin #: ORDER CONTROL HEAD SEPSEATELY ORDER INSTALLATION KIT SEPERATELY DOES NOT HAVE TRAFFIC ADVISOR CONTROL MODULE ********************************************* 4Y4CC5K60.00000.00 WEC CCSRN5 INSTALL KIT TAHOE/SUB Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4CANCTL60.00000.00 WEC CANTROL REMOTE ROTARY SWITCH CONTROL HEA ONLY Warehouse: HOUSVin #: p/n #01-0687496-01C NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CENCOM CARBIDE AMP *************************** 4Y4SA315P0.00000.00 Whelen 100W Compact Black Composite 122DB Speaker Warehouse: HOUSVin #: MOUNTING BRACKET SOLD SEPERATELY- *********************************** Print Date 09/17/21 02:29:43 PM Print Time 2 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407937 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4SAK10.00000.00 WEC UNIVERSAL "L" SPEAKER BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 16Y16TLI2J102.05001,632.80 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/B Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4OEWD54-KM806.76003,227.04 WEC ION OUTER EDGE WC DUO 21 TAHOE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4TIONBKT222.100088.40 WEC UNIVERSAL ADJUSTABLE T-ION LICENSE PLATE BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: BRACKET WILL MOUNT2T-ION HEADS ************************************ 4Y4CP-21TAH-SC1,079.08004,316.32 LUND CP-21TAH-SC CONSOLE PACKAGE 21 TAHOE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: CP-21TAH-SC 4Y4MK-2CL16.210064.84 LUND MIC CLIP & BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:29:43 PM Print Time 3 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407937 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4CG-X66.2800265.12 HAV CHARGE GARD, UNIVERSAL, CONTROL MODULE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INFINITE TIMER, SURGE PROTECTOR12VDC,30a ************************************************************ ******* 4Y4UNVTAB3-MT-0222.9500891.80 LUND Universal Mount for Tablets features Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4ARM-TELS225.9000903.60 LUND 9-13" TELESCOPING SLIDE ARM W/SWIVEL Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4SECUR-TAB2165.3700661.48 LUND SECUR-TAB2 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: REPLACEMENT FOR SECURETAB-MT 4Y4GRAPHICS-LAPORTEPD11,450.00005,800.00 GRAPHICS City Of Laporte Police Departmnet Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4ENT3B3D193.7000774.80 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG RED/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 09/17/21 02:29:43 PM Print Time 4 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407937 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 4Y4ENT3B3E193.7000774.80 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG BLUE/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4PMP2BKUMB5-D0.00000.00 SOI 2021 TAH DRIVER INTERSECTOR BKT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4PMP2BKUMB5-P0.00000.00 SOI 2021 TAH PAS INTERSECTOR BKT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 8Y8WEC-IOND70.0000560.00 Whelen ION W/Universal Mount - Red/White Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 44NINFO0.00000.00 Customer supplied Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Radio,Coban Video,Printer Radar,Tablet Keyboard, sHARKEE aNTENNA gps,wifi lte 4Y4INSTALL KIT225.0000900.00 MISC INSTALLATION SUPPLIES I.E. Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOOM, WIRE, HARDWARE, CONNECTORS, ETC ************************************************ Print Date 09/17/21 02:29:43 PM Print Time 5 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 407937 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/17/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeogarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 44NINSTALL2,400.00009,600.00 DSS INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Approved By: Approve All Items & Quantities Quote Good for 30 Days Print Date 09/17/21 44,177.00 Subtotal 02:29:43 PM Print Time 600.00 Freight 6 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geogaris 44,777.00 Order Total DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408509 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 2021 Charger CID ADMIN Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1WEC-ITRAYW8-35KM946.8000946.80 WEC INNER EDGE RST DODGE CHARGER DUO R/A/BA Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1IW35UFX1,131.60001,131.60 WEC INNER EDGE 12 6-LED DUO+ FOR 2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1CCSRN3699.0000699.00 WHELEN REMOTE SIREN & 18-BUTTON CONTROL SYSTEM Warehouse: HOUSVin #: REPLACES CCSRN2CENCOM GOLD SIREN/SWITCH(DISCONTINUED) INCLUDES:AMP/RELAY MODULE, CONTROL HEAD, MIC,20' MICROPHONE EXTENSION AND CABLES ******************************************************** 1Y1SA315P178.0000178.00 Whelen 100W Compact Black Composite 122DB Speaker Warehouse: HOUSVin #: MOUNTING BRACKET SOLD SEPERATELY- *********************************** 1Y1SAK3721.640021.64 WEC SA315 BRACKET FOR 2011+ CHARGER Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/06/21 04:39:50 PM Print Time 1 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 408509 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Doug DitrichDoug Ditrich Contact:Contact: 281.842.3116281.842.3116 Telephone: Telephone: E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method NET30 09/22/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICE Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 activate factory HLF and TLF Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1INSTALL KIT125.0000125.00 MISC INSTALLATION SUPPLIES I.E. Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOOM, WIRE, HARDWARE, CONNECTORS, ETC ************************************************ 11NINSTALL900.0000900.00 DSS INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Approved By: Approve All Items & Quantities Quote Good for 30 Days Print Date 10/06/21 4,002.04 Subtotal 04:39:50 PM Print Time 0.00 Freight 2 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris 4,002.04 Order Total DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 413238 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 Customer No.LAPORTEPD 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Bennie BolesBennie Boles Contact:Contact: 281-842-3114281-842-3114 Telephone: Telephone: BolesB@laportetx.govBolesB@laportetx.gov E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method 10/27/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICEnet30 Entered BySalespersonOrdered By Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 11NINFO0.00000.00 BUYBOARD 603-20 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INSTALLINSTALL X 1 11N0.00000.00 BK2019TAH21 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1Delivery Info: 575182899.0000899.00 PB450L4 BUMPER whelen ION R/W B/W Warehouse: HOUSVin #: PB450L4 W/IONS FOR 2021 TAHOE PPV AND Z71 GRILLE ONLY 1Y1EVP2,830.00002,830.00 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PACKAGE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1WEC-IW54UFX-DE0.00000.00 WEC DUO I-E XLP 12-LT 2021 TAHOE RW/BW Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1WEC-ITRAYW8-54-KM0.00000.00 WEC INNER EDGE DUO INNER EDGE RST WC 8-LT TRAY R Warehouse: HOUSVin #: CHEVY TAHOE 2021 Print Date 10/27/21 08:02:37 AM Print Time 1 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 413238 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Bennie BolesBennie Boles Contact:Contact: 281-842-3114281-842-3114 Telephone: Telephone: BolesB@laportetx.govBolesB@laportetx.gov E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method 10/27/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICEnet30 Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 1Y1CCSRN5Delivery Info: ON HAND0.00000.00 / WEC CARBIDE AMP CONTROL MOD WCANPORT OBDII INTRFACE M Warehouse: HOUSVin #: ORDER CONTROL HEAD SEPSEATELY ORDER INSTALLATION KIT SEPERATELY DOES NOT HAVE TRAFFIC ADVISOR CONTROL MODULE ********************************************* 1Y1CC5K6Delivery Info: 5480740.00000.00 WEC CCSRN5 INSTALL KIT TAHOE/SUB Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1CANCTL6Delivery Info: ON HAND0.00000.00 WEC CANTROL REMOTE ROTARY SWITCH CONTROL HEA ONLY Warehouse: HOUSVin #: p/n #01-0687496-01C NO CHARGE IF ORDERED WITH CENCOM CARBIDE AMP *************************** 1Y1SA315PDelivery Info: ON HAND0.00000.00 Whelen 100W Compact Black Composite 122DB Speaker Warehouse: HOUSVin #: MOUNTING BRACKET SOLD SEPERATELY- *********************************** Print Date 10/27/21 08:02:37 AM Print Time 2 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 413238 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Bennie BolesBennie Boles Contact:Contact: 281-842-3114281-842-3114 Telephone: Telephone: BolesB@laportetx.govBolesB@laportetx.gov E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method 10/27/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICEnet30 Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 1Y1SAK1Delivery Info: ON HAND0.00000.00 WEC UNIVERSAL "L" SPEAKER BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 4Y4TLI2JDelivery Info: 566439102.0500408.20 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/B Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1TIONBKT2Delivery Info: ON HAND22.100022.10 WEC UNIVERSAL ADJUSTABLE T-ION LICENSE PLATE BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: BRACKET WILL MOUNT2T-ION HEADS ************************************ 1Y1CP-21TAH-SCDelivery Info: 5751831,079.08001,079.08 LUND CP-21TAH-SC CONSOLE PACKAGE 21 TAHOE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: CP-21TAH-SC 1Y1MK-2CLDelivery Info: 57518316.210016.21 LUND MIC CLIP & BRACKET Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/27/21 08:02:37 AM Print Time 3 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 413238 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Bennie BolesBennie Boles Contact:Contact: 281-842-3114281-842-3114 Telephone: Telephone: BolesB@laportetx.govBolesB@laportetx.gov E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method 10/27/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICEnet30 Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 1Y1CG-XDelivery Info: ON HAND66.280066.28 HAV CHARGE GARD, UNIVERSAL, CONTROL MODULE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: INFINITE TIMER, SURGE PROTECTOR12VDC,30a ************************************************************ ******* 1Y1UNVTAB3-MT-0Delivery Info: 575183222.9500222.95 LUND Universal Mount for Tablets features Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1ARM-TELSDelivery Info: 575183225.9000225.90 LUND 9-13" TELESCOPING SLIDE ARM W/SWIVEL Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1SECUR-TAB2Delivery Info: 575183165.3700165.37 LUND SECUR-TAB2 Warehouse: HOUSVin #: REPLACEMENT FOR SECURETAB-MT 1Y1GRAPHICS-LAPORTEPD11,450.00001,450.00 GRAPHICS City Of Laporte Police Departmnet Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1ENT3B3DDelivery Info: 575175193.7000193.70 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG RED/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Print Date 10/27/21 08:02:37 AM Print Time 4 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 413238 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Bennie BolesBennie Boles Contact:Contact: 281-842-3114281-842-3114 Telephone: Telephone: BolesB@laportetx.govBolesB@laportetx.gov E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method 10/27/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICEnet30 Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 1Y1ENT3B3EDelivery Info: 575175193.7000193.70 SOI INTERSECTOR 18-LED SFC MNT,BLK HSG BLUE/WHITE Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1PMP2BKUMB5-DDelivery Info: 5751750.00000.00 SOI 2021 TAH DRIVER INTERSECTOR BKT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 1Y1PMP2BKUMB5-PDelivery Info: 5751750.00000.00 SOI 2021 TAH PAS INTERSECTOR BKT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 3Y3TLI2DDelivery Info: 566439102.0500306.15 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO R/W Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 3Y3TLI2EDelivery Info: 566439102.0500306.15 WEC ION T-SERIES LINEAR DUO B/W Warehouse: HOUSVin #: 11NINFO0.00000.00 Customer supplied Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Radio,Coban Video,Printer Radar,Tablet Keyboard, sHARKEE aNTENNA gps,wifi lte Print Date 10/27/21 08:02:37 AM Print Time 5 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris Continued on Next Page DANA SAFETY SUPPLY, INC 4809KOGER BLVD 413238 Sales Quote No. GREENSBORO, NC27407 LAPORTEPD Customer No. 800-845-0405 Telephone: Bill ToShip To City Of Laporte Police DepartmnetCity Of Laporte Police Departmnet N rd StN rd St 300123300123 Laporte, TX77571Laporte, TX77571 Bennie BolesBennie Boles Contact:Contact: 281-842-3114281-842-3114 Telephone: Telephone: BolesB@laportetx.govBolesB@laportetx.gov E-mail:E-mail: Quote DateShip ViaF.O.B.Customer PO NumberPayment Method 10/27/21GROUND SHIPMENTPPAY & ADD TO INVOICEnet30 Entered ByOrdered BySalesperson Project Name Chuck GeocarisChuck Geocaris-HoustonBennie Boles OrderApproveUnitExtended TaxItem Number / Description QuantityQuantityPricePrice 1Y1INSTALL KIT225.0000225.00 MISC INSTALLATION SUPPLIES I.E. Warehouse: HOUSVin #: LOOM, WIRE, HARDWARE, CONNECTORS, ETC ************************************************ 11NINSTALL2,400.00002,400.00 DSS INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Warehouse: HOUSVin #: Approved By: Approve All Items & Quantities Quote Good for 30 Days Print Date 10/27/21 11,009.79 Subtotal 08:02:37 AM Print Time 150.00 Freight 6 Page No. Printed By: Chuck Geocaris 11,159.79 Order Total REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 Requested By:Ray Mayo, Director Source of Funds:General Fund Department:Public Works Account Number:N/A Amount Budgeted:$110,000.00 ReportResolutionOrdinance Amount Requested:N/A Exhibits:Notification and Access Report, Bid from Budgeted Item:YesNo Aztec Remodeling and Landscaping. SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION City of La Porte Bid #21024 for Sylvan Beach Pier Repairs was opened and read on ndth August 12, 2021.Bids were advertised on July 22and July 29in the Bay Area Observer andOnesinglebid was received from Aztec Remodeling and Landscaping.Thescope of workwas prepared for normal maintenance type repairs. Prior to awarding the bid, the storm surge and wave action associated with Hurricane Nicholas damaged Sylvan Beach pier much more severely. Due to the change in scope of pier repairs and the additional damage to Seabreeze Park Pier, a new bid has been prepared to accomplish repairs to both piers. Staff recommends rejection of the single bid for City of La Porte Bid # 21024. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Reject the single bid for the City of La Porte Bid #21024 for Sylvan Beach Pier Repairs. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City ManagerDate Notification & Access Report to Sealed Bid #21024 - Sylvan Pier Repairs Notifications: Vendor NameReason aztec remodeling &landscaping Bid Notification BIO-WEST, Inc.Bid Notification CDC NewsBid Notification Colliers Engineering & DesignBid Notification CONSOR Engineers, LLC dba U Bid Notification ConstructConnectBid Notification Construction JournalBid Notification Crawley Shoreline Construction Bid Notification D DavilaBid Notification DeShazo Group, Inc.Bid Notification Dodge Data & AnalyticsBid Notification Durba ConstructionBid Notification Envirobidnet an Entram CorpBid Notification ERS, Inc.Bid Notification Fugro USA Land, Inc.Bid Notification HDR Engineering, Inc.Bid Notification Hearn CompanyBid Notification HenecoBid Notification HUFFMAN CONTRACTORS, LBid Notification IMSBid Notification North America Procurement CoBid Notification OnviaBid Notification Orion Marine Construction, Inc.Bid Notification Perkens WS CorporationBid Notification Professional Service Industries, Bid Notification PWXPressBid Notification RFx AnalystBid Notification SmartProcureBid Notification Taylor Marine Construction, IncBid Notification Texas Commercial DIving Inc.Bid Notification The Blue Book Building & Cons Bid Notification URS CorporationBid Notification Access: Vendor NameDocuments Crawley Shoreline Construction #21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf ConstructConnect#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Construction Journal#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf North America Procurement Co#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf PWXPress#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Orion Marine Construction, Inc.#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Dodge Data & Analytics#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf IMS#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Colliers Engineering & Design#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Onvia#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Durba Construction#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf aztec remodeling &landscaping #21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Texas Commercial DIving Inc.#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf30 Construction Software Technolo#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf RFx Analyst#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Dodge Data & Analytics#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf SmartProcure#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Hearn Company#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Perkens WS Corporation#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Taylor Marine Construction, Inc#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Heneco#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Swantner & Gordon Insurance A#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf Greenscapes 6#21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf The Blue Book Building & Cons #21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf CONSOR Engineers, LLC dba U #21024 Sylvan Pier Repair BID.pdf REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8, 2021 N/A Requested By:Source of Funds: Ray Mayo, Director Department: Public Works N/A Account Number: N/A Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance N/A Amount Requested: Exhibits: April 13, 21 City Council meeting item Budgeted Item:YesNo April 13,21 City Council meeting minutes SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATIONS As part of the FY22 pre-budget retreatheld on April 13, 2021, Council directed staff to move forward with planning for a new City Hall facility andissuance of $13.5 million dollars in certificates of obligation, and tolaterassemblea committeeof Councilpersons to assist with the project. At this time, staff is requesting appointment of members and chargesto a committee for the proposed City Hall project. Benefits: Allows forthe course of the project. Creates opportunity for creativity drawingfrom multiple resources and points of view. Promotes a team conceptfrom the project onset. Liabilities: Potential for multiple changes when presented to the full Council. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Appoint acommitteeof Councilpersonsto assist with the facilitation of the proposed City Hall project.(Complete referral of action to the committee will determine members, how chair will be selected, what the committee is charged with, and when reporting is expected from the committee.) Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City ManagerDate REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:April 10, 2021 N/A Requested By:Source of Funds: Mayor Louis Rigby Department: Public Works & Administration N/A Account Number: N/A Amount Budgeted: ReportResolutionOrdinance $65,000 Amount Requested: Exhibits:PowerPoint Presentation Budgeted Item:YesNo SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATIONS Mayor Louis Rigby has requested discussion about the construction of a new City Hall to be built next the current City Hall at 604 W. Fairmont Parkway. The La Porte City Hall was first constructed on this site in 1978. It was renovated and expanded in 2002 as part of a bond election in 2000. Today, our City Hall Facilityis facing some growing pains; Aging Equipment o Chiller will require replacement within 3-5 years -estimated at $100,000 o Portion of rooftop HVAC package needs replacement2 out of 5 estimated at $30,000 o Roof Repairs neededestimated at $200,000 o HVAC components were installed in 1978 -will require re-design of air handler system $40,000 for design only o The aand are becoming obsoleteReplacement cost is roughly estimated at $200,000 to $300,000 o Issues result in adjacent hot zones or cold zones Inefficiencies o Inadequate size of meeting rooms o Permits Desk -public area lobby is cramped o City Secretary proximity to Council Chambers,Council Meeting roomand any area where voting may be held o Unable to group departments due to layout; some staff are scattered o Ability to meet with visitors in an area adjacent to lobby ( without having to bring visitors intoa) Needs o Public Meeting Room (other than Council Chambers) o Election Equipment Storage o Walk-in office supply storage closet o Secure area to manage election materials o Safety concerns / Entrance-Exit routes o Covered Parking o Gated secure employee parking area o Employee only restrooms o Network Room /Technology upgrades o PA system for announcements ( shelter-in-place/tornado warning) o Security Cameras inside and out o Storage room for garbage bags o Enclosed bullet-proof areas for utility billing, front desk and permit desk staff o Audio Visual upgrades in all meeting rooms The recent AV upgrades to Council Chambers can be migrated to a new building Currently, La Porte City Hall is roughly 28,000 square feet. Current construction costs are indicating an average of $350 per square foot. Construction costs will continue to climb annually. Advantages of building on the neighboring property are; The City already owns the property The move could be accomplished very easily The existing building can be re-purposed If interest exists to build a new City Hall facility, Request for Qualifications can be prepared in order to evaluate potential firms to perform a needs assessment and determine space requirements for a new City Hall facility. A condition assessment of the existing building can be performed for $35,000. The approximate cost for a needs assessment is $48,000. Combining these two services would offer some savings and would be estimated at $65,000. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL Provide staff direction regarding the construction of a new City Hall Facility. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date LA PORTE CITY HALL ITEM REQUESTED BY MAYOR RIGBY YESTERDAY The current La Porte City Hall was built at 604 W. Fairmont Parkway in 1978. At that time, the City population was less than 13,000. In 1998, City Hall was due for a renovation and expansion. The expansion was completed in 2003. TODAY Another 20 years have passed, and La Porte is again experiencing growing pains. TOMORROW EXTERIOR EXAMPLES FROM OTHER CITIES 2012ComprehensivePlan: Deer Park City Hall EXTERIOR EXAMPLES FROM OTHER CITIES HuttoCity Hall EXTERIOR EXAMPLES FROM OTHER CITIES Buda City Hall & Library EXTERIOR EXAMPLES FROM OTHER CITIES Katy City Hall Proposed Mont Belvieu City Hall and Municipal Court INTERIOR EXAMPLE Aesthetic enhancements such as the design of buildings also contribute to enhanced Hutto City Hall EXTERIOR/INTERIOR EXAMPLE College Station Municipal Complex CITYHALLCOMPARISONBENCHMARKS Average Cost per Square Foot = $310.00 DRIVERS FOR BUILDING NEEDS Growing Community Enhanced Customer Service Aging Facility Technology Considerations Current Space Arrangement Current Floorplan Limitations Staging Plan for Future Growth NEXT STEPS Decide on a funding mechanism. Prepare RFQ for Architectural Firms to perform a Needs Assessment and possibly a Condition Assessment of existing building. Generate distinct needs for a new City Hall complex; e.g. public meeting rooms, election needs, technology advancements, departmental efficiencies, etc. Possibly create a committee to guide the decision making process. QUESTIONS? REQUEST FOR CITY COUNCIL AGENDA ITEM Appropriation Agenda Date Requested:November 8,2021 Requested By:Source of Funds:N/A Jason Weeks, Asst City Mgr Department: Administration/CMO Account Number:N/A Amount Budgeted:$69,948,604 ReportResolutionOrdinance Amount Requested:N/A th Exhibits: CIP 4QuarterFY 2020-21Update Budgeted Item:YesNo SUMMARY& RECOMMENDATION stth through September 30. The City of La Porte Capital Improvement Plan (CIP) program for thefourthquarter of fiscal year 2020-21, which includes activity from October1, 2020through September30, 2021has been included for you to review; therefore, the report is cumulative as the fiscal year progresses. The attached CIP Update includes several documents: Spreadsheet summary listing all outstanding Capital Projects as of October 1, 2020, with activity through September30, 2021. This spreadsheet is broken down between the different types of Capital Projects: o SEW Sewer Projects o AI Airport Projects o DR Drainage Projects o EMS EMS Project o F216 F216 Drainage Project o FD Fire Department Project o UTL Utility Projects o GEN General CIP Projects o GC Golf Course Projects o AD Administration Projects o MSTR M Street Projects (TIRZ) o SM Street Maintenance Projects o PR Parks & Recreation Projects o PW Public Works Projects o STR Street Projects Individual Project sheets, which include: 1) project number & name; 2) account number; 3) funding summary by fiscal year for budget, expenditures, encumbrances and remaining budget; 4) project description; and 5) narrative of quarter activity including any photos or diagrams. The City ofLa Porte prior to FY 2020-21had budgeted $56.0million for capital projects city-wide. In FY 2020-21, the City Council allocated $13.9million for capital projects, which brought the total budget for the CIP program to $69.9million. Project to-date, the City has spent $28.6 million on the CIP programed projects included in this update. As of September 30, 2021, the remaining budget to spend on these projects was $41.2 million. Below is a summary of the City of La Porte CIP program by CIP Type. Budget Thru FY 2020-21 Total Project To-Budget CIP Type FY20 Budget Budget Date Spent Balance Administration $375,919 $53,990 $429,909 $310,377 $119,532 Airport $530,000 $0 $530,000 $385,382 $144,618 $10,275,000 $3,605,000 $13,880,000 $406,974 $13,473,026 Drainage EMS $583,000 $100,000 $683,000 $82,561 $600,440 F216 $2,360,864 $200,000 $2,560,864 $1,386,599 $1,174,265 Fire Field $1,200,000 $0 $1,200,000 $9,500 $1,190,500 Golf Course $248,000 $600,000 $848,000 $71,375 $776,625 General CIP $5,601,432 $520,000 $6,121,432 $5,092,534 $1,028,898 M Street TIRZ $1,500,000 $0 $1,500,000 $0 $1,500,000 Parks & Rec $6,142,237 $1,927,751 $8,069,988 $4,009,985 $4,060,003 Public Works $22,340,860 $2,454,165 $24,795,025 $8,358,426 $16,436,599 Sewer $0 $350,000 $350,000 $331,992 $18,008 Street Maint $200,000 $780,000 $980,000 $767,341 $212,659 Street $2,545,000 $2,867,000 $5,412,000 $5,292,338 $119,663 Utility $2,004,046 $445,000 $2,449,046 $2,137,832 $311,214 TOTAL $55,906,358 $13,902,906 $69,809,264 $28,643,215 $41,166,049 th The CIP 4 Quarter for Fiscal Year 2020-21 Update document is attached to provide City Council with more detail concerning the ram. Staff will be available to answer any questions City Council may have concerning specific CIP Projects. Additionally, staff welcomes any feedback on future formatting and/or added detail needed for the quarterly CIP updates. ACTION REQUIRED BY CITY COUNCIL No action is needed. Staff welcomes questions and feedback about the format of the presentation. Approved for the City Council meeting agenda Corby D. Alexander, City Manager Date List of Outstanding Capital Projects as of October 1, 2020 - With activity through September 30, 2021 BudgetExpendituresBalance ProjectBudget thruActual thruActualEncumbrancesProjectBudget Proj NumProject DescriptionFundLeaderFY 19-20FY 20-21TotalFY 19-20FY 20-21FY 20-21to DateFY 20-21 Upgrade Outdoor Warning Sirens & Control Unit C AD0004015Gauither 189,000 - 189,000 175,954 6,139 - 182,0946,906 Upgrade Flashing Roadway Signs C AD0005015Gauither 108,000 - 108,000 - 94,356 3,927 98,2839,717 AD0006City Hall Conference Room Expansion015Miller 48,919 - 48,919 - - - -48,919 Council Chambers AV Upgrade (Year 1) C AD0007015Parker 30,000 - 30,000 - 30,000 - 30,000 - AD0008Bus Covers (EDC Funded)015Weeks - 12,000 12,000 - - - -12,000 AD0009Election Equipment (prefunding)015Woodward - 41,990 41,990 - - - -41,990 Administration Total 375,919 53,990 429,909 175,954 130,495 3,927 310,377119,532 AIR001Runway, Taxi, Tie Down Rehabilitation Design010/032Mayo 300,000 - 300,000 156,437 10,462 - 166,899133,101 AIR002Runway, Taxi, Tie Down Rehabilitation Construction010/015Mayo 200,000 - 200,000 192,283 - - 192,2837,717 AIR003Construct Drainage Improvements010Mayo 30,000 - 30,000 14,142 1,463 10,595 26,2003,800 Airport Total 530,000 - 530,000 362,862 11,925 10,595 385,382144,618 DR0001TV Insprection of Storm Sewer System019Mayo 90,000 30,000 120,000 54,099 18,341 10,859 83,29936,701 DR0004Drainage Materials (in-house)019Mayo 195,000 75,000 270,000 69,791 - - 69,791200,209 DR0006Brookglen Drainage - Design & Construction (HMGP)015/019/032Mayo 4,275,000 1,500,000 5,775,000 - - - -5,775,000 003/015/019/ DR0007Bayside Terrace Drainage Improvements Design (HMGP)033/032Mayo 2,300,000 2,000,000 4,300,000 85,495 140,251 28,138 253,8844,046,116 DR0008F101 Lomax Drainage Improvements Design (HMGP)015/019/032Mayo 3,350,000 - 3,350,000 - - - -3,350,000 DR0009Batleground Estates Drainage Improvements Design019Mayo 65,000 - 65,000 - - - -65,000 Drainage Total 10,275,000 3,605,000 13,880,000 209,385 158,592 38,997 406,97413,473,026 EMS001EMS Headquarter Expansion015Mayo 583,000 100,000 683,000 48,757 32,403 1,401 82,561600,440 EMS Total 583,000 100,000 683,000 48,757 32,403 1,401 82,561600,440 015/019/032/ F216F216 Phase II & III - Little Cedar Bayou Drainage050Mayo 2,360,864 200,000 2,560,864 908,888 25,590 452,122 1,386,599 1,174,265 FD0002Fire Field Propane Project015Gifford 1,200,000 - 1,200,000 9,500 - - 9,5001,190,500 C GC0002Golf Maintenance Building Improvement015Stoker 51,000 - 51,000 50,675 - - 50,675325 C GC0003Clubhouse Repairs015Stoker 28,000 - 28,000 11,122 9,577 - 20,7007,300 GC0004Golf Course Land Improvements - 015Stoker 169,000 - 169,000 - - - -169,000 GC0005Golf Course Infrastructure (EDC Funded)015Stoker - 600,000 600,000 - - - -600,000 1 List of Outstanding Capital Projects as of October 1, 2020 - With activity through September 30, 2021 BudgetExpendituresBalance ProjectBudget thruActual thruActualEncumbrancesProjectBudget Proj NumProject DescriptionFundLeaderFY 19-20FY 20-21TotalFY 19-20FY 20-21FY 20-21to DateFY 20-21 Golf Course Total 248,000 600,000 848,000 61,797 9,577 - 71,375776,625 GEN620Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. Park Replacement015Miller 95,000 - 95,000 70,881 169 - 71,05023,950 GEN641SunGard ONE Solution - Phase I015 Dolby 50,000 - 50,000 28,938 - - 28,93821,062 GEN656Emergency Prepardness/Generators015Mayo 2,400,000 - 2,400,000 2,184,806 9,588 28,710 2,223,104 176,896 GEN661Golf Course Fairway Upgrade015Stoker 170,000 - 170,000 128,893 4,480 - 133,37336,627 GEN671Infill Sidewalk015Mayo 223,000 60,000 283,000 - 183,109 39,891 223,00060,000 GEN675Community Coop Projects015Weeks 30,000 30,000 60,000 9,161 - - 9,16150,839 C*GEN683Concrete Repair Slab Jacking033Mayo - 30,000 30,000 - 29,687 - 29,687313 GEN684Concrete Repair (Small Sections)033Mayo 1,250,000 200,000 1,450,000 498,949 184,867 335,759 1,019,575 430,425 GEN693City Hall Renovations015Miller 75,763 - 75,763 58,986 - - 58,98616,777 GEN927Handicap Ramp/sidewalks033Mayo 900,000 200,000 1,100,000 593,425 101,101 348,471 1,042,997 57,003 GEN993Enhancement Grants015Weeks 407,669 - 407,669 215,270 37,392 - 252,662155,007 General Total 5,601,432 520,000 6,121,432 3,789,310 550,393 752,831 5,092,534 1,028,898 MSTRM Street - TIRZ Project015Mayo 1,500,000 - 1,500,000 - - - -1,500,000 PR0006Northwest Pool Improvements015Miller 905,435 - 905,435 803,011 78,202 - 881,21324,222 PR0007Wave Pool Renovation (Year 2)015Miller 910,000 250,000 1,160,000 514,559 - - 514,559645,441 PR0008Design Services for Recreation Center Expansion015Miller 3,202,152 - 3, 202,152 316,797 - 11,426 328,2232,873,929 C PR0011Decorative Broadway Lighting (EDC Funded)015Miller 480,700 - 480,700 241,392 141,188 - 382,58098,120 PR0012Park Lighting Project (Year 1 - Northwest Park)015Miller 523,950 - 523,950 23,835 258,569 140,059 422,463101,487 C PR0013Library Improvements015Miller 120,000 - 120,000 107,204 18,630 - 125,834(5,834) PR0014San Jacinto Pool015Miller - 456,006 456,006 - 410,572 12,477 423,04932,957 PR0015San Jacinto Pool - Splash Pad015Miller - 186,000 186,000 - 188,080 - 188,080(2,080) PR0016Park Light Project - Little Cedar Bayou015Miller - 389,445 389,445 - - 363,370 363,37026,075 PR0017Fairmont Park West (Included Year 1 of 3 for Splash Pad Funding)015Miller - 291,300 291,300 - 70,310 - 70,310220,990 C PR0018Handicap Playground (EDC Funded)015Miller - 250,000 250,000 - 219,985 - 219,98530,015 PR001914th Street Playground Equipment (EDC Funded)015Miller - 55,000 55,000 - 40,952 - 40,95214,048 C PR0020Fairmont Park Fitness Equipment (EDC Funded)015Miller - 50,000 50,000 - 49,368 - 49,368632 Parks & Recreation Total 6,142,237 1,927,751 8,069,988 2,006,798 1,475,855 527,332 4,009,985 4,060,003 C PW0006Design & Replacement for Hillridge Booster Pump003Mayo 100,000 - 100,000 93,895 - - 93,8956,105 PW0009Coupland Drive Improvements019/033/051Mayo 1,310,000 - 1,310,000 132,755 23,738 31,133 187,6261,122,374 PW0012Lomax Lift Station Consolidation 051/052Mayo 10,195,000 - 10,195,000 853,118 38,520 154,160 1,045, 7989,149,202 2 List of Outstanding Capital Projects as of October 1, 2020 - With activity through September 30, 2021 BudgetExpendituresBalance ProjectBudget thruActual thruActualEncumbrancesProjectBudget Proj NumProject DescriptionFundLeaderFY 19-20FY 20-21TotalFY 19-20FY 20-21FY 20-21to DateFY 20-21 PW0015Restroom/Pavilion at Five Points015Mayo 750,000 394,165 1,144,165 95,651 334,541 686,016 1,116,209 27,956 PW0016Parking Spaces at Pecan Park015Mayo 350,000 - 350,000 315,699 28,500 - 344,1995,801 C PW0017Fairmont Parkway Signalization Project015Mayo 1,500,000 - 1,500,000 - - - -1,500,000 PW0020Fencing on Spencer Highway015Mayo 1,240,400 - 1,240,400 368,988 86,997 52,353 508,337732,063 PW0023Commercial Water Meter Replacement003Mayo 120,000 25,000 145,000 46,068 3,163 - 49,23195,769 PW0027Design for Drainage Improvements (6th St/N Madison & W. Main)051/032Mayo 400,000 - 400,000 153,928 56,317 23,605 233,849166,151 003/015/050/ 051 PW0028Design Somerton ImprovementsMayo 2,350,000 - 2,350,000 1,278,468 - - 1,278,468 1,071,532 C PW0029Main Street Sidewalk Repairs015Mayo 15,000 - 15,000 - 15,000 - 15,000 - PW0032Construct N. 6th/Main to Tyler and Main St Drainage003/050Mayo 990,000 - 990,000 - 196,144 648,216 844,360145,640 PW0033Hillridge Pump Station Construction Phase 1003Mayo 1,235,460 - 1,235,460 639,941 426,276 37,723 1,103,940 131,520 PW0034Aerial Crossings003Mayo 215,000 25,000 240,000 72,202 4,512 5,375 82,089157,911 PW0041Public Works Facility Assessment015Mayo 140,000 - 140,000 46,849 - 2,536 49,38590,615 C PW0043East Main Street Sidewalk (Prefunding)015Mayo 430,000 - 430,000 267,157 68,271 4,340 339,76990,231 C PW0046Pumps & Equipment Replacement003Mayo 100,000 50,000 150,000 20,552 - - 20,552129,448 PW0049Replace Ground Tank - Hillridge Water Plant003Mayo 300,000 - 300,000 20,000 170,000 - 190,000110,000 C PW0050Coating Lomax Water Tower003Mayo 600,000 - 600,000 62,500 296,500 - 359,000241,000 PW0053Replace Main Lift Pump 1 & 2003Mayo - 120,000 120,000 - - 95,992 95,99224,008 PW0054Copper Limit Study003Mayo - 100,000 100,000 - - 51,000 51,00049,000 C PW0055Replace Electrical Panel and 1 Pump LS 1A003Mayo - 90,000 90,000 - 71,852 - 71,85218,148 PW0056Replace Belt Press 1003Mayo - 450,000 450,000 - - 186,894 186,894263,106 C PW0057Replace 3 Lift Pump Check Valves003Mayo - 30,000 30,000 - 23,221 - 23,2216,779 C PW0058Replace Blower003Mayo - 40,000 40,000 - 37,760 - 37,7602,240 PW0059Public Works Facility Design015Mayo - 750,000 750,000 - - - -750,000 PW0060Pecan Park Parking Lot Improvement015Mayo - 350,000 350,000 - - - -350,000 PW0061Plant 9 Ground Storage Tank Replacement003Mayo - 30,000 30,000 - 15,000 15,000 30,000 - Public Works Total 22,340,860 2,454,165 24,795,025 4,467,771 1,896,311 1,994,344 8,358,426 16,436,599 *SEW669Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation 018Mayo - 350,000 350,000 - 303,216 28,776 331,99218,008 *SM0002Asphalt Street Surfacing033Mayo - 720,000 720,000 - - 604,840 604,840115,160 SM0003Street Repair Material (in-house)033Mayo 200,000 60,000 260,000 137,489 18,692 6,320 162,50197,499 Street Maintenance Total 200,000 780,000 980,000 137,489 18,692 611,160 767,341212,659 STR7THSouth 7th Street Paving and Drainage003/019/033Mayo 2,435,000 2,867, 000 5,302, 000 297,586 20,293 4,864,458 5,182, 338119,663 3 List of Outstanding Capital Projects as of October 1, 2020 - With activity through September 30, 2021 BudgetExpendituresBalance ProjectBudget thruActual thruActualEncumbrancesProjectBudget Proj NumProject DescriptionFundLeaderFY 19-20FY 20-21TotalFY 19-20FY 20-21FY 20-21to DateFY 20-21 C STRLCBLittle Cedar Bayou Drive Concrete Paving033Mayo 110,000 - 110,000 - 110,000 - 110,000 - STR Total 2,545,000 2,867,000 5,412,000 297,586 130,293 4,864,458 5,292,338 119,663 UTL655Meter Replacement Program003Dolby 1,839,046 350,000 2,189,046 1,616,344 149,671 205,815 1,971,830 217,216 UTL697Valve Replacement Program (In-House)003Mayo 165,000 25,000 190,000 91,064 15,427 - 106,49183,509 C*UTL760Lift Station Improvements003Mayo - 35,000 35,000 - 34,793 - 34,793207 *UTL898In House Waterline Replacement 003Mayo - 35,000 35,000 - 24,719 - 24,71910,281 Utility Total 2,004,046 445,000 2,449,046 1,707,408 224,609 205,815 2,137,832 311,214 55,906,358 13,902,906 69,809,264 14,183,506 4,967,951 9,491,758 28,643,215 41,166,049 CCompleted Projects - will be closed out at end of fiscal year. * Expenditures reported for FY20-21 were incurred prior to September 30, 2021. Expenditures posted after this date will be reflected on the next monthly report. 4 AD0004 – Upgrade Outdoor Warning Sirens & Control Unit Account Number: 0156054-510Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 189,000$ 175,954$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 189,000$ 175,954$ -$ 13,046 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The City has a total of thirteen (13) outdoor warning sirens. In 2000, the City began replacing one original siren a year over an 11-year period. During this time, the LEPC purchased two (2) additional sirens for the City, making a total of thirteen (13). The last siren upgrade was completed in 2012. Some of our current sirens are nearly 20 years old. The equipment is outdated and maintenance intensive. Staff has been working to maintain the sirens each year, but believes it is time for an upgrade of the system. One siren was substantially upgraded in 2018, so staff is proposing replacement or significant repairs of the remaining twelve (12) sirens in the next fiscal year. Also, staff is proposing that the City purchase a control unit that will allow staff the opportunity to monitor the status of the sirens from Dispatch 24/7. This will allow the City to quickly identify when there is an issue with one of the sirens, so that it can be addressed in a more timely and effective manner. The sirens were discussed as part of OEM’s presentation at the Council budget retreat. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 This project is complete. 5 AD0005 – Upgrade Flashing Roadway Signs Account Number: 0156054-510Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 108,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 94,356 3,927 Total$ 108,000$ 94,356 $ 3,927$ 9,717 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION In 2008, the LEPC purchased and installed nine (9) Flashing Roadway Signs for the City of La Porte at various locations throughout the city. These signs were intended to alert drivers to an emergency situation, and direct them to AM 830 to listen for more information. Today, the signs are not in good working order, and the process of referring drivers to AM 830 is outdated. The radio station is not managed by the City of La Porte, so the City cannot ensure it is always working properly. In addition, staff feels it would be more effective to provide an emergency announcement to drivers, including protective actions that should be taken. While the signs can be used for emergency situations (i.e. Shelter in Place, Flash Flood Warning, Tornado Warning, Mandatory Evacuation Order, etc.), they can also be used for day-to-day community messaging. This would allow the City to promote various events and City activities along roadways throughout the City. This initial request is to upgrade six (6) of the original signs, but the system can be expanded in the future, if desired. The signs would be used to promote citywide events and to attract visitors to La Porte to stay and shop. Staff feels this project would be beneficial, not only for public communications, but also for improving aesthetics at the proposed locations. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 On December 14, 2020, staff presented several sign options to City Council, and requested direction for the project. City Council directed staff to seek pricing for two, double-sided signs with a decorative pole. On January 25, 2021, staff will take this option to City Council for approval. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 On January 25, 2021, City Council approved $89,130.00 for the purchase of two (2) double-faced, high quality LED signs with decorative poles. The LED displays are now complete, so the contractor will begin working to put the entire sign together. The two (2) new signs will be installed at: (1) the th north side of Main Street westbound, between SH 146 and 14 Street, and (2) the south side of th Fairmont Pkwy eastbound, between SH 146 and 8 Street. Staff is hoping the signs will be installed by the beginning of June. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 th Both signs will be installed on Friday, July 30. Multiple staff members have completed training on the system that allows the City to create and post messages. Staff is developing graphics for various events and programs that will go live as soon as the signs are up and running. Emergency Management staff will continue to work with the Marketing and Special Events Coordinator, Marketing and Events Specialists, and all departments to keep messaging for the signs updated with information that promotes City events, programs, and services. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 This project is complete. Both sirens have been installed, and are up and running. 6 AD0006 – City Hall Conference Room Expansion Account Number: 0150156060-510Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20 48,919 - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 48,919$ -$ -$ 48,919 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This projectis to create additional space in the conference room across from the City Manager’s Suite and to add four additional office spaces in the Planning hallway. There is limited availability to have large group meetings in City Hall. Twice a month, the City Manager’s Office has executive staff meetings that are required to be held at Fire Station #1 due to limited space within City Hall. Additionally, on Tuesday pre-development meetings, the space within City Hall continues to be a problem with standing room only and not enough space for all needed staff to attend the meeting. Based on the current layout of City Hall the best option was to double the conference room space in the conference room across from the City Manager’s suite and then remove the cubicle area along the Planning hallway and convert those to four (4) office spaces. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, this project was on hold due to Purchasing Department requirements. Staff will be obtaining an architect for this project in the Second Quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff began getting quotes and purchase orders issued during the second quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project has been placed on hold due to City Council’s decision to move forward with plans to build a new City Hall. No activity during the third quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 This project has been placed on hold due to City Council’s decision to move forward with plans to build a new City Hall. No activity during the fourth quarter. 7 AD0007 – Council Chambers AV Upgrade (Year1) Account Number: 0155051-522Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 30,000$ -$ 30,000 Fiscal Year 20-21 - Total$ 30,000$ -$ 30,000$ - P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Due to aging equipment, the Information Technology Department with CSO input has planned to upgrade the City Council Chambers audio video equipment. This is a planned 2-year project with partial funding in FY 2019-20 and the remaining funding coming in FY 2020-21. Staff will be starting this project in FY 2020-21 during the month of December 2020. The thought behind waiting was to ensure there is no interruption of any scheduled City Council and/or Board meetings. The scope of the project will be to replace the audio system with a newer more user-friendly system. The new system will be relocated into the back storage closet instead of under the City Council dais. Along with upgrading the audio equipment, staff will upgrade the City Council microphones, audience- facing speakers and include City Council and audience facing cameras. Also, staff will work with the City’s Facility Maintenance Department to create a more user-friendly dais, which will allow a better writing surface and allow the existing display monitors to be recessed into the current wells. Additionally, staff will update the existing three audience video displays with a newer larger set. This will allow the audience to see presentations clearer in the future meetings. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 After a number of scheduling delays the Technology Division was able to work with the audio visual contracting company, Ford Audio Video to provide an implementation schedule for February 9, 2021. Ford Audio Video anticipates this will be a two (2) week implementation and is projected to be completed on February 17, 2021. Once the audio video system has been upgraded we will then be able to stream all public meetings to the official City of La Porte website. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 After a number of scheduling delays the Technology Division was able to work with the audio visual contracting company to get the new audio video stsyem implemented and tested. The City of La Porte started live streaming the City Council meetings on March 22, 2021. This project is now completed. 8 AD0008 – Bus Covers (EDC Funded) Account Number: 0159892-675Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 12,000$ -$ - Total$ 12,000$ -$ -$ 12,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project is funded by the EDC and includes eight bus covers. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff has reached out the Harris County to begin discussions with their Transportation Department concerning the installation of bus covers at multiple Harris County Public Transit bus stops. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 There is no update for the second quarter FY 20-21. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Harris County Transit and the City of La Porte (COLP) Parks & Recreation Department have installed bus coverings at the following location: Spencer and Farrington west bound, Spencer and Underwood (Walgreens) west bound, Spencer and Underwood (CVS) east bound, Spencer and Canada east bound, in front of COLP Special Programs building on S. Broadway, and a bench by the old Carl`s Jr. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 There are no additional updates for fourth quarter. There is one additional bus covering to install on Spencer Eastbound at Farrington, but staff is waiting until the Spencer Wall Project on the Southside of Spencer is completed. 9 AD0009 – Election Equipment (Prefunding) Account Number: 0156067-510Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 41,990$ -$ - Total$ 41,990$ -$ -$ 41,990 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Beginning with the adoption of the 2020-2021 budget, and in preparation for the eventual replacement of the election equipment, $41,990 will be set aside for each of the next three years (2020-2021, 2021-2022, and 2022-2023). The equipment has been working well and received maintenance in January 2020, but is aging and is not intuitive, such as the voters’ expectations of screens being touchscreens. The current equipment does not provide voters a copy of their votes as cast, which has become a national trend. Every legislative year brings the chance that there will be requirements for upgrades. LPISD indicated in spring 2020 that they are open to contributing to equipment purchases when necessary. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 No update this quarter, nothing was purchased. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity in the second quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity in the third quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity in the fourth quarter. 10 AIR001 – Runway, Taxi, Tie Down Rehabilitation Design Account Number: 010/0329891-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 300,000$ 19,250 $ - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 288 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 136,899 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 10,462 - Total$ 300,000$ 166,899$ -$ 133,101 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project includes design for the rehabilitation of the Airport runways, taxiways, and tie downs. The condition of the runways is fair. However, with pro-active maintenance, the extremely high cost to completely pull out existing material and replace can be avoided. The total budget is $300,000. The project is grant funded and the City’s share is 10%. The remainder of the funding is located in Fund 032 (Grand Fund). Future Operating Impact: Completing rehabilitation in the next few years will help the City avoid a very costly complete reconstruction of the runways, taxiways, etc. in the future. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Original identified project is complete. The remaining funds have been authorized to evaluate the potential for additional drainage improvements on the north and east side of the airport. The preliminary report has been received from the consultant. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. 11 AIR002 – Runway, Taxi, Tie Down Rehabilitation Construction Account Number: 010/0157077-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 200,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 192,283 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 200,000$ 192,283$ -$ 7,717 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project includes design forthe rehabilitation of the Airport runways, taxiways, and tie downs. The condition of the runways is fair. However, with pro-active maintenance, the extremely high cost to completely remove existing material and replace can be avoided. The total budget is $200,000 with supplemental funding in Fund 015 (Utility Fund) in the amount of $7,717. The overall total project budget is $2,000,000. The project is grant funded and the City’s share is 10%. The remainder of the funding is located in Fund 032 (Grand Fund) and Fund 015 (Utility Fund). Future Operating Impact: Completing rehabilitation in the next few years will help the City avoid a very costly complete reconstruction of the runways, taxiways, etc. in the future. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Original identified project is complete. The remaining funds have been authorized to evaluate the potential for additional drainage improvements on the north and east side of the airport. The preliminary report has been received from the consultant. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. 12 AIR003 – Construct Drainage Improvements Account Number: 0107077-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 30,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 14,142 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 1,463 10,595 Total$ 30,000 $ 15,605$ 10,595$ 3,800 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund future drainage improvements, as identified by the drainage study. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarteron airport drainage construction. Original identified project is complete. The remaining funds have been authorized to evaluate the potential for additional drainage improvements on the north and east side of the airport. The preliminary report has been received from the consultant. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. 13 DR0001 – TV Inspection of Storm Sewer System Account Number: 0199881-690Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 20,000$ 23,029 $ - Fiscal Year 17-18 20,000 1, 286 - Fiscal Year 18-19 20,000 16,356 - Fiscal Year 19-20 30,000 13,428 - Fiscal Year 20-21 30,000 18,341 10,859 Total$ 120,000$ 72,440 $ 10,859$ 36,701 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund the continuation of a program initiated in mid-FY13. The goal is to inspect and video the entire city storm sewer system over a 5-year time frame. The funding is to be utilized for contract inspection and video. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Purchase Order established for $29,200 to AAA Flexible Pipe on December 30, 2020. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 A work order has been issued for East E, F, and H Streets. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 A work order has been completed for East E, F, and H Streets. 14 DR0004 – Drainage Materials (in-house) Account Number: 0199881-690Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 60,000 $ 18,593$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 60,000 45,695 - Fiscal Year 19-20 75,000 5,503 - Fiscal Year 20-21 75,000 - - Total$ 270,000$ 69,791$ -$ 200,209 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the purchase of materials for in-house drainage work. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Equipment rental and materials were purchased for Drainage Repairs at Glen Meadows Park. 15 DR0004 – Drainage Materials (in-house), continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 th Materials purchased for repair on Bayshore Drive and B Street at 15 Street. Bayshore Drive sink hole. 16 DR0004 – Drainage Materials (in-house), continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Bay Harbor 17 DR0004 – Drainage Materials (in-house), continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 18 DR0006 – Brookglen Drainage – Designand Construction (HMGP) – City’s Grant Match Account Number: 015/0199881-690Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 275,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 19-204,000,000 - - Fiscal Year 20-211,500,000 - - Total$ 5,775,000$ -$ -$ 5,775,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will design and construct drainage improvements to mitigate the effect of flooding in the Brookglen subdivision. The total project estimated at $4,000,000. This project is being pre-funded with $1,000.000 budgeted within Fund 015(FY19). The remaining $1,500,000 is anticipated to be included with the FY22 budget to complete the project funding. This project will be submitted to receive approval for grant funds within FY20 for the total project cost. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. Staff is working with Grant Administrator to prepare an application for GLO- Supplemental grant program, which the COLP was invited to apply for. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Grant process is still in review. The possibility exists to share costs with Harris County Flood Control District as a partnership project. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. CDBG grant application pending approval. Interlocal Agreement (ILA) for Harris County Flood Control District (HCFCD) partnership funding being negotiated. 19 DR0007 – Bayside Terrace Drainage Improvement – Designand Construction (HMGP) – City’s Grant Match Account Number: 003/015/019/032/0339881-690Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 100,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 19-202,200,00085,459 Fiscal Year 20-212,000,000140,251 28,138 Total$ 4,300,000$ 225,710$ 28,138$ 4,046,152 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will design and construct the needed improvements to redirect, provide adequate capacity and improve drainage in the Bayside Terrace Subdivision. Total cost for this project is estimated at $4,400,000; year one of two year funding. Additional funds to be provided by Fund 003 ($400,000) and 033 ($800,000). . Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Preliminary Engineering Report is complete. Design efforts are underway. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant is preparing 60% of the construction plans. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant has prepared 90% construction plans. The possibility exists to share costs with Harris County Flood Control District as a partnership project. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Approximately 90% of the construction plans are complete. Staff is preparing to discuss potential construction conflicts with residents, prior to finalizing design. ILA for HCFCD Partnership Funding being negotiated. 20 DR0008 – F-101 Lomax Drainage Improvements - Design Account Number: 015/019/0329881-690Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 150,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 19-203,200,000 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 3,350,000$ -$ -$ 3,350,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project designs the improvements identified by the feasibility study conducted in 2018 by KSA Engineers related to drainage improvements located in Lomax along F-101. Total project cost estimated at $3,200,000. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Harris County Flood Control District (HCFCD) is leading this project. HCFCD held public meeting in December 2020. Hydrology and hydraulic models have been completed for all alternatives. A draft PER has been submitted to HCFCD for review. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Environmental study and Final PER are pending. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Harris County is leading this project. Approximately 30% design drawings have been completed. Subsurface utility engineering efforts are underway to address pipeline conflicts. 21 DR0009 – Battleground Estates Drainage Improvements Design Account Number: 0199881-690Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 65,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 65,000 $ -$ -$ 65,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The drainage improvement project is focused on the Lomax Area north of “P” Street. Mitigation efforts include adjustments to existing roadside ditches, increasing culvert sizes and drainage channel improvements. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant didn’t respond in a timely manner. Therefore, staff is planning to advertise a Request For Qualification (RFQ) for drainage related engineering services related to this project and future projects. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. The Request for Qualifications (RFQ) are pending. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 A consultant has been selected; awaiting a proposal for professional services agreement. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Professional services agreement negotiations put on hold due to potential to receive ARPA grant funds to accomplish this project. No progress this quarter. 22 EMS001 – EMS Headquarter Expansion Account Number: 0155059-522Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20 583,000 48,757 - Fiscal Year 20-21 100,000 32,403 1,401 Total$ 683,000$ 81,160 $ 1,401$ 600,439 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION EMS Headquarters located at 10428 Spencer Highway was renovated in 2007 to house EMS operations. EMS Headquarters is in need of expanding and remodeling in order to address an outdated co-ed dormitory design and the lack of any training room area for paramedics to train. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design efforts are 95% completed. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project is prepared to go out for bid. Work is scheduled to re-locate a gas main on the east side of the facility. Asbestos survey has been scheduled. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The bids received were unbalanced and all over budget. Preparing to reject bids and refine the bid item summary. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Bid form and construction drawings are being revised. Project expected to be rebid first quarter FY 21-22. 23 F216 – Phase 2& 3 – Little Cedar Bayou Drainage Account Number: 015019/032/0509892-530Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 12-13$ 1,500,000$ 34,180 $ - Fiscal Year 13-14 - 345 - Fiscal Year 14-15 - (1,845) - Fiscal Year 15-16 - 175,404 - Fiscal Year 16-17 35,864 196,372 - Fiscal Year 17-18 - 56,868 - Fiscal Year 18-19 825,000 447,564 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 200,000 25,590 452,122 Total$ 2,560,864$ 934,478$ 452,122$ 1,174,264 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This CDBG Ike grant funded project (round 2.1) will provide for the second phase of the Little Cedar Bayou drainage improvements. Phase I was completed in 2011 and included a 28 acre regional detention basin south of W. Main Street. Phase II consists of 1.3 miles of bayou widening between W. Main and Sens Road. While the entire project is not contemplated in the upcoming budget, the project scope will be derived from the 1.5 million of funds available from the grant. The current scope will provide engineering of the entire project as well as acquisition and construction of approximately 1000 linear feet working northward from W. Main Street. Tree mitigation survivability contract signed for environmental clearance to proceed with ROW acquisition. Phase III – This project will fund construction of Phase III of Little Cedar Bayou Drainage improvements, from Madison Street to Sens Road, including a drainage analysis to evaluate potential improvements to mitigate flooding along H Street. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Professional services contract approved at the December 14, 2020 City Council meeting. Notice to proceed is expected to be issued by mid-January 2021. Harris County Flood Control District (HCFCD) is expected to present an ILA to Commissioner's Court in January 2021 for the 50/50 cost share of the F216 scope of work. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design consultant is coordinating with HCFCD to kick-off existing conditions model. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant is nearing completion on existing conditions modeling. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant completed existing conditions model for H Street at Sens Rd component. F216 component on hold due to delays associated coordinating with HCFCD. 24 FD0002 – Fire Field Propane Project Account Number: 0155051-522Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 1,200,000$ 9,500$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 1,200,000$ 9,500$ -$ 1,190,500 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Changes in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and the fact that the community is growing toward the fire field, the La Porte Fire Department feels that it is time to upgrade the facilities to propane. There are many advantages to using propane as oppose to ‘Class A’ type fuels. The biggest advantage is propane props are safer than ‘Class A’ type fuels. Also, propane is better for the environment and has no irritating smell. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Currently updating bids on LPG projects and contacting contractors to begin bids on site prep work. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff is proposing a change in scope for this project; however, staff is awaiting approval from City Council and Fire Control Board (FCB is funding project). Staff is finalizing bids and adding remodel of Fire Training Center to scope. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 City Council and Fire Control, Prevention and Emergency Medical Services Board both approved change in scope. Bid updates are in progress and quotes for foundation work should be submitted soon. Site prep work should begin in fourth quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Waiting for approval on Co-Op from Purchasing. Met with Purchasing to begin detailed bid specs on foundation work. Received quotes for outside burn props. 25 GC0002 – Golf Maintenance Building Improvements Account Number: 0156049-551Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 51,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 35,000 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 15,675 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 51,000$ 50,675$ -$ 325 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION These funds will fund the replacement of the maintenance barn walls/roof and replacement of base plates/doors. The proposed components for replacement are approximately 25 years old. The total cost of the projects is $45,000. However, savings from FY 15-16 project to re- skin the cart barn yielded substantial savings, which will be incorporated into the Maintenance Barn project. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Project is complete and no further projects planned. 26 GC0003 – Clubhouse Repairs Account Number: 0156049-551Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 28,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 11,122 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 9,577 - Total$ 28,000 $ 20,699$ -$ 7,301 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project is to fund painting the Clubhouse for $20,000 and replacing counters and cabinets for $8,000. These funds will be used to freshen up the Clubhouse. The outside and inside of the clubhouse are in need of fresh paint. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 The search for outside furniture and PA system has begun and will have in before the start of tournament season. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, staff is working with City staff to replace all the light fixtures in the clubhouse to LED lighting. New outdoor furniture has replaced the old furniture along with the new PA system has been upgraded to a mobile PA system for outside events that will gather under the pavilion. 27 GC0003 – Clubhouse Repairs, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 28 GC0003 – Clubhouse Repairs, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Some old lighting has been replaced with new fixtures and LED lighting. When new lighting is received, the remainder of light fixtures will be replaced. Old exhaust fan in cart barn has been taken out and replaced with new exhaust fan. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 All lighting is now complete in the clubhouse. Finance will re-appropriate Clubhouse Repairs remaining budgeted funds for new projects in FY 21-22. 29 GC0004 – Golf Course Land Improvements Account Number: 0156049-551Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 169,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 169,000$ -$ -$ 169,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This projectwill be used to address necessary infrastructure improvements at the golf course including bridge replacement at Hole #8, cart path repair, culvert repair, bulkhead repair, and an aeration system for the pond at the clubhouse entrance. These funds will be used to repair existing bulkhead on Hole #11 and #15. Also reroute the cart path on Hole #11 so the bulkhead can be tied into the bank for better stability. The culvert on Hole #17/18 will be repaired and aeration system will be added to hole #1 one to circulate the water to help eliminate the algae build up in the pond. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff met with two contractors to assess the job needed to be done. Staff will be getting measurements for bulkhead replacement, covert replacement and concrete work for this project. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Measurements for have been taken for new bulkheading to be constructed on holes #1 and #18 along with the measurements to remove the existing bulkheading on Hole #11 and #15. Bids will be set up for new construction on Hole #1 and #18 and a bid for removing existing bulkhead on hole #11 and #15, taken off property and replaced with new bulkheading. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff invited GreenScape 6 out to survey the job needed to remove existing bulkhead and replace with new bulkheading on Hole #11 and #15. A scope of work and specifications has been received and staff will create bid sheets to send out to contractors for quotes. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Working with City staff on a “scope” of work and detailed list of materials to send out for bid and then when awarded to a contractor, a timeline for projects will be determined. 30 GC0005 – Golf Course Infrastructure II (EDC Funded) Account Number: 0156049-551Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 600,000$ -$ - Total$ 600,000$ -$ -$ 600,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The funding will be used for cart path improvements and additional bulk heading. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff will be riding the golf course and deciding most critical areas for cart path replacement and new additional bulk heading. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Measurements have been taken for cart path replacement/repair on holes #1, #2, #3, repairs on hole #4, replacement on hole #6, #8 and #9. Projection for this project is in the summer time. Hoping to catch the weather with less rain to minimize the damage to the golf course. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Measurements have been taken holes on Holes #10 through #18 for needed repairs. Staff has prioritized holes with the higher need of repairs. Staff is working on a scope of work and specifications needed for these repairs. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Working with City staff on a “scope” of work and detailed list of materials to send out for bid and then when awarded to a contractor, a timeline for projects will be determined. 31 GEN620 – Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. Park Account Number: 0159892-620Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 14-15$ 60,000$ 31,788 $ - Fiscal Year 15-16 35,000 34,999 - Fiscal Year 16-17 - - - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 1,772 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 2,323 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 169 - Total$ 95,000$ 71,050$ -$ 23,950 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund the replacement of playground equipment at Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. Park. The playground is complete and all remaining funds will be used for any additional expenses associated with the Historic School House Project or sidewalks in the park. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Remaining funds from this project are being used to obtain items to place in the Historic School House. No items were purchased this quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity during the second quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 This quarter staff added a television to the schoolhouse to project a video made of past students and stories to educate visitors on the historyof the building. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity during the fourth quarter. 32 GEN641 – SunGard ONE Solution – Phase 1 Account Number: 015-9892-641Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 12-13$ 50,000$ 28,938$ - Fiscal Year 13-14 - - Fiscal Year 14-15 - - Fiscal Year 15-16 - - Fiscal Year 16-17 - - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - Total$ 50,000$ 28,938 $ -$ 21,062 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION ONE Solution replaced the existing Naviline application by SunGard as the City’s primary business application. ONE Solution is a Windows-based application, which provides greater functionality than Naviline, while also allowing for a more intuitive and modern user experience. It is designed to be a more streamlined application that takes advantage of current technology now available. Phase I included implementation of Finance, Human Resources and Purchasing applications. Following successful implementation of the Finance module, Community Service will be the next business function to transition. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Remaining funds will be used for future training for COGNOS upgrades. The COGNOS training is yet to be scheduled. This training will be for our accounting technicians. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity this quarter. Remaining funds will be used for future training for COGNOS upgrades. The COGNOS training is yet to be scheduled. This training will be for our accounting technicians. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. Remaining funds will be used for future training for COGNOS upgrades. The COGNOS training is yet to be scheduled. This training will be for our accounting technicians. 33 GEN656 – Emergency Preparedness/Generators Account Number: 0159892-656Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 12-13$ 1,100,000$ 135,104 $ - Fiscal Year 13-14 1,300,000 1,805,301 - Fiscal Year 14-15 - 184,879 - Fiscal Year 15-16 - 35,445 - Fiscal Year 16-17 - 23,777 - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 300 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 9,588 28,710 Total$ 2,400,000$ 2,194,394$ 28,710$ 176,896 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project is for the purchase of fixed generators at the Waste Water Treatment Plant to improve resident return time after an emergency. Future Operating Impact: An annual maintenance contract will be implemented once the generators are in place; however, the cost is undetermined at this time. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity for this quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff began acquiring prices for transfer switch improvements at water plant #3. Installation of the generator connection at the Municipal Airport is complete. Project awarded to contractor for the replacement of generator at the animal shelter. 34 GEN656 – Emergency Preparedness/Generators T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 Installation ofthe manual transfer switch at water Plant #3is in progress. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Installation ofthe manual transfer switch at water Plant #3is complete. 35 GEN661 – Golf Course Fairway Upgrade Account Number: 0159892-661Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 12-13 170,000 12,442 - Fiscal Year 13-14 - 28,007 - Fiscal Year 14-15 - 33,843 - Fiscal Year 15-16 - 22,665 - Fiscal Year 16-17 - 17,200 - Fiscal Year 17-18 - 14,736 - Fiscal Year 18-19 - - - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 4,480 - Total$ 170,000$ 133,373$ -$ 36,627 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project was designed to renovate and level all fairways and add new irrigation where necessary. This is an ongoing project that will be an annual project for several summers. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 This project is scheduled to take place June 21-24, 2021. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Bids will go out for the amount of sod that will be needed to complete the project. Once receiving the bids, a purchase order will be opened up for the purchase of the sod when the project is scheduled to take place. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The beginning of sanding Sanding complete 36 GEN661 – Golf Course Fairway Upgrade, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Laying Sod Sodding complete F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No projects for the fourth quarter. Finance will re-appropriate Golf Course Fairway Upgrade remaining budgeted funds for new projects in FY 21-22. 37 GEN671 – Infill Sidewalk Account Number: 0159892-671Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 223,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 60,000 183,109 39,891 Total$ 283,000$ 183,109$ 39,891$ 60,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This will be the first year of a multi-year project to extend/install sidewalk city-wide in areas of need for infill. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 The first year project is approximately 50% complete. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No Activity this quarter. Cost estimates received from contractor on new locations. Construction is set to resume in May. 38 GEN671 – Infill Sidewalk, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 A total of 3,500 SF of infill sidewalk has been constructed along Farrington Drive. The infill sidewalks construction work allows pedestrian connectivity on Farrington from Spencer Highway to Fairmont Parkway. 39 GEN671 – Infill Sidewalk, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Contractor is 95% complete with this project, project should be complete by the end of this year. 40 GEN675 – Community Coop Projects Account Number: 0159892-675Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 30,000$ 9,161$ - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 30,000 - - Total$ 60,000$ 9,161$ -$ 50,839 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The City will partner with neighborhood groups to complete various community/neighborhood improvements. Each project is considered on a first come-first served basis and will be awarded maximum of $5,000. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff issued a “Memorandum of Agreement” to Bay Point Townhomes Owner’s Association for a COOP project which will consist of removal and replacement of concrete driveway to fix potholes within their community. The estimated cost of this project is $27,366, of which only $5,000 would be reimbursable from this program. Additionally, staff has been working with Bayside Terrace Civic Club on a project that would include the addition of a chain-link fence with a gate entrance along with a new play structure at their community park. Staff is awaiting a signature from the BTCC president on the “Memorandum of Agreement” before they are given permission to proceed with this project. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff heard from the Bayside Terrace Civic Club pertaining to their project. Their Board decided to not move forward with their project. However, they may still decide to install a new play structure at their community park at a future date. At that time, they will come back to the City for the change in scope of their request. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Bayside Terrace Civic Club agreed to a Memorandum of Understanding for the City’s assisted funding of the replacement of their play structure within their community park. BTCC provided staff with estimated cost for their entire project at a cost of $3,445.42, which 50% would be eligible for reimbursement ($1,722.71). Staff is awaiting completion of this project. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Bayside Terrace Civic Club completed their Neighborhood COOP project on installing a play structure within their community park at a total cost of $4,451.08, which the City participated in a 50/50 cost share reimbursing them $2,270.54 on July 28, 2021. 41 GEN683 – Concrete Slab Jacking Account Number: 0339892-683Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 30,000$ 29,687$ - Total$ 30,000$ 29,687 $ - 313 Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This annual programincludes slab jacking at locations where settling has occurred on roadway slab sections at locations throughout the City. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, the project is underway. Approximately 4304 square feet raised on Rustic Gate, Roseberry, Poplar Cove, Garden Walk, Evelyn Kennedy Center and Hillridge. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project completed for the FY 20-21 budget. Work order completed in Fairmont Park and Glen Meadows subdivisions. 42 GEN684 – Concrete Repair (Small Sections) Account Number: 0339892-684Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 13-14$ 100,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 14-15 150,000 2,529 - Fiscal Year 15-16 200,000 4,011 - Fiscal Year 16-17 200,000 263,949 - Fiscal Year 17-18 200,000 - - Fiscal Year 18-19 200,000 223,176 - Fiscal Year 19-20 200,000 5,284 - Fiscal Year 20-21 200,000 184,867 339,212 Total$ 1,450,000$ 683,816$ 339,212$ 426,972 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project includes funding for concrete repair on small sections of streets. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, the project is underway and identified repairs are 40% completed. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. Cost estimates received from contractor on new locations. Construction is set to resume in May. 43 GEN684 – Concrete Repair (Small Sections) T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 No Activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Contractor is 50% complete on street repair small sections. Project should be completedby the end of the year. 44 GEN693 – City Hall Renovations Account Number: 0159892-693Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 14-15$ 20,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 15-16 - - - Fiscal Year 16-17 70,000 - - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 (14,237) 45,561 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 13,425 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 75,763 $ 58,986$ -$ 16,777 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION In March 2013, a security assessment was completed by the La Porte Police Department on City Hall. At that time, $20,000 was originally budgeted to address some of the security deficiencies that were identified by the assessment. Initial plans were to secure and relocate the Inspections customer service counter to the front lobby. After engaging an architect to provide plans for this relocation, it became clear that additional changes were necessary. The project scope allows the City to enhance the customer service experience by consolidating all customer related services in the front lobby, allows staff to be more secure, and provides for relocation of staff that are currently working in remote City facilities. The additional funding requested in FY17 budget added to those that have been previously allocated and the City’s General Fund contingency account. Future Operating Impact: None. The building footprint remains unchanged. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 These funds will be combined with the AD0006 – City Hall Conference Room Renovation Project. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity during the second quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The remaining portion of this project has been placed on hold due to City Council’s decision to move forward with plans to build a new City Hall. No activity during the third quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The remaining portion of this project has been placed on hold due to City Council’s decision to move forward with plans to build a new City Hall. No activity during the fourth quarter. 45 GEN927 – City Wheelchair Ramp/Sidewalk Account Number: 0339892-927Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 300,000$ 126,375$ - Fiscal Year 17-18 200,000 285,621 - Fiscal Year 18-19 200,000 118,220 - Fiscal Year 19-20 200,000 63,210 - Fiscal Year 20-21 200,000 101,101 348,471 Total$ 1,100,000$ 694,527$ 348,471$ 57,002 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This multi-year project will fund the replacement of sidewalks and installation of handicap ramps throughout the City. Future Operating Impact: Minimal. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this Quarter. Bid Opening is scheduled for February 4, 2021. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. Contract documents are executed, project will begin late April 2021. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No Activity this Quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project work order is 60% complete. 46 GEN993 – Façade Enhancement Grant Account Number: 0159892-993Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 09-10$ 200,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 10-11 - 6,179 - Fiscal Year 11-12 - 25,000 - Fiscal Year 12-13 - 32,780 - Fiscal Year 13-14 100,000 17,611 - Fiscal Year 14-15 - 34,339 - Fiscal Year 15-16 107,669 50,925 - Fiscal Year 16-17 - 19,932 - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 28,504 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 37,392 - Total$ 407,669$ 252,662 $ -$ 155,007 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Governed by the Community Development Corporation (EDC) and much like the Community Coop projects, Façade Enhancement Grants are not technically Capital Improvement Projects. Grants and/or matching funds are made available to business owners throughout the City of La Porte to enhance existing building design. Acceptable components of an application are painting, new exterior materials, signage, parking lot improvements, and landscaping, but the Board looks for complete projects, applications using multiple of the accepted components. Applicants can receive a matching reimbursement grant up to $25,000 with Board approval or $50,000 with approval from the Board and City Council. Owners and tenants may be eligible for the reimbursement grant as incentive to partner with the City of La Porte to achieve a mutual goal of visually enhancing their business. Grants are limited to $50,000 per property over three years. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff received two applications for the Enhancement Grant Program, Boats Etc. and Precision Auto th Repair, which will be presented the La Porte Development Board on January 25 for consideration. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 On January 25, 2021, the La Porte Development Corporation Board approved two (2) enhancement grant applications during the second quarter 20-21. The Board approved a grant to Boats Etc. in the amount of $12,491.41 for the building and sign enhancements to the business. Additionally, the Board approved a grant to Precision Auto Repair in the amount of $26,226.54 for the building and sign enhancements to the business. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The La Porte Development Corporation Board approved two (2) enhancement grant applications during the third quarter 20-21. On April 26, 2021, the Board approved a new sign at Snider 47 GEN993 – Façade Enhancement Grant, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Transmission, which is located at 10335 W. Fairmont Parkway for an amount not to exceed $14,140.88. Additionally, on June 28, 2021, the Board approved parking lot improvements to Patrasia Hefley’s two properties located at 831 S. Broadway (currently occupied by Dairy Queen) and 901 S. Broadway (currently occupied by Lavish T) in an amount not to exceed $7,408.50 for both projects. The Board approved payment on the two (2) approved enhancement grants awarded in the second quarter that were completed in the third quarter. The Boats, Etc. stucco and sign improvements were reimbursed in the amount of $12,557.04, while Precision Auto Repair’s stucco, sign, garage door and painting project was reimbursed in the amount of $24,835.26. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The Board approved payment on one approved enhancement grant awarded in the third quarter that was completed in the fourth quarter. Patrasia Hefley’s two properties located at 831 S. Broadway (currently occupied by Dairy Queen) and 901 S. Broadway (currently occupied by Lavish T) received parking and drainage improvements were reimbursed in the amount of $7,408.50 on September 27, 2021. 48 MSTR- M Street – TIRZ Project Account Number: 0157071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 1,500,000$ -$ - Total$ 1,500,000$ -$ - $ 1,500,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will provide for the development of the “M” Street right-of-way between SH 146 and S th 16Street. The project will consist of the construction approximately 1600 linear feet of concrete pavement, 1,300 linear feet of twelve-inch (12”) waterline, 500 linear feet of eight-inch sanitary sewer line, and 1,000 linear feet of storm sewer. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 The 60% design drawings are under review at the end of the first quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff reviewed 60% plans and returned comments to the design consultant to be revised. Awaiting 90% submittal. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Awaiting 90% submittal. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff reviewed 90% submittal. Bid documents are being prepared. Awaiting Harris County approval. 49 PR0006 – Northwest Pool Improvements Account Number:0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 9 05,435$ 32,069 - Fiscal Year 18-19 -755,610 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 15,332 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 78,202 - Total$ 9 05,435$ 881,213$ -$ 24,222 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The current buildings (restrooms, storage, pump house and guard room) are in very poor shape. The building foundation has issues and the walls were starting to crack at the joints and between the cinderblocks. Additionally, replastering the pool and re-decking the concrete are critical items as well. The total project budget is $905,435 with supplement funding provided by Fund 038 (EDC). F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Some of the remaining funds from this project are encumbered for the Wave Pool fan assembly repairs. The assembly was ordered during the fourth quarter of FY19-20. There is a long lead time for this specialty item, which is still being fabricated. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff received the Wave Pool fan assembly during this quarter. The contractor will be installing the fan during the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The new Wave Pool fan was installed during this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. 50 PR0007 – Wave Pool Renovation Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 410,000$ 67,680 $ - Fiscal Year 18-19250,000413,814 - Fiscal Year 19-20250,000 33,065 - Fiscal Year 20-21250,000 - - Total$ 1,160,000$ 514,559$ -$ 645,441 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund replastering of the pool, replacement of tiles and decking, installation of a shade structure with concrete pads, new umbrellas, and restroom upgrades. Included in this project is re- plastering the pool, removing a cracked beam, changing the pool to a zero depth entry instead of a small step down, installing drains, and repairing coping. The above renovations were complete in Fiscal Year 17-18. Included in this budget is $250,000 a year, for four years, to be set aside as prefunding for the construction of a spray park feature in the Wave Pool area. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. The City budgets $250,000 a year, for four years, to be set aside as prefunding for the construction of a spray park feature in the Wave Pool area. Funding will be complete in FY 2021-22. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity during the second quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The Request for Qualification (RFQ) was completed this quarter and a company was chosen to design the project. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The department has reached out to the RFQ award winner and have started working on details. 51 PR0008 – Design Services for Recreation Center Expansion Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 500,000$ 30,475$ - Fiscal Year 18-192,702,15214,087 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 272,235 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - 11,426 Total$ 3,202,152$ 316,797$ 11,426$ 2,873,929 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will increase the size of the facility to alleviate congestion during the busy times of the day. Based on funding, the expansion request includes: tripling the size of the current cardio equipment room, doubling the current size of the weight room, doubling the current of the aerobics room, adding on additional basketball court, expanding the locker rooms as needed for anticipated usage, adding storage, and upgrading HVAC so that it can sufficiently maintain the facility. Future Operating Impact: Possible increased usage, increased utilities, increased cleaning need, additional equipment and repairs, and additional staffing to keep up with the increased facility size and attendance. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 During this quarter, the consultant updated the plans to include renovations with the remaining budget. The consultant will be working on pricing in the next quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 During this quarter, the contractor made some additional changes to the renovation plans and worked on the project budget estimate. Staff anticipates the completed budget estimate in the early part of the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 During this quarter, the contractor made some additional changes to the renovation plans to try to get it to work within our budget. Staff anticipates the completed budget estimate in the next couple of weeks. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Received the completed budget from PGAL. Staff has scheduled to take the PGAL recommendations to City Council in October 2021. 52 PR0011 – Decorative Lighting Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 480,700$ -$ - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 241,392 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 141,188 Total$ 480,700$ 382,580$ -$ 98,120 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Decorative lighting, similar to the ones we currently have on the San Jacinto Trail, will be installed on Broadway between Wharton Weems and Dwire. The length of the section is approximately 440 linear feet and the lights would be spaced approximately every 100 feet. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project is complete. 53 PR0012 – Park Lighting Project (year 1 – Northwest Park) Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 523,950$ 23,835 $ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 258,569 140,059 Total$ 523,950$ 282,404$ 140,059$ 101,487 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The current lighting poles are made of wood and many are leaning. This project would include 23 new galvanized steel poles and 109 lights with 750W LED light Fixtures with visors. The new lights would include a 10-year maintenance-free warranty. Once installed, the lights will be operated electronically and have the ability to be scheduled when they are needed. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project went out for bid in the first quarter; however, bids came in over budget. Therefore Huitt- Zollars, Inc. made adjustments to the plans and staff plans to go out for rebid in the second quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 This project went out for bid during the second quarter. The bid for the project will be going to City Council for approval during the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 This quarter, City Council approved the vendor for this project and work has started. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project was started and will be completed during the first quarter of FY 21-22. 54 PR0013 – Library Improvements Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 120,000$ 107,204$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 18,630 - Total$ 120,000$ 125,834$ -(5,834) P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project is to replace all flooring and repaint the Library. Currently, the carpet is worn, torn, and stained. The vinyl composition tile is also outdated and worn. This project includes replacing all carpet with carpet tiles that can be changed out individually when needed. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 The library flooring and paint project is complete. 55 PR0014 – San Jacinto Pool Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 456,006$ 410,572$ 12,477 Total$ 456,006$ 410,572$ 12,477$ 32,957 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION San Jacinto Pool was built in 1966 and was the only La Porte pool at the time. San Jacinto Pool is one of the four (4) outdoor pools that the City of La Porte currently operates. The last time San Jacinto Pool was renovated was in FY2001/02. This funding is for renovations to the pool, deck, and pump system. The renovation will include using plaster instead of a vinyl liner and new water features. Approximately 80% of the deck will be replaced and have a Kool Deck coating applied. The new pump system will run more efficiently and allow for more efficient maintenance. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project went out to bid during the first quarter. Staff will be bringing this bid to City Council for approval in the second quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 The construction for this project began during the second quarter. The completion is scheduled for the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The construction has been ongoing this quarter. Project completion is scheduled for the fourth quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 The pool was completed. 56 PR0015 – San Jacinto Pool – Splash Pad Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 186,000$ 188,080$ - Total$ 186,000$ 188,080$ -(2,080) P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This funding is for the inclusion of a splash pad at the San Jacinto Pool. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project went out to bid during the first quarter. Staff will be bringing this bid to City Council for approval in the second quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 The construction for this project began during the second quarter. The completion is scheduled for the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The construction has been ongoing this quarter. Project completion is scheduled for the fourth quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The project was near completion. There was an issue with the decking under the splash pad addition that will be repaired during the first quarter of FY 21-22. 57 PR0016 – Park Light Project – Little Cedar Bayou Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 389,445$ -$ 363,370 Total$ 389,445$ -$ 363,370$ 26,075 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This is the second year of a two year project for park lighting improvements. Northwest Park was funded in Fiscal Year 2020. The current lighting poles at Little Cedar Bayou are made of steel and are in acceptable condition. This retrofit would replace 119 lights with 750W LED Light Fixtures with visors. The new fixtures will include a standard 10-year warranty. Once installed, the lights will be operated electronically and have the ability to be scheduled when they are needed. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No update this quarter. Huitt-Zollars, Inc. will begin working on the plans once the Northwest Park Lighting Project goes out for rebid. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 No update this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project’s contractor was approved by City Council during the third quarter. Techline Sports Lighting, LLC was contracted to complete this project. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project will begin the first quarter of FY 21-22. 58 PR0017 – Fairmont Park West (included Year 1 of 3 for Splash Pad Funding) Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 291,300$ 70,310 $ - Total$ 291,300$ 70,310 $ -$ 220,990 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION As part of the Parks and Recreation Master Plan, the consultant was asked for a recommendation at Fairmont Park West Park. This item was discussed at the pre-budget retreat and council expressed interest in removing the swimming pool and replacing it with a splash park, as well as renovating the park to be a Drug-Free Zone. This is the first year of a three year funding plan to move forward with this project, Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 During the first quarter the new playground was ordered and the pool and pool house were demolished. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff received the playground equipment in the second quarter. The installation of the playground equipment will be completed by Parks & Recreation staff during the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The playground was installed by the Parks and Recreation Department and is complete. Design for the Splash Park has begun. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design was completed for the Splash Park and will be presented to council during the first quarter of FY 21-22. 59 PR0018 – Handicap Playground (EDC Funded) Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 250,000$ 219,985$ - Total$ 250,000$ 219,985$ -$ 30,015 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION These funds will be used to upgrade Northwest Park with playground equipment that is handicap accessible. This project will be funded by the Economic Development Corporation. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 During the first quarter the playground equipment was ordered. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 The inclusive playground equipment remained in fabrication during this quarter. A playground contractor will be installing this playground due to the pour-in-place ground covering. Staff is hopeful that the installation will begin in the third quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The playground installation began this quarter. Project is expected to be completed in the fourth quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The project was completed. 60 th PR0019 – 14 Street Playground Equipment (EDC Funded) Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 55,000$ 40,952$ - Total$ 55,000$ 40,952$ -$ 14,048 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund the replacement of playground equipment at 14 Street Park. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 During the first quarter the playground equipment was ordered. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 During the second quarter we received this playground equipment. Staff will begin playground installation once the playground at Fairmont Park West is complete. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Playground installation has been postponed to ensure placement once the detention area has been formed by Public Works. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The playground was transferred to Spenwick Park and installation began. 61 PR0020 – Fairmont Park Fitness Equipment (EDC Funded) Account Number: 0158080-552Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 50,000$ 49,368 $ - Total$ 50,000$ 49,368 $ -$ 632 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The funding is for a multi-station training area at Fairmont Park. This option would contain one large area where multiple pieces are put together to form a training circuit. The project includes a 10-piece training circuit with rubber ground cover. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 During the first quarter the outdoor fitness equipment was ordered. In the second quarter Public Works will assist by installing cement pads. Staff anticipates the arrival of the equipment during the second quarter. Once received, Parks & Recreation staff will install the equipment on the cement pads. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 This project was completed during the second quarter. 62 PW0006 – Design and Replacement for Hillridge Booster Pump Account Number: 0037085-533Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 15-16$ 100,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 16-17 - 78,482 - Fiscal Year 17-18 - 15,413 - Fiscal Year 18-19 - - - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 100,000$ 93,895 $ -$ 6,105 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund the proposed replacement of the Hillridge Booster Pumps and design a new building. The current pumps are original and are approximately 50 years old. The new equipment will add pumping capacity. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is complete. The construction portion of this project is 100% completed. Start-up and final inspection is anticipated in February 2021. 63 PW0006 – Design and Replacement for Hillridge Booster Pump, continued F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Design is complete.The construction portion of this project is 90% completed.Started punch-list. Start-up and final inspection due soon. 64 PW0006 – Design and Replacement for Hillridge Booster Pump, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is complete. The construction portion of this project is 100% completed. Started punch-list. Instrumentation and facility corrections are being addressed. The project is substantially completed. 65 F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is complete. The construction portion of this project is 100% completed. Instrumentation and facility corrections are being addressed. Preparing for final acceptance and project close-out. 66 PW0009 – Coupland Drive Improvements Account Number: 019/033/051-7071-533Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 15-16$ 200,000$ 17,021 $ - Fiscal Year 16-17 1,110,000 12,096 - Fiscal Year 17-18 - 27,960 - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 60,830 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 14,848 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 17,468 37,403 Total$ 1,310,000$ 150,223$ 37,403$ 1,122,374 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the design for proposed improvements on Coupland Drive, as well as the acquisition of the required right-of-way for the project. The total project budget for design is $200,000, which is shared between the Drainage Fund ($100,000) and the Street Maintenance Fund ($100,000). Staff presented the construction phase of the project in the FY2017 budget for consideration. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is 95% completed. This project is to be bid and constructed in conjunction with Lomax Lift Station Consolidation Project. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is 100% completed. This project to be bid and constructed in conjunction with Lomax Lift Station Consolidation Project. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Bid package is being prepared. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Prepared to go out for bid in conjunction with Lomax Lift Station project. 67 PW0012 – Lomax Lift Station Consolidation Design Account Number: 051/052-7086-532Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 15-16$ 195,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 16-17 - 8,205 - Fiscal Year 17-18 500,000 308,971 - Fiscal Year 18-19 9,500,000 186,963 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 348,979 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 38,520 154,160 Total$ 10,195,000$ 891,638$ 154,160$ 9,149,202 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This multi-year sanitary sewer project has been approved for funding through the Texas Water Development Board’s (TWDB) Clean Water State Revolving Fund Program. The project encompasses planning, design, and construction costs. The project consists of replacement of over 20,000 feet of gravity sewer and more than 50 manholes. Also planned, is construction of one regional lift station and 10,000 feet of new sewer force main. This project will eliminate eight (8) aging stations in the area. Future Operating Impact: Improvements will be sized for ultimate build-out of the area, reduce sanitary sewer surcharging in West Lomax. The replacement of aging infrastructure will improve efficiency and reduce maintenance costs. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design efforts are 90% completed. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 95% Plans and Specifications are under review by City staff and Texas Water Development Board. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant is making suggested changes from comment period. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The Lomax project is in final review with TWDB and Harris County. Theproject documents have been updated with all required changes from the comment period. 68 PW0015 – Restroom/Pavilion at Five Points Account Number: 0157070-530Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 400,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 23,109 - Fiscal Year 19-20 350,000 72,542 - Fiscal Year 20-21 394,165 334,541 686,016 Total$ 1,144,165$ 430,192$ 686,016$ 27,957 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will include the installation of a covered, open-air outdoor pavilion and a restroom facility at Five Points Park at the corner of Main Street and Broadway Street in downtown La Porte. The restroom facility will serve the park during recurring events such as Movie in the Park, Mardi Gras on Main, Christmas on Main, Summer Party on Main and numerous parade activities (larger events will supplement the restrooms available with portable units). The pavilion will serve as an additional outdoor programming. This project is funded by the La Porte Development Corporation. Five Points Park space is in need of a covered pavilion with restrooms and storage area. The first portion of the project was funded in FY 16-17. Project scope has expanded outside of a design-build platform. Additional funds were budgeted in FY 19-20 to meet construction costs. Future Operating Impact: Minimal F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Construction of this project was awarded to Texas Specialty Construction. Contracts are being executed. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Site preparation and demo is approximately 95% complete. Building pad preparation work and installation of underground storm sewer for proposed parking lot is underway. 69 PW0015 – Restroom/Pavilion at Five Points, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 Parking lot paving has been poured. Contractor is making preparations to pour foundations for pavilion. Project is currently 25% complete. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Project is 40% complete (behind schedule). Contractor and consultant are working through approval of structural design. 70 PW0016 – Parking Spaces at Pecan Park Account Number: 0157070-530Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 350,000$ 45,535 $ - Fiscal Year 17-18 - 46,063 - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 203,599 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 20,502 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 28,500 - Total$ 3 50,000$ 344,199$ -$ 5,801 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project includes the installation of 123 additional parking spaces at Pecan Park. The parking at this park has consistently been an issue. The proposed spaces will be located as both infill spaces and in locations that were currently underutilized. This project was funded by the La Porte Development Corporation. Future Operating Impact: Minimal. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Original Project has been completed. Remaining funds have been authorized to evaluate the traffic pattern and safety concerns. Consultant has provided four (4) design concepts for review. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Conceptual design and associated cost estimate was presented to City Council for consideration. City Council directed staff to reconsider the proposed design to reduce potential costs. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 A refined design concept was approved by City Council along with funding from Economic Development Corp. 71 PW0016 – Parking Spaces at Pecan Park, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Consultant began preliminary design. Geotechnical engineer completed soil borings. 72 PW0017 – Fairmont Parkway Signalization Project Account Number: 0157070-530Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 1,500,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 17-18 - - - Fiscal Year 18-19 - - - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 1,500,000$ -$ -$ 1,500,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project includes the City’s share of a joint effort with Harris County to completely re-design and th re-configure the traffic signals along Fairmont Parkway. The limits of the project are 7 Street to the western City limits along Fairmont Parkway. The signals will be replaced, re-programmed, and some intersections will be re-configured to allow for better traffic flow today and in the future once Fairmont Parkway is widened. The total project budget if $5.5 million. Future Operating Impact: None. All signals are owned and operated by Harris County. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project has been completed. No invoice has been issued by Harris County. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Harris County has initiated the inter-local agreement with La Porte so the project can be closed-out. Signal work is confirmed to be substantially complete. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project work is complete. Interlocal agreement was approved by City Council. Harris County has not submitted an invoice. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Harris County has not submitted an invoice. 73 PW0020 – Fencing at Spencer Highway Account Number: 0157070-530Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 340,200$ -$ - Fiscal Year 17-18 340,200 40,906 - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 16,408 - Fiscal Year 19-20 560,000 311,674 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 86,997 52,353 Total$ 1,240,400$ 455,985$ 52,353$ 7 32,062 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION To provide feasibility, planning, survey and design services for constructing an eight foot precast concrete fence and sidewalk. The concrete fence will be constructed along the south side of Spencer Highway from Farrington to Myrtle Creek and along the norths side from Farrington to Valleybrook. The proposed sidewalk will extend from Farrington to Underwood Road. Future Operating Impact: Minimal maintenance cost. Meets goals of comprehensive plan. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 The north side of Spencer Highway Fencing project which goes from Farrington to Valleybrook is complete and is closed out. Currently, the south side is being reviewed to determine the most feasible construction option(s). Pictures attached are of the competed north side from Farrington to Valleybrook. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Consultant is developing preliminary layout for fence along the southern ROW (right of way) line. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project is 95% designed. Coordination with AT&T is underway to relocate a large pedestal box. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project submitted to Harris County for review. Harris County approval pending. Project is ready to bid pending County approvals. 74 PW0023 – Commercial Water Meter Replacement Account Number: 0037085-533Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 50,000$ 37,694$ - Fiscal Year 17-18 30,000 6,805 - Fiscal Year 18-19 15,000 1,569 - Fiscal Year 19-20 25,000 - - Fiscal Year 20-21 25,000 3,163 - Total$ 145,000$ 49,231$ -$ 95,769 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the replacement of commercial water meters. Future Operating Impact: Maintains revenue collection. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 A total of four (4) commercial meters were replaced.Defective meters are being sent in for cleaning, refurbishing and/or repair for future usage. 75 PW0023 – Commercial Water Meter Replacement, continued F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 A total of two (2) commercial meters were replaced. Defective meters are being sent in for cleaning, refurbishing and/or repair for future usage. 76 PW0023 – Commercial Water Meter Replacement, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 A total of 3commercial meters were replaced. Defective meters are being sent in for cleaning, refurbishingand/or repair for future usage. 77 PW0023 – Commercial Water Meter Replacement, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 No commercial meters were replaced during this period. Defective meters are being sent in for cleaning, refurbishing and/or repair, as needed, for future usage. 78 th PW0027 – Design for Drainage Improvements (6Street/N. Madison and W. Main) Account Number: 051/0327071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 150,000$ 11,777 $ - Fiscal Year 17-18 - 25,353 - Fiscal Year 18-19 250,000 18,000 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 98,797 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 56,317 23,605 Total$ 400,000$ 210,244$ 23,605$ 166,151 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Currently, the drainage structures serving this area are approximately 60 years old. This project will fund a preliminary engineering report for future improvements to enhance drainage. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Phase 1 - Consultant completed 60% construction plans. Consultant will address comments and begin working towards 90% completion. Phase 2 – Consultant is evaluating potential locations for detention ponds needed for mitigation. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Phase 1 - Consultant completed construction plans. Project is being prepared to advertise for bidding. Phase 2 – Consultant is evaluating potential locations for detention ponds needed for mitigation and preparing 30% plans. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Phase 1 – Project was awarded to Tandem Construction and site work is underway. Phase 2 – Consultant has prepared 60% plans. 79 th PW0027 – Design for Drainage Improvements (6Street/N. Madison and W. Main), Cont. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Phase 1 – Project is approximately 80% complete. Phase 2 – Consultant is preparing drainage impact analysis to be submitted to Harris County Flood Control District for review/approval. 80 PW0028 – Design Somerton Improvements/Construction Account Number: 003/015/050/051-7071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 150,000$ 78,836$ - Fiscal Year 17-18 2,200,000 79,741 - Fiscal Year 18-19 - 762,646 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 357,245 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - - - Total$ 2,350,000$ 1,278,468$ - $ 1,071,532 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds design services for the future replacement of water line and street improvement on Somerton from Bandridge to Spencer Highway. Staff included the construction budget in the FY18 CIP. This project funds construction for the replacement of water line and street improvement on Somerton in Fund 003 (Utility Fund), Fund 015 (General CIP), and Fund 050 (Drainage Improvement). Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Original Project scope has been completed. Remaining funds may be authorized for additional improvements along Somerton Drive. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. 81 PW0029 – Main Street Sidewalk Repairs Account Number: 0157070-530Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 15,000 $ -$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 - - - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 15,000 - - Total$ 15,000 $ 15,000$ - $ - P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund small sidewalk repair to level dangerous locations along Main Street. Infill sidewalks and repair of ADA ramps are also included in this project. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project Completed on October 18, 2020. 82 th PW0032 – Construct N. 6/Main to Tyler and Main St Drainage Account Number: 003/0507071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 990,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 - - - Fiscal Year 19-20 - - - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 196,144 648,216 - Total$ 990,000$ 196,144$ 648,216$ 145,640 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Currently, the drainage structures serving this area are approximately 60 years old. This project will fund construction of drainage improvements, in these two areas. The construction budget is $990,000 with supplemental funding in Fund 050 (950,000). Future Operating Impact: Minimal. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No Activity this quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Phase 1 - Consultant completed construction plans. Project is being prepared to advertise for bidding. Phase 2 – Consultant is evaluating potential locations for detention ponds needed for mitigation and preparing 30% plans. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Phase 1 – Project was awarded to Tandem Construction and site work is underway. Phase 2 – Consultant has prepared 60% plans. 83 th PW0032 – Construct N. 6/Main to Tyler and Main St Drainage, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Phase 1 – Project is approximately 80% complete. Phase 2 – Consultant is preparing drainage impact analysis to be submitted to Harris County Flood Control District for review/approval. 84 PW0033 – Hillridge Pump Station Construction Phase 1 Account Number: 0037085-533Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 535,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 700,460 7,875 - Fiscal Year 19-20 - 632,066 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 426,276 37,723 Total$ 1,235,460$ 1,066,217$ 37,723$ 131,520 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION The first portion of this project was funded in FY18 for the construction of a new pump station on the existing site. The Hillridge Pump Station is over 50 years old and in need to repair. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Design is complete.The construction portion of this project is 95% completed. Start-up and final inspection is anticipated in February2021. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 The construction portion of this project is 100% completed. Punch list has been started. Start-up and final inspection due soon. 85 PW0033 – Hillridge Pump Station Construction Phase 1, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 86 PW0033 - Hillridge Pump Station Construction Phase 1, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 The construction portion of this project is 100% completed. Punch list has been started. Start-up and inspection of pumps, valves, piping, GST and Chlorinator system was done on May 13, 2021. Automatic operation controls and communication system remains to be established properly. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is complete. The construction portion of this project is 100% completed. Instrumentation and facility corrections are being addressed. The project is nearing final acceptance and close-out. 87 PW0034 – Aerial Crossings Account Number: 0037071-532Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 17-18$ 25,000$ 10,916$ - Fiscal Year 18-19 140,000 2,000 - Fiscal Year 19-20 50,000 59,286 - Fiscal Year 20-21 25,000 4,512 5,375 Total$ 240,000$ 76,714$ 5,375$ 157,911 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This annual project will address maintenance of exposed water and wastewater pipes that cross drainage channels. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 During the first quarter, staff began purchasing materials to replacethe Shady River water line aerial crossing. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Replacementof the Shady River water line aerial crossingto start soon. In addition, painting of water th line at 8Street & FairmontParkwayhas begun. T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 Replaced water line on Shady River bridge. Painted 3 water line aerial crossings as well as well. Expanding list to include additional water and sanitary sewer lines.Repaired a water main break on an aerial crossing on EastC. Street. 88 PW0034 – Aerial Crossings, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 89 PW0034 – Aerial Crossings, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 th Painted the water line aerial crossingat Spencer and 14St. Also, installed pipe support bolts on th water line aerial crossing at 8and Fairmont Parkway(1/2 of the bolts were missing), Project is complete for the FY 20-21. 90 PW0041 – Public Works Facility Assessment Account Number: 0157070-530Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 65,000 $ 24,435$ - Fiscal Year 19-20 75,000 22,414 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - -2,536 Total$ 140,000 $ 46,849$ 2,536$ 90,615 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION In FY 18-19 City Council asked that staff begin a needs assessment of the current Public Works Service Center. The current facility is 37 years old and does not meet wind-loading requirements. The assessment will provide direction for future design and improvements to the service center. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project has been revised in scope to utilize the existing building structure. Professional Services agreement for design has been revised to include a Preliminary Engineering Report. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 A revised floor plan and site plan is under review by City staff. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff has provided comments on the revised floor plan and also provided information needed for the use of the existing building. The architect/ representative assigned to this project has resigned. Currently, staff is waiting to have a new project representative assigned. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 No progress this quarter. Emphasis was shifted to EMS dorm expansion. 91 PW0043 – East Main Street Sidewalk Account Number: 0157071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 430,000$ 29,839 $ - Fiscal Year 19-20 -237,318 - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 68,271 4,340 Total$ 430,000$ 335,429$ 4,340$ 90,231 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund design and construction of sidewalk on the south side of East Main from S. Broadway to Morgan’s Point. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project is complete. Currently ,awaiting close out documents. Project will be closed out by second quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project is complete and closed out. 92 PW0046 – Pumps & Equipment Replacement Account Number: 0037085-533Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 50,000$ 9,500$ - Fiscal Year 19-2050000 11,052 - Fiscal Year 20-2150000 - - Total$ 150,000$ 20,552$ -$ 129,448 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project replaces aging pumps and motors within the Wastewater Treatment Plant and Water Production facilities. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Treatment plant lift pump #7 has been taken in for repair/rebuild. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Lift pump#7 has been received and re-installed at the wastewater treatment plant.Vendor has received purchase orderfor ammonia injection system for Lomax Tower. Awaiting material and installation date. 93 PW0046 – Pumps & Equipment Replacement, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 Ammonia injection system for Lomax Tower has been installed. Isolation valves on the WWTP thickener pumps have been replaced.Safety grating was replaced atop the treatment plant headworks, asneeded.Booster motor for Water Plant #3 has been rebuilt and returned back to service as of June 3, 2021. 94 PW0046 – Pumps & Equipment Replacement, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 95 PW0046 – Pumps & Equipment Replacement, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 96 PW0046 – Pumps & Equipment Replacement, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 th Pilot control valve replaced at the 4Street & Main Street water towerlocation. 97 PW0049 – Replace Ground Tank – Hillridge Water Plant Account Number: 0037085-533Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 300,000$ 20,000 $ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 170,000 - Total$ 300,000$ 190,000$ -$ 110,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds design and replacement of a 45 year old water storage tank at the Hillridge Water Plant. Future Operating Impact: Decreased maintenance costs. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 New Ground Storage tank is fully erected. Testing is nearly completion. Final acceptance and startup is anticipated in February 2021. 98 PW0049 – Replace Ground Tank – Hillridge Water Plant, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 New Ground Storage tank is fully erected. Testing has beencompleted. Final acceptance and startup is anticipated soon, as per punch-list. 99 PW0049 – Replace Ground Tank – Hillridge Water Plant, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 New Ground Storage tank is fully erected. Testing has been completed and this project has been completed. 100 PW0050 – Coating Lomax Water Tower Account Number: 0037085-533Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 600,000$ 62,500$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 296,500 - Total$ 600,000$ 359,000$ -$ 241,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the replacement of interior coating, repair work and over-coating the exterior for the 750,000 gallon elevated water tank. Future Operating Impact: Routing maintenance will extend the life of the structure. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Lomax Tower Rehabilitation Project is complete. 101 PW0053 – Replace Main Lift Pumps 1 & 2 Account Number: 0037087-532Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 1 20,000$ -$ 95,992 Total$ 1 20,000$ -$ 95,99224,008 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project replaces aging pumps within the influent wet well at the Wastewater Treatment plant. Year one of three year plan to replace all six influent pumps. Future Operating Impact: Decreased maintenance costs and improved efficiency. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently working with Purchasing to obtain quotes. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 City Council approved in March. Equipment is on order. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Equipment is on order.Installation anticipated during the fourth quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Equipment is still on order. Installation will be early FY 21/22. P.O. will rollover to FY 21/22. 102 PW0054 – Copper Limit Study Account Number: 0037087-532Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 100,000$ -$ 51,000 Total$ 1 00,000$ -$ 51,000$ 49,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project provides for a saltwater Water Effect Ratio (WER) study to assess the feasibility of reducing effluent contaminant limits at the wastewater treatment facility. Future Operating Impact: Projects future improvements at WWTP. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Copper consultant’s services have been procured. In process of narrowing lab search. Consultant currently working on the draft of the copper study work plan to be submitted to the TCEQ for approval. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 TCEQ has received WER Plan from consultant and is reviewing. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 EPA & TCEQ have reviewed and accepted sampling plan. Copper sampling has begun. 103 PW0054 – Copper Limit Study, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Sampling is complete. The WER Study contractor, Ardurra, is currently in the process of interpreting the copper results and preparing a Final Report for the TCEQ. Finance will rollover the Purchase Order to FY 21-22. 104 PW0055 – Replace Electrical Panel and 1 Pump LS 1A Account Number: 0037085-533Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 90,000$ 71,852$ - Total$ 90,000$ 71,852$ -$ 18,148 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project provides for the replacement of an electrical panel and one pump at the east side regional lift station. Future Operating Impact: Decreased maintenance costs. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Technical specificationsand pricing has been obtained.On City Council agenda for February. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 A purchase orderhas been issued to vendor to begin project. T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 New panel and pump wereinstalled the week of June 21-25. 105 PW0055 – Replace Electrical Panel and 1 Pump LS 1A F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Rebuilt spare pump for L.S. #1A. Project complete. 106 PW0056 – Replace Belt Press 1 Account Number: 0037087-532Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 450,000$ -$ 186,894 Total$ 450,000$ -$ 186,894$ 263,106 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the replacement of the 16 year old belt press at the wastewater treatment plant. Future Operating Impact: Improvements will lessen future maintenance and operating costs. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Technical specifications and scope of work is under review. Awaiting additional technicalinformation from belt press supplier. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Only received onebid and the bid was over budget. Public Works staff will re-group and discuss internallyother viable options. T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 Equipment is on order.Work is expected to begin September2021. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Currently, refurbishingis ongoing and will be complete early FY 21-22.Finance will rollover the Purchase Order to FY 21-22. 107 PW0057 – Replace 3 Lift Pump Check Valves Account Number: 0037087-532Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 30,000 $ 23,221 $ - Total$ 30,000 $ 23,221 $ -$ 6,779 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the replacement of three fifty year old lift pump check valves at WWTP. Future Operating Impact: Improved efficiency. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 All three (3) valves have been purchased; awaiting installation. 108 PW0057 – Replace 3 Lift Pump Check Valves, continued F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Valves installed and the project is complete. 109 PW0058 – Replace Blower Account Number: 0037087-532Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 40,000 $ 37,760 $ - Total$ 40,000 $ 37,760 $ -$ 2,240 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the replacement of one forty year old blower at WWTP. Future Operating Impact: Improved efficiency. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Blowers have been ordered, awaiting delivery. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Blowers have been installed, project complete. 110 PW0059 – Public Works Facility Design Account Number: 0157070-530Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 750,000$ -$ - Total$ 750,000$ -$ -$ 750,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION An assessment was performed on the current Public Works Service Center. The current facility is 37 years old and does not meet wind-loading requirements. This project will fund design services for improvements to the facility to meet current and future needs. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, in pre-design phase. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, this project is still in the pre-design phase. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, this project is still in the pre-design phase. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, this project is still in the pre-design phase. 111 PW0060 – Pecan Park Parking LotImprovement Account Number: 0157070-530Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 350,000$ -$ - Total$ 350,000$ -$ -$ 350,000 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This will fund the analysis of existing conditions at Pecan Park which will determine alternative design(s) for the parking lot(s) as well as the construction of the recommended improvements. Pecan Park is heavily used year-round for baseball and softball practice, games and tournaments. Currently, the parking lot provides 469 parking spaces. The traffic pattern for the parking lot was intended to be on-way from the inception of the parking plan. Over time, traffic patterns have evolved into two-way traffic in certain area creating issues with traffic flow. Future Operating Impact: Minimal. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, in pre-design phase. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Currently, this project is still in pre-design phase. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 City Council provided direction to move forward with the revised parking lot concept at the th June 28 meeting. The design team is preparing a proposal for engineering services. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Proposal for engineering services was executed. Preliminary engineering efforts are underway. 112 PW0061 – Plant 9 Ground Storage Tank Replacement Account Number: 0157070-530Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 30,000 $ 15,000 $ 15,000 Total$ 30,000 $ 15,000 $ 15,000$ - P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds design and replacement of a 32 year old water storage tank at Water Plant 9. Future Operating Impact: Minimal. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity this quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project is in design phase. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 The project design is completed. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 The project will be prepared to bid in September and award in October 2021. 113 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation Account Number: 0189881-669Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 350,000$ 303,216$ 28,776 Total$ 350,000$ 303,216$ 28,776$ 18,008 Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION Public Works Department will perform in-house rehabilitation of sewers by slipline, point repairs, manhole sealing, smoke testing, and TV inspection. This program is mandated by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ).Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Utilities completed numerous portions of this project during the first quarter: In-house - 19 lift station wet wells were cleaned; 19 point repairs were completed, 114 vertical feet of manhole repairs; 287 sanitary sewer manholes were inspected; 20’ of sanitary sewer main was removed & replaced; and 3 dye flood tests were performed. In addition, 16,899 feet of sanitary sewer main was cleaned. Two cleanouts were located. 18,160’ of sanitary sewer main was smoketested. One manhole was located. Contractforces replaced one existing manhole and installed one new manhole near the treatment plant. 114 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation, continued F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 115 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Utilities completed numerous portions ofthis project during the 2ndquarter: In-house - 20 lift station wet wells were cleaned; 17 point repairs were completed, 81 vertical feet of manhole repairs; 23 sanitary sewer manholes were inspected; 172’ of sanitary sewer main was removed & replaced; and 4 dye flood tests were performed. In addition, 14,112 feet of sanitary sewer main was cleaned. One cleanoutwaslocated;3468’ of sanitary sewer main was smoke tested; 7 manholes were cleaned; 5 manholes and a cleanout were verified/located; and staff performed a 185’ sanitary sewer main extension on Oak Shores Dr.Contract forces - In addition, 53 vertical feet of sanitary sewer manholes were sealed by contract forces; 18,381’ of sanitary sewer main was cleaned and televisedby contract forces; and 1899’ of sanitary sewer main was pipe burstby contract forces. 116 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 117 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 Utilities completed numerous portions ofthis project during the 3rd quarter: In-house - 24lift station wet wells were cleaned; 9point repairs were completed;78vertical feet of manhole repairswere completed; 6sanitary sewer manholes were inspected; 2dye flood tests were performed. Inaddition, 24,650feet of sanitary sewer main was cleaned. 22,132’ of sanitary sewer main was smoke tested; 2 manholes were cleaned; 7 manholes located; and in-house staff performed a 251’ sanitary sewer main extension. Contract forces – additionally, 14vertical feet of sanitary sewer manholes were sealed by contract forces;10,122’ of sanitary sewer main was cleaned and televised by contract forces. 118 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 119 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation – cont. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Utilities completed numerous portions ofthis project during the fourthquarter: In-house - 16lift station wet wells were cleaned; 32point repairs were completed; 72vertical feet of manhole repairs were completed; 285sanitary sewer manholes were inspected; 3dye flood tests were performed. In addition, 22,453feet of sanitary sewer main was cleaned;22,551’ of sanitary sewer main was smoke tested; 8 sanitary sewer manholes were cleaned; 7 sanitary sewer manholesand/or cleanouts were located; 165’ sanitary sewer main extension; 2 cleanout shoes and 1 manhole were installed. Contract – additionally, 10vertical feet of sanitary sewer manholes were sealed by contract forces; 5514’ of sanitary sewer main was cleaned and televised by contract forces; 972’ sewer extension; 8 sanitary sewer manholes were installed; 1 point repair; 1256’ of 8” sanitary sewer was pipe burst. 120 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation – cont. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 121 SEW669 – SanitarySewer Rehabilitation – cont. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 122 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation – cont. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 123 SEW669 – Sanitary Sewer Rehabilitation – cont. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 124 SM0002 – Asphalt Street Surfacing Account Number: 0337071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21 720,000 - 604,840 Total$ 720,000$ -$ 604,840$ 1 15,160 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the annual program to resurface streets throughout the City with asphalt. Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. Future Operating Impact: Minimal. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity for this quarter. This project is undertaken in the late spring / summer of 2021. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Preparing bid package for late Spring bid. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 This project was awarded to Forde Construction Inc. Purchasing is working to execute the contract. Reconstruction and overlay will be completed prior to the end of the fourth quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Work order for this project will be completed prior to end of October 2021. 125 SM0002 – Asphalt Street Surfacing, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 126 Project SM0003 – Street Repair Material (in-house) Account Number: 0337071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 16-17$ 50,000$ 50,205 $ - Fiscal Year 17-18 50,000 38,992 - Fiscal Year 18-19 50,000 34,866 - Fiscal Year 19-20 50,000 13,426 - Fiscal Year 20-21 60,000 18,692 6,320 Total$ 260,000$ 156,181$ 6,32097,499 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the purchase of materials for repairs that are completed by in-house street crews. Future Operating Impact: None. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Purchased materials for in-house concrete projects. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Purchased materials for in-house concrete projects. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Purchased materials for in-house concrete projects. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Purchases completed for FY 20-21 projects. 127 th STR7TH – South 7Street Paving and Drainage Account Number: 003/019/033-7071-531Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 18-19$ 139,340139,340$ - Fiscal Year 19-20 2,435,000297,586 - Fiscal Year 20-21 2,867,00020,2934,864,458 Total$ 5,441,340$ 457,219 4,864,458$ 119,663 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION (003) Utility Fund – This project will fund water main adjustments needed for drainage system on th South 7 Street from Main Street to Fairmont Parkway. Total costs for Design and Construction is estimated at $5,300,000. (033) Drainage Fund – This project will fund design and construction of improved drainage with th concrete curt and gutter with sidewalks on South 7 Street from Main Street to Fairmont Parkway. Total costs for Design and Construction is estimated at $5,300,000 Future Operating Impact: Improved street surface and improved area drainage. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is 90% complete. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Design is 95% complete. Awaiting Harris County permit approvals. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project was awarded to D&W Contractors at the City Council meeting on July 26th. Purchasing Department will work to execute the contract. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Notice-to-Proceed issued with a start date of September 14, 2021. Contractor began installing drainage infrastructure. 128 th STR7TH – South 7Street Paving and Drainage, continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 129 STRLCB – Little Cedar Bayou Drive Concrete Paving Account Number: 0337071-531Budget BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 19-20$ 110,000$ -$ - Fiscal Year 20-21 - 110,000 - Total$ 110,000$ 110,000$ -$ - P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project included funding for replacement of park entrance road with concrete paving from th South 8 Street to the park entrance. Future Operating Impact: None F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 No Activity this quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project is complete and closed out. 130 UTL655 – Meter Replacement Program Account Numb 0039890-655Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 12-13$ 80,000$ 79,141$ - Fiscal Year 13-14 90,000 85,102 - Fiscal Year 14-15 290,000 110,163 - Fiscal Year 15-16 180,000 285,591 - Fiscal Year 16-17 250,000 317,186 - Fiscal Year 17-18 299,046 275,671 - Fiscal Year 18-19 300,000 299,682 - Fiscal Year 19-20 350,000 163,808 - Fiscal Year 20-21 350,000 108,691 246,795 Total$ 2,189,046$ 1,725,034$ 246,795$ 217,217 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This funds the annual program to continue replacing water meters, which includes the purchasing of electronic components, meters and meter boxes. Future Operating Impact: Reduced maintenance on old, broken water meters. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff installed 213 water meters in the first quarter. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff installed 227 water meters in the second quarter. T HIRD Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff installed 280 water meters in the third quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 Staff installed 277 water meters in the fourth quarter. 131 UTL697 – Valve ReplacementProgram (in-house) Account Number: 0039890-697Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 14-15$ 40,000$ 24,479 $ - Fiscal Year 15-16 25,000 6,273 - Fiscal Year 16-17 25,000 8,034 - Fiscal Year 17-18 25,000 24,847 - Fiscal Year 18-19 25,000 15,421 - Fiscal Year 19-20 25,000 12,010 - Fiscal Year 20-21 25,000 15,427 - Total$ 190,000$ 106,491$ -$ 83,509 P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project is for material cost for City crews to replace non-functioning water main valves. Future Operating Impact: Improved efficiency F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 A total of three (3) gate valves were replaced during the first quarter. 132 UTL697 – Valve ReplacementProgram (in-house), continued F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 S ECOND Q UARTER FY 20-21 No activity during the second quarter. 133 UTL697 – Valve ReplacementProgram (in-house), continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 A total of 2gate valves were replaced during the 3rd quarter. 134 UTL697 – Valve ReplacementProgram (in-house), continued F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 A total of 2gate valve(s) were replaced during the 4th quarter. 135 UTL760 – Lift Station Improvements Account Number: 0039892-683Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 35,000$ 34,793$ - Total$ 35,000$ 34,793$ -$ 207 Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project will fund general repairs to the City’s various lift stations. Improvements may include replacing and repairing pumps, piping, and control panels. Future Operating Impact: Improvements will lessen future maintenance and operating costs. F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 Rebuilt a pump at L.S. #30 and replaced a pump at L.S. #10. S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 Replaced onepump at Lift Station #5 ( Lakes at Fairmont Green). 136 UTL760 – Lift Station Improvements – continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 No activity this quarter. F OURTH Q UARTER FY 20-21 Project completed for the FY 20-21 budget. 137 UTL898 – In House Waterline Replacement Account Number: 0039890-898Budget Funding:BudgetExpendituresEncumbrancesRemaining Fiscal Year 20-21$ 35,000$ 24,719$ - Total$ 35,000$ 24,719$ -$ 10,281 Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION This project funds the replacement of small steel lines in the alleys of La Porte where numerous leaks and failures continue to occur. Note: This project does not roll forward each year. A new amount is budgeted each year. Future Operating Impact: Reduction is leak repairs. F IRST Q UARTER FY 20-21 Staff replaced 450 ft. of waterline at Dwire & Bay Oaks during the first quarter. 138 UTL898 – In House Waterline Replacement, continued F IRST Q UARTER FY20-21 139 UTL898 – In House Waterline Replacement, continued S ECOND Q UARTER FY20-21 thnd Staff replaced 860ft. of waterline atS. Holmes and S. 6St.during the 2quarter. 140 UTL898 – In House Waterline Replacement, continued T HIRD Q UARTER FY20-21 th Staff replaced 20 ft. of waterline and a TS & V on the 100 block of S. 5St. Also, 90’ of waterline was replaced in the 600 block of W. Main Street. Project delays from weather. F OURTH Q UARTER FY20-21 thth Staff replaced 390 ft. of waterline at the 100 block of S. 5St. & 600 block ofS. 4St. 141